ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE

TRUE TORQUE CONTROL SERIES

230,460, and 600 Volt Ratings

OPERATION MANUAL

February, 1998
Part #45086-003
 TOSHIBA

IMPORTANT NOTICE
The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all of the details
or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency
to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
additional information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not
covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to
the local Toshiba sales office.

The contents of this instruction manual shall not become a part of or modify any
prior or existing agreement, commitment, or relationship. The sales contract
contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International Corporation's Adjustable
Speed Drive Division. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation's Adjustable Speed Drive
Division and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right, without prior notice, to update
information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product or service
identified in this publication.

Any electrical or mechanical modification to this equipment,

without prior written consent of Toshiba International
Corporation, will void all warranties and may void UL listing.

AC ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE

Please complete the Extended Warranty Card supplied with this inverter and return
it by prepaid mail to Toshiba. This activates the extended warranty. If additional
information or technical assistance is required, call Toshiba's marketing department
toll free at (800) 231-1412 or write to: Toshiba International Corporation, 13131 W.
Little York Road, Houston, TX 77041-9990.

For your records, complete the following information about the drive with which this
manual was shipped.

G3 Model Number:

G3 Serial Number:

Date of Installation:

Inspected By:

Name of Application:

i
 TOSHIBA

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the G3 adjustable speed drive. This adjustable frequency solid-state AC drive
features "True Torque Control" - Toshiba's 'vector algorithm' that enables motors to develop high starting
torque and compensates for motor slip. The G3 also features a multi-lingual forty-character LCD display,
RS232 port, dynamic braking transistor, and ground fault, overload, and overcurent protection. These
features, combined with built-in special control features such as PID, drooping, trim, and dancer control,
make the G3 suitable for a wide variety of applications that require unparalleled motor control and
reliability.

It is the intent of this operation manual to provide a guide for safely installing, operating, and maintaining
the drive. This operation manual contains a section of general safety instructions and is marked
throughout with warning symbols. Read this operation manual thoroughly before installing and operating
this electrical equipment.

All safety warnings must be followed to ensure personal safety.

Follow all precautions to attain proper equipment performance and longevity.

We hope that you find this operation manual informative and easy to use. For assistance with your G3, for
information on our free drive application school, or for information on Toshiba's complete line of motors,
adjustable speed drives, switchgear, instrumentation, uninterruptable power supplies, PLCs, and
motor control products, please call toll free (800) 231-1412 or write to our plant at: Toshiba International
Corporation, 13131 W. Little York Road, Houston, TX 77041-9990.

Again, thank you for your purchase of this product.

COPYRIGHT © [JULY, 1997] TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

ii
 TOSHIBA

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Warnings in this manual appear in either of two ways:

1) Danger warnings - The danger warning symbol is an exclamation mark enclosed in a

triangle which precedes the 3/16" high letters spelling the word "DANGER". The
Danger warning symbol is used to indicate situations, locations, and conditions that
can cause serious injury or death:

DANGER
2) Caution warnings - The caution warning symbol is an exclamation mark enclosed in a
triangle which precedes the 3/16" high letters spelling the word "CAUTION". The
Caution warning symbol is used to indicate situations and conditions that can cause
operator injury and/or equipment damage:

CAUTION
Other warning symbols may appear along with the Danger and Caution symbol and are used to specify
special hazards. These warnings describe particular areas where special care and/or procedures are
required in order to prevent serious injury and possible death:

1) Electrical warnings - The electrical warning symbol is a lighting bolt mark enclosed in
a triangle. The Electrical warning symbol is used to indicate high voltage locations and
conditions that may cause serious injury or death if the proper precautions are not
observed:

2) Explosion warnings - The explosion warning symbol is an explosion mark enclosed in

a triangle. The Explosion warning symbol is used to indicate locations and conditions
where molten, exploding parts may cause serious injury or death if the proper
precautions are not observed:

For the purpose of this manual and product labels, a Qualified Person is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction, operation and maintenance of the equipment and the hazards involved.
This person must:

1) Carefully read the entire operation manual.

2) Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, clear faults, ground, lockout
and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.

3) Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes,
rubber gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc. in
accordance with established safety practices.

4) Be trained in rendering first aid.

iii
 TOSHIBA

CONTENTS

PAGE

Disclaimer ............................................................................................... i

Introduction .............................................................................................. ii

General Safety Instructions ..................................................................... iii

Contents ............................................................................................iv-vi

Section 1 Inspection/Storage/Disposal
Inspection of the New Unit.........................................................................1-1
Storage .............................................................................................1-1
Disposal .............................................................................................1-1

Section 2 Installation and Operation

Installation Safety Precautions ..................................................................2-1
Operating Safety Precautions....................................................................2-2
Confirmation of Wiring ...............................................................................2-3
Start-up and Test .......................................................................................2-4
Maintenance .............................................................................................2-4
EMC Installation Guidelines ......................................................................2-5
General EMC Guidelines For Consideration .............................................2-7
EU Declaration of Conformity ....................................................................2-8

Section 3 Specifications
230 Volt NEMA 1 Chassis Ratings ............................................................3-1
230 Volt NEMA 4, NEMA12, and Fan/Filter Chassis Ratings....................3-1
460 Volt NEMA 1 Chassis Ratings ............................................................3-2
460 Volt NEMA 4, NEMA 12, and Fan/Filter Chassis Ratings...................3-2
600 Volt NEMA 1 Chassis Ratings ............................................................3-3
600 Volt type 12 Chassis Ratings..............................................................3-3
Standard Specifications .............................................................................3-4

iv
 TOSHIBA

CONTENTS (cont'd)

PAGE

Section 4 Wiring
Standard Connection Diagrams ................................................................4-1
Selection of Main Circuit Wiring Equipment and
Standard Cable Sizes ................................................................................4-4
Grounding .............................................................................................4-7
Application Notes: Motor Selection............................................................4-7
Connection Examples
Potentiometer Operation .................................................................4-8
4-20 mA Reference Operation ........................................................4-9
Keypad Reference and Remote Stop/Start ...................................4-10
RS232 Port ....................................................................................4-10
0-10 Volt Reference Operation ......................................................4-11

Section 5 Jumper and Terminal Connections

Terminal Strip Board ..................................................................................5-1
Control Board ............................................................................................5-2
Terminal Connections and Functions ........................................................5-3

Section 6 Operating Panel

Panel Layout .............................................................................................6-1
Keys and Functions ...................................................................................6-2

Section 7 Keypad Functions

Local Mode .............................................................................................7-1
Forward/Rerverse Change .............................................................7-1
Jog .............................................................................................7-1
Coast Stop ......................................................................................7-2
Programming Mode ...................................................................................7-2
Remote Mode ............................................................................................7-2
ESTOP............................................................................................7-2
Other: Language Selection ........................................................................7-2
Monitor Mode.............................................................................................7-3
Monitoring "RR" Input Special Function ..........................................7-4
Monitoring During Pattern Run .......................................................7-4

v
 TOSHIBA

CONTENTS (cont'd)
PAGE

Section 8 Programming Charts

Fundamental Parameters #1 .....................................................................8-1
Fundamental Parameters #2 .....................................................................8-2
Panel Control Parameters .........................................................................8-3
Special Control Parameters .......................................................................8-4
Terminal Selection Parameters .................................................................8-5
Frequency Setting Parameters ..................................................................8-8
Protection Parameters ..............................................................................8-13
Pattern Run Control Parameters ..............................................................8-16
Feedback Parameters ..............................................................................8-22
Communication Setting Parameters .........................................................8-24
Industrial Application Parameters (Pump) ................................................8-26
Industrial Application Parameters (Fan) ...................................................8-26
Industrial Application Parameters (Conveyor) ..........................................8-26
Industrial Application Parameters (Hoist) .................................................8-26
Industrial Application Parameters (Textiles) .............................................8-26
Industrial Application Parameters (Machine Tools) ..................................8-26
AM/FM Terminal Adjustment Parameters.................................................8-27
Utility Parameters .....................................................................................8-28
Motor Parameters .....................................................................................8-32
Parameter Tree ........................................................................................8-33

Section 9 Programming
Groups .............................................................................................9-1
Blinding .............................................................................................9-2
Search Function ........................................................................................9-2
Parameter Explanations ............................................................................9-3
Programming Examples ...........................................................................9-30

Section 10 Service
Requesting After Sales Service ................................................................10-1
Parts Service Life .....................................................................................10-2
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................10-3
How to Clear a Fault ......................................................................10-3
G3 Fault Displays and Explanations ..............................................10-3
G3 Warning Explanations ..............................................................10-7

Section 11 Dimensions/Weights
Basic Dimensions .....................................................................................11-1
Shipping Weights......................................................................................11-5
G3 Options ............................................................................................11-6
Keypad Cutout ..........................................................................................11-7

Section 12 Index ............................................................................................12-1

vi
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 1: Inspection/Storage/Dosposal
Inspection of the New Unit
Upon receipt of the G3, a careful inspection for shipping damage should be made. After uncrating:
1) Check the unit for loose, broken, bent or otherwise damaged parts due to
shipping.

2) Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the
nameplate conform to the order specifications.

Storage
1) Store in a well ventilated location and preferably in the original carton if the
inverter will not be used immediately after purchase.

2) Avoid storage in locations with extreme temperatures, high humidity, dust, or

metal particles.

Disposal
Please contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical
components and packaging in your particular area. Never dispose of electrical
components via incineration.

1-1
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 2: Installation and Operation

Installation Safety Precautions CAUTION

1) Install in a secure and upright position in a well ventilated location that is out of
direct sunlight. The ambient temperature should be between -10° C and 40° C.

2) Allow a clearance space of 8 inches (20 cm) for the top and bottom and 2 inches
(5 cm) on both sides. For models 2010-2270 and models 4015-4500, the top and bottom
clearance can be reduced to 4 inches (10 cm). This space will insure adequate ventilation.
Do not obstruct any of the ventilation openings.

3) Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, steel particles,
or sources of electrical noise are present.

4) Adequate working space should be provided for adjustment, inspection and

maintenance.

5) Adequate lighting should be available for troubleshooting and maintenance.

6) A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area

immediately surrounding the electrical system where maintenance is required.

7) Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help

reduce electrical noise. A separate ground cable should be run
inside the conduit with the input, output, and control power
cables (See Grounding page 4-7).

THE METAL OF CONDUIT IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE GROUND.

8) Use lockout/tagout procedures before connecting three phase power of the

correct voltage to input terminals L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T) and connect three phase
power from output terminals T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W) to a motor of the correct voltage
and type for the application. Size the conductors in accordance with Selection of
Main Circuit Wiring Equipment and Standard Cable Sizes page 4-4.

9) If conductors of a smaller than recommended size are used in parallel to share

current then the conductors should be kept together in sets i.e. U1, V1, W1 in
one conduit and U2, V2, W2 in another. National and local electrical codes
should be checked for possible cable derating factors if more than three power
conductors are run in the same conduit.

10) Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) between the power source and the
inverter. Size the MCCB to clear the available fault current of the power source.

11) Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and
control circuits.

12) Installation of drive systems should conform to the National Electrical Code,
regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, all national,
regional or industry codes and standards.

13) If the factory provided enclosure is removed from the drive, then it must be
provided with an alternate enclosure before operating. The alternate enclosure
should be a minimum of NEMA 1.

2-1
 TOSHIBA

Installation Safety Precautions (cont'd) CAUTION

14) Do not connect control circuit terminal block return connections marked CC to
inverter earth ground terminals marked GND(E). See Standard Connection
Diagrams page 4-1 and Terminal Connections and Functions page 5-3.

15) If a secondary Magnetic Contactor (MC) is used between the inverter output
and the load, it should be interlocked so the ST-CC terminals are disconnected
before the output contactor is opened. If the output contactor is used for bypass
operation, it must also be interlocked so that commercial power is never applied
to the inverter output terminals (U,V,W).

16) Power factor improvement capacitors or surge absorbers must not be installed
on the inverter's output.

17) Only qualified personnel should install this equipment.

Operating Safety Precautions CAUTION

1) Do not power up the inverter until this entire operation manual is reviewed.

2) The input voltage must be within +/-10% of the specified input voltage. Voltages
outside of this permissible tolerance range may cause internal protection
devices to turn on or can cause damage to the unit. Also, the input frequency
should be within +/-2 Hz of the specified input frequency.

3) Do not use this inverter with a motor whose rated input is greater than the rated
inverter output.

4) This inverter is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult the factory before
using the inverter for special applications such as an explosion proof motor or
one with a repetitive type piston load.

5) DANGER
Do not touch any internal part with power applied to the inverter; first remove
the power supply from the drive and wait until charge LED (see page 5-1 for location)
are no longer illuminated. Charged capacitors can present a hazard even if source
power is removed. not touch any internal part with
power applied to the inverter. First remove
the sou 6) DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT WITH ITS CABINET DOOR OPEN.

7) Do not apply commercial power to the output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), or T3

(W) even if the inverter source power is off. Disconnect the inverter from the
motor before megging or applying bypass voltage to the motor.

8) The PWM carrier frequency is limited to a maximum of 2.2KHz when the inverter has a
NEMA TYPE12 enclosure, limited to a maximum of 5KHz in all of the 600 volt inverters,
and limited to a maximum of 5KHz in the 460 volt NEMA TYPE4 10 horsepower inverter.
Do not attempt to exceed the inverter's carrier frequency which is shown in the
PWM Carrier Frequency adjustment range (see page 8-4).

2-2
 TOSHIBA

Operating Safety Precautions (cont'd)

CAUTION
9) Interface problems can occur when this inverter is used in conjunction with
some types of process controllers. Signal isolation may be required to
prevent controller and/or inverter malfunction (contact Toshiba or the process
controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and
signal isolation).

10) Do not open and then re-close a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) between
the inverter and the load unless the inverter is OFF (output frequency has
dropped to zero) and the motor is not rotating. Abrupt re-application of the
load while inverter is on or while motor is rotating can cause inverter damage.

11) Use caution when setting output frequency. Overspeeding a motor can decrease its
torque-developing ability and can result in damage to the motor and/or driven
equipment.

12) Use caution when setting the acceleration and deceleration time. Unnecessarily
short times can cause tripping of the drive and mechanical stress to loads.

13) High carrier frequency operation is not available on the G3-4080. Customers
requiring high carrier frequencies should consult the factory.

14) Only qualified personnel should have access to the adjustments and
operation of this equipment. They should be familiar with the drive operating
instructions and with the machinery being driven.

15) Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to service
this equipment. See page iii.

16) Follow all warnings and precautions. Do not exceed equipment ratings.

Confirmation of Wiring
CAUTION
Make the following final checks before applying power to the unit:

1) Confirm that source power is connected to terminals L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T).
Connection of incoming source power to any other terminals will damage
the inverter.

2) The 3-phase source power should be within the correct voltage and frequency
tolerances.

3) The motor leads must be connected to terminals T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W).

4) Make sure there are no short circuits or inadvertent grounds and tighten any
loose connector terminal screws.

2-3
 TOSHIBA

Start-Up and Test CAUTION

Prior to releasing an electrical drive system for regular operation after installation,
the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel. This assures
correct operation of the equipment for reasons of reliable and safe performance. It is
important to make arrangements for such a check and that time is allowed for it.

When power is applied for the first time, the inverter's parameters are set to the values
listed as "FACTORY SETTING" in the charts starting on page 8-1. If these settings are not
optimal for the application, program the desired settings before initiating a run. The
inverter can be operated with no motor connected. Operation with no motor
connected or use with a small trial motor is recommended for initial adjustment or for
learning to adjust and operate the inverter.

Maintenance
CAUTION
1) Use lockout/tagout procedures in accordance with local electrical codes
before performing any inverter maintenance.

2) Periodically check the operating inverter for cleanliness.

3) Do not use liquid cleaning agents.

4) Keep the heatsink free of dust and debris.

5) Periodically check electrical connections for tightness (with power off,

locked out, and with charge LED out (see page 5-1 for location)).

2-4
 TOSHIBA

EMC Installation Guidelines

In order to help our customers comply with European electromagnetic compatibility
standards, Toshiba has developed the following guide. All relevant apparatus placed on
the European market is required to comply to the European Community directive on
electromagnet compatibility (EMC). The following instructions provide a means of
compliance for the G3 series of inverters. A technical construction file (TCF) indicates
the rationale used to declare compliance.

The inverters listed in the Filter Selection Chart below have been shown to conform to the
following product specifications:

Radiated Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A

Mains Interference : EN 55011 Group 1 Class A
Radiated Susceptibility : IEC 801-3 1984
Conducted RFI Susceptibility : prEN55101-4 (prIEC801-6) Doc. 90/30270
Electrostatic Discharge : IEC801-2 1991
Electrical Fast Transient : IEC 801-4 1988
Surge : IEC1000-4-5 1995 2 KV line to line, 4 KV line to earth
Voltage Interruption : IEC 1000-4-11

Filter Selection Chart

Inverter Filter
VT130G3U4015 FN258 - 7 / 07
VT130G3U4025 FN258 - 7 / 07
VT130G3U4035 FN258 - 7 / 07
VT130G3U4055 FN258 - 16 / 07
VT130G3U4080 FN258 - 16 / 07
VT130G3U4110 FN258 - 30 / 07 *
VT130G3U4160 FN258 - 30 / 07
VT130G3U4220 FN258 - 42 / 07 *
VT130G3U4270 FN258 - 55 / 07
VT130G3U4330 FN258 - 55 / 07
VT130G3U4400 FN258 - 75 / 34
VT130G3U4500 FN258 - 100 / 35
VT130G3U4600 FN258 - 100 / 35
VT130G3U4750 FN258 - 130 / 35
VT130G3U410K FN258 - 180 / 35
VT130G3U412K FN258 - 130 / 35 x 2 **

* note: based on 110% rating

** note: use filters in parallel

A combination of good grounding (earth) and shielding will yield the best results. In order to
make a G3 EMC compliant, an input filter and ferrite bead (part number FN251.005) are required
and are available through your Toshiba distributor or Toshiba International (Europe) LTD.
(0181-8484466). See above Filter Selection Chart for the suggested input filters. Drives should
be installed according to the following installation guidelines in order to maximize electromagnetic
compatibility.

2-5
 TOSHIBA

EMC Installation Guidelines (cont'd)

Mains
input

E L1 L3
E L2

Metallic
Back-Plane Filter G3 or G2+
FN258 Inverter

E L2
L1 L3 E R S T U V W
Motor
U
V
W

Ferrite core

1) Mechanical
The inverter and associated equipment should be mounted on a flat metallic back-
plane. A minimum space of 2 inches should be left between the drive and filter to
allow for ventilation. The filter output cable is to be connected from the bottom of the
filter to the inverter power input and is to be as short as possible.

2) Filtering
A Schaffner FN258 series input filter of the appropriate current rating should be
mounted next to the drive. The filter output must be screened. A single ferrite bead
(Schaffner 251-005 or equivalent) must be placed around the filter output, ground,
and screen collectively.

3) Cabling
The power, filter, and motor cables should be of the appropriate current rating and
connected in accordance with suggested manufacturer, local, and national guidelines.
4-core screened cable (such as RS 379-384) is to be used for the power and earth
connections to minimize RF emissions. Control cabling must also be screened
(RS 367-347 or similar).

4) Grounding
The mains (input) ground will be connected at the ground terminal provided on the
filter. The filter and motor should be grounded at the ground terminals provided in the
inverter.

2-6
 TOSHIBA

EMC Installation Guidelines (cont'd)

5) Screening
The mains (input) screen is to be connected to the metallic back-plane at the filter,
removing and treating finish coating as required. The screen over the filter output
cables, the motor cable screen, and the control wire screens must be connected to
the inverter case using glands or conduit connectors. The motor cable screen should
be connected to the motor case. When using a braking resistor, the cabling between
the resistor and drive should also be screened. This screen should connect to both
the inverter enclosure and the resistor enclosure.

6) Control cables
RS-232 cables on G3 inverters must have four turns through one ferrite bead
(Chomerics H8FE-1004-AS or equivalent). Ferrite beads are best placed within the
inverter enclosure.

General EMC Guidelines For Consideration

Always provide good grounding. Keep grounds short with low RF impedance. A central
ground should provide good results in a complex system. Paint or corrosion can hamper
good grounding. Keep control and power cabling separated. Minimize exposed
(unscreened) cable. Use 360° screened connections where possible.

2-7
 TOSHIBA

EU Declaration of Conformity

2-8
 TOSHIBA
SECTION 3: Specifications
230 Volt NEMA TYPE 1 Standard Enclosure Ratings
G3 STANDARD RATINGS
MODEL

(see below)
NOTES
RATED MOTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OVERLOAD MAIN CIRCUIT INPUT
KVA HP(KW) CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER CONTROL
(AMPS) 3-PHASE POWER
2010 (1, 3) 1 0.75/0.55 3.5 200-230V 150% FOR 200V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
2015 (1, 3) 1.5 1/0.75 5 3-PHASE 120 SEC. 200-230V/60Hz CONTROL
2025 (1, 3) 2.5 2/1.5 7 MAX VOLTAGE 110% VOLTAGE +/- 10% POWER SOURCE
2035 (1, 3) 3.5 3/2.2 10 CONTINUOUS FREQ. +/- 2Hz REQUIRED
2055 (1, 3) 5.5 5/3.7 16
2080 (1, 3, 5) 8 7.5/5.5 22
2110 (1, 2, 5) 11 10/7.5 30
2160 (1, 2, 5) 16 15/11 45
2220 (1, 2, 5) 22 20/15 60
2270 (1, 2, 5) 27 25/18 70
2330 (1, 4, 5) 33 30/23 90

NOTES:
1) UL/CUL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) listed.
2) Available with NEMA TYPE 12 UL listing (see 460 Volt NEMA TYPE 12, 4 chart below for output current).
3) Available with NEMA TYPE 4 UL listing (see 460 Volt NEMA TYPE 12, 4 chart below for output current).
4) Available with fan/filter option kit (same output current).
5) Available with optional DC bus inductor (DCL cannot be used with NEMA TYPE 4, 12 or fan/filter kit).

230 Volt NEMA TYPE 12 and NEMA TYPE 4 Enclosure Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS
MODEL

(see below)
NOTES

RATED MOTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OVERLOAD MAIN CIRCUIT INPUT

KVA HP(KW) CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER CONTROL
(AMPS) 3-PHASE POWER
2010N4 (1) 1 0.75/0.55 3.5 200-230V 150% FOR 200V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
2015N4 (1) 1.5 1/0.75 5 3-PHASE 120 SEC. 200-230V/60Hz CONTROL
2025N4 (1) 2.5 2/1.5 7 MAX VOLTAGE 110% VOLTAGE +/- 10% POWER SOURCE
2035N4 (1) 3.5 3/2.2 10 CONTINUOUS FREQ. +/- 2Hz REQUIRED
2055N4 (1) 5.5 5/3.7 16
2080N4 (1) 8 7.5/5.5 22
2110N12 (2) 11 10/7.5 28
2160N12 (2) 16 15/11 42
2220N12 (2) 22 20/15 54
2270N12 (2) 27 25/18 68

NOTES:
1) NEMA TYPE 4 UL/CUL enclosure.
2) NEMA TYPE 12 UL/CUL enclosure.

3-1
 TOSHIBA

460 Volt NEMA TYPE 1 Standard Enclosure Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS
MODEL

(see below)
NOTES
RATED MOTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OVERLOAD MAIN CIRCUIT INPUT
KVA HP(KW) CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER CONTROL
(AMPS) 3-PHASE POWER
4015 (1, 3) 1.5 1/0.75 2.7 380-460V 150% FOR 380V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
4025 (1, 3) 2.5 2/1.5 3.5 3-PHASE 120 SEC. 400-460V/60Hz CONTROL
4035 (1, 3) 3.5 3/2.2 5 MAX VOLTAGE 110% VOLTAGE +/- 10% POWER SOURCE
4055 (1, 3) 5.5 5/3.7 8 CONTINUOUS FREQ. +/- 2Hz REQUIRED
4080 (1) 8 7.5/5.5 11
4110 (1, 3, 5) 11 10/7.5 15
4160 (1, 2, 5) 16 15/11 22
4220 (1, 2, 5) 22 20/15 30
4270 (1, 2, 5) 27 25/18.5 38
4330 (1, 2, 5) 33 30/22 45
4400 (1, 2, 5) 40 40/30 55
4500 (1, 2, 5) 50 50/37 69
4600A (1, 4, 5) 60 60/45 83
4750A (1, 4, 5) 75 75/55 104
410KA (1, 4, 5) 100 100/75 138
412K (1, 6) 125 125/90 172 130% FOR
415K (1, 6) 150 150/110 206 120 SEC.
420K (1, 6) 200 200/150 275 110%
425K (1, 6) 250 250/185 343 CONTINUOUS
430K (1, 6) 300 300/220 415
435K (1, 6) 350 350/243 447

NOTES:
1) UL/CUL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) listed.
2) Available with NEMA TYPE 12 UL listing (see 460 Volt NEMA TYPE 12, 4 chart below for output current).
3) Available with NEMA TYPE 4 UL listing (see 460 Volt NEMA TYPE 12, 4 chart below for output current).
4) Available with fan/filter option kit (same output current).
5) Available with optional DC bus inductor (DCL cannot be used with NEMA TYPE 4, 12 or fan/filter kit).
6) Available with optional external DC bus inductor.

460 Volt NEMA TYPE 12 and NEMA TYPE 4 Enclosure Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS
MODEL

(see below)
NOTES

RATED MOTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OVERLOAD MAIN CIRCUIT INPUT

KVA HP(KW) CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER CONTROL
(AMPS) 3-PHASE POWER
4015N4 (1) 1.5 1/0.75 2.7 380-460V 150% FOR 380V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
4025N4 (1) 2.5 2/1.5 3.5 3-PHASE 120 SEC. 400-460V/60Hz CONTROL
4035N4 (1) 3.5 3/2.2 5 MAX VOLTAGE 100% VOLTAGE +/- 10% POWER SOURCE
4055N4 (1) 5.5 5/3.7 8 CONTINUOUS FREQ. +/- 2Hz REQUIRED
4080N4 (1) 8 7.5/5.5 11
4110N4 (1) 11 10/7.5 15
4160N12 (2) 16 15/11 21
4220N12 (2) 22 20/15 27
4270N12 (2) 27 25/18.5 34
4330N12 (2) 33 30/22 40
4400N12 (2) 40 40/30 52
4500N12 (2) 50 50/37 65

NOTES:
1) NEMA TYPE 4 UL/CUL enclosure.
2) NEMA TYPE 12 UL/CUL enclosure.

3-2
 TOSHIBA

600 Volt NEMA TYPE 1 Standard Enclosure Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS
MODEL

(see below)
NOTES
RATED MOTOR OUTPUT OUTPUT OVERLOAD MAIN CIRCUIT INPUT
KVA HP(KW) CURRENT VOLTAGE CURRENT INPUT POWER CONTROL
(AMPS) 3-PHASE POWER
6060 (1, 2, 3) 6 5 (3.8) 6.1 600V 150% FOR 575-600V/60Hz NO EXTERNAL
6120 (1, 2, 3) 12 10(7.5) 12 3-PHASE 120 SEC. 525V/50Hz CONTROL
6160 (1, 2, 3) 16 15(11) 17 MAX VOLTAGE 110% voltage:+/- 10% POWER SOURCE
6220 (1, 2, 3) 22 20(15) 22 CONTINUOUS freq: +/- 2 Hz REQUIRED
6270 (1, 2, 3) 27 25(18.5) 27
6330 (1, 2, 3) 33 30(22) 32
6400 (1, 2, 3) 40 40(30) 41
6500 (1, 2, 3) 50 50(37) 52
6600 (1, 2, 3) 60 60(45) 62
6750 (1, 2, 3) 75 75(55) 77
610K (1, 2, 3) 100 100(75) 99
612K (1, 2, 3) 125 125(90) 125 130% FOR
615K (1, 3) 150 150(110) 150 120 SEC.
620K (1, 3) 200 200(150) 200 110%
625K (1, 3) 250 250(185) 250 CONTINUOUS
NOTES:
1) UL/CUL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.) listed.
2) Available with fan/filter option kit (same output current).
3) Available with optional DC bus inductor (DCL option cannot be used with fan/filter kit).

3-3
 TOSHIBA

Standard Specifications

ITEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Principal Control System Sinusoidal PWM control
Control Output voltage regulation Same as power line.
Specifications Output frequency 0.01 to 400 Hz (0.1 to 80Hz default setting)*. 800 Hz operation
possible.
Frequency setting 0.1Hz from operating panel input (60Hz base), 0.01Hz from analog
input (60Hz base, 12-bit/0 to 10Vdc), 0.01Hz from computer interface
(60Hz base)

Frequency accuracy Analog input: ±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C±10°C),
Digital input: ±0.01% (25°C±10°C)
Voltage/frequency Constant V/f, variable torque, automatic torque boost, True Torque
characteristics Control and automatic energy-saving control/maximum voltage
frequency adjustment (25 to 400Hz), torque boost adjustment
(0 to 30%), start-up frequency adjustment (0 to 10Hz).
PWM carrier frequency Adjustable between 0.5 and 10kHz
Transistor type Insulated gate bipolar (IGBT)
Output voltage regulation Drive can be programmed to fix max. output volts, let max. float with
input voltage, or set max. to input voltage sensed at power-up.
Dynamic braking Dynamic braking circuitry installed. External resistor optional.
Frequency Input signals 3k ohms potentiometer (1k ohm to 10k ohm-rated potentiometer
can be connected). 0 to 10Vdc (Zin=33k ohm), ±10 Vdc (Zin=67k
ohm), +/-5 Vdc (Zin=34k ohm), 4 to 20mAdc (Zin=500 ohm)
Set point control (PID) Proportional gain, integral gain, anti-hunting gain, lag time constant,
and PID error limit adjustments.
Operating Accel/decel time 0.1 to 6000 secs, accel/decel time 1 or 2 selection, accel/decel
functions pattern selection
Forward or reverse run Forward run when F-CC closed (default); reverse run when R-CC
closed (default); reverse run when both closed (default); coast-stop
when ST-CC opened (default); emergency coast stop by a
command from operating panel or terminal block; 3-wire control and
motorized speed pot programmable functions.
Jogging run Jog run from panel with JOG mode selection. Terminal
block operation possible with parameter settings.
Multispeed run Set frequency plus 15 preset speeds possible with combinations of
CC, SS1, SS2, SS3, and SS4 (default functions).
Retry When a protective function is activated, the system checks main
circuit devices, and attempts to restart. Settable to a maximum
of 10 times; wait time adjustment (0 to 10 secs)
Soft stall Automatic load reduction during overload (Default setting: OFF).
Automatic restart A coasting motor can be smoothly restarted (Default setting: OFF).
Pattern Run 4 groups of 8 patterns each can be set to the 15 preset speed values.
A maximum of 32 different patterns can be run; terminal block
control/repetitive run possible.
DC injection braking Braking starting frequency adjustment (0 to 120Hz), braking current
adjustment (0 to 100%), braking time adjustment (0 to 10secs),
emergency stop braking function, motor shaft stationary control.
Upper/Lower limit Limits the frequency between the set values (0 to max. frequency).
Can be indicated via output contact closure.
Frequency jump 3 jump frequency settings (each with unique band settings)
Edit function Easy access user group containing all changed parameters
Blind function Select to display needed parameter groups and parameters
User-defined defaults User's parameter values can be saved into a default library. User
can then default drive to Toshiba's values or to the user's own.

* Consult the factory for applications above 80 Hz.

3-4
 TOSHIBA

Standard Specifications (cont'd)

ITEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Display Interface 2-line backlit display LCD 20 characters per line
Fault display Overcurrent, overvoltage, heatsink overheat, load-side short-circuit,
load-side ground fault, inverter overload, stator overcurrent during
start-up, load-side overcurrent during start-up, EEPROM error, RAM
error, ROM error, communication error, (dynamic braking unit
overcurrent/overload), (emergency stop), (undervoltage), (low
current), (overtorque), (open output phase), (motor overload). Items
in parenthesis can be selected or deselected.
Monitor functions Terminal input/output status, forward/reverse, frequency setting
value, output frequency, output current, output voltage, input power,
output power, torque current, cumulative run time, past faults,
excitation current, DBR overload ratio, inverter overload ratio, motor
overload ratio, PID feedback value, DC voltage.
Selectable units display Can scale frequency display.
Selection of display of current in amps or %, voltage in V or %.
LED charge indicator Indicates that the main circuit capacitors are charged
LED local/remote Mounted in LOCAL/REMOTE key. Indicates local (keypad) or
indicator remote (terminal) control
Inverter/Motor Protective functions Soft-stall, current limit, overcurrent, overvoltage, short-circuit at load,
load-side ground fault, undervoltage, momentary power failure,
regeneration power ride-through, electronic thermal overload
protection, main circuit overcurrent at start-up, load-side overcurrent
during start-up, DBR resistor overcurrent/overload, heatsink over
heat, emergency stop, open output phase.
Electronic thermal Drive's motor overload protection for motor can be adjusted for motor
characteristics rated amperage. Motor overload has adjustable speed sensitivity.
Soft stall on/off. Motor 150% time programmable.
Reset Fault reset via keypad, remote contact closure, or programming drive
retry. Cycling power also resets fault (fault display can be maintained)
Regeneration power Some G3 ratings can use regen energy from motor to maintain
ride-through control operation during brown-outs.
Output signals Fault detection signal NC/NO form C contact (250VDC, 2A)
Low speed/reach signals Dry contacts (250VDC, 2A)
Upper limit/lower limit Dry contacts (250VDC, 2A)
Programmable meter Pre-compensation reference frequency, post-compensation output
output signals frequency, frequency setting value, output current, DC voltage,
output voltage, torque current, excitation current, PID feedback value,
motor/inverter/DBR overload ratio, input/output power.
Pulse-train frequency Open collector output (max. 24 Vdc, 50mA)
Communication functions RS232C equipped as standard ( connector: modular 6P), RS485,
TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-F20, RIO, DN, and MB+ are options.
Enclosure Type NEMA 1 (available with NEMA 4, NEMA 12, or fan/filter option)
Cooling method Forced air cooling . Fan can be automatically stopped when not
necessary for extended fan life.
Color Sherwin Williams Precision Tan #F63H12
Service environment Indoor. Consult factory for elevations above 1000m (requires derate).
For example, at 2000m, derate drive FLA by 11%.
Must not be exposed to direct sunlight, corrosive and/or explosive
gases or mists, fibers and dusts.
Ambient temperature From -10°C to 40°C (14°F to 104°F).
Relative humidity 20 to 95% maximum (non-condensating)
Vibration 5.9 m/s 2(0.5G) maximum (10 to 55Hz)
Climatic class 3K3
Polution degree 2
IP rating 2X

3-5
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 4: Wiring
Standard Connection Diagrams

TOSVERT-130G3
STANDARD CONNECTION
MODEL 2010 TO 2330
MODEL 4015 TO 4270

DBR
MCCB
L1(R) PA PB T1(U)
INPUT POWER SUPPLY T2(V)
L2(S) M
(see notes 1 and 2 below)
L3(T) T3(W)
RES M
(see note 3 below) S4
F
CC
PROGRAMMABLE R FLA
SIGNAL INPUT ST FLB PROGRAMMABLE
OUTPUT CONTACTS
250V, 2A MAX
FLC
S1
R/CH-A
S2
S3 R/CH-C PROGRAMMABLE
LOW-A OUTPUT CONTACTS
PROGRAMMABLE
250V, 2A MAX
ANALOG INPUT
Potentiometer LOW-C
PP DIGITAL
OPERATION PANEL
RR
P24 50mA MAX
CC FP PULSE OUTPUT
-
AUTO FM
REF.
+ IV AM PROGRAMMABLE
+ +
- AM
SIGNAL OUTPUT
FM
AUTO 0-1mA or 4-20mA
REF. CC
+ RX GND(E)

NOTES:

1.) For inverter models 2010 through 2330 use input power supply of 200VAC, 50Hz or
200-230VAC, 60Hz.

2.) For inverter models 4015 through 4270 use input power supply of 380VAC, 50Hz or
400-460VAC, 60Hz.

3.) As an example, the "S4" terminal is shown above as an EMERGENCY OFF input. See
Section 8 for information on how to program the drive for this and other functions.

4-1
 TOSHIBA

Standard Connection Diagrams (cont'd)

TOSVERT-130G3
STANDARD CONNECTION
MODEL 4330 TO 435K

DBR
MCCB
L1(R) PA PB T1(U)
INPUT POWER SUPPLY
T2 (V) M
(set by input power selection) L2 (S)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
M
R41/46
INPUT POWER SELECTION (see note 1 below) S4
415/460V-50/60Hz R40/44
CC
400/440V-50/60Hz R38
380V-50Hz
RJ

RES
F
R FLA
PROGRAMMABLE
SIGNAL INPUT ST FLB PROGRAMMABLE
OUTPUT CONTACTS
250V, 2A MAX
FLC
S1
S2 R/CH-A
S3 R/CH-C PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT CONTACTS
ANALOG INPUT 250V, 2A MAX
LOW-A
Potentiometer LOW-C
PP DIGITAL
OPERATION PANEL
RR 50mA MAX
P24
CC FP PULSE OUTPUT
-
AUTO FM
REF.
IV AM
+ + + PROGRAMMABLE
- SIGNAL OUTPUT
AM FM
AUTO 0-1mA or 4-20mA
REF. CC
+ RX GND(E)

NOTE:

1.) As an example, the "S4" terminal is shown above as an EMERGENCY OFF input. See
Section 8 for information on how to program the drive for this and other functions.

4-2
 TOSHIBA

Standard Connection Diagrams (cont'd)

TOSVERT-130G3
STANDARD CONNECTION
MODEL 6060 TO 625K

DBR
MCCB
L1(R) PA PB T1(U)
INPUT POWER SUPPLY
T2 (V) M
(set by input power selection) L2 (S)
L3 (T) T3 (W)
M
INPUT POWER SELECTION R60
(see note 1 below) S4
600V-60Hz R57
575V-60Hz CC
R52
525V-50Hz
RJ

RES
F
R FLA
PROGRAMMABLE
SIGNAL INPUT ST FLB PROGRAMMABLE
OUTPUT CONTACTS
250V, 2A MAX
FLC
S1
S2 R/CH-A
S3 R/CH-C PROGRAMMABLE
PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUT CONTACTS
ANALOG INPUT 250V, 2A MAX
LOW-A
Potentiometer LOW-C
PP DIGITAL
OPERATION PANEL
RR 50mA MAX
P24
CC FP PULSE OUTPUT
-
AUTO FM
REF.
IV AM
+ + + PROGRAMMABLE
- SIGNAL OUTPUT
AM FM
AUTO 0-1mA or 4-20mA
REF. CC
+ RX GND(E)

NOTE:

1.) As an example, the "S4" terminal is shown above as an EMERGENCY OFF input. See
Section 8 for information on how to program the drive for this and other functions.

4-3
 TOSHIBA

Selection of Main Circuit Wiring Equipment and Standard Cable Sizes

* Molded case Ampacity

Inverter circuit breaker (FLA x 1.25) ** Typical cable size (AWG)
(MCCB)

Amp Main power Input and Output Frequency command input, Other
Model Number rating (A) and Lug frequency meter, ammeter signal
(A) motor load Wire Capacity circuits

G3-2010 15 4.4 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-2015 15 6.3 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-2025 20 8.8 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-2035 20 12.5 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-2055 30 20.0 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-2080 50 27.5 #10 24-8 / 24-8

G3-2110 70 37.5 #8 18-2 / 18-2

G3-2160 90 56.3 #6 18-2 / 18-2

G3-2220 100 75.0 #4 18-2 / 18-2

G3-2270 125 87.5 #3 18-2 / 14-2/0

G3-2330 150 112.5 #2 6-250 / 6-250

G3-4015 15 3.4 #14 24-12 / 24-12 3-core shield cable #18

(speed reference)
G3-4025 15 4.4 #14 24-12 / 24-12 2-core shield cable
#20
G3-4035 15 6.1 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-4055 15 10.0 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-4080 30 13.8 #14 24-8 / 24-8

G3-4110 30 18.8 #14 24-8 / 24-8

G3-4160 40 27.5 #10 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4220 50 37.5 #8 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4270 70 47.5 #8 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4330 90 56.3 #6 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4400 100 68.8 #4 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4500 100 86.1 #3 18-2 / 14-2

G3-4600 125 103.8 #2 6-250 / 6-250

G3-4750 175 130.0 #1 6-250 / 6-250

G3-410K 200 172.5 #2/0 6-250 / 6-250

G3-412K 225 215.0 #4/0 6-250 / 6-250

G3-415K 300 257.5 *** 2 (#2/0) 6-250 / 6-250

G3-420K 350 343.8 *** 2 (#4/0) 6-250 / 6-250

G3-425K 400 428.8 *** 2 (#4/0) 6-250 / 6-250

G3-430K 600 518.8 *** 2(#350) 1/0-500 / 1/0-500

G3-435K 700 558.8 *** 2(#400) 1/0-500 / 1/0-500

See page 4-6 for notes.

4-4
 TOSHIBA

Selection of Main Circuit Wiring Equipment and Standard Cable Sizes (cont'd)

* Molded case Ampacity

Inverter circuit breaker (FLA x 1.25) ** Typical cable size (AWG)
(MCCB)

Amp Main power Input and Output Frequency Other

Type form rating (A) and Lug command input, signal
(A) motor load Wire Capacity frequency meter, circuits
ammeter

G3-6060 15 7.7 #14 24-12 / 24-12

G3-6120 30 15 #12 24-8 / 24-8

G3-6160 35 21.3 #12 18-2 / 14-2

G3-6220 50 27.5 #10 18-2 / 14-2

G3-6270 60 33.8 #8 18-2 / 14-2

G3-6330 70 40 #8 18-2 / 14-2

G3-6400 90 51.3 #6 18-2 / 14-2 3-core shield cable #18

(speed reference)
G3-6500 100 65 #4 18-2 / 14-2 2-core shield cable
#20
G3-6600 100 77.5 #4 6-250 / 6-250

G3-6750 125 96.3 #2 6-250 / 6-250

G3-610K 175 123.8 #1/0 6-250 / 6-250

G3-612K 200 156.3 #2/0 6-250 / 6-250

G3-615K 200 187.5 *** 2 (#2) 6-250 / 6-250

G3-620K 200 250 *** 2 (#1/0) 6-250 / 6-250

G3-625K 250 312.5 *** 2 (#2/0) 6-250 / 6-250

See page 4-6 for notes.

4-5
 TOSHIBA

Selection of Main Circuit Wiring Equipment and Standard Cable Sizes (cont'd)

* The customer supplied Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) or Magnetic Circuit
Protector (MCP) should be coordinated with the available short circuit current. The
drives are rated for output short circuits capable of delivering fault currents of 200,000A
(in all horsepowers). The selection of breakers for this table is in accordance with 1987
NEC Article 430.

** Wire sizing is based upon NEC table 310-16 or CEC Table 2 using 75 deg C cable, an
ambient of 30 deg C, cable runs for less than 300 FT., and copper wiring for not more
than three conductors in raceway or cable or earth (directly buried). The customer
should consult the NEC or CEC wire Tables for his own particular application and wire
sizing.

*** Use two parallel conductors instead of a single conductor (this will allow for the proper
wire bending radius within the cabinet). Use separate conduits for routing parallel
conductors. This prevents the need for conductor derating (see note 3 this page).

Notes:

1.) Contacts used to connect G3 terminals should be capable of switching low

current signals (i.e. 5 mA).

2.) The G3 has internal overload protection which has been calibrated and
certified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and does not require external motor
overload protection.

3.) When wiring with parallel conductors, the conductors should be kept together in
phase sets with U1, V1, W1 in one conduit and parallel conductors U2, V2, W2
in another conduit. The ground conductor should be in one of these conduits.

4) Twisted pair wiring should be used for external meters connected to AM and FM
terminals.

5) For multiple motor applications, a magnetic only MCP should be replaced

by a thermal magnetic MCCB. The MCCB should be sized according to (1.25 X
largest motor full load amps) + sum of all other motor full load amps to meet
National Electric Code (NEC) or Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) requirements.
Applications featuring multiple motors on one drive require overload protection for
each motor.

CAUTION Turn off power to the inverter before making any wiring
changes to the analog output circuits.

Use separate conduits for routing incoming power, power

CAUTION to motor, and control conductors. Use no more than three
power conductors and a ground conductor per conduit.

4-6
 TOSHIBA

Grounding
The inverter should be grounded in accordance with Article 250 of the National Electrical
Code or Section 10 of the Canadian Electrical Code, Part I and the grounding conductor
should be sized in accordance with NEC Table 250-95 or CEC, Part I Table 16. See
Installation Safety Precautions notes 7 and 14.

CAUTION Conduit is not a suitable ground for the inverter.

Motor Selection
1) Exceeding the peak voltage rating or the rise time allowable of the motor insulation
system will reduce the life expectancy. To insure good motor insulation life, consult
with the motor supplier as to the peak voltage and rise time withstand level of the
motor. Long lead lengths between the motor and the G3 may require filters to
be added to the output of the inverter or the selection of an adjustable speed drive
grade insulation system in the motor.

NEMA MG-1-1993 SECTION IV PART 30 PARAGRAPH 30.02.2.9:

When operated under usual service conditions (MG-1-14.02 or 20.80.2) the

following limit values at the motor terminals should be observed:
Voltage (peak) = 1kV or less (where peak voltage is single amplitude)
Rise Time = 2 micro-seconds or greater

NEMA MG-1-1994 SECTION IV PART 31 PARAGRAPH 31.81.2:

When operated under usual service conditions (MG-1-31.20) stator winding

insulation systems for definite purpose adjustable speed drive-fed motors shall be
designed to operate under the following limits at the motor terminals:
Voltage (peak) = 1600 volts with a rise time of more than 0.1 microseconds
(where peak voltage is single amplitude).

2) Bearing Considerations:
A. Motors operating from adjustable speed drive power sources tend to operate at
higher temperatures which may increase the need for more frequent lubrication
cycles.

B. Operation at higher than 5kHz carrier frequencies may require shaft grounding
or bearing insulation to prevent shaft current caused by capacitance coupling
to ground.

4-7
 TOSHIBA

Connection Examples: Potentiometer Operation

Wiper
(usually middle terminal)

stop/start

P24 RES RR F R S1 S2 S3 S4 RCH RCH LOW LOW

A C A C

ST FM AM CC CC RX PP IV FP FLC FLB FLA

Terminal Block

To run from a pot, the G3 must have:

1) Drive enable ("ST"-"CC" made)
2) Direction command ("F" or "R" to "CC" made)
3) Frequency reference ( wiper from pot is read via "RR" terminal )
4) LOCAL/REMOTE LED off (puts drive in remote mode).
Toggle the LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad to turn LED off (with drive stopped).

Notes:
1) Use a 3K ohm pot (1 to 10 K ohms will work).
2) The drive will accel to commanded frequency when "F" or "R" to "CC" is made.
3) The drive will decel to 0.0 Hz when "F" or "R" to "CC" is broken.
4) Motor will coast to a stop if "ST" to "CC" is broken.
5) The above information applies to a G3 with factory default programming.

4-8
 TOSHIBA

Connection Examples: 4 - 20mA Reference Operation

Phone Jack on Control Board I 5

Dipswitch
V 10

stop/start

P24 RES RR F R S1 S2 S3 S4 RCH RCH LOW LOW

A C A C

ST FM AM CC CC RX PP IV FP FLC FLB FLA

(-) >
(+)
Terminal Block
4-20 mA Reference

To follow a 4-20 mA signal, the G3 must have:

1) "IV" dipswitch to the right of phone jack on control board (immediately under keypad) set to "I"
position. "5/10" dipswitch has no effect in this scenario.
1) Drive enable ("ST"-"CC" made)
2) Direction command ("F" or "R" to "CC" made)
3) Frequency reference ( 4-20mA signal at "IV" terminal )
4) LOCAL/REMOTE LED off ( puts drive in remote mode)
Toggle the LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad to turn LOCAL/REMOTE LED off.

Notes:
1) The drive will accel to the commanded frequency when "F" or "R" to "CC" is made.
2) The drive will decel to 0.0 Hz when "F" or "R" to "CC" is broken.
3) Motor will coast to a stop if "ST" to "CC" is broken.
4) The above information applies to a G3 with factory default programming.
5) Do not connect "CC" to ground.

4-9
 TOSHIBA

Connection Examples: Keypad Frequency Reference and Remote Stop/Start

dry contact (stop/start)

P24 RES RR F R S1 S2 S3 S4 RCH RCH LOW LOW

A C A C

ST FM AM CC CC RX PP IV FP FLC FLB FLA

Terminal Block

To follow a local (keypad) reference with a remote stop/start, the G3 must have:
1) Drive enable ("ST"-"CC" made)
2) Direction command ("F" or "R" to "CC" made)
3) Frequency reference: Adjust on keypad with arrows. Press READ/WRITE to enter.
4) LOCAL/REMOTE LED off ( puts drive in remote mode)
Toggle the LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad to turn LED off.
5) Programming: Set Item 282, FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION to "2". See page 8-28.

Notes:
1) The drive will accel to the commanded frequency when "F" or "R" to "CC" is made.
2) The drive will decel to 0.0 Hz when "F" or "R" to "CC" is broken.
3) Motor will coast to a stop if "ST" to "CC" is broken.

Connection Examples: RS232 Port

Pinout for G3 RJ11 RS232 port

< >

6 5 4 3 2 1
( facing front of G3 )
Pinout for DB-9 on computer
(5) (4) (3) (2) (1) Connect DB9 pin 5 to RJ11 pin 3
(9) (8) (7) (6) Connect DB9 pin 3 to RJ11 pin 4
Connect DB9 pin 2 to RJ11 pin 2
( looking head-on at male connector
Connect DB9 pin 7 to RJ11 pin 6
that plugs into computer )
Connect DB9 pin 8 to RJ11 pin 1
Short DB9 pin 6 to DB9 pin 4
DB9 pin 1 and 9 and RJ11 pin 5 not used
Notes:
1) Free RS232 programming/monitoring software is available from Toshiba. Contact your distributor for a
copy and manual.
2) Do not insert/remove the phone plug into/from the G3 port when drive is powered.
3) Common 6 conductor phone cord can be used with an adaptor (6 conductor RJ11 female to DB9 female).
The adapter is available from your Toshiba distributor or local electrical supply house.
4) "ST"-"CC" must be made.

4 - 10
 TOSHIBA

Connection Examples: 0-10 volt Reference Operation

0-10 V
(+) <Reference> ( - )

stop/start

P24 RES RR F R S1 S2 S3 S4 RCH RCH LOW LOW

A C A C

ST FM AM CC CC RX PP IV FP FLC FLB FLA

Terminal Block

To run from a 0-10 V reference, the G3 must have:

1) Drive enable ("ST"-"CC" made)
2) Direction command ("F" or "R" to "CC" made)
3) Frequency reference ( 0-10 V signal applied to "RR" terminal )
4) LOCAL/REMOTE LED off (puts drive in remote mode).
Toggle the LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad to turn LED off.

Notes:
1) The drive will accel to commanded frequency when "F" or "R" to "CC" is made.
2) The drive will decel to 0.0 Hz when "F" or "R" to "CC" is broken.
3) Motor will coast to a stop if "ST" to "CC" is broken.
4) The above information applies to a G3 with factory default programming.
5) Do not connect "CC" to ground.

4 - 11
 TOSHIBA
SECTION 5: Jumper and Terminal Connections
Terminal Board
The terminal printed wiring board is shown in the detail below. See Section 5.3 for
terminal functions. This board is used in all inverter sizes.

Charge LED
Fused Resistor for P24
(part no. 40980)

P24 RES RR F R S1 S2 S3 S4 RCH RCH LOW LOW

A C A C

ST FM AM CC CC RX PP IV FP FLC FLB FLA

Terminal Block

0-1mA 4-20 mA 0-1mA 4-20 mA

JP3 JP4

Jumper JP3 is used to set AM terminal and

Jumper JP4 is used to set FM terminal.

Turn off power to the inverter before connecting or

CAUTION disconnecting any wiring to the terminal block.

5-1
 TOSHIBA

Control Board
The control printed wiring board is shown in the detail below. This control board is used in
all inverter sizes.

I 5
Ribbon cable
connector
Dip Switch SW1
(back side)
(Detail)

V 10
When a 4(0)-20mA reference signal is input
to terminal "IV", set switch SW1 to I

When a 0-10 volt reference signal is input to

terminal "IV", set SW1 to V

Option board When a +/- 0-5 volt reference signal is input

connector to terminal "RX", set SW1 to 5
(40-pin)
Operation When a +/- 0-10 volt reference signal is
panel input to terminal "RX", set SW1 to 10
connector

Dip Switch
SW1
(see detail 1
this page)

600 volt G3s are shipped with

an option ROM installed

Option RS-232
ROM Communication
socket connector

Ribbon cable Make connections to this board only with power off.
connector

5-2
 TOSHIBA

Terminal Connections and Functions

Terminal Terminal functions Terminal
name location

L1, L2, L3 Line input supply terminals for models G3-2010 to G3-2330:
(R, S, T) Connect to either 3ø, 50Hz, 200VAC or 3ø, 60Hz, 200 to 230VAC.
Line input supply terminals for models G3-4015 to G3-435K:
Connect to either 3ø, 50HZ, 400VAC or 3ø, 60Hz, 400 to 460VAC. Terminal
Line input supply terminals for models G3-6060 to G3-625K: block
Connect to either 3ø, 50HZ, 525VAC or 3ø, 60Hz, 575 to 600VAC. or
Drives can be operated on single phase power with when bus bar
appropriately derated; contact Toshiba distributor for information.

T1, T2, T3 Motor output terminals. Connect these terminals to a 3-phase

(U, V, W) induction motor of the proper voltage, current, and horsepower.

PA, PB Braking resistor output terminals. Connect to an external dynamic

braking resistor.

FLA, FLB, FLC Programmable relay contact output. The contact rating is
250VAC - 2A. Default setting closes FLA-FLC and opens FLB-FLC
when protective function has been activated.

P24 Unregulated 24Vdc power supply (24Vdc, 50mA maximum). P24 is

protected by fused resistor found on the terminal board (see p. 5-1).

RCH(A & C) Programmable relay contact output. Standard setting closes

contact when an acc/dec is complete, or when the output
frequency is within a specified range. Contact rating is 250Vac - 2A.

LOW(A & C) Programmable relay contact output. Standard setting closes

contact when a preset low speed or a preset lower limit is
reached. Contact rating is 250Vac - 2A.
Terminal
PP 10 VDC supply typically used to drive potentiometers. Wipers from block
pots typically connected to "RR" or "RX" terminals. (See page
5-1)
FM* Programmable analog output. Outputs 0 - 1mA or 4 - 20mA (set by
JP4 on terminal board (see section 5.1)). This terminal can
be connected to an external analog meter. Use either an ammeter
rated 1mA DC/20 mA DC at full scale or a voltmeter rated 7.5Vdc at
full scale (true analog output). See page 9-23 for programming.

AM* Programmable analog output. Outputs 0 - 1mA or 4 - 20mA (set by

JP3 on terminal board (see section 5.1)). This terminal can
be connected to an external analog meter. Use either an ammeter
rated 1mA DC/20 mA DC at full scale or a voltmeter rated 7.5Vdc at
full scale (true analog output). See page 9-23 for programming.

FP Dedicated open-collector output. Pulses that are 48, 96, or

360-times the output frequency are available according to the
parameter settings (must connect external supply through pull-up
resistor to measure output).

* Do not make/break connections to these terminals with the drive powered.

5-3
 TOSHIBA

Terminal Connections and Functions (cont'd)

Terminal Terminal functions Terminal
name location

CC This is the common return for all of the input and output terminals.
(2-terminals) Do not connect this terminal to ground. Do not connect to GND(E).

RR Programmable analog input. Default setting allows user to

input a 0 - 10VDC signal as a frequency command. Input has
bias/gain adjustments.

IV Programmable analog input. User can input a 0 - 10VDC signal or a

4 - 20 mA DC signal as a frequency command (selection of current
or voltage done via dipswitch on control board - see page 5-2).
Input has bias gain adjustments.

RX Programmable analog input. User can input a +/- 10VDC or a

+/- 5VDC signal as a frequency command (see page 5-2). Input
has bias/gain adjustments for forward and reverse operation.

ST Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting terminal

to "CC" enables drive. Opening "ST" to "CC" coasts motor.

F Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting terminal

to "CC" gives drive forward run command. Opening "F" to "CC" Terminal
decels motor to a stop. block
(See page
R Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting terminal 5-1)
to "CC" gives drive reverse run command. Opening "R" to "CC"
decels motor to a stop.

S1 Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting "S1" to

"CC" gives drive preset speed frequency reference.

S2 Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting "S3" to

"CC" gives drive preset speed frequency reference.

S3 Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting "S2" to

"CC" gives drive preset speed frequency reference.

S4 Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting "S4" to

"CC" gives drive preset speed frequency reference.

RES Programmable digital input. With default setting, shorting "RES" to

"CC" resets a tripped drive.

5-4
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 6: Operating Panel

Operating Panel Layout
The operating panel enables the user to enable or disable the keypad, input commands
from the keypad, and monitor the G3's operation on the liquid crystal display. The panel
consists of the keypad, 20 character x 2-line LCD and a LED in the LOCAL/REMOTE
button of the keypad. The illustration below shows the operating panel keypad layout and
the locations of the keys and display.

Liquid crystal display

Local / remote
LED

6-1
 TOSHIBA

Operating Panel Keys and Functions

The following chart explains each of the key functions on the keypad

Keys and Functions

Key Function

Up scroll key used for incrementing numerical values. Also, when a parameter or
group name is displayed, the name of the previous parameter/group can be
displayed by pressing this key.

Down scroll key used for decrementing numerical values. Also, when a parameter
or group name is displayed, the name of the next parameter/group can be
displayed by pressing this key.

Used to start a run from the keypad (local control).

RUN

Key changes between the local control mode and the terminal block input
control mode operation. When the local control LED in the keypad is "on",
LOCAL operation of the inverter is from the keypad.

REMOTE

This key functions as the STOP key when running from keypad (local control). In
STOP all other modes, emergency off is engaged when this key is pressed twice. During
an inverter trip, the tripped state can be reset by pressing this key twice.
CLEAR

This key is used to enter the monitor mode..

MON

This key is used to select or enter a parameter name, a parameter value, a

READ frequency command, or a group name.
WRITE

This key is used to enter the programming mode.

PRG

6-2
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 7: Keypad Operating Functions

This chapter discusses basic keypad operating functions. The keypad allows the user to enter one of four
modes: LOCAL, REMOTE, PROGRAMMING, or MONITORING.

LOCAL MODE

Turn on the power source (MCCB). The drive will display OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0.0Hz.

Press the LOCAL/REMOTE button so that the local/remote LED is on. The illuminated LED
indicates that the drive is receiving run/stop commands from the keypad (LOCAL mode).

Set the operating frequency pressing the 'up arrow' or 'down arrow' keys. Notice that display
changes to FREQUENCY COMMAND.

Press READ/WRITE to save frequency. Display changes back to OUTPUT FREQUENCY.

When the RUN key is pressed, the G3 will output a frequency that will increase according to
the set acceleration time. The panel control LED will blink to indicate motor is running.

When the STOP/CLEAR key is pressed, the G3 outputs a frequency that will decrease
according to the set deceleration time. The motor will decelerate and stop.

If the power switch is turned off while the G3 is running a motor, the motor will coast to a stop.
This method should be used for emergency stopping only.

Avoid frequent starting and stopping of the G3 by turning

CAUTION the (MCCB) power on and off. This will shorten the life of
the inverter.

The output frequency can be changed while running by pressing up arrow or down arrow key.
When one of these keys is pressed the LCD display will blink, indicating that the value is being
changed. When the desired frequency is shown on the display, press the READ/WRITE key. The
output frequency will change even if the READ/WRITE key is not pressed. However, if power is
removed and the READ/WRITE key has not been pressed then the 'new' frequency will be lost
because it was not written into the EEPROM.

LOCAL MODE: FORWARD/REVERSE CHANGE

In LOCAL mode, motor direction can be changed on the fly via the keypad if Item 25, DIRECTION
SELECTION (FORWARD/REV)is set to "1" (its default):

Press READ/WRITE and up arrow at the same time to forward direction command ( drive will
briefly display MOTOR RUN DIRECTION: FORWARD).

Pressing READ/WRITE and down arrow at the same time results in a reverse direction command
(drive will briefly display MOTOR RUN DIRECTION: REVERSE).

Reverse runs can be disabled via Item 5, REVERSE OPERATION DISABLE (see page 8-1).

LOCAL MODE: JOG

To jog from the keypad, program Item 108, JOG RUN FREQUENCY and Item 109, JOG STOP
METHOD as desired (see page 8-9).

In LOCAL mode and with display of OUTPUT FREQUENCY, press PRG twice. Drive displays
FORWARD JOG MODE (PRESS RUN). Direction can be changed with up/down arrows.
Pressing RUN starts jog. Releasing RUN stops jog according to Item 109, JOG STOP METHOD.

7-1
 TOSHIBA

LOCAL MODE: COAST STOP

In LOCAL mode, the drive's stop method can be changed to let the motor coast with the following
keystrokes.

Keystroke Display Comment

OUTPUT FREQUENCY Standard output frequency display
60.0 HZ
LOCAL/REMOTE COAST STOP COMMAND Drive prompts user for coast stop command
(PRESS STOP)
STOP/CLEAR OUTPUT FREQUENCY Drive immediately stops firing transistors and motor
0.0 HZ coasts to a stop

PROGRAMMING MODE
Pressing the PRG button allows users to enter the programming mode. See parameter tree on
page 8-33 and parameter charts starting on page 8-1. Parameter explanations and examples can
be found in section 9.
REMOTE MODE
The drive operates in REMOTE mode when the LOCAL/REMOTE LED is not illuminated. The
LOCAL/REMOTE LED can be turned on and off with the LOCAL/REMOTE key only when the
drive is stopped and at 0.0 Hz. With default programming, the drive powers up in remote mode. In
the remote mode, the G3 is stopped/started remotely (e.g. from the terminal strip). To initiate a
run, the drive must have:

1. Drive enable ( e.g. "ST"-"CC" made)

2. Frequency command ( e.g. analog input to "IV", "RR", or other termials)
3. Direction command ( e.g. "R"-"CC" closure or "F"-"CC" closure )

See pages 5-2 and 4-1 for information on physical connections to the drive. See Items 44-55
on page 8-5 for information on the functions available via the input terminals. See Item 281,
COMMAND MODE SELECTION and Item 282, FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION for information on
how to set where the drive receives start/stop and frequency commands.

REMOTE MODE: EMERGENCY OFF

EMERGENCY OFF can be executed from the keypad when running and operating in remote
mode. EMERGENCY OFF is stored as a past fault in the monitor, but does not change the state
of any "fault" contacts. When running in remote mode, press STOP/CLEAR twice to initiate an
EMERGENCY OFF command. Drive will stop motor according to method selected in Item 151,
EMERGENCY OFF MODE SELECTION.

OTHER KEYPAD FUNCTIONS: LANGUAGE SELECTION

To change languages, press LOCAL/REMOTE + MON + PRG together with the display
showing OUTPUT FREQUENCY. Use the arrows to select the desired language and press WRT
to enter. As of 8/97, English and German are supported. German is available on the version 121
keypad ROM. To check keypad ROM number, press and hold the PRG button after pressing the
three buttons together as mentioned above. If drive displays "79", the keypad ROM is version 121;
if the drive displays "6E", the keypad ROM version is 110. If the drive does nothing, keypad ROM
is version 100.

7-2
 TOSHIBA

MONITOR MODE
Pressing the MON key switches the drive to monitor mode. The following table is an example of
the drive operation variables visible in the monitor:

Keystroke Display Explanation

OUTPUT FREQUENCY Standard output frequency display
0.0Hz
MON MOTOR RUN DIRECTION: Pressing the MON key places inverter in monitor
FORWARD mode. The first monitor window indicates direction.
down arrow MONITOR #1 Programmable monitor #1
0.0 Hz (the default shows frequency command)
down arrow LOAD CURRENT Programmable monitor #2
0% (default setting shows total current in percent)
down arrow INPUT VOLTAGE Programmable monitor #3
228V (default setting shows input voltage)
down arrow OUTPUT VOLTAGE Programmable monitor #4
0V (default setting shows output voltage)
down arrow STATUS: R:-- S1:ON Input terminal monitor. Drive displays "ON"
S2:-- S3:ON S4:-- when terminal is shorted to "CC".
down arrow ST:ON F:-- RES:ON Input terminal monitor. Drive displays "ON"
S5:-- S6:ON S7:-- when terminal is shorted to "CC".
down arrow RCH:ON LOW:ON FL:ON Output contact monitor. Drive displays "ON" when
OUT:ON FAN:-- MC:ON output is energized.
down arrow CUMULATIVE RUN TIME Non-resettable run time monitor. ".01" = 1 hour.
0.00
down arrow PAST TRIP #1 Past trip #1 monitor
OVERCURRENT (ACCEL)
down arrow PAST TRIP #2 Past trip #2 monitor
OVERCURRENT (DECEL)
down arrow PAST TRIP #3 Past trip #3 monitor
OVERVOLTAGE (DECEL)
down arrow PAST TRIP #4 Past trip #4 monitor
NO ERROR
down arrow MOTOR RUN DIRECTION: Return to the first monitor window
FORWARD

The monitor has no effect on what is happening to the motor and contains information useful for
start-ups and troubleshooting. If the down/up arrow key is pressed continuously, every 0.5
seconds the next/previous item will be displayed.

As illustrated above, the monitor displays MONITOR #1, LOAD CURRENT, INPUT VOLTAGE,
and OUTPUT VOLTAGE as default. The four variables displayed in these monitor windows are
programmable via Items 289-292 (see page 8-30).

Terminals "S6", "S7", and "S8" exist on option boards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. Terminal
"OUT" is an output contact available on option boards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. "MC" is
the soft start resistor bypass contactor (should always show "ON").

Monitor currents can be shown in amps by adjusting Item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION to
"1". Monitor voltages can be shown in percent by adjusting Item 297, VOLTAGE UNITS
SELECTION to "0".

The monitor's past four faults can be cleared by setting Item 280, STANDARD SETTING MODE
SELECTION to "4".

7-3
 TOSHIBA

MONITORING "RR" INPUT SPECIAL FUNCTION

The "RR" terminal can be used to adjust the following drive parameters on the fly: Maximum
Output Frequency, accel/decel times, voltage boost, and stall level. When Item 289, 290, 291, or
292 are programmed to "14", one of the drive's monitor windows will display the following:

Setting of Item 79, RR INPUT

SPECIAL FUNCTION SELECT Monitor display
1 With 10 volts on the "RR" terminal, this monitor shows MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY. Zero volts on "RR" makes the effective
Maximum Output Frequency 30 Hz. See Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT
FREQUENCY.
2 This monitor displays the acc/dec multiplier. Zero volts on "RR" results
in a display of "1.0". Ten volts on "RR" results in a display of "10.0".
3 This monitor displays the effective voltage boost. Zero volts on the
"RR" terminal results in a "0.0" display. At ten volts, VOLTAGE
BOOST is displayed.
4 This monitor shows effective Stall Protection Current Level. If Item 296,
CURRENT UNITS SELECTION is set to "1", no units will be
displayed with the current value.

MONITORING DURING PATTERN RUN

During a pattern run, the following four windows are added to the monitor sequence:

Key Operation LCD Message Explanation

OUTPUT FREQUENCY Standard output frequency display
30.0HZ
MON PATTERN GROUP #1 Indicates the active pattern group number
SPEED #3 and current speed used.
down arrow NUMBER OF CYCLES Indicates how many pattern group repetitions
REMAINING 145 are remaining
down arrow PRESET SPEED # 12 Indicates the preset speed currently used.
down arrow REMAINING PATTERN Indicates the remaining pattern time
TIME 2365 MIN
down arrow MOTOR RUN DIRECTION: Beginning of regular monitor windows.
FORWARD

7-4
 TOSHIBA
SECTION 8: Programming Charts

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

MAXIMUM OUTPUT 1 Maximum frequency 30 - 400 Hz 0.01/0.1 Hz 80 Hz 9-3

FREQUENCY

BASE FREQUENCY #1 2 Base frequency #1 25 - 400 Hz 0.01/0.1 Hz 60 Hz 9-3

BASE FREQUENCY 3 Base frequency voltage selection 0: Input voltage level - 1 9-3
VOLTAGE SELECT 1: Automatic setting
2: Stationary setting

MAXIMUM OUTPUT 4 Maximum voltage #1 for 230V 0 - 255V 1V 230V 9-3

VOLTAGE #1 Maximum voltage #1 for 460V 0 - 510V 1V 460V 9-3
Maximum voltage #1 for 600V 0 - 600V 1V 575V 9-3

REVERSE OPERATION 5 Reverse operation disable selection 0: Reverse allowed - 0 9-3

DISABLE SELECT 1: Reverse not
allowed

UPPER LIMIT 6 Upper limit frequency 0.0 Hz - Maximum 0.01/0.1 Hz 80.0 9-3
FREQUENCY Output Frequency

LOWER LIMIT 7 Lower limit frequency 0.0 Hz - Upper 0.01/0.1 Hz 0.0 9-3
FREQUENCY Limit Frequency

VOLTS PER HERTZ 8 V/F pattern 1: Constant torque * - 1 9-3

PATTERN 2: Variable torque *
3: Automatic torque
boost
4: Automatic torque
boost with
automatic energy
savings feature
5: Vector control
6: Vector control with
automatic energy
savings feature

VOLTAGE BOOST #1 9* 30 HP and less 0 - 30% 0.1% 3% 9-4

40 HP and greater 1%

ACCELERATION TIME #1 10 60 HP and less 0.1-6000/0.01-600.0 0.1s/0.01s 10 sec 9-4

75 HP and greater 60 sec

DECELERATION TIME #1 11 60 HP and less 0.1-6000/0.01-600.0 0.1s/0.01s 10 sec 9-4

75 HP and greater 60 sec

ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 12 Acc/Dec pattern #1 0: Linear - 0 9-4

SELECTION 1: Self-adjusting
2: S-Pattern
3: Overspeed Pattern

ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN 13 Acc/Dec pattern adjustment 0 - 50 1% 25 9-5

ADJUST LOW amounts (low)

ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN 14 Acc/Dec pattern adjustment 0 - 50 1% 25 9-5

ADJUST HIGH amounts (high)

*Item 9 is available only when Item 8 Adjustment Range option 1 or 2 is selected.

8-1
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

BASE FREQUENCY #2 15 Base frequency #2 25 - 400 Hz 0.01/0.1 Hz 60.0 9-5

MAXIMUM OUTPUT 16 Maximum voltage #2 for 230V 0 - 255V 1V 230V 9-5

VOLTAGE #2 Maximum voltage #2 for 460V 0 - 510V 1V 460V 9-5
Maximum voltage #2 for 600V 0 - 600V 1V 575V 9-5

VOLTAGE BOOST #2 17 * 30 HP and less 0 - 30% 0.1% 3% 9-5

40 HP and greater 1%

ELECTRONIC THERMAL 18 Electronic thermal protection 10-100% or amps 1%/A 100 9-5
PROTECT LVL #2 level #2

STALL PROTECTION 19 turn stall #2 on/off 0: On ** - 0 9-5

SELECTION #2 1: Off

STALL PROTECTION 20** adjust stall current level #2 10-215% or amps 1%/A 150% 9-5
LEVEL #2

ACCELERATION TIME #2 21 60 HP and less 0.1-6000/0.01-600.0 0.1s/0.01s 10 sec 9-5

75 HP and greater 60 sec

DECELERATION TIME #2 22 60 HP and less 0.1-6000/0.01-600.0 0.1s/0.01s 10 sec 9-5

75 HP and greater 60 sec

ACC/DEC PATTERN #2 23 Acc/Dec pattern #2 0: Linear - 0 9-5

SELECTION 1: Self-adjusting
2: S-Pattern
3: Overspeed Pattern

ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCH 24 Hz at which to switch from 0 - Max. Output Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-5
FREQUENCY ACC1/DEC1 to ACC2/DEC2 (Item 1)

*Item 17 is available only when Item 8, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN Adjustment Range option 1 or 2
is selected.
**Item 20 is available only when Item 19 Adjustment Range option 0 is selected.

8-2
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PANEL CONTROL PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

DIRECTION SELECTION 25 Forward/reverse 0: Reverse - 1 9-5

(FORWARD/REV) 1: Forward

STOP PATTERN 26 Stop pattern selection 0: Decelerated stop - 0 9-5

SELECTION 1: Coast stop

FUNDAMENTAL PARAM 27 Fundamental parameter #1 or #2 1: Fundamental - 1 9-5

SWITCHING selection parameter #1
2: Fundamental
parameter #2

ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 28 Acc/dec #1 or #2 1: Acc/dec #1 - 1 9-6

SELECTION selection 2: Acc/dec #2

PANEL RESET 29 Panel reset selection 0: All possible - 0 9-6

SELECTION 1: Only OL can be
reset
2: Only OL, OC1,
OC2, OC3 can be
reset

PANEL FEEDBACK 30 Panel feedback control 0: On (valid when - 0 9-6

CONTROL (PID, speed feedback, drooping) panel operation is
selected)
1: Off (invalid when
panel operation is
selected)

8-3
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

START-UP FREQUENCY 31 Start-up frequency 0.0 - 10 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.1 9-6

END FREQUENCY 32 End frequency 0.0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.1 9-6

RUN FREQUENCY 33 Run frequency 0.0 - max output freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-6

RUN FREQUENCY 34 Run frequency hysteresis 0.0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-6

HYSTERESIS

ENABLE JUMP 35 Jump frequency enable 0: Function OFF - 0 9-6

FREQUENCIES 1: Function ON *

JUMP FREQUENCY #1 36* Jump frequency #1 0.0-Max Output Freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-6

JUMP FREQUENCY #1 37* +/- band # 1 0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-7

BANDWIDTH

JUMP FREQUENCY #2 38* Jump frequency #2 0.0-Max Output Freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-7

JUMP FREQUENCY #2 39* +/- band # 2 0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-7

BANDWIDTH

JUMP FREQUENCY #3 40* Jump frequency #3 0.0-Max Output Freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-7

JUMP FREQUENCY #3 41* +/- band # 3 0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-7

BANDWIDTH

PWM CARRIER 42 PWM carrier frequency for 230V 500 Hz - 10 kHz 0.1kHz 2.2 kHz 9-7
FREQUENCY (.75-30 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 460V 500 Hz - 10 kHz
(1-125 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 460V 500 Hz - 5 kHz
(150-325 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 230V 500 Hz - 10 kHz
and 460V NEMA TYPE4
(.75-7.5 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 460V 500 Hz - 5 kHz
NEMA TYPE4
(10 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 230V 500 Hz - 2.2 kHz
NEMA TYPE12
(10-25 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 460V 500 Hz - 2.2 kHz
NEMA TYPE12
(15-50 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 230V 500 Hz - 10 kHz
with fan/filter kit
(30 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 460V 500 Hz - 10 kHz
with fan/filter kit
(60-100 HP)
PWM carrier frequency for 600V 500 Hz - 5kHz
(5-250 HP)

*Items 36 - 41 are available only when Item 35 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

8-4
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

INPUT TERMINAL 43 Input terminal selection 0: Standard terminal - 0 9-7

SELECTION functions
1: custom terminal
functions *

"R" INPUT TERMINAL 44* assign function to "R" terminal 0 - 54 - 0 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is reverse run) 5-1

"S1" INPUT TERMINAL 45* assign function to"S1" terminal 0 - 54 - 1 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is preset speed) 5-1

"S2" INPUT TERMINAL 46* assign function to "S2" terminal 0 - 54 - 2 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is preset speed) 5-1

"S3" INPUT TERMINAL 47* assign function to "S3" terminal 0 - 54 - 3 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is preset speed) 5-1

"S4" INPUT TERMINAL 48* assign function to "S4" terminal 0 - 54 - 4 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is preset speed) 5-1

"F" INPUT TERMINAL 49* assign function to "F" terminal 0 - 54 - 5 9-7

FUNCTION (default function is forward run) 5-1

"RES" INPUT TERMINAL 50* assign function to "RES" terminal 0 - 54 - 6 9-8

FUNCTION (default function is fault reset) 5-1

"ST" INPUT TERMINAL 51* assign function to "ST" terminal 0 - 54 - 7 9-8

FUNCTION (default function is drive enable) 5-1

"S5" INPUT TERMINAL 52* assign function to "S5" terminal 0 - 54 - 8 9-8

FUNCTION (available on option board)

"S6" INPUT TERMINAL 53* assign function to "S6" terminal 0 - 54 - 9 9-8

FUNCTION (available on option board)

"S7" INPUT TERMINAL 54* assign function to "S7" terminal 0 - 54 - 10 9-8

FUNCTION (available on option board)

POTENTIAL TERMINAL 55* pick function that is always active 0 - 42 - 33 9-8

FUNCTION (no physical connection)

R, S1-S7 TERMINAL 56 "R" and "S1"-"S7" terminals' 1 - 100 1 6 9-10

RESPONSE TIME response time 5-1

"F" INPUT TERMINAL 57 "F" terminal response 1 - 100 1 6 9-10

RESPONSE TIME time selection 5-1

"RES" INPUT TERMINAL 58 "RES" terminal response 1 - 100 1 6 9-10

RESPONSE TIME time selection 5-1

"ST" INPUT TERMINAL 59 "ST" terminal response 1 - 100 1 6 9-10

RESPONSE TIME time selection 5-1

"RCH" CONTACTS 60 assign function to "RCH" 0 - 63 1 6 9-10

FUNCTION output contact 5-1

"RCH" CONTACTS 61 "RCH" output contact delay time 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

DELAY TIME 5-1

"RCH" CONTACTS 62 "RCH" output contact hold time 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

HOLD TIME 5-1

Table continued on next page

*Items 44 - 55 are available only when Item 43 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
8-5
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

"LOW" CONTACTS 63 assign function to "LOW" 0 - 63 1 4 9-10

FUNCTION contact 5-1

"LOW" CONTACTS 64 "LOW" output contact 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

DELAY TIME delay time 5-1

"LOW" CONTACTS 65 "LOW" output contact 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

HOLD TIME hold time 5-1

"FL" CONTACTS 66 asssign function to "FL" output 0 - 63 1 10 9-10

FUNCTION contact 5-1

"FL" CONTACTS 67 "FL" output contacts 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

DELAY TIME delay time 5-1

"FL" CONTACTS 68 "FL" output contacts 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

HOLD TIME hold time 5-1

"OUT" CONTACTS 69 assign function to "OUT" 0 - 61 1 8 9-10

FUNCTION output contacts
(available on option board)

"OUT" CONTACTS 70 "OUT" output contact delay time 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

DELAY TIME (available on option board)

"OUT" CONTACTS 71 "OUT" output contact hold time 1 - 100 1 1 9-10

HOLD TIME (available on option board)

LOW SPEED SIGNAL 72 Low-speed signal frequency 0 - Max. Output Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-13
OUTPUT FREQ

ACC/DEC COMPLETE 73 Acc/Dec complete detection 0 - Max. Output Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 2.5 9-13
DETECT BAND bandwidth

SPEED REACH MAXIMUM 74 Speed reach high frequency 0 - Max. Output Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-13
FREQUENCY

SPEED REACH MINIMUM 75 Speed reach low frequency 0 - Max. Output Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-13
FREQUENCY

COMMERCIAL POWER/INV 76 Bypass control 0: Off - 0 9-13

SWITCHING OUTPUT 1: Automatic
switching upon trip
2: Switching upon
receipt of
switching
signal *
3: Both 1 and 2
above*

COMMERCIAL POWER/INV 77* Incoming power/inverter 0 - Max Output Freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 60.0 Hz 9-13
SWITCH FREQ switching frequency

Table continued on next page

*Item 77 is available only when Item 76 Adjustment Range option 2 or 3 is selected.

8-6
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE SETTING NO.

"FP" OUTPUT TERMINAL 78 Output terminal pulse 0: 48 times output frequency 0 9-13
PULSE FREQUENCY frequency selection 1: 96 times output frequency 5-1
2: 360 times output frequency

RR INPUT SPECIAL 79 RR input special function selection 0: Standard 0 9-13

FUNCTION SELECT 1: Set effective Maximum 5-1
Output Frequency
2: Scale ACC/DEC times
3: Set effective Voltage Boost
4: Set effective Stall Level

8-7
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

FREQUENCY PRIORITY 80 Assign priority to frequency 1:RR terminal - 1 9-13

SELECTION #1 reference sources 2:IV terminal
3:RX terminal
4:PG input
5:Binary input or MOP

FREQUENCY PRIORITY 81 Assign second priority 1:RR terminal 2 9-13

SELECTION #2 frequency reference source 2:IV terminal
3:RX terminal
4:PG input
5:Binary input or MOP

ANALOG INPUT FILTER 82 Analog input filter 0-3 - 0 9-14

RR TERMINAL STANDARD 83 RR input selection 0: Standard - 0 9-14

OR ADJUSTABLE 1: Adjustable * 5-1

RR REFERENCE SETTING 84* RR reference point #1 0 - 100% 1% 0 9-14

POINT #1 of terminal max (10V)

RR REF POINT #1 85* Output frequency desired 0 - Max. Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-14
FREQUENCY with input entered in Item 84

RR REFERENCE SETTING 86* RR reference point #2 0 - 100% 1% 100 9-14

POINT #2 of terminal max (10V)

RR REF POINT #2 87* Output frequency desired 0 - Max.Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 80.0 9-14
FREQUENCY with input entered in Item 86

IV TERMINAL STANDARD 88 IV input selection 0: Standard - 0 9-14

OR ADJUSTABLE 1: Adjustable ** 5-1

IV REFERENCE SETTING 89** IV reference point #1 0 - 100% 1% 20 9-14

POINT #1 of terminal maximum

IV REF POINT #1 90** Output frequency desired 0 - Max. Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-14
FREQUENCY with input entered inItem 89

IV REFERENCE SETTING 91** IV reference point #2 0 - 100% 1% 100 9-14

POINT #2 of terminal maximum

IV REF POINT #2 92** Output frequency desired 0 - Max. Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 80.0 9-14
FREQUENCY with input entered in Item 91

RX TERMINAL STANDARD 93 RX input selection 0: Standard - 0 9-14

OR ADJUSTABLE 1: Adjustable *** 5-1

RX REFERENCE SETTING 94*** RX reference point #1 -100 - 100% 1% 0 9-14

POINT #1 of terminal maximum

RX REF POINT #1 95*** Output Hz desired with input -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-14
FREQUENCY entered in Item 94 Max. Out. Freq.

RX REFERENCE SETTING 96*** RX reference point #2 -100 - 100% 1% 100 9-14

POINT #2 of terminal maximum

RX REF POINT #2 97*** Output Hz desired with input -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 80.0 9-14
FREQUENCY entered in Item 96 Max. Out. Freq.

Table continued on next page

*Items 84 - 87 are available only when Item 83 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
**Items 89 - 92 are available only when Item 88 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
***Items 94 - 97 are available only when Item 93 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
8-8
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PG TERMINAL STANDARD 98 Bias/gain for PG input selection 0: Standard - 0 9-14

OR ADJUSTABLE (option board) 1: Adjustable*

PG REFERENCE SETTING 99* PG reference point #1 -100 - 100% of Max. 1% 0 9-14

POINT #1 Out. Freq. X PPR

PG REF POINT #1 100* Output Hz desired when reference -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-14
FREQUENCY equals value entered in Item 99 Max. Out. Freq.

PG REFERENCE SETTING 101* PG reference point #2 -100 - 100% of Max. 1% 100 9-14
POINT #2 Out. Freq. X PPR

PG REF POINT #2 102* Output Hz desired when reference -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 80.0 9-14
FREQUENCY equals value entered in Item 101 Max. Out. Freq.

BINARY INPUT STD 103 Bias/gain for binary input 0: Standard - 0 9-14
OR ADJUSTABLE (via input terminals). 1: Adjustible**

BINARY REF SETTING 104** Binary reference point #1 0 - 100 % 1% 0 9-14

POINT #1

BINARY REF POINT #1 105** Output Hz desired when reference -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-14
FREQUENCY equals value entered in Item 104 Max. Out. Freq.

BINARY REF SETTING 106** Binary reference point #2 0 - 100 % 1% 100 9-14
POINT #2

BINARY REF POINT #2 107** Output Hz desired when reference -Max. Out. Freq. to 0.1/0.01 Hz 80.0 9-14
FREQUENCY equals value entered in Item 106 Max. Out. Freq.

JOG RUN FREQUENCY 108 Jog run frequency 0.0 - 20*** 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15

JOG STOP METHOD 109*** Jog stop control 0: Decelerated stop - 0 9-15
1: Coast to stop
2: DC injection
braking

Table continued on next page

*Items 99 - 102 are available only when Item 98 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
**Items 104 - 107 are available only when Item 103 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
***Item 109 is available only when Item 108 Adjustment Range is set to other than "0".

8-9
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PRESET SPEED 110 Selects number of preset speeds 0: Disabled - 0 9-15

SELECTION to be unblinded 1: 1st speed only *
2: speeds 1 thru 2 *
3: speeds 1 thru 3*
4: speeds 1 thru 4*
5: speeds 1 thru 5*
6: speeds 1 thru 6*
7: speeds 1 thru 7*
8: speeds 1 thru 8*
9: speeds 1 thru 9*
10:speeds 1 thru 10*
11:speeds 1 thru 11*
12:speeds 1 thru 12*
13:speeds 1 thru 13*
14:speeds 1 thru 14*
15:speeds 1 thru 15*

PRESET SPEED MODE 111* Mode selection 0: Deactivated - 0 9-15

ACTIVATION 1: Activated

PRESET SPEED #1 112* 1st speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #1 113* 1st speed run mode 0: Acc/dec #1, 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE forward run
1: Acc/dec #1,
reverse run
2: Acc/dec #2,
forward run
3: Acc/dec #2,
reverse run
4: Acc/dec #1,
forward run
5: Acc/dec #1,
reverse run
6: Acc/dec #2,
forward run
7: Acc/dec #2,
reverse run

PRESET SPEED #2 114* 2nd speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #2 115* 2nd speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #3 116* 3rd speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #3 117* 3rd speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

Table continued on next page

*Items 111 - 117 are available only when Item 110 Adjustment Range options 1 - 15 are selected.

8 - 10
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PRESET SPEED #4 118* 4th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #4 119* 4th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #5 120* 5th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #5 121* 5th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #6 122* 6th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #6 123* 6th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #7 124* 7th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #7 125* 7th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #8 126* 8th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #8 127* 8th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #9 128* 9th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #9 129* 9th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #10 130* 10th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #10 131* 10th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #11 132* 11th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #11 133* 11th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

Table continued on next page

*Items 118 - 133 are available only when Item 110 Adjustment Range options 1 - 15 are selected.

8 - 11
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PRESET SPEED #12 134* 12th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #12 135* 12th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #13 136* 13th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #13 137* 13th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #14 138* 14th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #14 139* 14th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

PRESET SPEED #15 140* 15th speed Lower limit frequency 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-15
FREQUENCY to
upper limit frequency

PRESET SPEED #15 141* 15th speed run mode Same options as - 0 9-15
OPERATING MODE Item 113

*Items 134 - 141 are available only when Item 110 Adjustment Range options 1 - 15 are selected.

8 - 12
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

DYNAMIC BRAKING 142 Dynamic braking selection 0: No DBR used - 0 9-15

SELECTION 1: DBR used. Drive's
DBR OL protect off.
2: DBR used. Drive's
DBR OL protect on.

BRAKING RESISTOR 143* DBR resistor value 1.0 - 1000 0.1 ohm ***** 9-15
VALUE

BRAKING RESISTOR 144* DBR capacity 0.01 - 600 0.01 kW ***** 9-15
POWER RATING

OVERVOLTAGE STALL 145 Overvoltage stall protection 0: On - 0 9-16

PROTECTION 1: Off

DC INJECTION START 146 DC injection starting frequency 0 - 120 ** 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-17
FREQUENCY

DC INJECTION CURRENT 147** DC injection current 0 - 100% or amps 1 %/A 0 9-17

MAGNITUDE

DC INJECTION TIME 148** DC injection time 0 - 10 0.1 sec 0.0 9-17

FWD/REV DC INJECTION 149 DC injection during 0: Off - 0 9-17

PRIORITY CTRL direction change 1: On

MOTOR SHAFT 150 continuous DC trickle 0: Off - 0 9-17

STATIONARY CTRL 1: On

EMERGENCY OFF MODE 151 Emergency stop selection 0: Coast to stop - 0 9-17
SELECTION 1: Decelerated stop
2: DC injection
stop ***

EMERGENCY OFF DC 152*** Emergency stop DC injection time 0 - 10 0.1 sec 0.1 9-17
INJECTION TIME

NUMBER OF RETRY 153 Retry selection 0: No retry - 0 9-17

ATTEMPTS 1: Retry 1 time ****
2: Retry 2 times ****
3: Retry 3 times ****
4: Retry 4 times ****
5: Retry 5 times ****
6: Retry 6 times ****
7: Retry 7 times ****
8: Retry 8 times ****
9: Retry 9 times ****
10:Retry 10 times ****

TIME BETWEEN RETRY 154 Retry time setting 0.0 - 10 0.1 sec 1.0 9-17
ATTEMPTS ****

Table continued on next page

*Items 143 - 144 are available only when Item 142 Adjustment Range option 2 is selected.
** Items 147 - 148 are available only when Item 146 Adjustment Range is set to other than "0".
*** Item 152 is available only when Item 151 Adjustment Range option 2 is selected.
**** Item 154 is available only when Item 153 Adjustment Range options 1 - 10 are selected.
***** Default wattage and ohm values depend on the inverter size.

8 - 13
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

REGENERATION POWER 155 allows drive to use regen 0: Off - 0 9-17

RIDE-THROUGH for control power 1: On *

REGENERATION RIDE- 156* maximum allowable 0.0 - 25 0.1 sec 2.0 9-17
THROUGH TIME ride-through time

AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR 157 "catch" a spinning motor 0: Off - 0 9-17

SPEED SEARCH) (forward or reverse) 1: After momentary
power failure
(ride-through)
2: After "ST" is
shorted to "CC"
3: Both 1 and 2

ELECTRONIC THERMAL 158 sets drive's overload to 10-100% or amps 1%/A 100 9-18
PROTECT LVL 1 protect motor

OVERLOAD REDUCTION 159 frequency at which drive's motor 0 - 30 0.1/0.01 Hz 30.0 9-18
START FREQ overload becomes speed sensitive

MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD 160 sets motor overload time 10 - 2400 10 sec 600 9-18
TIME LIMIT

OVERLOAD SELECTION 161 OL selection 0: Standard - 0 9-18

1: Soft stall on
2: Motor OL trip off
3: Soft stall on,
Motor OL trip off

STALL PROTECTION 162 Stall protection #1 0: On ** - 0 9-18

ENABLE 1: Off

STALL PROTECTION 163** sets current limit 10 - 215%/A 1 %/A 150 9-18
CURRENT LEVEL

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP 164 Undervoltage detection can 0: Trip disabled - 0 9-18

SELECTION cause a warning or a trip 1: Trip enabled

UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT 165 Undervoltage detection time 0 - 10 0.01 sec 0.03 9-18
TIME

LOW CURRENT DETECT 166 Low current detection can 0: Trip disabled - 0 9-18
SELECTION cause a warning or a trip 1: Trip enabled

LOW CURRENT DETECT 167 Low current detection level 0 - 100% or amps 1%/A 0 9-19
LEVEL

LOW CURRENT 168 Low current detection time 0 - 255 1 sec 0 9-19
DETECTION TIME

OUTPUT SHORT-CIRCUIT 169 Output short-circuit detection 0: Standard - 0 9-19

DETECTION SELECT selection (OCL) 1: Less sensitive
short-circuit checki
2: Short-circuit check
at power up only
3: Combination of
1 and 2 above

Table continued on next page

*Item 156 is available only when Item 155 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
**Item 163 is available only when Item 162 Adjustment Range option 0 is selected.

8 - 14
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

OVERTORQUE TRIP 170 Overtorque detection can cause 0: Trip disabled - 0 9-19
SELECTION a warning or a trip 1: Trip enabled

OVERTORQUE TRIP 171 Overtorque trip level 10-200% or amps 1%/A 2.0 9-19
LEVEL

FAULT TRIP EEPROM 172 Fault trip saving 0: Fault - 0 9-19

SAVE ENABLE cleared when
power cycled
1: Fault display
retained when
power cycled*

COOLING FAN CONTROL 173 Cooling fan control selection 0: Automatic fan - 0 9-19
SELECTION 1: Fan always on

CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER 174 Cumulative run timer alarm setting 0.00 - 999.9 0.02 175.0 9-19
ALARM SETTING (.01 = 1 hour)

*This parameter disables the retry function (see Items 153 and 154).

8 - 15
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PATTERN RUN 175 Pattern run on/off 0: Off - 0 9-19

SELECTION 1: On *

PATTERN RUN CONTINUE 176* Pattern run mode 0: Pattern is reset - 0 9-19
MODE when inverter
is stopped
1: Pattern resumes
with speed of
interruption and
with time left at
interruption

PATTERN GROUP #1 177* 1st Pattern Group 0: Skip - 1 9-20

SPEED #0 1st speed selection 1: Preset speed #1
2: Preset speed #2
3: Preset speed #3
4: Preset speed #4
5: Preset speed #5
6: Preset speed #6
7: Preset speed #7
8: Preset speed #8
9: Preset speed #9
10:Preset speed #10
11:Preset speed #11
12:Preset speed #12
13:Preset speed #13
14:Preset speed #14
15:Preset speed #15

PATTERN GROUP #1 178* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 2 9-20

SPEED #1 2nd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 179* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 3 9-20

SPEED #2 3rd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 180* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 4 9-20

SPEED #3 4th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 181* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 5 9-20

SPEED #4 5th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 182* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 6 9-20

SPEED #5 6th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 183* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 7 9-20

SPEED #6 7th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #1 184* 1st Pattern Group Same options as - 8 9-20

SPEED #7 8th speed selection Item 177

Table continued on next page

*Items 176 - 184 are available only when Item 175 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

8 - 16
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PATTERN GROUP #1 185* number of repeats for 1 - 254, 255=infinity - 1 9-20

NUMBER OF CYCLES entire pattern group

PATTERN GROUP #2 186* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 9 9-20

SPEED #0 1st speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 187* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 10 9-20

SPEED #1 2nd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 188* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 11 9-20

SPEED #2 3rd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 189* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 12 9-20

SPEED #3 4th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 190* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 13 9-20

SPEED #4 5th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 191* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 14 9-20

SPEED #5 6th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 192* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 15 9-20

SPEED #6 7th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 193* 2nd Pattern Group Same options as - 0 9-20

SPEED #7 8th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #2 194* number of repeats of 1 - 254, 255=infinity - 1 9-20

NUMBER OF CYCLES entire pattern group

PATTERN GROUP #3 195* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 1 9-20

SPEED #0 1st speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 196* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 1 9-20

SPEED #1 2nd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 197* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 2 9-20

SPEED #2 3rd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 198* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 3 9-20

SPEED #3 4th speed selection Item 177

Table continued on next page

*Items 185 - 198 are available only when Item 175 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

8 - 17
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PATTERN GROUP #3 199* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 4 9-20

SPEED #4 5th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 200* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 5 9-20

SPEED #5 6th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 201* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 6 9-20

SPEED #6 7th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 202* 3rd Pattern Group Same options as - 7 9-20

SPEED #7 8th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #3 203* number of repeats of 1 - 254, 255=infinity - 1 9-20

NUMBER OF CYCLES entire pattern group

PATTERN GROUP #4 204* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 9 9-20

SPEED #0 1st speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 205* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 10 9-20

SPEED #1 2nd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 206* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 11 9-20

SPEED #2 3rd speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 207* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 12 9-20

SPEED #3 4th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 208* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 13 9-20

SPEED #4 5th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 209* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 14 9-20

SPEED #5 6th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 210* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 15 9-20

SPEED #6 7th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 211* 4th Pattern Group Same options as - 0 9-20

SPEED #7 8th speed selection Item 177

PATTERN GROUP #4 212* number of repeats of 1 - 254, 255=infinity - 1 9-20

NUMBER OF CYCLES entire pattern group

Table continued on next page

*Items 199 - 212 are available only when Item 175 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

8 - 18
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

SPEED #1 CONTINUE 213 determines how speed time 0: Count in seconds 0 9-20
MODE is measured from time of
activation *
1: Count in minutes
from time of
activation *
2: Count in seconds
from time set
speed is reached *
3: Count in minutes.
from time set
speed is reached *
4: Non-stop
(continue until
STOP command)
5: Continue until next
step command

SPEED #1 DRIVE TIME 214* Speed #1 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #2 CONTINUE 215 Speed #2 drive continuation mode Same options as 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #2 DRIVE TIME 216** Speed #2 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #3 CONTINUE 217 Speed #3 drive continuation mode Same options as 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #3 DRIVE TIME 218*** Speed #3 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #4 CONTINUE 219 Speed #4 drive continuation mode Same options as 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #4 DRIVE TIME 220 Speed #4 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
****
SPEED #5 CONTINUE 221 Speed #5 drive continuation mode Same options as 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #5 DRIVE TIME 222 Speed #5 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
*****

Table continued on next page

*Item 214 is available only when Item 213 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
**Item 216 is available only when Item 215 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
***Item 218 is available only when Item 217 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
****Item 220 is available only when Item 219 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
*****Item 222 is available only when Item 221 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.

8 - 19
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

SPEED #6 CONTINUE 223 Speed #6 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #6 DRIVE TIME 224* Speed #6 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #7 CONTINUE 225 Speed #7 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #7 DRIVE TIME 226** Speed #7 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #8 CONTINUE 227 Speed #8 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #8 DRIVE TIME 228*** Speed #8 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #9 CONTINUE 229 Speed #9 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #9 DRIVE TIME 230 Speed #9 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
****
SPEED #10 CONTINUE 231 Speed #10 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #10 DRIVE TIME 232 Speed #10 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
*****

Table continued on next page

*Item 224 is available only when Item 223 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
**Item 226 is available only when Item 225 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
***Item 228 is available only when Item 227 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
****Item 230 is available only when Item 229 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
*****Item 232 is available only when Item 231 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.

8 - 20
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

SPEED #11 CONTINUE 233 Speed #11 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #11 DRIVE TIME 234* Speed #11 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #12 CONTINUE 235 Speed #12 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #12 DRIVE TIME 236** Speed #12 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #13 CONTINUE 237 Speed #13 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #13 DRIVE TIME 238*** Speed #13 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21

SPEED #14 CONTINUE 239 Speed #14 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #14 DRIVE TIME 240 Speed #14 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
****
SPEED #15 CONTINUE 241 Speed #15 drive continuation mode Same options as - 0 9-20
MODE Item 213

SPEED #15 DRIVE TIME 242 Speed #15 drive time 0 - 8000 1 sec./min. 0 9-21
*****

Table continued on next page

*Item 234 is available only when Item 233 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
**Item 236 is available only when Item 235 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
***Item 238 is available only when Item 237 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
****Item 240 is available only when Item 239 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.
*****Item 242 is available only when Item 241 Adjustment Range option 0 - 3 is selected.

8 - 21
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FEEDBACK PARAMETERS
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

FEEDBACK CONTROL 243 select type of feedback control 0: No feedback - 0 9-21

SELECTION control
1: PID setpoint
control *
2: Speed feedback
control *

FEEDBACK INPUT 244* Feedback input signal selection 1: "RR" terminal - 2 9-21
SIGNAL SELECTION 2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal
4: PG feedback
(option board)
5: RS232C input
6: RS485 board or
12-bit binary/BCD
option board input
7: Binary input

PROPORTIONAL GAIN 245* Proportional gain 0.01 - 2.55 0.01 0.30 9-21

INTEGRAL GAIN 246* Integral time 0.01 - 360.0 0.01 sec 5.00 9-21

ANTI-HUNTING GAIN 247* Differential time 0.0 - 25.5 0.1 sec 0.0 9-21

LAG TIME CONSTANT 248* Lag time constant 0 - 255 1 80 9-21

PID LOWER LIMIT 249** unique lower limit for PID 0.0 - Max Out Freq 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-21
FREQUENCY

PID DEVIATION LIMIT 250 PID deviation limit selection 0: No PID deviation - 0 9-21
SELECTION limit
1: PID deviation
limited***

PID DEVIATION UPPER 251*** PID deviation upper limit 0 - 50% 1% 50 9-21
LIMIT

PID DEVIATION LOWER 252*** PID deviation lower limit 0 - 50% 1% 50 9-21
LIMIT

PG INPUT: NUMBER OF 253 pulses per rev (for feedback) or 1 - 9999 1 500 9-21
PULSES # pulses = 1Hz for pulse reference

PG INPUT: NUMBER OF 254 number of phases 1: Single phase input - 2 9-22

PHASES 2: Two-phase input

DROOPING CONTROL 255 load share 0: Off - 0 9-22

ENABLE 1: On ****

DROOPING CONTROL 256 Number of Hz droop 0.0 - 10.0% 0.1% 0.0 9-22
AMOUNT at full load**** of Max. Out. Freq.

Table continued on next page

*Items 244 - 248 are available only when Item 243 Adjustment Range options 1or 2 are selected.
**Item 249 is available only when Item 243 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
***Items 251 - 252 are available only when Item 250 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
****Item 256 is available only when Item 255 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

8 - 22
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:FEEDBACK PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

OVERRIDE CONTROL 257 trim source 0: Off - 0 9-22

SELECTION 1: "RR" terminal
2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal
4: PG option board
5: Keypad
6: All other opt board
7: Multiplier

OVERRIDE MULTIPLIER 258* trim source selection 0: Reference - 0 9-22

INPUT SELECTION 1: "RR" terminal.
2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal
4: Binary input

OVERRIDE CHANGE 259* sets trim range -100.0 - 100.0% 0.1% 0.0 9-22
MULTIPLIER of reference

*Items 258 - 259 are available only when Item 257 Adjustment Range option 7 is selected.

8 - 23
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

RS232 BAUD RATE 260 set RS232 baud rate 0: 2400 baud - 2 9-22
1: 4800 baud
2: 9600 baud

NUMBER OF DATA BITS 261 Number of data bits 0: 7 bits - 0 9-22

1: 8 bits

PARITY SETTING 262 Parity 0: Even parity - 0 9-22

1: Odd parity

INVERTER ID NUMBER 263 Inverter number 0 - 255 - 0 9-22

COMMUNICATION 264 Communication selection 0: Off - 0 9-23

SELECTION 1: RS485 board*
2: Tosline-F10,
DN board,
MB+ board,
RIO board**
3: Tosline-S20 **
4: 12-bit binary input
(option board)
5: BCD board
(0.1 Hz units)
6: BCD board
(1 Hz units)

MASTER/SLAVE 265* Master/follower selection 0: Follower - 0 9-23

SELECTION 1: Master (follower
follows master
freq. command)
2: Master (output
frequency)

RS485 BAUD RATE 266* RS485 baud rate 0: Normal mode - 0 9-23
1: High speed mode

TOSLINE-F10/S20 267** TOSLINE-F10/TOSLINE-S20 0: Off - 0 9-23

COMMAND INPUT command input 1: Frequency
command
2: Command input
3: Frequency
command,
command input

Table continued on next page

*Items 265 - 266 are available only when Item 264 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.
**Item 267 is available only when Item 264 Adjustment Range option 2 or 3 is selected.

Cycle power after changing any parameter in GROUP: COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.

8 - 24
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

TOSLINE-F10/S20 268* TOSLINE-F10/TOSLINE-S20 0: Off - 0 9-23

MONITOR OUTPUT monitor output 1: Output frequency
2: Status
3: Output
frequency, status
4: Output current
5: Output
frequency,
output current
6: Status, output
current
7: Output
frequency,
status,
output current
8: Output voltage
9: Output
frequency,
output voltage
10:Output voltage,
status
11:Output
frequency,
output voltage,
status
12:Output voltage,
output current
13:Output voltage,
output current,
output frequency
14:Output voltage,
output current,
status
15:Output voltage,
output current,
output frequency,
status

TOSLINE-F10/S20 COMM 269 TOSLINE-F10 0: Data cleared - 0 9-23

ERROR MODE TOSLINE-S20 1: Data retained
communication error mode

RS485/12-BIT BINARY 270 RS485/12-bit binary input: bias 0: Off - 0 0 9-23

BIAS, GAIN and gain settings 1: On **

RS485/12-BIT BINARY 271** Point #1 setting signal 0 - 100% of 1% 0 9-23

POINT #1 Max. Out. Freq.

RS485/12-BIT BINARY 272** Output Hz desired with input 0 - Max. Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz 0.0 9-23
POINT #1 FREQ entered in Item 271

RS485/12-BIT BINARY 273** Point #2 setting signal 0 - 100% of 100% 0 9-23

POINT #2 Max. Out. Freq.

RS485/12-BIT BINARY 274** Output Hz desired with input 0 - Max. Out. Freq. 0.1/0.01 Hz Max Out 9-23
POINT #2 FREQ entered in Item 273 Freq

*Item 268 is available only when Item 264 Adjustment Range option 2 or 3 is selected.
**Items 271 - 274 are available only when Item 270 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

Cycle power after changing any parameter in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.

8 - 25
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (PUMP)

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (FAN)

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (CONVEYOR)

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (HOIST)

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (TEXTILES)

GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (MACHINE TOOLS)

These groups contain the parameters likely to be used for certain applications. See the G3 Industrial
Application Manual (available from your Toshiba distributor) for programming charts and macro values.

8 - 26
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:AM/FM TERMINAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE SETTING NO.

FM TERMINAL FUNCTION 275 "FM" terminal signal selection 0: Pre-compensation 0 9-23

SELECTION ref frequency
1: Post-compensation
output frequency
2: Frequency
referencee
3: Output current
4: DC voltage
5: Output voltage
6: Torque current
7: Excitation current
8: PID feedback
value
9: Motor overload
ratio
10: Inverter overload
ratio
11: DBR overload
ratio
12: Input power
13:Output power
14: Meter calibration
(100% fixed output)
15: Peak output
current
16: Peak input voltage

FREQUENCY METER 276 "FM" terminal calibration - - 9-24

ADJUSTMENT

AM TERMINAL FUNCTION 277 "AM" terminal signal selection 0: Pre-compensation 3 9-25

SELECTION reference
frequency
1: Post-
compensation
output frequency
2: Frequency setting
value
3: Output current
4: DC voltage
5: Output voltage
6: Torque current
7: Excitation current
8: PID feedback
value
9: Motor overload
ratio
10: Inverter overload
ratio
11: DBR overload
ratio
12: Input power
13: Output power
14: Meter calibration
(100% fixed output)
15: Peak output
current
16: Peak input voltage

CURRENT METER 278 "AM" terminal calibration - - 9-25

ADJUSTMENT

8 - 27
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE SETTING NO.

INDUSTRIAL 279 selects application-specific 0: Does nothing 0 9-25

APPLICATIONS programming (macros) 1: Pump application
2: Fan application
3: Conveyor application
4: Hoist application
5: Textiles application
6: Machine tool application

STANDARD SETTING 280 defaults drive parameters 0: Does nothing 0 9-25

MODE SELECTION 1: 50 Hz setting
2: 60 Hz setting
3: Default drive to factory settings
4: Clear past trips in monitor
5: Store user default settings
6: Default to user default settings
7: Initialize inverter typeform

COMMAND MODE 281 selects START/STOP command 0: Only RS232C input valid 4 9-25
SELECTION source 1: Terminal input valid
2: Panel input valid
3: RS485 option board
4: Keypad or terminal strip, as set
by LOCAL/REMOTE button.

FREQUENCY MODE 282 selects frequency reference 0: Only RS232C input valid 4 9-25
SELECTION source 1: Terminal input valid
2: Panel input valid
3: RS485 option board
4: Keypad or terminal strip, as set
by LOCAL/REMOTE button

PANEL OPERATION MODE * 283 limits keypad's functions 0: Prohibit all key operations 63 9-26
SELECTION 1: Perform reset
2: Perform monitor operations
3: Perform reset, perform monitor
operations
4: Perform emergency stop
5: Perform emergency stop,
perform reset
6: Perform emergency stop,
perform monitor operations
7: Perform emergency stop,
perform monitor operations,
perform reset
8: Perform run/stop operations
9: Perform run/stop operations,
perform reset
10:Perform run/stop operations,
perform monitor operations
11:Perform run/stop operations,
perform monitor operations,
perform reset
12:Perform run/stop operations,
perform emergency stop
13:Perform run/stop operations,
perform emergency stop,
perform reset
14:Perform run/stop operations,
perform emergency stop,
perform monitor operations
(cont'd)

Table continued on next page

* NOTE: Recycle power after changing ITEM 283, PANEL OPERATION MODE SELECTION. ESTOP
from keypad while in remote mode cannot be disabled.
8 - 28
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE SETTING NO.

(cont'd from p.8-28)

PANEL OPERATION MODE * 283 Panel operation mode selection 15:Perform run/stop operations, 63 9-26
SELECTION perform emergency stop,
perform monitor operations,
perform reset
16:Perform parameter read
operations
17:Option 16 + Option 1
18:Option 16 + Option 2
19:Option 16 + Option 3
20:Option 16 + Option 4
21:Option 16 + Option 5
22:Option 16 + Option 6
23:Option 16 + Option 7
24:Option 16 + Option 8
25:Option 16 + Option 9
26:Option 16 + Option 10
27:Option 16 + Option 11
28:Option 16 + Option 12
29:Option 16 + Option 13
30:Option 16 + Option 14
31:Option 16 + Option 15
32:Perform parameter change
operations
33:Option 32 + Option 1
34:Option 32 + Option 2
35:Option 32 + Option 3
36:Option 32 + Option 4
37:Option 32 + Option 5
38:Option 32 + Option 6
39:Option 32 + Option 7
40:Option 32 + Option 8
41:Option 32 + Option 9
42:Option 32 + Option 10
43:Option 32 + Option 11
44:Option 32 + Option 12
45:Option 32 + Option 13
46:Option 32 + Option 14
47:Option 32 + Option 15
48:Option 32 + Option 16
49:Option 32 + Option 17
50:Option 32 + Option 18
51:Option 32 + Option 19
52:Option 32 + Option 20
53:Option 32 + Option 21
54:Option 32 + Option 22
55:Option 32 + Option 23
56:Option 32 + Option 24
57:Option 32 + Option 25
58:Option 32 + Option 26
59:Option 32 + Option 27
60:Option 32 + Option 28
61:Option 32 + Option 29
62:Option 32 + Option 30
63:Standard mode (perform all
operations)

* NOTE: Recycle power after changing ITEM 283, PANEL OPERATION MODE SELECTION.

8 - 29
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

PASS NUMBER 284 Panel operation mode selection 0 - 99 - 0 9-26

CPU VERSION 285 CPU version Can be monitored only - 120 9-26

ROM VERSION 286 ROM version Can be monitored only - - 9-26

EEPROM VERSION 287 EEPROM version Can be monitored only - - 9-26

INVERTER TYPEFORM 288 Inverter typeform Can be monitored only - - 9-26

STATUS MONITOR #1 289 Programmable monitor #1 1: post-compensation - 2 9-27

DISPLAY SELECT (displayed in MON mode) output frequency
2: frequency
command setting
3: output current
4: input voltage
5: output voltage
6: torque current
7: excitation current
8: PID feedback value
9: motor overload
ratio
10:inverter overload
ratio
11:DBR overload ratio
12:input power
13:output power
14:RR input value
15:peak load current
16:peak input voltage

STATUS MONITOR #2 290 Programmable monitor #2 Same options as - 3 9-27

DISPLAY SELECT (displayed in MON mode) Item 289

STATUS MONITOR #3 291 Programmable monitor #3 Same options as - 4 9-27

DISPLAY SELECT (displayed in MON mode) Item 289

STATUS MONITOR #4 292 Programmable monitor #4 Same options as 5 9-27

DISPLAY SELECT (displayed in MON mode) Item 289

FREQUENCY UNITS 293 multiplier to scale Hz display 0 (Off), 0.01 - 200 0.01 0.00 9-27
SCALE FACTOR

FREQUENCY DISPLAY 294 Frequency display resolution 0: 1 Hz - 1 9-27

RESOLUTION 1: 0.1 Hz
2: 0.01 Hz

ACC/DEC TIME UNITS 295 ACC/DEC time units selection 0: 0.1 secs- 0 9-27
SELECTION 1: 0.01 secs

CURRENT UNITS 296 Current units selection 0: % - 0 9-27

SELECTION 1: A

VOLTAGE UNITS 297 Voltage units selection 0: % - 1 9-27

SELECTION 1: V

Table continued on next page

8 - 30
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS (cont'd)

LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE SETTING NO.

BLIND FUNCTION 298 Blind function selection 0: Items 299-315 blinded 0 9-27
SELECTION 1: View Items 299-315

FUNDAMENTAL 299* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind this group 0 9-27
PARAMS #2 BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

PANEL CONTROL PARAMS 300* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind this group 0 9-28
BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visiblegroup list

TERMINAL SELECTION 301* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind this group 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

SPECIAL CONTROL 302* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind this group 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

FREQUENCY SETTING 303* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind this group 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

PROTECTION FUNCTION 304* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28

PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

PATTERN RUN CONTROL 305* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

FEEDBACK CONTROL 306* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28

PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

COMMUNICATION PARAMS 307* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28

BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: PUMP 308* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: FAN 309* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28
PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: 310* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28

CONVEYOR BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: 311* Thsi group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-28

HOIST BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: 312* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-29

TEXTILES BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

INDUSTRIAL APPL: 313* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-29

TOOLS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

AM/FM ADJUSTMENT 314* This group must be unblinded to 0:Blind 0 9-29

PARAMS BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

MOTOR PARAMETERS 315* This group must be unblinded to 0: Blind 0 9-29

BLIND access group's parameters 1: Add this group to visible group list

*Items 299 - 315 are available only when Item 298 Adjustment Range option 1 is selected.

600 volt G3s have an additional group, GROUP:TRAVERSE CONTROL PARAMETERS that is unblinded
via the parameter TRAVERSE CONTROL PARAMS UNBLIND. See Traverse Option ROM Instruction
Manual for more information.

8 - 31
 TOSHIBA

GROUP:MOTOR PARAMETERS
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY ITEM PARAMETER ADJUSTMENT DISPLAY FACTORY PAGE
NO. DESCRIPTION RANGE RESOLUTION SETTING NO.

NUMBER OF MOTOR 316 Number of motor poles 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 2 4 9-29
POLES 16

MOTOR RATED CAPACITY 317 Motor rated capacity 0.1 - 999.9 0.1kW * 9-29

MOTOR TYPE 318 Motor type 0: High efficiency - 0 9-29

motor
1: Standard motor
2: Other**

MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE 319** Rated voltage for 400V inverter 90 - 600 5V 400 9-29
Rated voltage for 200V inverter 90 - 600 5V 200 9-29
Rated voltage for 600V inverter 130 - 860 5V 575 9-29

MOTOR RATED 320** Rated frequency 0 - 400 2 Hz 60 9-29

FREQUENCY

MOTOR RATED RPM 321** Rated RPM 0 - 9999 1 RPM 1710 9-29

AUTO-TUNING ENABLE 322** Auto-tuning *** 0: Auto-tuning - 0 9-29

disabled
1: Auto-tuning
enabled

LOAD MOMENT OF 323 Load moment of inertia 0: Small - 1 9-29

INERTIA 1: Medium
2: Large
3: Very large

*Item 317 factory setting depends on inverter rating (1 HP = .746kW)

**Items 319 - 322 are available only when Item 318 Adjustment Range option 2 is selected.
***Inverters sized 150 HP and larger cannot be auto-tuned.

8 - 32
 TOSHIBA
Parameter Tree

Fundamental Fundamental Parameters Panel Control Parameters Special Control Terminal Selection Terminal Selection Frequency Setting Frequency Setting
Parameters #1 #2 Parameters Parameters Parameters (continued) Parameters Parameters (continued)

1 15 25 31 43 62 80 100
Maximum Output Base Frequency #2 Direction Selection Start up Frequency Input Terminal "RCH" Contacts Hold Frequency Priority PG Ref Point #1
Frequency Forward/Rev Selection Time Selection #1 Frequency

2 16 26 32 44 63 81 101
Base Frequency #1 Maximum Output Stop Pattern Selection End Frequency "R" Input Terminal "Low" Contacts Frequency Priority PG Reference Setting
Voltage #2 Function Function Selection #2 Point #2

3 17 27 33 45 64 82 102
Base Frequency Voltage Boost #2 Fundamental Param Run Frequency "S1" Input Terminal "Low" Contacts Delay Analog Input Filter PG Ref Point #2
Voltage Select Switching Function Time Frequency

4 18 28 34 46 65 83 103
Maximum Output Electronic Thermal Accel/Decel #1/#2 Run Frequency "S2" Input Terminal "Low" Contacts Hold RR Terminal Standard Binary Input Std. or
Voltage #1 Protect LVL #2 Selection Hysteresis Function Time or Adjust. Adjustable

5 19 29 35 47 66 84 104
Reverse Operation Stall Protection Panel Reset Selection Enable jump "S3" Input Terminal "FL" Contacts Function RR Reference Setting Binary Ref Setting
Disable Select Selection #2 Frequencies Function Point #1 Point #1

6 20 30 36 48 67 85 105
Upper Limit Freq. Stall Protection Level Panel Feedback Jump Frequency #1 "S4" Input Terminal "FL" Contacts Delay RR Ref Point #1 Binary Ref Point #1
#2 Control Function Time Frequency Frequency

7 21 37 49 68 86 106
Lower Limit Freq. Acceleration Time #2 Jump Frequency #1 "F" Input Terminal "FL" Contacts Hold RR reference Setting Binary Ref Setting
Bandwidth Function Time Point #2 point #2

8 22 38 50 69 87 107
Volts per hertz Pattern Deceleration Time #2 Jump Frequency #2 "RES" Input Terminal "OUT" Contacts RR Ref Point #2 Binary Ref Point #2
Function Function Frequency Frequency

9 23 39 51 70 88 108
Voltage Boost #1 Acc/Dec Pattern #2 Jump Frequency #2 "ST" Input Terminal "OUT" Contacts Delay IV Terminal Standard Jog Run Frequency
Bandwidth Function Time or Adj.

10 24 40 52 71 89 109
Acceleration Time #1 Acc/Dec #1/#2 Switch Jump Frequency #3 "S5" Input Terminal "OUT" Contacts Hold IV Reference Setting Jog Stop Method
Frequency Function Time Point #1

11 41 53 72 90 110
Deceleration Time #1 Jump Frequency #3 "S6" Input Terminal Low Speed Signal IV Ref Point #1 Preset Speed
Bandwidth Function Output Freq Frequency Selection

12 42 54 73 91 111
Acc/Dec Pattern #1 PWM Carrier "S7" Input Terminal Acc/Dec Complete IV Reference Setting Preset Speed Mode
Selection Frequency Function Detect Band Point #2 Activation

13 55 74 92 112
Accel/Decel Pattern Potential Terminal Speed Reach Max. IV Ref Point #2 Preset Speed #1
Adjust Low Function Frequency Frequency Frequency

14 56 75 93 113
Accel/Decel Pattern R, S1-S7 Terminal Speed Reach Min. RX Terminal Standard Preset Speed #1
Adjust High Response Time Frequency or Adjust. Operating Mode

57 76 94 114
"F" Input Terminal Commercial Power Inv RX Reference Setting Preset Speed #2
Response Time Switch Output Point #1 Frequency

58 77 95 115
"RES" Terminal Commercial Pwr / Inv RX Ref Point #1 Preset Speed #2
Response Time Switch Freq Frequency Operating Mode

LEGEND FOR PARAMETER TREE 59 78 96 116-139

"ST" Input Terminal "FP" Output Terminal RX Reference Setting Preset Speeds 3-14
Response Time Pulse Freq. Point #2 Oper. Modes #3-14
Unblinded Group Blinded Group
60 79 97 140
Item # Item # "RCH" Contacts RR Input Special RX Ref Point #2 Preset Speed #15
Function Function Select Frequency Frequency
Unblinded Parameter Blinded Parameter

61 98 141
"RCH" Contacts Delay PG Terminal Standard Preset Speed #15
600 V G3s HAVE ANOTHER GROUP NOT COVERED IN THIS MANUAL
Time or Adjust. Operating Mode

99
PG Reference Setting
Point #1

8 - 33
 TOSHIBA
Parameter Tree (cont'd)

Protection Parameters Protection Parameters Pattern Run Control Feedback Parameters Communication Setting AM/FM Terminal Utility Parameters Utility Parameters Motor Parameters
(Continued) Parameters Parameters Adjustment Parameters (Continued)

142 160 175 243 260 275 279 296 316

Dynamic Braking Motor 150% Overload Pattern Run Selection Feedback Control RS232 Baud Rate FM Terminal Function Industrial Applications Current Units Selection Number of Motor Poles
Selection Time Limit Selection Selection

143 161 176 244 261 276 280 297 317

Branking Resistor Overload Selection Pattern Run Continue Feedback Input Signal Number of Data Bits Frequency Meter Standard Setting Mode Voltage Units Motor Rated Capacity
Value Mode Selection Adjustment Selection Selection

144 162 177-184 245 262 277 281 298 318

Braking Resistor Stall Protection Enable Pattern Group #1 Proportional Gain Parity Setting AM Terminal Function Command Mode Blind Function Motor Type
Power Rating Speeds #0 - #7 Selection Selection Selection

145 163 185 246 263 278 282 299 319

Overvoltage Stall Stall Protection Pattern Group #1 Integral Gain Inverter ID Number Current Meter Frequency Mode Fundamental Motor Rated Voltage
Protection Current Level Number of Cycles Adjustment Selection Parameters #2 Blind

146 164 186-193 247 264 283 300 320

DC Injection Start Undervoltage Trip Pattern Group #2 Anti Hunting Gain Communication Panel Operation Mode Panel Control Motor Rated
Frequency Selection Speeds #0 - #7 Selection Selection Parameters Blind Frequency

147 165 194 248 265 284 301 321

DC Injection Current Undervoltage Detect Pattern Group #3 Lag Time Constant Master/Slave Selection Pass Number Terminal Selection Motor Rated RPM
Magnitute Time Number of Cycles Parameters Blind

148 166 195-202 249 266 285 302 322

DC Injection Time Low Current Detect Pattern Group #3 PID Lower Frequency RS485 Baud Rate CPU Version Special Control Auto-Tuning Enable
Selection Speeds #0 - #7 Limit Params Blind

149 167 203 250 267 286 303 323

Fwd/Rev DC Inj. Low Current Detect Pattern Group #3 PID Deviation Limit TOSLINE F10/S20 ROM Version Frequency Setting Load Moment of Inertia
Priority control Level Number of Cycles Selection Command Input Params Blind

150 168 204-211 251 268 287 304

Motor Shaft stationary Low Current Detection Pattern Group #4 PID Deviation Upper TOSLINE F10/S20 EEPROM Version Protection Function
control Time Speeds #0 - #7 Limit Monitor Output Params Blind

151 169 212 252 269 288 305

Emergency Off Mode Output Short Circuit Pattern Group #4 PID Deviation Lower TOSLINE F10/S20 Inverter TypeForm Pattern Run Control
Selection Detection Select Number of Cycles limit Comm Error Mode Params Blind

152 170 213 253 270 289 306

Emergency Off DC Overtorque Trip Speed #1 Continue PG Input Number of RS485/12-Bit Binary Status Monitor #1 Feedback Control
Injection Time Selection Mode Pulses Bias, Gain Display Select Params Blind

153 171 214 254 271 290 307

Number of Retry Overtorque Trip Level Speed #1 Drive Time PG Input Number of RS485/12-Bit Binary Status Monitor #2 Communication
Attempts Phases point #1 display Select Params Blind

154 172 215-242 255 272 291 308

Time Between Retry Fault Trip EEPROM Speeds 2 - 15 Drive Drooping Control RS485/12-Bit Binary Status Monitor #3 Industrial Appl: Pump
Attempts Save Enable Time Enable pt. #1 Freq Display Select Params Blind

155 173 215 - 242 256 273 292 309

Regeneration Power Cooling Fan Control Speeds 2-15 Continue Drooping Control RS485/12-Bit Binary Status Monitor #4 Industrial Appl: Fan
Ride Through Selection mode Amount point #2 Display Select Params Blind

156 174 257 274 293 310

Regeneration Ride Cumulative Run Timer Override Control RS485/12-Bit Binary Frequency Units Scale Industrial Appl:
Through time Alarm Setting Selection pt. #2 Freq Factor Conveyor Blind

157 258 294 311

Auto-restart (motor Override Multiplier Frequency Display Industrial Appl: Hoist
speed search) Input Selection Resolution Blind

158 259 295 312

Electronic Thermal Override Change ACC/DEC Time Units Industrial Appl:
Protect Level 1 Multiplier Selection Textiles Blind

159 313
Overload Reduction Industrial Appl: Tools
Start Freq. Blind

314
AM/FM Adjustment
Params Blind

315
Motor Parameters
Blind

8 - 34
 TOSHIBA
SECTION 9: Programming
Note: The G3 will "kick out" of programming mode (return to OUTPUT FREQUENCY display) when a
parameter name is displayed for fourteen seconds after the previous parameter has been read and
written.

Press the PRG button to access the G3's programming mode. The drive now displays the first of the
available groups. The G3 parameters that have related functions are gathered into families called groups.
Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the available group list.

Groups
With factory default programming, the G3 displays only three groups:
GROUP: PARAMETERS CHANGED FROM FACTORY DEFAULT
GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
GROUP: UTILITY PARAMETERS

The following is a list of all G3 groups:

GROUP: PARAMETERS CHANGED FROM FACTORY DEFAULT
GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2
GROUP: PANEL CONTROL PARAMETERS
GROUP: SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS
GROUP: TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS
GROUP: FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS
GROUP: PROTECTION PARAMETERS
GROUP: PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS
GROUP: FEEDBACK PARAMETERS
GROUP: COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (PUMP)
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (FAN)
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (CONVEYOR)
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (HOIST)
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (TEXTILES)
GROUP: INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION PARAMETERS (MACHINE TOOLS)
GROUP: AM/FM TERMINAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMETERS
GROUP: UTILITY PARAMETERS
GROUP: MOTOR PARAMETERS

600 volt G3s have another group for traverse control; see the traverse control ROM manual for
information on using this group. A flowchart showing all groups and parameters can be found on
pages 8-33 and 8-34. Item numbers are included for reference within the manual only; the drive
does not recognize or display item numbers.

Programming Example 1
Objective: Set ACCELERATION TIME #1 to 23.4 seconds.
Step 1: ACCELERATION TIME #1 (Item 10) is in GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1,
so press the PRG key and use the up/down arrows to scroll through the group list until
GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 is displayed.
Step 2: Press the READ/WRITE key. Drive will then display MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
(Item 1), because MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY is the first parameter in
GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1.
Step 3: Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the parameters in GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL
PARAMETERS #1 until the desired parameter (in this case, ACCELERATION TIME #1),
is displayed.
Step 4: Press the READ/WRITE key. Drive will display the value stored in this parameter.
Step 5: Adjust displayed value with up/down arrow keys. Press READ/WRITE when finished.
Drive flashes WRT to confirm entry.
Step 6: Use up/down arrows to select another parameter in this group, or press PRG to exit.

9-1
 TOSHIBA

Blinding
To make the G3's many parameters more manageable, Toshiba employs "blinded" parameters
and "blinded" groups.

BLINDED PARAMETERS
Item 9, VOLTAGE BOOST #1, is an example of a "blinded" parameter. A blinded parameter is
identified in the parameter charts (which start on page 8-1) by its gray shading. A "blinded"
parameter is preceded by a parameter that has a shaded choice in the Adjustment Range column
(like Item 8, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN). Item 9, VOLTAGE BOOST #1, is visible to the
programmer only if item 8, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN, is set to "1" or "2". Note how
Adjustment Range 1 and 2 are shaded to indicate this. There are many other blinded parameters
in the G3.

BLINDED GROUPS
Of the twenty groups in the G3 (21 for 600V drive), only three are accessible when the drive is
programmed with factory defaults. To adjust a parameter that is not in one of the three visible
groups, that parameter's group must first be added to the group list. This is done in GROUP:
UTILITY PARAMETERS, which is one of the visible groups.

Programming Example 2
Objective: Change ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL 1 in GROUP: PROTECTION
PARAMETERS to 89%.
Note 1: ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL 1 is in a group that is not one of the three
groups visible when the drive is programmed with factory defaults. Therefore, GROUP:
PROTECTION PARAMETERS will have to be added to the visible group list.
Note 2: GROUP: PROTECTION PARAMETERS is added to the visible group list by changing item
304, PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMETERS BLIND in GROUP: UTILITY
PARAMETERS to "1". To change item 304, however, it must first be unblinded by setting
Item 298, BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION in GROUP: UTILITY PARAMETERS to "1".
Step 1: Press PRG and use up arrow to display GROUP: UTILITY PARAMETERS. Press READ/
WRITE key. Drive will display INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS because it is the first
parameter in the group.
Step 2: Instead of using the down arrow to go through all the parameters in GROUP: UTILITY
PARAMETERS, use the up arrow to make the drive display the last visible parameter in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS, which is item 298, BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION.
Step 3: Press READ/WRITE and adjust the "0" to a "1" using the arrow keys. Press READ/
WRITE again. Drive flashes WRT to confirm entry.
Step 4: Items 299-315 are now unblinded. Use the down arrow to display PROTECTION
FUNCTION PARAMETERS BLIND. Press READ/WRITE, use the up arrow to change the
"0" to a "1", and press READ/WRITE again. Drive flashes WRT to confirm entry.
Step 5: Press PRG twice to return to the group list. Use the arrows to verify that a fourth group,
GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS is now a part of the group list.
Step 6: Press READ/WRITE to enter the group. Drive will display Item 142, DYNAMIC BRAKING
SELECTION because that parameter is the first in the group.
Step 7: Use the down arrow to reach Item 158, ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL 1.
Step 8: Press READ/WRITE. Using the arrows, adjust the value to "89". Press READ/WRT. Drive
flashes WRT to confirm entry.
Step 9: Press PRG to leave programming.

Search Function
When GROUP: PARAMETERS CHANGED FROM FACTORY DEFAULT is displayed and READ/
WRITE is pressed, the drive will display SEARCHING. Any displayed parameters have been
changed to a value different from Toshiba's default. Press READ/WRITE to see the value of the
parameter. The parameter can be modified with the up/down arrows. Pressing READ/WRITE
again resumes the drive's search.

9-2
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations

GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 and GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS # 2 allow the

user to store unique V/Hz, accel/decel, etc. parameters for two motors to be operated on one drive at
different times.

Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY - This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running,
and affects accel/decel times, binary frequency references, and many other parameters and functions. To
limit the drive's ouput frequency range, adjust UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY and/or LOWER LIMIT
FREQUENCY (see Items 6 and 7 below).

Item 2, BASE FREQUENCY #1 - This parameter sets the frequency at which the drive's output voltage
reaches its maximum.

Item 3, BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE SELECTION - The parameter affects the drive's maximum output
voltage as follows:
0: The output voltage fluctuates with the input voltage.
1: The output voltage is set according to the input voltage when the drive is first powered.
2: The output voltage is set by Item 4, MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #1.

Item 4, MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #1 - This parameter sets the drive's maximum output voltage. The
output voltage cannot exceed the input voltage.

Item 5, REVERSE DISABLE OPERATION SELECTION - The G3 will not run in reverse with this
parameter set to '1'.

Item 6, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY - This parameter sets the maximum frequency the G3 will output,
regardless of reference.

Item 7, LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY - This parameter sets the lowest speed the drive can run, regard-
less of reference. If this parameter is set to a non-zero value and the drive is given a run command (i.e.
F-CC closure or RUN button), the drive will run at LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY if the reference is less
than LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY.

Item 8, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN - This parameter cannot be changed while the motor is running.
The value here sets the way the output voltage changes with output frequency:
1: Constant torque: Drive varies its output voltage linearly with its output hertz change (at 30 Hz,
output voltage is approximately half of what it is at 60 Hz).
2: Variable torque: Drive varies its output voltage as the square of its output hertz change (at 30
Hz, ouput voltage is approximately 1/4 of what it is was at 60 Hz).
3: Automatic torque boost: Drive increases its output voltage at low output Hz to increase motor
starting torque.
4: Automatic torque boost with energy saving feature: Same as number 3 above, but drive lowers
output voltage during lightly-loaded periods (reduces idle amps).
5: True torque control: Drive maximizes torque developed by motor and compensates for
motor slip. Item 298, BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION and Item 315, MOTOR PARAMETERS
BLIND, must also be set to "1" so that GROUP:MOTOR PARAMETERS can be adjusted (see
page 8-31).
6: True torque control with energy saving feature: Same as number 5 above, but drive lowers
output voltage during lightly-loaded periods (reduces idle amps).

9-3
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 9, VOLTAGE BOOST #1 - This parameter increases output voltage at low Hz to enable a motor
operated in constant or variable torque modes to develop more starting torque. Too much voltage boost
could result in an overcurrent trip.

Item 10, ACCELERATION TIME #1 (AT#1)

AT#1 sets the time for drive output frequency to go from 0 Hz to MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
(Item 1). A small acceleration time may result in an overcurrent trip.

Item 11, DECELERATION TIME #1 (DT#1)

This parameter sets the time for drive output frequency to go from MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
(Item 1) to 0 Hz. A small deceleration time may result in an overvoltage trip.

Item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN #1

This value determines the way the drive's output frequency varies with time during an accel or decel as
follows:
0: Linear pattern - Drive's output frequency change is linear with respect to time. For example, if
the G3's output goes from 0 to 30 Hz in 5 seconds, it will take 10 seconds to go from 0 to 60 Hz.

1: Self-adjusting - Drive changes value in AT#1 and DT#1 based on current during accel and bus
voltage during decel to prevent overcurrent/overvoltage trips. Every time a run/stop is executed,
the G3 changes existing data in AT#1 and DT#1 (RAM). Drive may require a few run/stop
commands to optimize value. To store modified AT#1 and DT#1 values, read value in AT#1 and
DT#1 then press READ/WRITE to write values into memory (EEPROM).

2: S pattern - Drive output frequency's rate of change is slow near beginning and end of accel/
decel.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
OUTPUT HZ

commanded frequency

TIME
* AT#1 **
***
* S pattern accel time contributed by Item 13, ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST LOW
** S pattern accel time contributed by Item 14, ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST HIGH
*** Total S pattern accel time
Drive follows similar curve during decel.

3: Overspeed pattern - When outputting a frequency greater than the motor's base frequency,
drive extends accel/decel time to reduce possibility of overload trip due to reduction in torque.

MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY

OUTPUT HZ

commanded frequency

BASE FREQUENCY #1

AT#1 TIME

****
**** Actual accel time

9-4
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 13, ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST LOW - expressed as a percentage of Item 10, this time is
represented as "*" in the graph of S Pattern for Item 12.

Item 14, ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST HIGH - expressed as a percentage of Item 10, this time is
represented as "**" in the graph of S Pattern for Item 12.

Note for GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2

The parameters in this group are similar to those found in GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1.
These two groups allow the user to program the drive for operation with two different motors (only one
motor connected to drive at a time). The user can determine if GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
or if GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2 is active by setting Item 27, FUNDAMENTAL PARAM
SWITCHING as desired or by setting one of the drive's input terminal's function to "12" and opening/closing
that terminal to the CC terminal. The user can also determine if ACCELERATION TIME #1/DECELERA-
TION TIME #1 or ACCELERATION TIME #2/DECELERATION TIME #2 is active by setting Item 28,
ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 SELECTION or by setting one of the drive's input terminal's functions to "9" and
opening/closing that terminal to the CC terminal. See page 9-7 for more information on programming the
input terminals.

Item 15, BASE FREQUENCY #2 - see item 2, BASE FREQUENCY #1

Item 16, MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #2 - see item 4, MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #1

Item 17, VOLTAGE BOOST #2 - see item 9, VOLTAGE BOOST #1

Item 18, ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL #2 - This parameter lowers the drive's overload to
protect the motor. Divide motor full-load amps by drive full-load amps and multiply by one hundred. Enter
the result in this parameter. Input in amps with item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION, is set to "1".

Item 19, STALL PROTECTION SELECTION #2 - Stall is a drive function wherein the drive limits the
motor current by reducing output voltage and frequency in an effort to reduce load. Stall is most effective
on variable torque loads. This parameter turns stall off/on.

Item 20, STALL PROTECTION LEVEL #2 - Enter the current limit in amps or in percent of drive rating.
See Item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION, to change units from % to amps.

Item 21, ACCELERATION TIME #2 - see item 10, ACCELERATION TIME #1

Item 22, DECELERATION TIME #2 - see item 11, DECELERATION TIME #1

Item 23, ACC/DEC PATTERN #2 SELECTION - see item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION

Item 24, ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCHING FREQUENCY - The drive can be programmed to switch from
accel/decel time #1 to accel/decel time #2 based on output frequency. Enter the Hz at which the drive
should switch from accel/decel time #1 to accel/decel time #2.

Item 25, DIRECTION SELECTION (FORWARD/REVERSE) - This parameter determines direction when
commanding start/stop from keypad. Direction can also be changed from the keypad by pressing READ/
WRITE and the up or down arrow simultaneously (with Item 25 set to "1").

Item 26, STOP PATTERN SELECTION - This parameter determines whether the drive follows the decel
curve when the STOP button is pressed or if it performs a coast-stop. Coast stop is also performed when
ST-CC is broken.

Item 27, FUNDAMENTAL PARAM SWITCHING - This parameter determines whether GROUP:
FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 or GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2 is used.

9-5
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 28, ACC/DEC #1 OR #2 SELECTION - If the keypad is being used for the RUN/STOP command,
then change this parameter to choose which times and pattern are currently utilized. If the drive is getting
a run/stop command via the terminal strip (i.e. "F"-"CC" made or "R"-"CC" made), the user can remotely
choose which accel/decel is used by the drive by programming one of the input terminal's functions (see
items 44-54) to a value of "9" and then closing this terminal to "CC" when acc/dec #2 is to be used. See
item 24, ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCH FREQUENCY to change which acc/dec time is used based on drive's
output Hz.

Item 29, PANEL RESET SELECTION - Use this parameter to limit the type of fault that can be manually
reset from the panel:
0: Overcurrents, overloads, overvoltages, and overheat
1: Only overload faults
2: Only overload and overcurrent faults

Item 30, PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL - Turns feedback on/off when stop/starting from keypad."0" allows
keypad to set setpoint. "1" turns feedback off, letting keypad act as a regular frequency referrence.

Item 31, START-UP FREQUENCY - Drive's output frequency remains at 0 Hz until reference commands an
output frequency greater than START-UP FREQUENCY. When the reference is great enough, drive
immediately outputs commanded frequency (no accel ramp).

Item 32, END FREQUENCY - Drive's output frequency immediately goes to 0 Hz (no decel ramp) when
reference commands an output frequency less than or equal to END FREQUENCY.

Item 33, RUN FREQUENCY (Frun) - Use in conjunction with item 34, below. This parameter is the center of
the hysteresis band.

Item 34, RUN FREQUENCY HYSTERESIS (Fhys) - Use this parameter as a +/- bandwidth around RUN
FREQUENCY. When the reference signal reaches a value that commands a frequency of Frun+Fhys, the
drive's output frequency will ramp up to the corresponding frequency. The G3 will continue to follow the
reference until the frequency it is commanding falls below Frun-Fhys, at which time the drive will decel to 0
Hz.

Items 33 and 34 are not effective when PID control is operating.

HYSTERESIS CHARACTERISTIC
OUTPUT FREQUENCY

Frun + Fhys
Start
Frun
Frun - Fhys
Stop

0 100%
FREQUENCY REFERENCE

Item 35 JUMP FREQUENCY ENABLE - This parameters allows the programming of "Jump Frequencies",
which are bands of output frequencies the drive will not continuously output. The drive allows the user to
program up to three separate frequencies along with a bandwidth for each.

Item 36 JUMP FREQUENCY #1 - Enter the jump frequency.

9-6
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 37 JUMP FREQUENCY BAND #1 - Enter the bandwidth for JUMP FREQUENCY #1. The value
entered here will be added to and subtracted from JUMP FREQUENCY #1 to determine the upper and
lower frequencies of the deadband.

Item 38 JUMP FREQUENCY #2 - see item 36.

Item 39 JUMP FREQUENCY BAND #2 - see item 37.

Item 40 JUMP FREQUENCY #3 - see item 36.

Item 41 JUMP FREQUENCY BAND #3 - see item 37.

Example of Jump Frequency:

Suppose JUMP FREQUENCY #1 is set to 30 Hz and JUMP FREQUENCY BAND #1 is set to 5 Hz.
Suppose a frequency reference starts commanding 0 Hz and slowly increases. The drive's output
frequency slowly increases. When the reference hits a level that is commanding 25 Hz (30 - 5 Hz),
the drive's output frequency stays at 25 Hz even though the reference continues to increase.
When the reference hits a level that commands 35 Hz (30+5 Hz), the drive accelerates (using the
selected acceleration time) from 25 Hz to 35 Hz and continues to increase as the reference
increases. During a decel, the drive will "stick" at 35 Hz until the reference hits a level that
commands 25 Hz, at which time the drive decelerates (using the selected decel time) from 35 Hz
to 25Hz, and resumes following the reference.

Item 42 PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY - Use this function to change the frequency of the motor's acoustic
noise. Above 8 KHz, the drive derates its current capability (100 HP and smaller).

Item 43 INPUT TERMINAL SELECTION - With this parameter set to "0", the drive's input terminals, when
shorted to "CC", have the following default functions:"R" terminal gives reverse run command, "F" terminal
gives forward run command, "RES" terminal resets a fault, "ST" terminal enables drive, "S1", "S2", "S3",
and "S4" terminals give preset speed references. The user has the option of changing the function as-
signed to any of the G3's input terminals by programming a "1" into item 43 and programming the following
parameters as necessary.

Item 44, "R" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "R" terminal is shorted
to "CC". Default setting gives a reverse run command. See page 9-9 for codes for other available
functions.

Item 45, "S1" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S1" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a preset speed reference. See page 9-9 for codes for other available
functions.

Item 46, "S2" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S2" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a preset speed reference. See page 9-9 for codes for other available
functions.

Item 47, "S3" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S3" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a preset speed reference. See page 9-9 for codes for other available
functions.

Item 48, "S4" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S4" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a preset speed reference. See page 9-9 for codes for other available
functions.

Item 49, "F" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "F" terminal is shorted
to "CC". Default setting gives a forward run command. See page 9-9 for codes for other available

9-7
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 50, "RES" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "RES" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting resets a fault. See page 9-9 for codes for other available functions.

Item 51, "ST" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "ST" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting enables the drive. See page 9-9 for codes for other available functions.

Item 52, "S5" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S5" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a binary speed reference bit. The "S5" terminal is available on the
option boards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. See page 9-9 for codes for other available functions.

Item 53, "S6" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S6" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a binary speed reference bit. The "S6" terminal is available on the
option boards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. See page 9-9 for codes for other available functions.

Item 54, "S7" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION - sets the function realized when the "S7" terminal is
shorted to "CC". Default setting gives a binary speed reference bit. The "S7" terminal is available on the
option boards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. See page 9-9 for codes for other available functions.

Item 55, POTENTIAL TERMINAL FUNCTION - The potential terminal is an imaginary terminal that the
drive considers always shorted to "CC". Any function code from page 9-9 entered here will always be
active. For example, if a value of "10" is programmed here, the drive will always ESTOP

Notes on input terminals' functions:

1. If the same function is assigned to more than one input terminal, 'OR' logic is in effect.
2. If none of the input terminals' function is set to "7" (enable), the drive will assume the drive
enabled (just like ST-CC is made).

9-8
 TOSHIBA
Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

The following are the functions that are realized when the appropriate G3 terminal is shorted to "CC".
Program the desired code from the list below into items 44-55 (see). Contact the factory on how to
make a function active when the terminal is disconnected from "CC" (fail-safe).

Code Function
0 Reverse direction command (default for "R" terminal function)
1 Binary coding for number of preset speed desired. Value: +1 (default for "S1" terminal function)
2 Binary coding for number of preset speed desired. Value: +2 (default for "S2" terminal function)
3 Binary coding for number of preset speed desired. Value: +4 (default for "S3" terminal function)
4 Binary coding for number of preset speed desired. Value: +8 (default for "S4" terminal function)
5 Forward direction command (default for "F" terminal function)
6 Reset faults (momentary falling-edge trigger) (default for "RES" terminal function)
7 Drive enable (default for "ST" terminal function)
8 Jog (also need direction command). See items 108 and 109.
9 Select ACC1/DEC1 (open) or ACC2/DEC2 (closed to "CC")
10 Emergency stop. Also see item 151, EMERGENCY OFF MODE SELECTION.
11 DC injection. When outputting a frequency under DC INJECTION START FREQUENCY, short
terminal to "CC" to inject. Also see items 146, 147, and 148. Works in remote mode only.
12 Activate GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 (open) or GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL
PARAMETERS #2 (closed to "CC")
13 PID off (closed to "CC") or on (open)
14 Select Pattern Run #1
15 Select Pattern Run #2
16 Select Pattern Run #3
17 Select Pattern Run #4
18 Pattern Run continue signal
19 Pattern Run step signal
20 Jog forward (includes forward command). See items 108 and 109.
21 Jog reverse (includes reverse command). See items 108 and 109.
22 Bit #0 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/2048)
23 Bit #1 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/1024)
24 Bit #2 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/512)
25 Bit #3 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/256)
26 Bit #4 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/128)
27 Bit #5 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/64)
28 Bit #6 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/32)
29 Bit #7 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/16)
30 Bit #8 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/8)
31 Bit #9 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/4)
32 Bit #10 for binary speed reference (value of MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY/2)
33 no function (use terminal to connect wires)
34 Motor operated pot: increase frequency reference
35 Motor operated pot: decrease frequency reference
36 Motor operated pot: clear frequency reference
37 Three wire control: NO momentary start push button
38 Three wire control: NO momentary stop push button. Contact factory for information on how to
realize stop with a NC contact.
40 Forward (open) or reverse (closed to "CC") command
41 Run (use in conjunction with 40 above)
42 Binary data write (use with 22-32 above). If no input terminal's function is set to "42", the drive
responds immediately to binary references commanded by changing data bits. If one of the input
terminal's function is set to "42", the drive responds to binary reference only when terminal is
closed to "CC". Binary reference is lost when power is cycled.
43 emulate LOCAL/REMOTE key
51 Drive/bypass switching signal
53 give "RR" priority over "IV" and "RX"
54 give "IV" priority over "RR" and "RX"
9-9
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 56, R,S1-S7 RESPONSE TIME - Use this function to adjust the time between an input terminal's
connection to "CC" and its function's realization. A setting of "100" results in a delay of about 200
milliseconds.

Item 57, "F" INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME - Use this function to adjust the time between an
input terminal's connection to "CC" and its function's realization. A setting of "100" results in a delay of
about 200 milliseconds.

Item 58, "RES" INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME - Use this function to adjust the time between an
input terminal's connection to "CC" and its function's realization. A setting of "100" results in a delay of
about 200 milliseconds.

Item 59, "ST" INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME - Use this function to adjust the time between an
input terminal's connection to "CC" and its function's realization. A setting of "100" results in a delay of
about 200 milliseconds.

Item 60, "RCH" CONTACTS FUNCTION - Enter the code from the table on pages 9-11 and 9-12 to
determine when drive will change the state of this dry output contact. Terminals "RCHA" and "RCHB" are
either side of the contact.

Item 61, "RCH" CONTACTS DELAY TIME - sets the delay between the time the drive senses a desired
condition and the time at which a change in "RCH" contact indicating this condition occurs. Maximum
adjustment of "100" is approximately 200 milliseconds.

Item 62, "RCH" CONTACTS HOLD TIME - Example: Suppose drive is programmed to close "RCH"
contact when it is outputting more than 30 Hz. When the drive's output frequency dips below 30 Hz, the
contact will immediately open. Adjusting this parameter to "100" would keep the "RCH" contact closed (i.e.
"RCHA" to "RCHB" shorted) for an additional 200 milliseconds after the drive outputted less than 30 Hz.

Item 63, "LOW" CONTACTS FUNCTION - See item 60 above.

Item 64, "LOW" CONTACTS DELAY TIME - See item 61 above.

Item 65, "LOW" CONTACTS HOLD TIME - See item 62 above.

Item 66, "FL" CONTACTS FUNCTION - See item 60 above. On terminal strip, normally open contact is
between "FLA" and "FLC". Normally closed contact is between "FLB" and "FLC".

Item 67, "FL" CONTACTS DELAY TIME - See item 61 above.

Item 68, "FL" CONTACTS HOLD TIME - See item 62 above.

Item 69, "OUT" CONTACTS FUNCTION - See item 60 above. Available on INV3-COM-B and
INV3-COM-D option boards (see page 11-6 for more information).

Item 70, "OUT" CONTACTS DELAY TIME - See item 61 above.

Item 71, "OUT" CONTACTS HOLD TIME - See item 62 above.

9 - 10
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Output Contacts' Functions

Value Comments
0 Contact will close when drive is at or above Item 7, LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY
1 Contact will close when drive is not at or above LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY
2 Contacts will close when drive is at Item 6, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY
3 Contacts will close when drive is not at UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY
4 Default for LOWA/LOWC terminals. Contact will close when drive is at or above speed in Item
72, LOW SPEED SIGNAL OUTPUT FREQUENCY
5 Contact will close when drive is not at or above LOW SPEED SIGNAL OUTPUT FREQUENCY
6 Default for RCHA/RCHC terminals. Contact closes when any accel or decel is complete.
7 Contact closes when any acceleration or deceleration is not complete.
8 Contact closes when drive is at or above Item 74, SPEED REACH MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
during an accel or when drive is at or above Item 75, SPEED REACH MINIMUM FREQUENCY
during a decel
9 Contact closes when drive is not at or above SPEED REACH MAXIMUM FREQUENCY during an
accel or when drive is not at or above SPEED REACH MINIMUM FREQUENCY during a decel.
10 Default for FLA/FLB/FLC terminals. Contact closes when drive is faulted (ESTOP is not a fault)
11 Contact closes when drive is not faulted (ESTOP is not a fault)
12 Contact closes when drive is faulted on anything except EARTH FAULT or LOAD END
OVERCURRENT (ESTOP is not a fault)
13 Contact closes when drive is faulted on EARTH FAULT or LOAD END OVERCURRENT
14 Contact closes when overcurrent stall is active (use as overcurrent pre-alarm). The stall current
level is adjustable via Item 163 or Item 20 (see).
15 Contact closes when overcurrent stall is not active. The stall current level is adjustable via Item
163 or Item 20 (see).
16 Contact closes to signify inverter overload pre-alarm. Example of inverter overload: G3 is rated
for 150% of rated current for 2 minutes. If drive is operated at 150% of rated current for one
minute, the inverter overload is at 50%, or half of its overload current-time capability. The drive
trips on overload at 100%. Inverter overload pre-alarm starts at 50%.
17 Contact closes to signify inverter is not in an overload pre-alarm. See explanation for value 16
above.
18 Contact closes to signify motor overload pre-alarm. Example of overload: G3 is rated for 150%
of rated current for 2 minutes. If drive is operated at 150% of rated current for one minute, the
inverter overload is at 50%, or half of its overload current-time capability. The drive trips on
overload at 100%. Overload pre-alarm starts at 50%.
19 Contact closes to signify motor is not in an overload pre-alarm. See explanation for value 18
above.
20 Contact closes when heatsink reaches 84O C. Contact opens at 80O C after it has closed
21 Contact closes when heatsink is under 84O C. Contact closes at 80O C after it has opened
22 Contact closes when drive is displaying OVERVOLTAGE. See page 10-7.
23 Contact closes when drive is not displaying OVERVOLTAGE. See page 10-7.
24 Contact closes when drive is displaying DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE. See page 10-7.
25 Contact closes when is not displaying DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE. See page 10-7.
26 Contact closes when output current is at or greater than the current programmed into Item 167,
LOW CURRENT DETECTION LEVEL for longer than the time programmed in Item 168, LOW
CURRENT DETECTION TIME
27 Contact closes when output current is not at or greater than the current programmed into LOW
CURRENT DETECTION LEVEL for longer than the time programmed in LOW CURRENT
DETECTION TIME
28 Contact closes when torque current equals or exceeds the setting programmed into Item 171,
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL
29 Contact closes when torque current does not equal or exceed the setting programmed into
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL

Output contact functions continued on next page

9 - 11
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Ootput Contacts' Functions (con't)

Value Comments
30 Contact closes when dynamic braking resistor is half way or more into its overload as
calculated by the drive based upon the setting in Item 143, BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE and
Item 144, BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING (GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS). See
explanation of overload for Value 16 on previous page.
31 Contact closes when dynamic braking resistor is less than half way into its overload as
calculated by the drive based upon the settings in BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE and BRAKING
RESISTOR POWER RATING. See explanation of overload for Value 17 on previous page.
32 Contact closes when drive is executing an ESTOP
33 Contact closes when drive is not executing an ESTOP
34 Contact closes when drive is executing a retry
35 Contact closes when the drive is not executing a retry
36 Contact closes when drive is running a Pattern Run
37 Contact closes when drive is not running a Pattern Run
38 Contact closes when the error signal calculated by the drive’s PID equals or exceeds the value
programmed into Item 251, PID DEVIATION UPPER LIMIT or Item 252, PID DEVIATION
LOWER LIMIT (GROUP:FEEDBACK PARAMETERS)
39 Contact closes when the error signal calculated by the drive’s PID does not equal or exceed the
value programmed into PID DEVIATION UPPER LIMIT or PID DEVIATION LOWER LIMIT
40 Contact closes when drive is running at or above 0.01 Hz.
41 Contact closes when drive is not running at or above 0.01 Hz.
42 Contact closes when drive is faulted on a “severe” fault (not retryable) *
43 Contact closes when drive is not faulted on a “severe” fault *
44 Contact closes when drive is tripped on a retryable fault *
45 Contact closes when drive is not tripped on a retryable fault *
46 Auto-bypass control. Contact closes to energize coil of output contactor.
47 Opposite logic state of above
48 Auto-bypass control. Contact closes to energize coil of bypass contactor.
49 Opposite logic state of above
50 Contact closes when drive’s cooling fan(s) is on.
51 Contact closes when drive’s cooling fan(s) is not on.
52 Contact closes when drive is jogging
53 Contact closes when drive is not jogging
54 Contact closes when drive is getting RUN/STOP command from the keypad
55 Contact closes when drive is not getting RUN/STOP command from the keypad
56 Contact closes when drive run time is greater than or equal to time programmed into Item 174,
CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER ALARM SETTING (GROUP:PROTECTION PARAMETERS)
57 Contact closes when drive run time is not greater than or equal to time programmed into
CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER ALARM SETTING
58 Contact closes when drive trips on a COMMUNICATION ERROR
59 Contact closes when drive does not have a COMMUNICATION ERROR
60 Contact changes state when drive goes through 0.0 Hz to change direction. Contact is closed/
open during forward/reverse run. Contact maintains current condition at 0.0 Hz when decel is
complete after a stop command.
61 Contact changes state when drive goes through 0.0 Hz to change direction. Contact is open/
closed during forward/reverse run. Contact maintains current condition at 0.0 Hz when decel is
complete after a stop command.
62 Contact closes when drive has a run command and ST-CC is made
63 Contact closes when drive does not have a run command

* Retryable faults include:

OVERCURRENT(ACCEL), OVERCURRENT(DECEL), OVERCURRENT(RUN), DC OVERCURENT(ACC), DC
OVERCURRENT (DEC), DC OVERCURRENT(RUN), OVERVOLTAGE(ACCEL), OVERVOLTAGE(DECEL),
OVERVOLTAGE(RUN), OVERHEAT, MOTOR OVERLOAD, INVERTER OVERLOAD, DBR OVERLOAD TRIP

9 - 12
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 72, LOW SPEED SIGNAL OUTPUT FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the frequency above
which one of the drive's output contacts (RCHA-RCHC, etc) changes state. See Item 60, 63, and 66.

Item 73, ACC/DEC COMPLETE DETECT BAND - If one of the output contacts' function is set to "6"
(accel/decel complete), use this parameter to operate the contact when the output frequency is within this
bandwidth (minus during accel, plus during decel) of the frequency command.

Item 74, SPEED REACH MAXIMUM FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the output frequency at which
one of the drive's output contacts (RCHA-RCHC, etc.) changes state during an acceleration. See Items
60, 63, and 66.

Item 75, SPEED REACH MINIMUM FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the output frequency at which
one of the drive's output contacts (RCHA-RCHC, etc.) changes state during a deceleration. See Items 60,
63, and 66.

Item 76, COMMERCIAL POWER/INVERTER SWITCHING OUTPUT - On appropriately equipped drives, use
this parameter to determine when the G3's bypass circuitry is activated:
1: Motor runs on bypass when drive trips
2: Motor runs on bypass when a signal is given
3: Both of the above
Contact your Toshiba distributor for information on how to program and wire a G3 for this function.

Item 77, COMMERCIAL POWER/INVERTER SWITCHING FREQUENCY - On appropriately equipped

drives, use this parameter to determine the drive output frequency reached before the G3's bypass
circuitry is activated. Contact your Toshiba distributor for information on how to program and wire a G3 for
this function.

Item 78, "FP" OUTPUT TERMINAL PULSE FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the number of
pulses per output Hz.

Item 79, RR INPUT SPECIAL FUNCTION SELECT - Use this parameter to change the function
of the 0-10 volt signal applied to the "RR" terminal:
0: Standard (speed reference)
1: Scale MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY. Minimum 30 Hz
2: Adjust multiplier on accel/decel times. Zero volts sets the multiplier to 1, 10 volts sets
the multplier to 10.
3: Adjust voltage boost. Zero volts sets voltage boost to 0%. 10 volts set the voltage boost
to its programmed value.
4: Current limit. Ten volts sets current limit to 150%. Contact your Toshiba distributor for
information on how to Torque Current limit.

Suggestion: set one of the monitors (Items 289-292) to a value of "14" (RR input value) to see
effective MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, accel/decel multiplier, effective voltage boost, or
effective STALL PROTECTION CURRENT LEVEL.

Item 80, FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 - use this parameter to give one of the drive's
frequency setting signals priority over another. Only when the signal set here goes to zero will the drive
follow the signal set in Item 81. If the signal selected here becomes non-zero, the drive will follow it and
ignore the signal selected in Item 81. Set this parameter to "5" when using MOP control or inputting a
binary reference via the drive's terminal strip. Preset speeds have priority over "RR" and "RX".

Item 81, FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #2 - use this parameter to give one of the drive's
frequency setting signals priority over another. Only when the signal set in Item 80 goes to zero will the
drive follow the signal set here. If the signal selected in Item 80 becomes non-zero, the drive will follow it
and ignore the signal selected here.

9 - 13
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 82, ANALOG INPUT FILTER - Use this parameter to set the amount of filtering applied to
the drive's current/voltage frequency reference to dampen noise or resonance problems. "0" is no
filtering and "3" is maximum filtering.

Item 83, RR INPUT SELECTION - Use this parameter to allow adjustment of the RR reference's
bias and gain. Items 84 and 85 define one point on a % input reference vs. output Hz graph; Items
86 and 87 define another. The drive varies its output frequency as its input changes according to a
line connecting these points. See graph below. With default programming, drive outputs 40 Hz
with 5 volts on the "RR" terminal.

Item 84, RR REFERENCE POINT #1 - Use this parameter to set a percentage of reference.

Item 85, RR REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the desired drive output
Hz when its reference has the value set in Item 84 above.

Item 86, RR REFERENCE POINT #2 - Use this parameter to set a percentage of reference. The
"RR" terminal's range is 0-10 volts, so the factory default of 100% corresponds to 10 volts.

Item 87, RR REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the desired drive output
Hz when its reference has the value set in Item 86 above.

Bias/Gain of Frequency Input

REFERENCE POINT #2: 100%

Input Reference
Signal

REFERENCE POINT #1: 0% Output Hz

0 Hz 80 Hz
REF POINT #1 FREQ REF POINT #2 FREQ
Items 88-92, IV TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE - Use these parameters to allow
adjustment of the "IV" reference's bias and gain. See explanation for Items 83-87 above. With
dipswitch in "I" position, drive considers 100% reference = 20 mA (20% would be 4 mA). With
dipswitch in "V" position, 100% reference = 10 volts. See page 5-3 for dipswitch location.

Items 93-97, RX TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE - Use these parameters to allow

adjustment of the "RX" reference's bias and gain. See explanation for Items 83-87 above. With
dipswitch in "5" position, drive considers 100% reference = 5 volts. With dipswitch in "10" position,
100% reference = 10 volts. See page 5-3 for dipswitch location. Notice that the "RX" reference
can be positive or negative, and can represent a positive or negative frequency (direction change).

Items 98-102, PG TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE - Use these parameters to allow

adjustment of the "PG" reference's bias and gain. See explanation for Items 83-87 above. PG
input is available on option cards INV3-COM-B and INV3-COM-D. Notice that the PG reference
can be positive or negative, and can represent a positive or negative frequency (direction change).

Items 103-107, BINARY INPUT STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE - Use these parameters to allow
adjustment of a binary reference's bias and gain. See explanation for Items 83-87 above. Notice
that the binary reference can represent a positive or negative frequency (direction change). These
bias/gain adjustments apply to terminals programmed with values 22-32 on page 9-9.

9 - 14
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 108, JOG RUN FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the run frequency during a jog. An accel
time of zero is used, so low jog frequencies of 5 Hz or less and light loads are recommended. For
information on jogging from the keypad, see page 7-1. For information on how to jog from the terminal
strip, see pages 8-9 and 9-9. During a jog, low speed, speed reach, and PID, functions do not operate.

Item 109, JOG STOP METHOD - This parameter determines the way a jog is stopped. If DC Injection is
selected, also adjust Item 146, DC INJECTION STARTING FREQUENCY, Item 147, DC INJECTION
CURRENT, and Item 148, DC INJECTION TIME. Jog is stopped by releasing the "RUN" key (when in
panel control), and by opening "F"-"CC" or "R"-"CC" (when in remote control).

Item 110, PRESET SPEED SELECTION - Enter the total number of preset speeds to be accessed.

Item 111, PRESET SPEED MODE ACTIVATION - If this parameter is set to "1", the corresponding preset
speeds' acc/dec time selection, volts per hertz pattern selection, and direction is determined by the setting
of PRESET SPEED #<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> OPERATING MODE (Items 113, 115,
117, etc.). Directions commanded by closing "F"-"CC" or "R"-"CC" are effectively ignored. If Item 111 is set
to "0", the direction is determined by the terminal strip.

Items 112, 114, 116, 118, 120, 122, 124, 126, 128, 130, 132, 134, 136, 138, 140, PRESET SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set preset speed
frequencies.

Items 113, 115, 117, 119, 121, 123, 125, 127, 129, 131, 133, 135, 137, 139, 141, PRESET SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> OPERATING MODE - Use this parameter to associate a
direction and ACCELERATION TIME #1 / DECELERATION TIME #1 or ACCELERATION TIME #2 /
DECELERATION TIME #2 with a preset speed. See Item 111.

With default programming, the "S1", "S2", "S3", and "S4" terminals (see Items 45-48) are preset
speed selections via a binary implementation. Some examples:

"S4" to "CC" "S3" to "CC" "S2" to "CC" "S1" to "CC" Commanded Preset Speed #
open open open close 1
open open closed closed 3
closed closed open open 12
open closed open closed 5
closed closed closed closed 15
closed open open closed 9
closed open closed open 10

A "F"-"CC" or "R"-"CC" closure is necessary to initiate a preset speed run.

Item 142, DYNAMIC BRAKING SELECTION - Adjust this parameter when attaching a dynamic braking
resistor to the drive for increased stopping ability. A setting of "1" affords no protection for the resistor (use
for over-sized wattages, or for externally-protected resistors). A setting of "2" invokes the drive's braking
resistor protection (drive will trip on DB RESISTOR OVERLOAD if resistor is overloaded). See Items 143
and 144. For optimum use of the dynamic braking resistor, set Item 145, OVERVOLTAGE STALL
PROTECTION to "1", "off".

Item 143, BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE - Enter ohm value of resistor. See page 9-16 for
recommended DBR sizing.

Item 144, BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING - Enter kilowatt value of resistor. See page 9-16 for
recommended DBR sizing.

9 - 15
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

DYNAMIC BRAKING

When a motor is mechanically forced to spin faster than the output frequency of the drive, the
motor acts as a generator. This regenerated energy forces current to flow into the drive's DC
bus. The bus capacitors will absorb some of the regenerative energy by charging and raising the
DC bus voltage. At high bus voltages, the drive can be programmed to fire the IGBT7 dynamic
braking transistor. This prevents a common drive fault, DC BUS OVERVOLTAGE. The dynamic
braking resistor, attached by the user to the "PA" and "PB" terminals, dissipates the bus energy
as heat when the IGBT7 fires. Two resistor values are of concern: resistance (ohms) and power
(watts). Insufficient resistance may lead to IGBT7 damage; too low of a wattage may result in
braking resistor damage from overheating.

HEAVY DUTY RESISTORS LIGHT DUTY RESISTORS

WATTS: 300 watts per drive HP WATTS: 60 watts per drive HP

G3 H.D. G3 H.D. G3 L.D. G3 L.D.

Model Ohms Model Ohms Model Ohms Model Ohms
2010 60 4015 145 2010 600 4015 1800
2015 60 4025 125 2015 450 4025 900
2025 50 4035 135 2025 225 4035 600
2035 35 4055 108 2035 150 4055 360
2055 28 4080 65 2055 90 4080 240
2080 20 4110 60 2080 61 4110 180
2110 12 4160 38 2110 45 4160 120
2160 7.0 4220 30 2160 30 4220 90
2220 6.0 4270 22 2220 23 4270 70
2270 5.0 4330 20 2270 18 4330 61
2330 4.0 4400 14 2330 15 4400 45
6060 300 4500 8.0 6060 750 4500 36
6120 150 4600 7.0 6120 375 4600 30
6160 100 4750 7.0 6160 250 4750 24
6220 75 410K 5.5 6220 190 410K 18
6270 60 412K 5.0 6270 150 412K 15
6330 50 415K 4.0 6330 125 415K 12
6400 37 420K 3.0 6400 94 420K 9.0
6500 30 425K 2.4 6500 75 425K 7.0
6600 25 430K 2.0 6600 63 430K 6.0
6700 20 435K 2.0 6700 50 435K 6.0
610K 15 610K 38
612K 12 612K 30
615K 10 615K 25
620K 7.0 620K 19
625K 6.0 625K 15

Contact your Toshiba distributor for dynamic braking resistor part numbers and information.

Item 145, OVERVOLTAGE STALL PROTECTION - This function is turned on as a default setting.
Overvoltage stall protection causes the drive to automatically extend the decel time when the DC bus
voltage increases due to regeneration. The value stored in DECELERATION TIME #1 / DECELERATION
TIME #2 is not changed. The drive may still trip on overvoltage if the decel time is very small.

9 - 16
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 146, DC INJECTION STARTING FREQUENCY - Use this parameter to set the frequency at which
DC injection begins. DC injection can be initiated remotely by programming one of the input terminals
appropriately (see Items 44-54 and page 9-9).

Item 147, DC INJECTION CURRENT - sets the current level to be employed during DC injection. Amount
can be in % of drive rating or in amps (set by Item 296).

Item 148, DC INJECTION TIME - sets the number of seconds DC is applied to the motor.

Drive will DC inject approximately 60% FLA continuously, 80% for 100 seconds, and 100% for 2
seconds without an INVERTER OVERLOAD trip.

DC injection is active when the drive's output frequency is below DC INJECTION START
FREQUENCY and the drive has a STOP command or a zero reference. DC injection is also active
when the drive's output frequency is below Item 32, END FREQUENCY.

Item 149, FWD/REV DC INJECTION PRIORITY CONTROL - When drive is running in forward
direction and is given a reverse reference, this parameter determines whether or not DC injection is active
between DC INJECTION STARTING FREQUENCY and 0 Hz. Also, a setting of "1" gives DC injection
priority over a new run command. With a setting of "0", a new run command has priority over DC injection.

Item 150, MOTOR SHAFT STATIONARY CONTROL - This parameter enables a continuous DC injection
into a stopped motor. Amps are set by DC INJECTION CURRENT / 2. Motor shaft stationary control starts
after DC injection and continues until "ST"-"CC" is opened, power is turned off, drive emergency stops, or
parameter is changed.

Item 151, EMERGENCY STOP SELECTION - This parameter determines ESTOP method.

Item 152, EMERGENCY OFF DC INJECTION TIME - This is an unique DC injection time for ESTOPs.

Item 153, NUMBER OF RETRY ATTEMPTS - The G3 can be programmed to restart after a fault occurs.
This parameter sets the number of retry attempts. Speed search is automatically on during retry. Retry will
not function if Item 172, FAULT TRIP EEPROM SAVE ENABLE is on.

Item 154, TIME BETWEEN RETRY ATTEMPTS - Adjust this parameter to set the number of seconds
between retry attempts.
Make sure that workers are not exposed to danger from
CAUTION equipment suddenly re-starting when a fault occurs and
a retry selection option other than "0" has been selected.
Item 155, REGENERATION POWER RIDE THROUGH CONTROL - G3 models 2080-2110 and 4080-4270
take control power from the DC bus; enabling this function allows use of regeneration energy from the
motor to maintain control during a brown-out. Accel/decel times may need to be adjusted to avoid
overvolltage trips. Always confirm operation.

Item 156, REGENERATION POWER RIDE THROUGH TIME - Use this parameter to limit ride-through
time (effective only if there is sufficient regen energy).

Item 157, AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR SPEED SEARCH) - This parameter enables the drive's ability to
catch a spinning motor:
0: Speed search off
1: Drive performs speed search after a power glitch
2: Drive performs speed search after "ST"-"CC" is made
3: Both 1 and 2 above

A drive with a forward direction command will catch a reversing motor.

9 - 17
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

DRIVE AND MOTOR OVERLOADS

The G3 features separate overload curves for itself and the motor. All G3s can output 110% of their rated
current continuously; current levels above 110% are considered overload. The drive overload is fixed: 100
HP and smaller G3s' overload is 150% of their rated current for 120 seconds; 125 HP and larger G3s'
overload is 130% for 120 seconds. The motor's overload curve is defined by Items 158, 159, 160, and
output frequency:

Item 158, ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL 1 - use this parameter to scale the motor overload
protection to a specific motor's amp rating. Can be entered in percent or in amps, depending on the setting
of Item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION. For percent setting, divide motor full load amps by drive full
load amps and multiply by 100.

Item 159, OVERLOAD REDUCTION START FREQUENCY - The motor overload protection provided by the
drive is speed-sensitive by default. With default setting, a G3 at 115% of the current set by ELECTRONIC
THERMAL PROTECT LEVEL 1 will trip on MOTOR OVERLOAD sooner at 15 Hz than at 60 Hz. Users who
have allowed for reduced motor cooling at low speeds can reduce this parameter to get more overload
capability. The drive's overload protection is speed sensitive at frequencies below the value entered here.

Item 160, MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME LIMIT - This parameter sets the time the drive will output
150% of the current set by Item 158, ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECTION LEVEL #1 before tripping
on MOTOR OVERLOAD.

Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION - This parameter adjusts the overload protection scheme.
0: Standard
1: Soft stall on. Soft stall reduces output frequency only when the drive is in its overload
region. Soft stall helps prevent drive from tripping on INVERTER OVERLOAD.
2: Motor overload trip off.
3: Soft stall on and motor overload trip off.

Motor overload sensing is "on" unless "2" or "3" is selected.

INVERTER OVERLOAD cooling time is approximately one minute after trip

MOTOR OVERLOAD cooling time is approximately five minutes after trip
DBR OVERLOAD cooling time is approximately thirty seconds after trip

Item 162, STALL PROTECTION ENABLE - Drive current limits when stall is turned "on".

Item 163, STALL PROTECTION LEVEL - Drive will reduce its output frequency and voltage automatically
to limit output current to the value programmed here.

Item 164, UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION - The drive can be programmed to UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP
when the DC bus voltage is under a factory-set value by programming a "1" here. See Item 165 also. An
undervoltage alarm is available in the form of a drive output contact change; see Items 60, 63, or 66 and
setting values 24/25 on page 9-11.

Item 165, UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME - The DC bus must be low for at least the time entered here
before the drive faults on UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP.

Item 166, LOW CURRENT DETECT SELECTION - The drive can be programmed to LOW CURRENT TRIP
when its output current is below the value programmed in Item 167 for at least the time programmed in
Item 168. Enter a "1" here to enable the low current detection. A low current alarm is available in the form
of a drive output contact change; see Items 60,63, or 66 and setting values 26/27 on page 9-11.

9 - 18
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 167, LOW CURRENT DETECT LEVEL - Enter the current amount (in % or amps depending on setting
of Item 296) below which the drive will trip and/or close an appropriately-programmed output contact.

Item 168, LOW CURRENT DETECTION TIME - Enter the time the output current must be below the
amount set in Item 167 before the drive trips and/or closes an appropriately-programmed output contact.

Item 169, OUTPUT SHORT-CIRCUIT DETECTION SELECT - To protect itself, the drive does an output
short-circuit check every time a run is initiated. This parameter changes the short-circuit check:
0: Standard setting
1: When a low impedance motor is used, this setting desensitizes the short-circuit check,
reducing nusiance trips.
2: This setting programs the drive to perform the check at power up only.
3: Combination of 1 and 2 above.
Do not operate the drive on a motor with power factor correction capacitors.

Item 170, OVERTORQUE TRIP SELECTION - Enter a "1" here to program the drive to fault OVERTORQUE
TRIP based on on the torque current amount. See Item 171.

Item 171, OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL - Enter the torque current (in % or amps depending on the setting
of Item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION) at which the drive trips and/or closes an appropriately-
programmed output contact (see Items 60,63, or 66 and setting values 28/29 on page 9-11).

Item 172, FAULT TRIP SAVING - This parameter determines the effect of cycling power on a faulted
drive:
0: Fault and fault data cleared when drive powers up.
1: Drive powers up in tripped state (drive display remains in faulted state, but fault data and fault
contact are not maintained).

The setting of Item 153, NUMBER OF RETRY ATTEMPTS, is ignored by the drive when Item 172 is
set to "1".

Item 173, COOLING FAN CONTROL SELECTION - This parameter determines if the drive's fan is
thermostatically-controlled or if it runs continuously.

Item 174, CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER ALARM SETTING - One of the drive's output contacts can be
programmed to change state based upon the time entered here. See Items 60,63, or 66 and setting values
56/57 on page 9-12. ".01" is one hour.

PATTERN RUN

The G3 has a feature called pattern run that emulates a low-level PLC. During a pattern run, the drive
follows a pattern group by running at the user's preset speeds for desired amounts of time in desired
directions with desired accel/decel times for a defined number of cycles. The G3 has 15 preset speeds,
any of which can be assigned to be speeds zero through seven in a pattern group. The G3 can hold up to
four separate pattern groups, any of which can be remotely selected to run.

Item 175, PATTERN RUN SELECTION - This parameter enables pattern run. When stopping/starting
drive from panel, pattern run takes priority over the keypad's frequency reference.

Item 176, PATTERN RUN CONTINUE MODE - This parameter determines if a pattern group is continued
after a pattern run is stopped and restarted:
0: Pattern group starts over with its first speed
1: Pattern resumes at the time of and with the speed at interruption

9 - 19
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Items 177, 186, 195, and 204, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #0 - This parameter
determines which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the first
speed in the pattern group. Unlike the other speeds #1 - #7, speed #0 is not repeated when PATTERN
GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> NUMBER OF CYCLES is greater than one. Set this parameter to "0" to skip this
speed.

Items 178, 187, 196, 205, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #1 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #1 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #1.

Items 179, 188, 197, 206, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #2 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #2 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #2.

Items 180, 189, 198, 207, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #3 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #3 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #3.

Items 181, 190, 199, 208, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #4 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #4 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #4.

Items 182, 191, 200, 209, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #5 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #5 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #5.

Items 183, 192, 201, 210, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #6 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #6 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #6.

Items 184, 193, 202, 211, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> SPEED #7 - This parameter determines
which preset speed (preset speeds 1 through 15 programmed in Items 110-141) is the next speed in the
pattern group. Speed #7 can be but does not have to be Preset Speed #7.

Items 185, 194, 203, 212, PATTERN GROUP #<1,2,3, or 4> NUMBER OF CYCLES - This parameter
determines how many times the pattern group made up of speeds #1 through #7 entered in the above
parameters will be repeated.

Items 213, 215, 217, 219, 221, 223, 225, 227, 229, 231, 233, 235, 237, 239, and 241,
SPEED #<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> CONTINUE MODE. This parameter affects the timing
of the speeds in a pattern group:
0: Preset speed's time is counted in seconds from the beginning of the run (accel/decel time is
included in the time entered in the following parameter, SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> DRIVE TIME
1: Preset speed's time is counted in minutes from the beginning of the run (accel/decel time is
included in the time entered in the following parameter, SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> DRIVE TIME
2: Preset speed's time is counted in seconds after preset speed is reached (accel/decel time is
not included in the time entered in the following parameter, SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> DRIVE TIME
3: Preset speed's time is counted in minutes after preset speed is reached (accel/decel time is
not included in the time entered in the following parameter, SPEED
#<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,or 15> DRIVE TIME
4: Non-stop (stop by breaking ST-CC or F-CC or R-CC).
5: Drive waits for step command to change speeds. See Items 45-54 and setting value 19
on page 9-9.
9 - 20
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Items 214, 216, 218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 238, 240, and 242, SPEED NUMBER
<1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14, or 15> DRIVE TIME - This parameter determines the
amount of time associated with each preset speed. The time unit (minutes/seconds is determined by the
preceding parameter.

Item 243, FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION - This parameter programs the drive to operate in PID
mode (maintain a process variable such as pressure), speed feedback, or in normal mode.

Item 244, FEEDBACK INPUT SIGNAL SELECTION - This parameter programs the drive to accept
feedback at one of many possible inputs:
1: "RR" terminal
2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal
4: Pulse generator input (on option board INV3-COM-B or INV3-COM-D)
5: RS232 port
6: RS485 port or 12 bit input (on option board INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-C or
G3-VF5X-4526A
7: Binary input ( via input terminals programmed appropriately - see Items 45-54 and
setting values 22-32 on page 9-9).

Item 245, PROPORTIONAL GAIN - The larger the value here, the quicker the drive responds to changes
in feedback. Contact Houston for the PID application guideline. READ/WRITE does not have to be
pressed to make the value entered here effective.

Item 246, INTEGRAL GAIN - Also known as reset, this parameter is actually a time. The smaller the
value here, the more pronounced the effect of the integral function. Contact Houston for the PID
application guideline. READ/WRITE does not have to be pressed to make the value entered here
effective.

Item 247, ANTI-HUNTING GAIN - Also known as differential gain or rate, this parameter is actually a
time. The larger the value here, the more pronounced the effect of the differential function. Contact
Houston for the PID application guideline. READ/WRITE does not have to be pressed to make the value
entered here effective.

Item 248, LAG TIME CONSTANT - This parameter effects drive reaction time to change in feedback
value. Decrease this setting to improve drive response.

Item 249, PID LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY - When PID is active, Item 7, LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY
is not effective. This parameter is the lower limit when PID is active. Some drives have a version of keypad
ROM that does not contain this parameter (version 100). If drive cannot display this parameter, see
section 7.4 about identifying keypad ROM version. Keypad ROM versions 110 and 121 contain Item 249.

Item 250, PID DEVIATION LIMIT SELECTION - The amount of correction calculated by the drive can
be limited to control possible system oscillations. Place a "1" here to PID deviation limit.

Item 251, PID DEVIATION UPPER LIMIT - The amount of correction calculated by the drive is limited
to the value entered here, expressed in terms of percent of Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY.

Item 252, PID DEVIATION LOWER LIMIT - The amount of correction calculated by the drive is limited
to the value entered here, expressed in terms of percent of Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY.

Item 253, PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PULSES - When an encoder and PG option board (INV3-COM-B or
INV3-COM-D) is being used for closed loop speed control, enter pulses per revolution. When using option
board to follow a pulse reference, enter number of pulses that correspond to a frequency command of one
hertz. See the Extended Terminal Block Option Manual for more information.

9 - 21
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 254, PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PHASES - Use this parameter to select either one or two phase
encoder feedback. See the Extended Terminal Block Option Manual for more information.

Item 255, DROOPING CONTROL ENABLE - Use this parameter to enable the G3's load share function,
which continuously stalls based on load. This parameter can be changed while the drive is at a non-zero
output frequency, but the change does not go into effect until drive is stopped.

Item 256, DROOPING CONTROL AMOUNT - Use this parameter to set the maximum amount of droop (in
percent of Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY).

When drooping, Output Frequency = Reference Frequency - Droop

Droop = MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY x DROOPING CONTROL AMOUNT x Torque Ratio
Torque Ratio (maximum value of 2.0)= operating torque / rated torque

Item 257, OVERRIDE CONTROL SELECTION - Use this parameter to create a "trim pot". The "trim pot"
function allows a user to uniquely adjust the speed of a drive that is receiving a master reference. The
bias/gain of these inputs determines their effect on the master reference (see Items 84-107). Select which
one of the G3's frequency references will serve as the trim source:
0: none
1: "RR" terminal
2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal (+/- trim possible)
4: Pulse generator input on option card INV3-COM-B or INV3-COM-D (+/- trim possible)
5: G3 keypad
6: RS485 input or 12-bit input on option cards INV3-COM-A , INV3-COM-C, or G3-VF5X-4526A
7: Trim source with multiplier. See Items 258 and 259 below.

Item 258, OVERRIDE MULTIPLIER INPUT SELECTION - When used with a multiplier, the
following inputs' bias and gain do not determine their effect on the master reference. Select which
of the following trim sources will be used with the muliplier:
0: Frequency reference
1: "RR" terminal
2: "IV" terminal
3: "RX" terminal
4: RS485 input or 12-bit input on option cards INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-C, or G3-VF5X-4526A

Item 259, OVERRIDE CHANGE MULTIPLIER - When Item 258 is set to "0", this parameter sets the
percent of reference to be added/subtacted to/from the reference. When Item 258 is set to "1", "2", "3", or
"4", the value entered here determines the maximum range of trim in terms of percentage of reference.
This maximum range of trim includes both positive and negative trim bandwidths. Any amount of trim up to
this maximum is available by changing the trim terminal's input. Maximum negative trim is achieved with
minimum input on trim terminal. Maximum positive trim is achieved with maximum input on trim terminal.

Example: Suppose Item 258 is set to "1" (RR trim), Item 259 is set to "25%", and a 4-20 mA
reference into the "IV" terminal is commanding 40 Hz. When the "RR" input is 0 volts, the drive
outputs 35 Hz (40 - ((40 X 0.25)/2)). When the "RR" input is adjusted to 10 volts, the drive outputs
45 Hz (40 + ((40 X 0.25)/2)).

Item 260, RS232 BAUD RATE - sets baud rate. Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Item 261, NUMBER OF DATA BITS - sets the word length. Cycle power after changing.

Item 262, PARITY SETTING - sets the parity. Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Item 263, INVERTER ID NUMBER - assigns unique ID to drive for use on RS485 net. Cycle power after
changing this parameter.
9 - 22
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 264, COMMUNICATION SELECTION - Use this parameter to select type of communication:
0: None
1: RS485 port on option boards INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-C, or INV3-COM-B
2: Toshiba TOSLINE F10 (twisted pair). Contact your Toshiba distributor for more information
3: Toshiba TOSLINE S20 (fiber optic). Contact your Toshiba distributor for more information.
4: 12 bit binary reference using option card G3-VF5X-4526A
5: Three digit BCD input on card G3-VF5X-4526A ( 0.1 Hz resolution )
6: Three digit BCD input on card G3-VF5X-4526A ( 1.0 Hz resolution )

Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Item 265, MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION - This parameter defines the drive's role in the master/
follower scenario. A value of "1" entered here will make followers follow the frequency command
the master is receiving (master may be stopped while the followers run). A value of "2" entered
here will make the followers run according to the master's output frequency. Cycle power after
changing this parameter.

Item 266, RS485 BAUD RATE - In conjunction with jumpers J1 ands J2 on the RS485 option
board used, this parameter sets the RS485 baud rate as follows:

Position of Setting of Item 266

J1 J2 0 1
off off 9600 38400
on off 4800 19200
off on 2400 9600
on on 1200 4800

INV3-COM-A and INV3-COM-B cards' max baud is 19200.

INV3-COM-C card's max baud is 38400.
Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Item 267, TOSLINE F10/S20 COMMAND INPUT - determines if drive accepts run/stop and/or
frequency commands from TOSLINE. Contact PLC marketing for more information. Cycle power
after changing this parameter.

Item 268, TOSLINE F10/S20 MONITOR OUTPUT - determines the drive operating data to be
communicated. Contact PLC marketing for more information. Cycle power after changing this
parameter.

Item 269, TOSLINE F10/S20 COMM ERROR MODE - When set to a value of "0", a zero speed
command is commenced in the event of an error. A value of "1" the data prior to the error is held.
Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Items 270-274 , RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS, GAIN - use these parameters to allow
adjustment of the RS485 or 12 bit reference's bias and gain. See explanation for Items 83-87
above. Follower's 100% reference is master's Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY. RS485 input is
available on option cards INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-B, and INV3-COM-C. 12 bit binary input is available
on option card G3-VF5X-4526A. Cycle power after changing this parameter.

Item 275, FM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION - This parameter determines the drive
operating variable associated with the 0-1 mA/4-20 mA signal from the "FM" and "CC" terminals.
The "FM" output is user-selected as 0-1 mA or 4-20 mA by setting JP3 (to the left of the terminal
strip) in the appropriate position (see page 5-2). Do not make connections to this terminal with the
drive powered.
(continued next page)

9 - 23
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 275, FM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION (con't) - Choices for "FM" terminal's signal's
function:
0: (default for "FM"). Pre-compensation reference frequency. This is the drive's internal
frequency command and is affected by acc/dec and PID and droop (same as the actual output
frequency displayed on the drive's keypad).
1: Post-compensation output frequency may be higher than frequency command (drive
overspeeds to compensate for slip in vector control).
2: Frequency command. Use for master/follower. Not affected by stopping or accel/decel.
3: (default for "AM"). Output current. (output amps)2 =(torque amps)2+(excitation amps)2
4: DC bus voltage
5: Output voltage
6: Torque current. (output current)2 = (torque current)2 + (excitation current)2
7: Excitation current. (output current)2 = (torque current)2 + (excitation current)2
8: PID feedback value. This is the frequency represented by the feedback signal
9: Motor overload ratio. Example: G3 is rated for 150% FLA for 2 minutes. If G3 runs at
150% for 1 minute, this output will be 50%. Drive trips when ration hits 100%.
10: Inverter overload ratio. See example for selection 9 above.
11: Dynamic braking resistor overload ratio. See example for selection 9 above.
12: Input power (watts)
13: Output power (watts)
14: Meter calibration setting
15: Peak output current. Peak is reset by cycling power, initiating a run, or resetting drive.
16: Peak input voltage. Peak is reset by cycling power, initiating run, or resetting drive.
Calculated from DC bus.

Item 276, FREQUENCY METER ADJUSTMENT - This setting adjusts the gain of the "FM" terminal. With
Item 275 set to "14" (or Item 277 for the "AM" terminal), press the up/down arrows (ignoring parameter
value shown) until external meter/system reads the following value for the chosen operating variable:

For post compensation frequency, adjust until meter/system reads 75% of Item 1, MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY
For post-compensation output frequency, adjust until meter/system reads 75% of Item 1,
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
For frequency command, adjust until meter/system reads 75% of Item 1, MAXIMUM OUTPUT
FREQUENCY
For output current, adjust until meter/system reads drive rated amps (or 100%)
For DC bus voltage, adjust until meter/system 283 VDC for a 230 V drive or 566 VDC for a 460 V
drive.
For output voltage, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 200 VAC (or 100%) for a 230 V drive
or 400 VAC (or100%) for a 460 V drive.
For torque current, adjust arrows until meter/system reads drive rated amps (or 100%).
For excitation current, adjust arrows until meter/system reads drive rated amps (or 100%).
For PID feedback value, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 75% of Item 1, MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY.
For motor overload ratio, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 100%.
For inverter overload ratio, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 100%.
For dynamic braking resistor overload ratio, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 100%.
For input power, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 346 X drive FLA for a 230 V drive or 692
X drive FLA for a 460 V drive.
For output power, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 346 X drive FLA for a 230 V drive or
692 X drive FLA for a 460 V drive.
For peak output current, adjust arrows until meter/system reads drive rated amps (or 100%).
For peak input voltage, adjust arrows until meter/system reads 200 VAC for a 230 V drive or 400
VAC for a 460 V drive.

9 - 24
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 277, AM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION - This parameter is programmed like Item 275, but it
affects the "AM" terminal.

Item 278, AMMETER ADJUSTMENT - This parameter is programmed like Item 276, but it affects the "AM"
terminal.

Item 279, INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION SELECTION - This parameter can be changed only when the
drive's output is 0.0 Hz.When programmed with a non zero value, the drive will initialize itself (prior pro-
gramming is erased) to parameter values that lend themselves to specific applications. Contact your
Toshiba distributor for a copy of the G3 Industrial Application Manual which lists the specific parameter
setting by application macro. When read, this parameter displays two values; the one on the left is the
previous value, while the one on the right is the current value.

Item 280, STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION - This parameter can be changed only when the
drive's output is 0.0 Hz. When read, this parameter displays two values; the one on the left is the previous
value, while the one on the right is the current value. This parameter resets the parameter values of the
drive as follows:
1: Default drive to typical 50 Hz application settings.
2: Default drive to typical 60 Hz application settings.
3: Default drive to Toshiba factory settings listed in "Factory Setting" column on pages 8-1 through
8-32. Past four faults in the monitor erased.
4: Erase past four faults in the monitor.
5: Save present parameter settings in separate "user" default memory.
6: Default drive to "user" default memory.
7: Clear INVERTER TYPEFORM ERROR (also defaults drive to factory values).

Item 281, COMMAND MODE SELECTION - Changes to this parameter go into effect only when the drive is
at 0.0 Hz. This parameter determines where the drive looks for a stop/start command:
0: RS232 port
1: G3 terminal strip only (remote mode)
2: G3 keypad stop/start buttons only (local mode)
3: RS485 input on option boards INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-B, or INV3-COM-C
4: Local or remote as determined by setting of LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad

Terminal strip enable, reset, and ESTOP commands are always valid, regardless of Item 281's
setting. With this parameter set to "2", preset speeds from terminal strip will not function.

Item 282, FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION - Changes to this parameter go into effect only when the drive
is at 0.0 Hz. This parameter determines where the drive looks for its output frequency reference:
0: RS232 port
1: G3 terminal strip only (remote mode)
2: G3 keypad stop/start buttons only (local mode)
3: RS485 or 12 bit binary input on option boards INV3-COM-A, INV3-COM-B,
INV3-COM-C, or VF5X-4526A
4: Local or remote as determined by setting of LOCAL/REMOTE button on keypad

Terminal strip enable, reset, and ESTOP commands are always valid, regardless of Item 282's
setting.

9 - 25
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 283, PANEL OPERATION MODE SELECTION - Cycle power after changing this parameter.
This parameter limits what can be done via the keypad. Panel ESTOP in remote mode is ALWAYS valid.
The values entered here that are zero or are a power of two have one function assigned to them:
0: Keypad does nothing 1: Reset drive fault only
2: Monitor only 4: ESTOP only
8: Run/Stop only 16: Read parameters only
32: Change parameters only

The rest of the possible parameter values are combinations of the above.
Note: to "change parameters only", "read parameters only" must also be selected.

TO RESET AFTER "0" HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED IN ITEM 283:

1. Press four keys simultaneously: LOCAL/REMOTE, PRG, READ/WRITE, and up arrow
2. Drive will display ENTER PASS NUMBER 0
3. Pass number is programmed in Item 284, PASS NUMBER. Enter pass number with
arrows and hit READ/WRT.
4. If entered correctly, PASS NUMBER ENTERED CORRECTLY will display briefly and Item
283 will be reset to a value of 63, allowing all keypad operations.

If ENTER PASS NUMBER doesn't appear after pressing the four keys, cycle power and try again.

Item 284, PASS NUMBER - Incorrect entry of the setting in this parameter prevents resetting
keypad lockout (Item 283 set to "0"). Item 284 is viewable through RS232 port.

Item 285, CPU VERSION - This is a read-only parameter. This manual is for the version 120 CPU. Version
120 added the following features to version 5101: input terminal functions 52,53, and 54; output terminal
functions 62 and 63; "RR" special input function #4; PID lower limit, peak voltage, peak current, and
calibration settings for AM/FM terminal functions; peak voltage and peak current monitor choices; drooping
control.

Item 286, ROM VERSION - This is a read-only parameter. "5120" is the default setting with a
version 120 CPU (230/460 volt drive). "6600" or "6610" is the setting for 600 volt drives (version 6610
added 250 HP settings). Application-specific option ROMs are available from Toshiba.

Item 287, EEPROM VERSION - This read-only parameter shows control board EEPROM version.

Item 288, INVERTER TYPEFORM - This read-only parameter identifies the G3's model number:

Typeform Model Typeform Model Typeform Model

21 G3U2010 22 G3U2015 65 G3U6060
23 G3U2025 24 G3U2035 67 G3U6120
25 G3U2055 26 G3U2080 68 G3U6160
27 G3U2110 28 G3U2160 69 G3U6220
29 G3U2220 2A G3U2270 6A G3U6270
2B G3U2330 42 G3U4015 6B G3U6330
43 G3U4025 44 G3U4035 6C G3U6400
45 G3U4055 46 G3U4080 6D G3U6500
47 G3U4110 48 G3U4160 6E G3U6600
49 G3U4220 4A G3U4270 6F G3U6750
4B G3U4330 4C G3U4400 70 G3U610K
4D G3U4500 4E G3U4600 71 G3U612K
4F G3U4750 50 G3U410K 72 G3U615K
51 G3U412K 52 G3U415K 73 G3U620K
53 G3U420K 54 G3U425K 74 G3U625K
55 G3U430K 56 G3U435K

9 - 26
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Items 289-292, STATUS MONITOR #<1,2,3,and 4> SELECT - Pressing MON button displays the drive's
monitor mode. See Item 296 to display currents in amps or percent. See Item 297 to display voltages in
volts or percent. The drive operation variable displayed in four of the monitor mode's screens are
selectable:
1: Post-compensation output frequency may be higher than frequency command (drive
overspeeds to compensate for slip in vector control).
2: Frequency command. Not affected by stopping or accel/decel.
Default for STATUS MONITOR #1 DISPLAY SELECT
3: Output current. (output amps)2 =(torque amps)2+(excitation amps)2
Default for STATUS MONITOR #2 DISPLAY SELECT
4: Input voltage (calculated from DC bus voltage). If displayed in percent, note that 230 V G3s
consider 200 V to be 100% input and 460 V G3s consider 400 V to be 100% input.
Default for STATUS MONITOR #3 DISPLAY SELECT
5: Output voltage. If displayed in percent, note that 230 V G3s consider 200 V to be 100% output
and 460 V G3s consider 400 V to be 100% output.
Default for STATUS MONITOR #4 DISPLAY SELECT
6: Torque current. (output current)2 = (torque current)2 + (excitation current)2
7: Excitation current. (output current)2 = (torque current)2 + (excitation current)2
8: PID feedback value. This is the frequency represented by the feedback signal
9: Motor overload ratio. Example: G3 is rated for 150% FLA for 2 minutes. If G3 runs at 150% for
one minute, this output will be 50%. Drive trips when ration hits 100%.
10: Inverter overload ratio. See example for selection 9 above.
11: Dynamic braking resistor overload ratio. See example for selection 9 above.
12: Input power
13: Output power
14: "RR" terminal input value (the variable displayed here varies with the setting of Item 79, RR
INPUT SPECIAL FUNCTION SELECT).
15: Peak output current. Peak is reset by cycling power, initiating a run, or resetting drive.
16: Peak input voltage. Peak is reset by cycling power, initiating run, or resetting drive.
Calculated from DC bus. If displayed in percent, note that 230 V G3s consider 200 V input to
be 100% and that 460 G3s consider 400 V input to be 100%.

Item 293, FREQUENCY UNITS SCALE FACTOR - Drive's frequency output display can be scaled by
putting a non-zero value here. Drive's display will still read OUTPUT FREQUENCY, but HZ will no longer be
visible.

Item 294, FREQUENCY DISPLAY RESOLUTION - Use this parameter to select the number of decimal
points for keypad's output frequency display.

Item 295, ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION - Affects Items 10,11,21, and 22 (sets resolution of
accel/decel times).

Item 296, CURRENT UNITS SELECTION - With this parameter set to "1", drive displays currents in amps.

Item 297, VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION - With this parameter set to "0", the voltages displayed in the
monitor are in percent.

Item 298, BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION - Page 8-31 contains the parameters that unblind the G3's
programming groups. Item 298 must be set to "1" before Items 299-315 can be read or changed.

Item 299, FUNDAMENTAL PARAMS #2 BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on page 8-2 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP: FUNDAMENTAL
PARAMETERS #1 to the group list (accessed via the PRG button).

9 - 27
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 300, PANEL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on page 8-3 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:PANEL CONTROL
PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 301, TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on pages 8-5 through 8-7 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:TERMINAL
SELECTION PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 302, SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on page 8-3 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:SPECIAL CONTROL
PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 303, FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on pages 8-8 through 8-12 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:FREQUEMCY SETTING PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 304, PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of
the parameters on pages 8-13 through 8-15 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 305, PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of
the parameters on pages 8-16 through 8-21 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 306, FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on pages 8-22 through 8-23 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 307, COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on pages 8-24 through 8-25 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:COMMUNICATION PARAMENTERS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 308, INDUSTRIAL APPL: PUMP PARAMS BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:INDUSTRIAL
APPLICATION - PUMP to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button). This group contains
parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a pump application.
The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your Toshiba distributor for the
Industrial Application Manual for more information on the pump group.

Item 309, INDUSTRIAL APPL: FAN PARAMS BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION - FAN to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button). This
group contains parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a fan
application. The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your Toshiba
distributor for the Industrial Application Manual for more information on the fan application group.

Item 310, INDUSTRIAL APPL: CONVEYOR BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPL - CONVEYOR to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button). This
group contains parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a
conveyor application. The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your Toshiba
distributor for the Industrial Application Manual for more information on the conveyor application group.

Item 311, INDUSTRIAL APPL: HOIST BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPLICATION - HOIST to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).
This group contains parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a
hoist application. The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your Toshiba
distributor for the Industrial Application Manual for more information on the hoist application group.

9 - 28
 TOSHIBA

Parameter Explanations (cont'd)

Item 312, INDUSTRIAL APPL: TEXTILES BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPL - TEXTILES to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button). This
group contains parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a
textile application. The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your Toshiba
distributor for the Industrial Application Manual for more information on the textile application group.

Item 313, INDUSTRIAL APPL: TOOLS BLIND - Putting a "1" here adds
GROUP:INDUSTRIAL APPL - MACHINE TOOLS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).
This group contains parameters from other groups which may be useful when programming the drive for a
machine tool application. The settings of these parameters are still set at factory default. Contact your
Toshiba distributor for the Industrial Application Manual for more information on the machine tool applica-
tion group.

Item 314, AM/FM ADJUSTMENT PARAMS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the
parameters on page 8-27 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:AM/FM ADJUSTMENT
PARAMS to the visible group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 315, MOTOR PARAMETERS BLIND - This parameter must be set to "1" before any of the parameters
on page 8-31 can be read or changed. Putting a "1" here adds GROUP:MOTOR PARAMETERS to the visible
group list (accessed via the PRG button).

Item 316, NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES - Enter number of motor poles.

Item 317, MOTOR RATED CAPACITY - Enter motor KW. 1 HP = 0.746 KW.

Item 318, MOTOR TYPE - This parameter describes the motor as follows:
0: Toshiba/Houston EQP3 (premium efficiency)
1: Toshiba/Houston High Efficient (standard efficiency)
2: Non-Toshiba/Houston motor

Item 319, MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE - Enter motor nameplate voltage.

Item 320, MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY - Enter motor nameplate frequency.

Item 321, MOTOR RATED RPM - Enter motor nameplate full-load RPM.

Item 322, AUTO-TUNING ENABLE - To auto-tune a motor, enter a "1" here. When the next run is
initiated, the drive performs an autotuning which lasts a fraction of a second. Item 322 is then
reset to "0".

Item 323, LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA - Estimate the load's inertia as folows:
0: Small
1: Medium
2: Large
3: Very large
In the event of an AUTO-TUNING ERROR, try a different inertia level.

9 - 29
 TOSHIBA

Programming Examples

Preset Speed Example

The following example uses "S1" and "S2" terminals to access three preset speeds of 11.0 Hz
(close "S1"-"CC"), 55.0 Hz (close "S2"-"CC"), and 33.7 Hz (close "S1" and "S2" to "CC"). "F"-"CC"
and "ST"-"CC" must be made on the drive's terminal strip. This example assumes drive is
defaulted to factory settings prior to when the following programming is done.

Group Parameter Value

UTILITY PARAMETERS BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS BLIND 1
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED SELECTION 3
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED MODE ACTIVATION 0
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #1 FREQUENCY 11
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #1 OPERATING MODE 0
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #2 FREQUENCY 55
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #2 OPERATING MODE 0
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #3 FREQUENCY 33.7
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS PRESET SPEED #3 OPERATING MODE 0

LOCAL LED must be off to run from terminal strip. See page 9-15 for parameter explanations.

Trim Pot Example

This example uses the "RX" terminal to trim a reference (i.e. a 4-20 mA input) +7/-5 Hz.

Group Parameter Value

UTILITY PARAMETERS BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS BLIND 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS BLIND 1
FEEDBACK PARAMETERS OVERRIDE CONTROL SELECTION 3
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS RX TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 1
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0 %
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS RX REFERENCE POINT #1 FREQUENCY 7 HZ
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 100 %
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS RX REFERENCE POINT #2 FREQUENCY -5 HZ

Motor Operated Pot

The following programming allows a G3 to emulate motor operated pot control. Momentarily
shorting "S1"-"CC" increases frequency reference. Momentarily shorting "S2"-"CC" decreases
frequency reference. Momentarily shorting "S3"-"CC" erases frequency reference. "F"-"CC" and
"ST"-"CC" must be made on the drive's terminal strip. This example assumes drive is defaulted to
factory settings prior to the following programming is done.

Group Parameter Value

UTILITY PARAMETERS BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS BLIND 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS BLIND 1
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS INPUT TERMINAL SELECTION 1
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS "S1" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 34
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS "S2" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 35
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS "S3" INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 36
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 5

The LOCAL LED must be off to run from terminal strip. See pages 9-7 and 9-13 for parameter
explanations.

9 - 30
 TOSHIBA

Programming Examples (con't)

True Torque Control Programming

The G3 can be programmed to utilize True Torque Control (TTC), the benefits of which are slip compensa-
tion and high torque at low speed. In volts per hertz control (or across the line ), a typical AC induction
motor will lose 3-5% of its RPM as it goes from no load to full load; when operated on a G3 in TTC mode,
a motor will slow a maximum of 0.5% of base RPM as it is loaded. Motors operated on volts per hertz
drives cannot develop their rated torque when operated at low frequencies; the same motor operated on a
G3 in TTC mode can typically develop 200% of its rated torque at one Hz.

The G3 divides the motor current it is providing into two components that are ninety degrees out of phase:
the excitation current and the torque current. Excitation current is the part of the total current that develops
the magnetic field in the motor's core. The torque current is the current that does the useful work.
According to the Pythagorean theorem, (total current)2 = (torque current)2 + (excitation current)2. The G3
calculates and controls these currents based on motor models to optimize motor performance.

If a Toshiba/Houston motor is used, the drive will use an on-board motor model. If a generic motor is used,
the drive can be programmed to auto-tune. During auto tuning, the drive derives a motor model by apply-
ing a voltage to the motor and analyzing the resulting decay.

These G3 parameters must be adjusted to use TTC with a TOSHIBA/HOUSTON motor.

Group Parameter Value

UTILITY PARAMETERS BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS MOTOR PARAMETERS BLIND 1
FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN 5
MOTOR PARAMETERS NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR RATED CAPACITY *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR TYPE **
MOTOR PARAMETERS LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA ***

The following parameters must be adjusted to use TTC on the G3 for a GENERIC motor.

Group Parameter Value

UTILITY PARAMETERS BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 1
UTILITY PARAMETERS MOTOR PARAMETERS BLIND 1
FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN 5
MOTOR PARAMETERS NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR RATED CAPACITY *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR TYPE 2
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY *
MOTOR PARAMETERS MOTOR RATED RPM *
MOTOR PARAMETERS AUTO-TUNING ENABLE 1****
MOTOR PARAMETERS LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA ***

* Enter appropriate value from motor's nameplate. KW = 0.746 X HP.

** Enter "0" for an EQPIII or "1" for a high efficiency motor.
*** If the drive displays AUTO TUNE ERROR, try a different inertia setting.
**** The drive will auto tune the next time a run is initiated. This parameter is then reset to "0" by the G3.

9 - 31
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 10: Service

Requesting Service
When requesting service, report the contents of the following problem information sheet.

Problem Information Sheet

Item
Customer's name
Refer to Person in charge
Address
Telephone No.
Inverter Model No.
spec. Serial No.
Test No.
Delivery date
Time in service
Date when problem arose
Use
Motor rating Poles, Hp, V, Hz.
Made by Toshiba? Made by another company?
New? Number of units?
Alternate? Continuous?
Status of Indoor? Outdoor? Temperature range?
Use Ambient Humidity:
condition Dust composition and size:
Presence of salt and extent of corrosion from it:
Vibrations, in micrometers:
Presence of corrosive gas:
Availability of air conditioning:
Number of phases:
Voltage between L1 phase and L2 phase:
Power Voltage between L2 phase and L3 phase:
source Voltage between L3 phase and L1 phase:
Number of Hz:
Problem occurred hours after motor had been started. Motor has
been stopped for hours.
Phenome- State of Problem occurred during periodic inspection?
non motor when Problem occurred when motor was started?
problem was Problem occurred during acceleration?
found Problem occurred during deceleration?
Problem occurred while motor was not running?
Frequency First time? Problem occurred times in the past.
of problem Problem occurs sometimes?
Problem occurs every time motor is operated?
When did problem first occur?
Trouble Indicate LCD Screen Message:
indicator

Detailed description of problem:

Temporary diagnosis and corrective action:

Date defective product shipped: To:

Deadline for repairs:

Only qualified personnel should be allowed to service this equipment.

10 - 1
 TOSHIBA

Parts Service Life

In order to obtain the best performance and to get the maximum service life from
the inverter it is necessary to perform timely maintenance repairs on some parts
of the system even though the equipment may still be functioning with no apparent
problems

Use the following service life chart as a guide for major part periodic replacement
when the equipment is used in a standard installation service environment.

Service Life Replacement Chart

Part Name Service Life Remarks

Large capacity 5 Years To be electrified semiannually in

electrolytic capacitor case of long term disuse.

Cooling Fan 26000 Hours Internal fans

(if applicable)

Contact relays 500,000 operations

Connectors 100 operations Replace pin in case of failure.

10 - 2
 TOSHIBA

Troubleshooting

If the G3 faults, the following questions may help to pinpoint the reason for the trip:
1. Does the drive trip when accelerating, running, decelerating, or when not running ?
2. Can the drive make it to commanded frequency ?
3. Does the drive trip without the motor attached ?
4. Does drive trip with an unloaded motor ?

Drive data at the time of trip is saved in the monitor and can be read until the trip is cleared. Before clear-
ing the trip, make a note of this information. A history of past faults can be viewed by pressing the MON
button and then the down arrow until PAST FAULTs are displayed. Some trips are the result of improper
programming; resetting the drive to factory settings may be a solution (see Item 280, STANDARD SET-
TING MODE SELECTION).

How to clear a fault

1. Cycling power
2. Pressing the STOP/CLEAR button twice
3. Closing "RES"-"CC" on the terminal strip (with default drive programming).

If Item 172, FAULT TRIP EEPROM SAVE ENABLE is set to "1", the drive will power up with the fault
display, but the fault monitor and any fault contacts will be reset. On OVERLOAD trips, reset can occur only
after a cooling time; see explanation for Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION. No cooling time for reset is
required when power is cycled.

RETRY
See Items 153, NUMBER OF RETRY ATTEMPTS and Item 154, TIME BETWEEN RETRY ATTEMPTS to
program drive to automatically attempt to reset faults. Drive will display ATTEMPTING TO RESTART
during retries. See page 9-12 for a list of faults to retry. Retry will not function if Item 172, FAULT TRIP
EEPROM SAVE ENABLE is set to "1" (on).

The keypad, control board (with phone jack), and terminal strip board are common to all ratings of
G3. If a board or keypad is suspect, exchange with a known good board/keypad to verify.

G3 Fault Explanations

OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) or DC OVERCURRENT (ACC)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. ACCELERATION TIME may be too small. VOLTAGE
BOOST may be too high. Is motor/machine jammed? Is mechanical brake engaged while drive is
running? If G3 is starting into a rotating motor, see Item 157, AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR SPEED
SEARCH). If there is a contactor between motor and drive, wire so that contactor changes state
only when drive is outputting 0.0 Hz. Drive will automatically adjust accel time with Item 12, ACC/
DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION set to "1".

OVERCURRENT (DECEL) or DC OVERCURRENT (DEC)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. DECELERATION TIME may be too small. Is motor/
machine jammed? Is mechanical brake engaged while drive is running? Adding appropriate
braking resistor across "PA" and "PB" terminals may solve problem (see page 9-16). Drive will
automatically adjust decel time with Item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION set to "1".

OVERCURRENT (RUN) or DC OVERCURRENT (RUN)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. Is motor/machine jammed? Is mechanical brake
engaged while drive is running? Adding appropriate dynamic braking resistor across "PA" and
"PB" terminals may solve problem (see page 9-16). If there are severe load fluctuations, adding
mechanical dampening or an output line reactor may help to electrically damp.

10 - 3
 TOSHIBA

G3 Fault Explanations (con't)

U-PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT or V PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT or W PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT

Cause: Drive detected short-circuit in transistor.
Comments: Replace transistor. Contact your Toshiba distributor for authorized repair.

LOAD-END OVERCURRENT
Cause: Drive detected short-circuit on output.
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. Meg motor/leads with leads disconnected from
drive. Remove any power factor correction caps on motor. See Item 169, OUTPUT SHORT-
CIRCUIT DETECTION SELECT.

OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) or OVERVOLTAGE (RUN)

Cause: Bus exceeded 393 VDC (230 V G3), 787 VDC (460 V G3), or 1179 VDC (600 V G3).
Comments: Incoming AC may have gone high or spiked (verify with Item 289,290, 291, or 292 set
to "16"); a line reactor or a lower tap on transformer may help. Motor may be mechanically forced
to run faster than drive is commanding; install appropriate dynamic braking resistor (see page 9-
16). On eccentric cyclic loads like presses or pump jacks, contact your Toshiba distributor for
special programming instructions that may make a DBR unnecessary.

OVERVOLTAGE (DEC)
Cause: Bus exceeded 393 VDC (230 V G3), 787 VDC (460 V G3), or 1179 VDC (600 V G3).
Comments: Incoming AC may have gone high or spiked (verify with Item 289 set to "16"); a line
reactor or a lower tap on transformer may help. Item 11, DECELERATION TIME #1 may be too
short. Drive will automatically change decel time with Item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN ADJUST
LOW set to "1". Make sure Item 145, OVERVOLTAGE STALL PROTECTION is set to "0". Motor
may be mechanically forced to run faster than drive is commanding (due to large load inertias
mechanical couplings); install appropriate dynamic braking resistor (see page 9-16). On eccentric
cyclic loads like presses or pump jacks, contact your Toshiba distributor for special programming
instructions that may make a DBR unnecessary.

INVERTER OVERLOAD
Cause: Drive exceeded 110% of its rated current for too long of a time.
Comments: This trip indicates that the G3 output more than its rated current for specific
amounts of time. For example, 100 HP and smaller G3s can output 150% of their rated current for
120 seconds, 130% for 240 seconds, 170% for 3.5 seconds, and 185% for 0.5 seconds. If using
DC Injection, Item 147, DC INJECTION CURRENT MAGNITUDE or Item 148 DC INJECTION
TIME they may be too large. If Item 42, PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY is greater than 8 KHz, try
carrier frequencies less than 8 KHz. Programming Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION to "1" or "3"
(soft stall on) makes the drive reduce output frequency/voltage to shed load (works best on
variable torque applications). Motor or load bearings may have seized. Enabling True Torque
Control (see page 9-31) may reduce drive's current output and solve problem. Make sure that
drive is seeing voltage on all three of its input phases. Drive may be undersized.

MOTOR OVERLOAD
Cause: Motor is in danger of overheating because it drew too much current for too long of a time,
as determined by drive.
Comments: See page 9-17. Check Items 158, 159, 160, and 161. If trip occurred at a low
frequency, the setting of Item 159, OVERLOAD REDUCTION START FREQUENCY is probably
critical. Motor overload protection can be turned off by placing a "2" or "3" in Item 161. Check
value in Item 160, MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME LIMIT.

10 - 4
 TOSHIBA

G3 Fault Explanations (con't)

DBR OVERCURRENT
Cause: IGBT7 (dynamic braking transistor) is damaged
Comments: Check ohm value connected to "PA" and "PB" terminals (see page 9-16 for minimum
ohm values). If using multiple resistors, make sure parallel-series combination is wired correctly.
Check IGBT7. Check DC bus fuse for continuity; if open, check output transistors. Consult
your Toshiba distributor for authorized service.

DBR OVERLOAD
Cause: Dynamic braking resistor is in danger of overheating (as determined by drive).
Comments: Check that the values entered into Item 143, BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE and Item
144, BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING are correct.

OVERHEAT
Cause: Drive's heatsink exceeded 90o C.
Comments: Check drive's muffin fans (if any). Clear heatsinks of anything blocking airflow.
The enclosure that the drive is installed in may be too small or there may be to many heat sources
in the same enclosure. Drive may not have been properly sized for operating altitude. Thermistor
on heatsink may be bad.

EMERGENCY OFF
Cause: Drive received one of the following ESTOP commands:
1. Drive was receiving STOP/START command via terminal strip when STOP button on keypad
was pressed.
2. One of the drive's input terminal's function is set to "10" (see Items 44-55 and page 9-9), and
terminal is being opened/closed to command ESTOP.

EEPROM WRITE FAILURE or EEPROM READ FAILURE

Cause: EEPROM was unable to read/write to peripherals.
Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.) Control board may need to be replaced (part
number 03784). See picture of board on page 5-2.

RAM ERROR or ROM ERROR

Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). Replace control board (part number 03784).
See picture of board on page 5-2.

OPTION ROM ERROR

Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). If drive is energized with option ROM installed
and is later energized without option ROM installed, this fault will appear. Reset in normal fashion.

CPU ERROR
Comments: If option ROM or option board is installed or removed when drive is powered, this
fault will appear. Reset like any fault. Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as
"CC" connected to ground, an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). If the CPU is truly
damaged, the fault will not reset and replacement of the control board (part number 03784) is
necessary. See picture of control board on page 5-2.

COMMUNICATION ERROR
Cause: RS232 or RS485 timer did not respond
Comments: Check wiring to RS232 or RS485 ports. Check setting of Item 264,
COMMUNICATION SELECTION (should be "1" for RS485). Check jumpers J1, J2, and J3 on
RS485 option board (see RS485 Communications Option Manual). Cable may be broken.

10 - 5
 TOSHIBA

G3 Fault Explanations (con't)

OPTION PCB ERROR

Comments: If drive is energized with an option board installed and is later energized without the
board installed, this fault will appear. Check connectors between control board and option board.
Check settings of Item 80, FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1, Item 81, FREQUENCY
PRIORITY SELECTION #2, and Item 264, COMMUNICATION SELECTION. Use stand-offs to
secure board.

LOW CURRENT TRIP

Cause: The drive's output current went below the current value entered in Item 167, LOW
CURRENT DETECT LEVEL for at least the amount of time entered in Item 168, LOW
CURRENT DETECTION TIME.

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP
Cause: The drive's DC bus voltage went below 217 VDC (230 V G3), 413 VDC (460 V G3), or
594 VDC (600 V G3) for at least the time entered in Item 165, UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME.
Comments: Item 164, UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION turns the ability to undervoltage trip
on/off. On G3 models 2080-2110 and 4080-4270, turning on Item 155, REGENERATION POWER
RIDE-THROUGH and adjusting Item 156, REGENERATION RIDE-THROUGH TIME may keep bus
up during brown out if there is sufficient regen energy from the load.

OVERTORQUE TRIP
Cause: The drive's torque current went above the current value programmed in Item 171,
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL. The G3 can be programmed to torque current limit; contact your
Toshiba distributor and request the torque limit application guideline.

EARTH FAULT (SOFT) or EARTH FAULT (HARD)

Cause: Drive detected some current to ground. Depending on rating, drive senses ground fault via
ZCT (hard fault) or Hall CTs (soft fault).
Comments: With leads disconnected from drive, meg motor and leads. Look for any moisture that
may provide current path to ground. Make sure that control wiring is separated from power wiring.
Adding noise supressors on coils of starters on same line as drive may snub noise picked up by
ZCT. RF/EMI filter may help remove noise generated by SCR rectifiers in the vicinity. Make sure
drive chassis and motor are grounded.

AUTO-TUNING ERROR
Cause: Motor's physical characteristics are not within the window of allowable values for modeling.
Comments: Try a different inertia setting in Item 323, LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA. Motor must
be at rest to perform auto-tuning. Motor must be one HP size within the drive's HP size.
Auto-tuning is best done with motor at full-load temperature (if temperature is very cold, auto-tune
error may appear).

GATE ARRAY FAULT

Comments: Replace control board, part number 03784. See picture of board on page 5-2.

CURRENT DETECT ERROR

Comments: Occurs when drive is stopped but CPU detects current flowing. This fault could be
caused by plugging in RS232 cable with drive powered (resulting in damage to control board).
Adding a RF/EMI filter may remove noise spikes from nearby SCR rectifiers. If damaged, replace
control board, part number 03784. See picture of board on page 5-2.

INV TYPEFORM ERROR

Cause: Control board is not configured to drive's rating.
Comments: Enter "7" into Item 280, STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION.

10 - 6
 TOSHIBA

G3 Warning Explanations

DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE
Cause: The drive's DC bus voltage went below approximately 200 VDC (230 V G3), 395 VDC
(460 V G3), or 595 VDC (600 V G3) for at least the time entered in Item 165,
UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME.
Comments: Item 164, UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION turns the ability to undervoltage trip
on/off.

CONTROL POWER LOW

Control Power low warning voltage levels are sensed on DC bus and are set slightly less than DC
BUS UNDERVOLTAGE levels.

OVERLOAD
A flashing overcurrent display means that the drive is outputting more than 110% of its rated
current. If Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION is set to "1" or "3" (soft stall on), the drive's output
frequency will automatically decrease in an effort to reduce current. See suggestions for
remedying an inverter overload trip on page 10-4. Setting one of the monitor's functions (Items
289-292) to "10" will give an indication of how close a drive is to tripping.

OVERCURRENT
A flashing overcurrent display means that the drive is stalling. (Stall level is set by Item 160,
STALL PROTECTION CURRENT LEVEL). The drive's output frequency will automatically
decrease.

OVERVOLTAGE
A flashing overvoltage display means that the drive's DC bus has exceeded 360 VDC (230 V G3),
720 VDC (460 V G3), or 1034 VDC (600 V G3).

OVERHEAT
A flashing overheat display means that the drive's heat sink temperature has exceeded 84oC.
Display dissappears when heatsink temperature reaches 80oC.

COMM
A flashing comm display means that the drive has momentarily lost communications. Display will
clear when follower receives valid reference. Cycling power or reinitializing drive will clear warning.

10 - 7
 TOSHIBA
SECTION 11: Dimensions/Weights
Basic Dimensions for NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 chassis G3s
F
F 2-"H" DIA.
2-"H" DIA.

DE A
D E A

B .27 C
2-SLOT "G" DIA. B .25 C
2-SLOT "G" DIA.

FIGURE 1 FIGURE 2

DIMENSIONS in inches(millimeters)
MODEL FIG A B C D E F G H
VT130G3U2010 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2015 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2025 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2035 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2055 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2080 1 17.88(454) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 17.13(435) 17.38(441) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U2110 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U2160 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U2220 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U2270 2 23.63(600) 17.25(438) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4015 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4025 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4035 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4055 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4080 1 12.13(308) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 11.38(289) 11.63(295) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4110 1 17.88(454) 8.66(220) 7.44(189) 17.13(435) 17.38(441) 7.69(195) .28(7) .28(7)
VT130G3U4160 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4220 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4270 2 18.75(476) 14.25(362) 9.81(249) 17.09(434) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4330 2 23.63(600) 17.25(438) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4400 2 23.63(600) 17.25(438) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U4500 2 23.63(600) 17.25(438) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .38(10) .38(10)

NOTES:
1) NEMA 12 part numbers add suffix "N12".
2) NEMA 12 chassis available for FIGURE 2 drives only. NEMA 1 and NEMA 12 dimensions are the same

11 - 1
 TOSHIBA

Basic Dimensions for NEMA 1 Chassis G3s (con't)

F
F 2-"H" DIA. 2-"H" DIA.

D E A
D E A

B .27 C
2-SLOT "G" DIA. .25
B C

2-SLOT "G" DIA.

FIGURE 3 FIGURE 4

DIMENSIONS in inches(millimeters)
MODEL FIG A B C D E F G H
VT130G3U2330 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U4600 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U4750 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U410K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U412K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U415K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U420K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U425K 4 59.94(1522) 25.88(657) 14.47(368) 57.00(1448) 58.75(1492) 11.81(300) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U6060 3 18.75(476) 14.38(365) 9.94(252) 17.13(435) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U6120 3 20.75(527) 14.38(365) 9.94(252) 17.13(435) 18.09(459) 11.25(286) .38(10) .38(10)
VT130G3U6160 3 23.63(600) 17.38(441) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .50(13) .50(13)
VT130G3U6220 3 23.63(600) 17.38(441) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .50(13) .50(13)
VT130G3U6270 3 23.63(600) 17.38(441) 11.50(292) 21.63(549) 22.75(578) 14.25(362) .50(13) .50(13)
VT130G3U6330 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U6400 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U6500 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U6600 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U6750 3 36.50(927) 19.25(489) 13.56(344) 33.88(861) 35.34(898) 12.63(321) .63(16) .63(16)
VT130G3U610K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U612K 3 57.00(1448) 19.25(489) 13.16(334) 54.16(1376) 55.81(1418) 12.63(321) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U615K 4 59.94(1522) 25.88(657) 14.47(368) 57.04(1449) 58.75(1492) 11.81(300) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U620K 4 59.94(1522) 25.88(657) 14.47(368) 57.04(1449) 58.75(1492) 11.81(300) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U625K 4 59.94(1522) 25.88(657) 14.47(368) 57.04(1449) 58.75(1492) 11.81(300) .69(18) .69(18)

11 - 2
 TOSHIBA

Basic Dimensions for NEMA 1 Chassis G3

2-"H" DIA.
F

D E A

B .27 C
2-SLOT "G" DIA.

FIGURE 5

DIMENSIONS in inches(millimeters)
MODEL FIG A B C D E F G H
VT130G3U430K 5 73.00(1854) 24.00(610) 20.00(508) 68.00(610) 71.00(1727) 16.00(406) .69(18) .69(18)
VT130G3U435K 5 73.00(1854) 24.00(610) 20.00(508) 68.00(610) 71.00(1727) 16.00(406) .69(18) .69(18)

11 - 3
 TOSHIBA

Dimensions for NEMA 4 G3 Chassis

F 2 - 0.28"(7mm) DIA

>
D E A

B
<

2-SLOT 0.28"(7mm) DIA

FIGURE 6

DIMENSIONS in inches (millimeters)

MODEL FIG A B C D E F
VT130G3U4015N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U4025N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U4035N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U4055N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U4080N4 6 18.38(467) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 17.31 (440) 17.75(451) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U4110N4 6 18.38(467) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 17.31 (440) 17.75(451) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2010N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2015N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2025N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2035N4 6 12.63(321) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 11.56 (294) 12.00(305) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2055N4 6 18.38(467) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 17.31 (440) 17.75(451) 7.69 (195)
VT130G3U2080N4 6 18.38(467) 8.84(225) 7.44(189) 17.31 (440) 17.75(451) 7.69 (195)

11 - 4
 TOSHIBA

Shipping Weights

G3 Shipping Weight G3 Shipping Weigh G3 Shipping Weight

Model Pounds Kg Model Pounds Kg Model Pounds Kg
2010 15 6.8 4015 19 8.6 2110N12 53 24.1
2015 17 7.7 4025 20 9.1 2160N12 55 25
2025 17 7.7 4035 20 9.1 2220N12 56 25.5
2035 17 7.7 4055 23 10.5 2270N12 101 45.9
2055 19 8.6 4080 24 10.9 4160N12 57 25.9
2080 31 14.1 4110 32 14.5 4220N12 58 26.4
2110 51 23.2 4160 55 25 4270N12 60 27.3
2160 53 24.1 4220 56 25.5 4330N12 106 48.2
2220 54 24.5 4270 58 26.4 4400N12 109 49.5
2270 98 44.5 4330 103 46.8 4500N12 113 51.4
2330 178 80.9 4400 106 48.2 2010N4 16 7.3
6060 20 9 4500 110 50 2015N4 18 8.2
6120 61 28 4600 210 95.5 2025N4 18 8.2
6160 65 30 4750 215 97.7 2035N4 18 8.2
6220 67 31 410K 305 138.6 2055N4 31 14
6270 110 50 412K 315 143.2 2080N4 31 14
6330 110 50 415K 336 152.7 4015N4 20 9
6400 111 51 420K 359 163.2 4025N4 21 9.5
6500 190 86 425K 491 223.2 4035N4 21 9.5
6600 196 89 430K 681 309.5 4055N4 24 10.9
6750 200 91 435K 697 316.8 4080N4 32 14.5
610K 302 137 4110N4 32 14.5
612K 304 138
615K 310 141
620K 440 200
625K 448 204

11 - 5
 TOSHIBA
G3 Options
A number of option accessories are available for the G3 series of inverters and can be purchased from
your authorized Toshiba distributor or representative. If you need assistance finding a source for Toshiba
products in your area, consult Toshiba at 1-800-231-1412.

Product TOSHIBA P/N

NEMA 12 chassis G3 VT130G3U _ _ _ _ N12

NEMA 4 chassis G3 VT130G3U _ _ _ _ N4

Chassis fan/filter kits VT130G3-T12CON8 (60-75 HP)

VT130G3-T12CON9 (100-200 HP)

G3 extender box (breaker, NEMA 1 enclosure) FXG3- _ _ _ _

G3 extender box (breaker, bypass, NEMA 1 enclosure) EXG3- _ _ _ _

G3 build-up (custom controls and enclosures) ESPG3- _ _ _ _

RS232 programming software (free) consult distributor

120 VAC digital input option G3-INP

120 VAC digital input option (extended capability) G3-ACI

RS485 Communication Board (38.4 Kbaud) INV3-COM-C

(19.2 Kbaud) INV3-COM-A

Extended Terminal Option Board INV3-COM-D

(Offers speed feedback control, 3 additional programmable inputs,
1 additional programmable Form C relay, pulse input capability)

RS485 Extended Terminal Option Board INV3-COM-B

(Offers same capabilities as INV3-COM-D plus 19.2 K baud RS485
communication)

Modbus+* network communication board INV3-MODPLUS

Remote I/O* network communication board INV3-RIO

DeviceNet* network communication board INV3-DEVICENET

BCD/12-bit binary input option board G3-VFSX-4526A

Toshiba F-10 network communication board G3-VF5X-1254A

Toshiba S-20 network communication board G3-VF5X-1255A

Input fuse adapter kit

(required to internally mount input fuses in G3U2110-2220 and INV3-FUSE-KIT
G3U4160-4270 drives). Fuses not included.

Isolated 4-20 mA input/output board consult distributor

Long Lead Filters GCIMLL _ _ _ _ _

RF/EMI Filters 3H _ _ _ DF

* Modbus+ is a trademark of Modicon Inc. Remote I/O is a trademark of Allen Bradley Co. Inc. Device Net is a trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association Inc.

11 - 6
 TOSHIBA
G3 Options (con't)

Product TOSHIBA P/N

Option ROM: Traverse Control (for 230/460 volt drives) INV3-ROM-6200

Keypad extender cables 3 foot length SX-CABLE-1M

9 foot length SX-CABLE-3M
15 foot length SX-CABLE-5M
Kit to secure extender cable to keypad INV3-MKIT
Kit to secure extender cable to G3 INV3-BKPANEL

Dynamic Braking Resitors PBR- _ _ _ _ - _ _

Input Fuses Contact Toshiba distributor

DC Link Reactor INV3-DCL- _ _ _ _

Remote Stations (custom stop/start, metering, etc.) VT-REMOTE- _ _ _

Additional G3 documentation available

RS232 Inverter/PC Communications Software Manual (for the free software)

Industrial Application Manual (contains information on the G3's application macros)

RS232C Communications Manual (protocol information)

Application Guidelines
(programming examples such as dancer control, three-wire start, pattern run, and PID)

Devicenet Communications Option Manual

RS485 Communications Manual (protocol information)

Extended Teminal Block Option Manual

Traverse Option ROM Instruction Manual

Modbus+ Communications Option Manual

Cutout Dimensions for Keypad and Cable Securing Kit (INV3-MKIT)

5.19"
< >
Holes are 1/4" diameter.
< >
4.25"
>

>
>

5.38" 4.20"
4.80"
>

>
>

5.50"
< >

11 - 7
 TOSHIBA

INDEX
A
Acc/dec #1/#2 switch frequency ................................................................................................ 8-2, 9-5
Acc/Dec complete detection bandwidth .................................................................................... 8-6, 9-13
Acc/dec pattern #1 selection ...................................................................................................... 8-1, 9-4
Acc/dec pattern #2 selection ...................................................................................................... 8-2, 9-5
Acc/dec pattern adjust high ....................................................................................................... 8-1, 9-5
Acc/dec pattern adjust low ......................................................................................................... 8-1, 9-5
Acc/dec selection ............................................................................................................ 8-2, 9-6
Acc/dec time units selection .................................................................................................... 8-30, 9-27
Acceleration time ................................................................................................................ 9-4
Acceleration time #1 ............................................................................................................ 8-1, 9-3
Acceleration time #2 ............................................................................................................ 8-2, 9-5
Adjustment range (parameters) ............................................................................................. 8-1 thru 8-32
After sales service ............................................................................................................... 10-1
Alarm setting for cumulative run timer ..................................................................................... 8-15, 9-19
AM terminal function selection ................................................................................................. 8-27, 9-25
AM/FM terminal adjustment parameters ....................................................................................... 8-27
Ammeter adjustment .......................................................................................................... 8-27, 9-25
Ampacity ........................................................................................................... 3-1 to 3-3
Analog input filter ........................................................................................................... 8-8, 9-14
Analog meter adjustment .............................................................................................................. 9-25
Auto-restart .......................................................................................................... 8-14, 9-17
Auto-tuning enable .......................................................................................................... 8-32, 9-29

B
Bandwidth Acc/Dec detection ........................................................................................................ 8-6
Bandwidth of jump frequency #1 thru #3 ........................................................................................ 8-4
Base frequency #1 ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Base frequency #2 ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Base frequency voltage select ....................................................................................................... 8-1
Basic operation ......................................................................................................... 7-1 thru 7-4
Baud rates ............................................................................................................... 8-24
Bearing considerations ................................................................................................................ 4-7
Bias/Gain adjustments ............................................................................................................... 9-14
Binary input selection ................................................................................................................ 8-9
Binary reference point frequency ................................................................................................... 8-9
Binary reference pt. setting ............................................................................................................ 8-9
Blind function selection ........................................................................................................... 8-31, 9-2
Blind/unblind function parameters ............................................................................................. 8-31, 9-2
Braking resistor selection ........................................................................................................ 8-13, 9-16
Braking selection (dynamic) ..................................................................................................... 8-13, 9-15

C
Capacitors (PF) precautions .......................................................................................................... 2-2
Capacity of motor rating ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Carrier frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Catch spinning motor ............................................................................................................... 9-17
CEC requirements ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Circuit board (control) ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Circuit board (main) ................................................................................................................ 5-1
Circuit board (terminal) ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Circuit breaker size (MCCB) .......................................................................................................... 4-3

12 - 1
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
C (con't)
Clearances ................................................................................................................ 2-1
Coast stop ................................................................................................................ 7-2
Codes (regulatory) ................................................................................................................ 2-1
Color (cabinet) ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Command mode selection ....................................................................................................... 8-28, 9-25
Commercial power switching output .............................................................................................. 8-6
Communication selection .............................................................................................................. 8-24
Communication setting parameters ...................................................................................... 8-24 thru 8-25
Confirmation (wiring) ................................................................................................................ 2-3
Connection diagrams ........................................................................................................... 4-1 to 4-3
Continue mode for speeds #1 thru #15 ................................................................................. 8-19 thru 8-21
Control system ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Conveyor application parameters ................................................................................................. 8-26
Cooling fan control ............................................................................................................... 8-15
Cooling method ................................................................................................................ 3-4
CPU version ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Cumulative run timer alarm setting ............................................................................................... 8-15
Current level of stall protection ..................................................................................................... 8-14
Current units selection ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Cutout, keypad ............................................................................................................... 11-7
D
Dancer ............................................................................................................... 11-7
Data bits (number) ............................................................................................................... 8-24
DC injection braking start frequency ............................................................................................. 8-13
DC injection current ............................................................................................................... 8-13
DC injection time ............................................................................................................... 8-13
Deceleration time #1 ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Deceleration time #2 ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Delay time FL output ................................................................................................................ 8-6
Delay time LOW output ................................................................................................................ 8-6
Delay time OUT output ................................................................................................................ 8-6
Delay time RCH output ................................................................................................................ 8-5
Detection bandwidth Acc/Dec ........................................................................................................ 8-6
Detection level for low current ...................................................................................................... 8-14
Detection time for low current ....................................................................................................... 8-14
Detection time for undervoltage .................................................................................................... 8-14
Differential gain ............................................................................................................... 8-22
Dimensions ............................................................................................................... 11-1
Dimensions, keypad cutout ........................................................................................................... 11-7
DIP switch SW1 ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Direction selection ................................................................................................................ 8-3
Display ................................................................................................................ 6-1
Disposal ................................................................................................................ 1-1
Drive time for speeds #1 thru #15 ........................................................................................... 8-19 to 8-21
Drooping control and amount........................................................................................................ 8-22
Dynamic braking ............................................................................................................... 8-13
E
EEPROM version ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Electronic thermal protection level #2 ............................................................................................ 8-2
EMC (European electro-magnetic compatibility) ............................................................................ 2-5
Emergency off ........................................................................................................... 8-13, 7-2

12 - 2
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
E (cont'd)
Emergency stop selection ............................................................................................................ 8-13
Enclosure ............................................................................................................... 11-1
End frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Error messages ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Examples, connection ................................................................................................................ 4-8
Examples,programming ............................................................................................................... 9-30
Exceeding motor peak voltage ...................................................................................................... 4-7
Excitation current ............................................................................................................... 9-31
F
F terminal function ............................................................................................................ 8-5, 5-2
Factory settings (parameters) .................................................................................................. 8-1 to 8-32
Failsafe inputs ................................................................................................................ 9-9
Fan application parameters .......................................................................................................... 8-26
Fan control selection ............................................................................................................... 8-15
Fault clearing ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Fault explanations ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Fault trip saving enable ............................................................................................................... 8-15
Feedback control selection ........................................................................................................... 8-22
Feedback input signal selection .................................................................................................... 8-22
Feedback parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-22 thru 8-23
Filter chart (EMC) ................................................................................................................ 2-5
FM terminal function selection ...................................................................................................... 8-27
Forward/reverse switching ...................................................................................................... 7-1, 7-2, 8-3
FP output terminal ............................................................................................................ 8-7, 5-2
Frequency accuracy ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Frequency command value setting ................................................................................................ 7-1
Frequency display resolution ........................................................................................................ 8-30
Frequency meter adjustment ........................................................................................................ 8-27
Frequency mode selection ............................................................................................................ 8-28
Frequency priority selection ........................................................................................................... 8-8
Frequency rating of motor ............................................................................................................. 8-32
Frequency setting mode selection ................................................................................................ 8-28
Frequency setting parameters ................................................................................................. 8-8 to 8-12
Frequency setting resolution .......................................................................................................... 3-4
Frequency units scale factor ......................................................................................................... 8-30
Function selection FL output .......................................................................................................... 8-6
Function selection LOW output ...................................................................................................... 8-6
Function selection OUT output ...................................................................................................... 8-6
Function selection RCH output ...................................................................................................... 8-5
Functions (key) ................................................................................................................ 6-2
Fundamental parameter selection ................................................................................................. 8-3
Fundamental parameters #1 .......................................................................................................... 8-1
Fundamental parameters #2 .......................................................................................................... 8-2
Fwd/Rev DC injection priority control ............................................................................................ 8-13
G
Groups ................................................................................................................ 9-1
Grounding ................................................................................................................ 4-7
H
Hoist application parameters ........................................................................................................ 8-26
Hold time FL output ............................................................................................................ 8-6, 5-2
Hold time LOW output ............................................................................................................ 8-6, 5-2
Hold time OUT output ................................................................................................................ 8-6

12 - 3
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
H (cont'd)
Hold time RCH output ............................................................................................................ 8-5, 5-2
Humidity (relative) ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Hysteresis of run frequency ........................................................................................................... 8-4
I
Incoming power switching frequency ............................................................................................. 8-6
Industrial application parameters .................................................................................................. 8-26
Industrial parameters selection ..................................................................................................... 8-28
Injection braking ............................................................................................................... 8-13
Input filter ................................................................................................................ 8-8
Input selection for binary input ....................................................................................................... 8-9
Input selection for terminal IV .................................................................................................... 8-9, 5-2
Input selection for PG input ........................................................................................................... 8-9
Input selection for terminal RR ................................................................................................... 8-8, 5-2
Input selection for terminal RX ................................................................................................... 8-8, 5-2
Input impedance ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Input signals ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Input terminal selection ................................................................................................................ 8-5
Inspection of new unit ................................................................................................................ 1-1
Installation precautions ........................................................................................................... 2-1 to 2-2
Integral gain ............................................................................................................... 8-22
Inverter number ............................................................................................................... 8-24
Inverter trip codes ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Inverter typeform ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Isolation ................................................................................................................ 2-3
IV input selection ............................................................................................................ 8-8, 5-2
IV reference point frequency .......................................................................................................... 8-8
IV reference point setting ............................................................................................................... 8-8
J
Jog run frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-9
Jog run mode ................................................................................................................ 7-1
Jog stop control ................................................................................................................ 8-9
Jump frequency enable ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Jumpers JP3, JP4 ................................................................................................................ 5-2
K
Key functions ................................................................................................................ 6-2
Keys ............................................................................................................. 6-1,6-2
L
Lag time constant ............................................................................................................... 8-22
Language selection ................................................................................................................ 7-2
LED charge indicator ................................................................................................................ 5-2
LED local/remote indicator ............................................................................................................ 6-1
Level for overtorque trip ............................................................................................................... 8-15
Load moment of inertia ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Lockout cancellation ............................................................................................................... 9-26
Low current detection level ........................................................................................................... 8-14
Low current detection selection .................................................................................................... 8-14
Low current detection time ............................................................................................................ 8-14
Low speed signal output frequency ............................................................................................... 8-6
Lower limit frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Lower limit frequency (PID) .......................................................................................................... 8-22
Lug capacity ................................................................................................................ 4-4

12 - 4
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
M
Machine tools application parameters .......................................................................................... 8-26
Magnetic contactors (output) ......................................................................................................... 2-2
Maintenance ................................................................................................................ 2-4
Master/slave selection ............................................................................................................... 8-24
Maximum output frequency ........................................................................................................... 8-1
Maximum output voltage #1 ........................................................................................................... 8-1
Maximum output voltage #2 ........................................................................................................... 8-2
MCCB precautions ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Meter adjustment ............................................................................................................... 9-23
Mode activation of preset speeds ................................................................................................. 8-10
Mode of operating speeds 1 to 15 .......................................................................................... 8-10 to 8-12
Monitor messages ................................................................................................................ 7-3
MOP ............................................................................................................ 9-9,9-30
Motor OL time limit ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Motor parameters ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor poles ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor rated capacity ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor rated frequency ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor rated RPM ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor rated voltage ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Motor selection application ........................................................................................................... .4-7
Motor shaft stationary control ....................................................................................................... 8-13
Motor speed search ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Motor type ............................................................................................................... 8-32
N
NEC requirements ................................................................................................................ 4-6
NEMA enclosures ........................................................................................... 3-1 to 3-3, 11-1 to 11-3
Number of data bits ............................................................................................................... 8-24
Number of inverter (identifier) ....................................................................................................... 8-24
Number of motor poles ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Number of preset speeds ............................................................................................................. 8-10
O
OL reduction start frequency ........................................................................................................ 8-14
OL time limit ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Operating mode preset speeds 1 thru 15.............................................................................. 8-10 thru 8-12
Operating panel ............................................................................................................ 6-1, 6-2
Options ............................................................................................................... 11-6
Output fault detection ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Output frequency ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Output short-circuit detection ........................................................................................................ 8-14
Output signals ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Output contact functions ............................................................................................................... 9-11
Output voltage regulation ............................................................................................................... 3-4
Overload protection ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Overload selection ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Override change multiplier ............................................................................................................ 8-23
Override control selection ............................................................................................................. 8-23
Override multiplier selection ......................................................................................................... 8-23
Overtorque trip selection............................................................................................................... 8-15
Overvoltage stall protection .......................................................................................................... 8-13

12 - 5
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
P
Panel control parameters............................................................................................................... 8-3
Panel feedback control ................................................................................................................ 8-3
Panel keys ................................................................................................................ 6-2
Panel layout ................................................................................................................ 6-1
Panel lockout cancellation ............................................................................................................ 9-26
Panel operation mode selection .................................................................................................... 8-28
Panel reset selection ................................................................................................................ 8-3
Parallel conductors ................................................................................................................ 4-6
Parameter explanations .......................................................................................................... 9-1 to 9-29
Parameters adjustment range ................................................................................................. 8-1 to 8-32
Parameters changed from factory default ...................................................................................... 9-2
Parameters factory settings ..................................................................................................... 8-1 to 8-32
Parity ............................................................................................................... 8-24
Pass number ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Pattern groups number of cycles .......................................................................................... 8-16 thru 8-18
Pattern groups preset speed selections ................................................................................ 8-16 thru 8-18
Pattern run continue mode ........................................................................................................... 8-16
Pattern run control parameters ............................................................................................... 8-16 to 8-21
Pattern run selection ............................................................................................................... 8-16
PG input (number of pulses and phases) ..................................................................................... 8-22
PG input selection ................................................................................................................ 8-9
PG reference point frequency ........................................................................................................ 8-9
PG reference point setting ............................................................................................................. 8-9
PID deviation of upper and lower limit ........................................................................................... 8-22
PID deviations limit activation ....................................................................................................... 8-22
Potential terminal function ............................................................................................................. 8-5
Power factor improvement precautions ......................................................................................... 2-2
Power/inverter switching frequency ............................................................................................... 8-6
Power/inverter switching output ..................................................................................................... 8-6
Precautions ............................................................................................................ 2-1, 2-2
Preset frequency for speeds 1 thru 15 .................................................................................... 8-10 to 8-12
Preset speed mode activation ...................................................................................................... 8-10
Preset speed selection ............................................................................................................... 8-10
Preset speeds operating mode 1 thru 15 ................................................................................ 8-10 to 8-12
Program mode ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Proportional gain ............................................................................................................... 8-22
Protection parameters ......................................................................................................... 8-13 to 8-15
Protective functions ................................................................................................................ 3-2
Pulse frequency selection .............................................................................................................. 8-7
Pump application parameters ....................................................................................................... 8-26
PWM carrier frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Q
Qualified person ................................................................................................................. iii
R
R terminal finction ............................................................................................................ 8-5, 5-2
Rated frequency of motor ............................................................................................................. 8-32
Rated RPM of motor ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Rated voltage of motor ............................................................................................................... 8-32

12 - 6
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
R (cont'd)
Regeneration power ride-through ................................................................................................. 8-14
Regulatory codes ............................................................................................................ 2-1, 4-6
Requesting service ............................................................................................................... 10-1
RES terminal function ................................................................................................................ 8-5
Resetting factory parameters ........................................................................................................ 8-28
Resistor value for dynamic braking ............................................................................................... 9-16
Response time selection input ....................................................................................................... 8-5
Retry ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Retry selection (number of attempts) ............................................................................................ 8-13
Retry time selection ............................................................................................................... 8-13
Retryable faults ............................................................................................................... 9-12
Reverse operation disable select ................................................................................................... 8-1
Reverse run ....................................................................................................... 7-1,7-2,5-2,8-3
Ride-through control ............................................................................................................... 8-14
ROM version ............................................................................................................... 8-30
RPM rating of motor ............................................................................................................... 8-32
RR input selection ................................................................................................................ 8-8
RR input terminal ............................................................................................................. 8-7,5-2
RR reference point frequency ........................................................................................................ 8-8
RR reference point setting ............................................................................................................. 8-8
RS232 baud rate ............................................................................................................... 8-24
RS485 baud rate ............................................................................................................... 8-24
RS485/12-bit binary bias, gain activation ...................................................................................... 8-25
RS485/12-bit binary frequency setting .......................................................................................... 8-25
RS485/12-bit binary point setting .................................................................................................. 8-25
Run frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Run frequency for jog ................................................................................................................ 8-9
Run/stop commands ............................................................................................................... 9-25
RX input selection ................................................................................................................ 8-8
RX reference point frequency ........................................................................................................ 8-8
RX reference point setting ............................................................................................................. 8-8
S
S1 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S2 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S3 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S4 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S5 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S6 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
S7 terminal ................................................................................................................ 8-5
Scale factor ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Searching ................................................................................................................ 9-2
Secondary magnetic contactors (MC) ........................................................................................... 2-2
Service after sales ............................................................................................................... 10-1
Service environment ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Service life ............................................................................................................... 10-2
Shipping weights ............................................................................................................... 11-5
Short-circuit detection on output ................................................................................................... 8-14
Signal isolation ................................................................................................................ 2-2
Special control parameters ............................................................................................................ 8-4
Special RR input function selection ........................................................................................... 8-7, 5-2
Speed #1 thru #15 drive continue mode ................................................................................. 8-19 to 8-21
Speed #1 thru #15 drive time .................................................................................................. 8-19 to 8-21

12 - 7
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
S (con't)
Speed reach frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-6
Speeds 1 thru 15 preset frequency ......................................................................................... 8-10 to 8-12
ST terminal function ................................................................................................................ 8-5
Stall protection ............................................................................................................... 8-13
Stall protection current level ......................................................................................................... 8-14
Stall protection enable ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Stall protection level #2 ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Stall protection selection #2 ........................................................................................................... 8-2
Standard setting mode selection ................................................................................................... 8-28
Standard specifications ........................................................................................................... 3-4 to 3-5
Start-up ................................................................................................................ 2-4
Start-up frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-4
Start-up frequency OL reduction ................................................................................................... 8-14
Stationary control ............................................................................................................... 8-13
Stop control for jog ................................................................................................................ 8-9
Stop pattern selection ................................................................................................................ 8-3
Storage ................................................................................................................ 1-1
Switch SW1 (DIP) ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Switching forward/reverse during run ............................................................................................ 7-1
T
Temperature (ambient) ................................................................................................................ 3-5
Terminal strip (control) ................................................................................................................ 5-2
Terminal functions ........................................................................................................... 5-3 to 5-5
Terminal identification ........................................................................................................... 5-3 to 5-5
Terminal location ........................................................................................................... 5-3 to 5-5
Terminal selection parameters ................................................................................................. 8-5 to 8-7
Textiles application parameters .................................................................................................... 8-26
Thermal protection ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Three wire control ................................................................................................................ 9-9
Time of ride-through ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Time units selection for Acc/dec ................................................................................................... 8-30
Torque current ........................................................................................................... 9-27,9-31
Tosline F10/S20 command input .................................................................................................. 8-24
Tosline F10/S20 communication error mode ................................................................................ 8-25
Tosline F10/S20 monitor output .................................................................................................... 8-25
Transistor type ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Trim ............................................................................................................... 9-22
Trip clear command ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Trip codes ............................................................................................................... 10-3
Trip saving on fault enable ............................................................................................................ 8-15
Trip selection for undervoltage...................................................................................................... 8-14
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 10-3
True Torque Control ............................................................................................................... 9-31
Type of motor ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Typeform ............................................................................................................... 8-30
U
Unblind/blind function parameters ................................................................................................ 8-31
Unblinding ................................................................................................................ 9-2
Undercurrent ............................................................................................................... 8-14
Undervoltage detection time ......................................................................................................... 8-14
Undervoltage trip selection ........................................................................................................... 8-14
Unlock combination ............................................................................................................... 8-30

12 - 8
 TOSHIBA

INDEX (cont'd)
U
Unusual service conditions ............................................................................................................ 4-5
Upper limit frequency ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Utility parameters ......................................................................................................... 8-28 to 8-31
V
Vibration ................................................................................................................ 3-3
Voltage boost #1 ................................................................................................................ 8-1
Voltage boost #2 ................................................................................................................ 8-2
Voltage rating of motor ............................................................................................................... 8-32
Voltage units selection ............................................................................................................... 8-30
Volts/Hertz pattern ................................................................................................................ 8-1
W
Weights (shipping) ............................................................................................................... 11-5
Wire size for control and signal circuit ........................................................................................... 4-4
Wire size for grounding ................................................................................................................ 4-7
Wire size for main and motor power .............................................................................................. 4-4
Wiring confirmation ................................................................................................................ 2-3

12 - 9
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 West Little York Rd., Houston Texas 77041
Tel: [800] 231-1412 Fax: [713] 466-8773 Telex: 762078
World Wide Web http://www.tic.toshiba.com

Printed in U.S.A.
 ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE
TRUE TORQUE CONTROL SERIES

460 Volt Ratings Plus-Pack

ADDENDUM MANUAL

February, 2003
Part #50229-002
 TOSHIBA

IMPORTANT NOTICE
The instructions contained in this manual are not intended to cover all of the details
or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency
to be met in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Should
additional information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not
covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, please contact your local
authorized Toshiba distributor.

The contents of this instruction manual shall not become a part of or modify any
prior or existing agreement, commitment, or relationship. The sales contract
contains the entire obligation of Toshiba International Corporation's Adjustable
Speed Drive Division. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Toshiba International Corporation's Adjustable Speed Drive
Division and any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.

Toshiba International Corporation reserves the right, without prior notice, to update
information, make product changes, or to discontinue any product or service
identified in this publication.

Any electrical or mechanical modification to this equipment,

without prior written consent of Toshiba International
Corporation, will void all warranties and may void UL listing.

AC ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE

Please complete the Extended Warranty Card supplied with this inverter and return
it by prepaid mail to Toshiba. This activates the extended warranty. If additional
information or technical assistance is required, call Toshiba's marketing department
toll free at (800) 231-1412 or write to: Toshiba International Corporation, 13131 W.
Little York Road, Houston, TX 77041-9990.

For your records, complete the following information about the drive with which this
manual was shipped.

G3 Plus-Pack Model Number:

G3 Plus-Pack Serial Number:

Date of Installation:

Inspected By:

Name of Application:

i
 TOSHIBA

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the G3 Plus-Pack adjustable speed drive. This adjustable frequency solid-state
AC drive features "True Torque Control" - Toshiba's 'vector algorithm' that enables motors to develop high
starting torque and compensates for motor slip. The drive also features a forty-character LCD display,
RS232 port, dynamic braking transistor, and ground fault, overload, and overcurrent protection. These
features, combined with built-in special control features such as PID, drooping, trim, and dancer control,
make the Plus-Pack suitable for a wide variety of applications and provides unparalleled motor control
and reliability.

It is the intent of this Plus-Pack addendum manual to be used along with the G3 operation manual to
provide a guide for safely installing, operating, and maintaining the drive. This addendum manual also
contains the section of general safety instructions and is marked throughout with warning symbols.
Read this addendum manual and the operation manual thoroughly before installing and operating
this electrical equipment.

All safety warnings must be followed to ensure personal safety.

Follow all precautions to attain proper equipment performance and longevity.

We hope that you find this operation manual informative and easy to use. For assistance with your G3
Plus-Pack, for information on our free drive application school, or for information on Toshiba's complete
line of motors, adjustable speed drives, switchgear, instrumentation, uninterruptable power sup-
plies, PLCs, and motor control products, please contact your local Toshiba distributor or call toll free
(800) 231-1412. You may also write to our plant at: Toshiba International Corporation, 13131 W. Little
York Road, Houston, TX 77041-9990.

Again, thank you for your purchase of this product.

COPYRIGHT © [SEPT, 1999] TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

ii
 TOSHIBA

GENERAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Warnings in this manual appear in either of two ways:

1) Danger warnings - The danger warning symbol is an exclamation mark enclosed in a

triangle which precedes the 3/16" high letters spelling the word "DANGER". The
Danger warning symbol is used to indicate situations, locations, and conditions that
can cause serious injury or death:

DANGER
2) Caution warnings - The caution warning symbol is an exclamation mark enclosed in a
triangle which precedes the 3/16" high letters spelling the word "CAUTION". The
Caution warning symbol is used to indicate situations and conditions that can cause
operator injury and/or equipment damage:

CAUTION
Other warning symbols may appear along with the Danger and Caution symbol and are used to specify
special hazards. These warnings describe particular areas where special care and/or procedures are
required in order to prevent serious injury and possible death:

1) Electrical warnings - The electrical warning symbol is a lighting bolt mark enclosed in
a triangle. The Electrical warning symbol is used to indicate high voltage locations and
conditions that may cause serious injury or death if the proper precautions are not
observed:

2) Explosion warnings - The explosion warning symbol is an explosion mark enclosed in

a triangle. The Explosion warning symbol is used to indicate locations and conditions
where molten, exploding parts may cause serious injury or death if the proper
precautions are not observed:

For the purpose of this manual and product labels, a Qualified Person is one who is familiar with the
installation, construction, operation and maintenance of the equipment and the hazards involved.
This person must:

1) Carefully read the entire operation manual.

2) Be trained and authorized to safely energize, de-energize, clear faults, ground, lockout
and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.

3) Be trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment such as safety shoes,
rubber gloves, hard hats, safety glasses, face shields, flash clothing, etc. in
accordance with established safety practices.

iii
 TOSHIBA

CONTENTS

PAGE

Disclaimer ............................................................................................... i

Introduction .............................................................................................. ii

General Safety Instructions ..................................................................... iii

Contents .............................................................................................. iv

Section 1 Inspection/Storage/Disposal
Inspection of the New Unit.........................................................................1-1
Storage .............................................................................................1-1
Disposal .............................................................................................1-1

Section 2 Installation and Operation

Installation Safety Precautions ..................................................................2-1
Operating Safety Precautions ....................................................................2-2
Confirmation of Wiring ...............................................................................2-3
Start-up and Test .......................................................................................2-4
Maintenance .............................................................................................2-4

Section 3 Specifications
460 Volt NEMA Type 3R Enclosure Standard Ratings .............................. 3-1
460 Volt NEMA Type 1 Enclosure Standard Ratings ................................ 3-1
Standard Specifications .............................................................................3-2

Section 4 Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G34660+3 through G3411K+3 .............................4-1
Dimensions for Models G3416K+3 through G3420K+3 ............................4-2
Dimensions for Models G3426K+3 through G3445K+3 .............................. 4-3
Dimensions for Models G3460K+3 through G3481K+3 .............................. 4-4
Dimensions for Models G3410L+3 through G3412L+3
and G3410L+1 through G3412L+1 ............................................................4-5
Shipping Weights ......................................................................................4-6

iv
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 1: Inspection/Storage/Disposal
Inspection of the New Unit
Upon receipt of the G3 Plus-Pack, a careful inspection for shipping damage should be made.
After uncrating:
1) Check the unit for loose, broken, bent or otherwise damaged parts due to
shipping.

2) Check to see that the rated capacity and the model number specified on the
nameplate conform to the order specifications.

Storage
1) Store in a well ventilated location and preferably in the original carton if the
inverter will not be used immediately after purchase.

2) Avoid storage in locations with extreme temperatures, high humidity, dust, or

metal particles.

Disposal
Please contact your state environmental agency for details on disposal of electrical
components and packaging in your particular area. Never dispose of electrical
components via incineration.

1-1
 TOSHIBA

SECTION 2: Installation and Operation

Installation Safety Precautions

CAUTION
1) Install in a secure and upright position in a well ventilated location that is out of
direct sunlight. The ambient temperature should be between -10° C and 50° C.

2) Allow a clearance space of 8 inches (20 cm) for the top and bottom and 2 inches
(5 cm) on both sides. This space will insure adequate ventilation. Do not obstruct
any of the ventilation openings.

3) Avoid installation in areas where vibration, heat, humidity, dust, steel particles,
or sources of electrical noise are present.

4) Adequate working space should be provided for adjustment, inspection and

maintenance.

5) Adequate lighting should be available for troubleshooting and maintenance.

6) A noncombustible insulating floor or mat should be provided in the area

immediately surrounding the electrical system where maintenance is required.

7) Always ground the unit to prevent electrical shock and to help

reduce electrical noise. A separate ground cable should be run
inside the conduit with the input, output, and control power
cables.

THE METAL OF CONDUIT IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE GROUND.

8) Use lockout/tagout procedures before connecting three phase power of the

correct voltage to input terminals L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T) and connect three phase
power from output terminals T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W) to a motor of the correct voltage
and type for the application. Size the conductors in accordance with legend notes
on page 4-1 through 4-5.

9) If conductors of a smaller than recommended size are used in parallel to share

current then the conductors should be kept together in sets i.e. U1, V1, W1 in
one conduit and U2, V2, W2 in another. National and local electrical codes
should be checked for possible cable derating factors if more than three power
conductors are run in the same conduit.

10) Use separate metal conduits for routing the input power, output power, and
control circuits.

11) Installation of drive systems should conform to the National Electrical Code,
regulations of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, all national,
regional or industry codes and standards.

12) Do not connect control circuit terminal block return connections marked CC to
inverter earth ground terminals marked GND(E).

2-1
 TOSHIBA

Installation Safety Precautions (cont'd) CAUTION

13) If a secondary Magnetic Contactor (MC) is used between the inverter output
and the load, it should be interlocked so the ST-CC terminals are disconnected
before the output contactor is opened. If the output contactor is used for bypass
operation, it must also be interlocked so that commercial power is never applied
to the inverter output terminals (U,V,W).

14) Power factor improvement capacitors or surge absorbers must not be installed
on the inverter's output.

15) Only qualified personnel should install this equipment.

Operating Safety Precautions

CAUTION
1) Do not power up the inverter until this entire operation manual is reviewed.

2) The input voltage must be within the specified input voltages as shown on page 3-1.
Voltages outside of this permissible tolerance range may cause internal protection
devices to turn on or can cause damage to the unit. Also, the input frequency
should be within +/-2 Hz of the specified input frequency.

3) Do not use this inverter with a motor whose rated input is greater than the rated
inverter output.

4) This inverter is designed to operate NEMA B motors. Consult the factory before
using the inverter for special applications such as an explosion proof motor or
one with a repetitive type piston load.

5)
DANGER
Do not touch any internal part with power applied to the inverter; first remove
the power supply from the drive and wait until charge LED is no longer illuminated.
Charged capacitors can present a hazard even if source power is removed. not
touch any internal part with power

6) DO NOT OPERATE THIS UNIT WITH ITS CABINET DOOR OPEN.

7) Do not apply commercial power to the output terminals T1 (U), T2 (V), or T3

(W) even if the inverter source power is off. Disconnect the inverter from the
motor before megging or applying bypass voltage to the motor.

2-2
 TOSHIBA

Operating Safety Precautions (cont'd)

CAUTION
8) Interface problems can occur when this inverter is used in conjunction with
some types of process controllers. Signal isolation may be required to
prevent controller and/or inverter malfunction (contact Toshiba or the process
controller manufacturer for additional information about compatibility and
signal isolation).

9) Do not open and then re-close a secondary magnetic contactor (MC) between
the inverter and the load unless the inverter is OFF (output frequency has
dropped to zero) and the motor is not rotating. Abrupt re-application of the
load while inverter is on or while motor is rotating can cause inverter damage
unless the proper sequence is followed.

10) Use caution when setting output frequency. Overspeeding a motor can decrease its
torque-developing ability and can result in damage to the motor and/or driven
equipment.

11) Use caution when setting the acceleration and deceleration time. Unnecessarily
short times can cause tripping of the drive and mechanical stress to loads.

12) Only qualified personnel should have access to the adjustments and
operation of this equipment. They should be familiar with the drive operating
instructions and with the machinery being driven.

13) Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be allowed to service
this equipment. See page iii.

14) Follow all warnings and precautions. Do not exceed equipment ratings.

Confirmation of Wiring
CAUTION
Make the following final checks before applying power to the unit:

1) Confirm that source power is connected to terminals L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T).
Connection of incoming source power to any other terminals will damage
the inverter.

2) The 3-phase source power should be within the correct voltage and frequency
tolerances.

3) The motor leads must be connected to terminals T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W).

4) Make sure there are no short circuits or inadvertent grounds and tighten any
loose connector terminal screws.

2-3
 TOSHIBA

Start-Up and Test CAUTION

Prior to releasing an electrical drive system for regular operation after installation,
the system should be given a start-up test by qualified personnel. This assures
correct operation of the equipment for reasons of reliable and safe performance. It is
important to make arrangements for such a check and that time is allowed for it.

When power is applied for the first time, the inverter's parameters are set to the values
listed as "FACTORY SETTING" in the charts starting on page 8-1 of the 'G3 Operation Manual".
If these settings are not optimal for the application, program the desired settings before initiating a
run. The inverter can be operated with no motor connected. Operation with no motor
connected or use with a small trial motor is recommended for initial adjustment or for learning to
adjust and operate the inverter.

Maintenance
CAUTION
1) Use lockout/tagout procedures in accordance with local electrical codes
before performing any inverter maintenance.

2) Periodically check the operating inverter for cleanliness.

3) Do not use liquid cleaning agents.

4) Keep the heatsink free of dust and debris.

5) Periodically check electrical connections for tightness (with power off,

locked out, and with charge LED indicator 'off').

2-4
 TOSHIBA

Section 3: Specifications

460 Volt NEMA TYPE 3R Enclosure Standard Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS

Full Load Output Overload Main Circuit Input

Model KVA HP
Amps Voltage Current Input Power Control
3-Phase Power
4660+3 66 60 79 Output voltage 120% FOR 380-415V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
4830+3 83 75 100 will not 60 SEC. 400-480V/60Hz CONTROL
411K+3 111 100 133 exceed input 100% FREQ. +/- 2Hz POWER SOURCE
416K+3 163 150 196 voltage CONTINUOUS REQUIRED
420K+3 200 200 241
426K+3 260 250 313
432K+3 325 300 391
439K+3 390 350 469
445K+3 454 400 546
460K+3 600 600 722
470K+3 700 700 842
481K+3 815 815 980
410L+3 1000 1000 1203
412L+3 1200 1200 1443

460 Volt NEMA TYPE 1 Enclosure Standard Ratings

G3 STANDARD RATINGS

Full Load Output Overload Main Circuit Input

Model KVA HP
Amps Voltage Current Input Power Control
3-Phase Power
445K+1 454 400 546 Output voltage 120% FOR 380-415V/50Hz or NO EXTERNAL
460K+1 600 600 722 will not 60 SEC. 400-480V/60Hz CONTROL
470K+1 700 700 842 exceed input 100% FREQ. +/- 2Hz POWER SOURCE
481K+1 815 815 980 voltage CONTINUOUS REQUIRED
410L+1 1000 1000 1203
412L+1 1200 1200 1443

3-1
 TOSHIBA

Section 3: Specifications
Standard Specifications

ITEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Principal Control System Sinusoidal PWM control
Control Output voltage regulation Same as power line.
Specifications Output frequency 0.01 to 400 Hz (0.1 to 80Hz default setting)*. 800 Hz operation
possible.
Frequency setting 0.1Hz from operating panel input (60Hz base), 0.01Hz from analog
input (60Hz base, 12-bit/0 to 10Vdc), 0.01Hz from computer interface
(60Hz base)

Frequency accuracy Analog input: ±0.2% of the maximum output frequency (25°C±10°C),
Digital input: ±0.01% (25°C±10°C)
Voltage/frequency Constant V/f, variable torque, automatic torque boost, True Torque
characteristics Control and automatic energy-saving control/maximum voltage
frequency adjustment (25 to 400Hz), torque boost adjustment
(0 to 30%), start-up frequency adjustment (0 to 10Hz).
PWM carrier frequency Adjustable between 0.5 and 10kHz
Transistor type Insulated gate bipolar (IGBT)
Output voltage regulation Drive can be programmed to fix max. output volts, let max. float with
input voltage, or set max. to input voltage sensed at power-up.
Dynamic braking Yes
Frequency Input signals 3k ohms potentiometer (1k ohm to 10k ohm-rated potentiometer
can be connected). 0 to 10Vdc (Zin=33k ohm), ±10 Vdc (Zin=67k
ohm), +/-5 Vdc (Zin=34k ohm), 4 to 20mAdc (Zin=500 ohm)
Set point control (PID) Proportional gain, integral gain, anti-hunting gain, lag time constant,
and PID error limit adjustments.
Operating Accel/decel time 0.1 to 6000 secs, accel/decel time 1 or 2 selection, accel/decel
functions pattern selection
Forward or reverse run Forward run when F-CC closed (default); reverse run when R-CC
closed (default); reverse run when both closed (default); coast-stop
when ST-CC opened (default); emergency coast stop by a
command from operating panel or terminal block; 3-wire control and
motorized speed pot programmable functions.
Jogging run Jog run from panel with JOG mode selection. Terminal
block operation possible with parameter settings.
Multispeed run Set frequency plus 15 preset speeds possible with combinations of
CC, SS1, SS2, SS3, and SS4 (default functions).
Retry When a protective function is activated, the system checks main
circuit devices, and attempts to restart. Settable to a maximum
of 10 times; wait time adjustment (0 to 10 secs)
Soft stall Automatic load reduction during overload (Default setting: OFF).
Automatic restart A coasting motor can be smoothly restarted (Default setting: OFF).
Pattern Run 4 groups of 8 patterns each can be set to the 15 preset speed values.
A maximum of 32 different patterns can be run; terminal block
control/repetitive run possible.
DC injection braking Braking starting frequency adjustment (0 to 120Hz), braking current
adjustment (0 to 100%), braking time adjustment (0 to 10secs),
emergency stop braking function, motor shaft stationary control.
Upper/Lower limit Limits the frequency between the set values (0 to max. frequency).
Can be indicated via output contact closure.
Frequency jump 3 jump frequency settings (each with unique band settings)
Edit function Easy access user group containing all changed parameters
Blind function Select to display needed parameter groups and parameters
User-defined defaults User's parameter values can be saved into a default library. User
can then default drive to Toshiba's values or to the user's own.

* Consult the factory for applications above 80 Hz.

3-2
 TOSHIBA

Section 3: Specifications
Standard Specifications (cont'd)

ITEM STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

Display Interface 2-line backlit display LCD 20 characters per line
Fault display Overcurrent, overvoltage, heatsink overheat, load-side short-circuit,
load-side ground fault, inverter overload, stator overcurrent during
start-up, load-side overcurrent during start-up, EEPROM error, RAM
error, ROM error, communication error, (dynamic braking unit
overcurrent/overload), (emergency stop), (undervoltage), (low
current), (overtorque), (open output phase), (motor overload). Items
in parenthesis can be selected or deselected.
Monitor functions Terminal input/output status, forward/reverse, frequency setting
value, output frequency, output current, output voltage, input power,
output power, torque current, cumulative run time, past faults,
excitation current, DBR overload ratio, inverter overload ratio, motor
overload ratio, PID feedback value, DC voltage.
Selectable units display Can scale frequency display.
Selection of display of current in amps or %, voltage in V or %.
LED charge indicator Indicates that the main circuit capacitors are charged
LED local/remote Mounted in LOCAL/REMOTE key. Indicates local (keypad) or
indicator remote (terminal) control
Inverter/Motor Protective functions Soft-stall, current limit, overcurrent, overvoltage, short-circuit at load,
load-side ground fault, undervoltage, momentary power failure,
regeneration power ride-through, electronic thermal overload
protection, main circuit overcurrent at start-up, load-side overcurrent
during start-up, DBR resistor overcurrent/overload, heatsink over
heat, emergency stop, open output phase.
Electronic thermal Drive's motor overload protection for motor can be adjusted for motor
characteristics rated amperage. Motor overload has adjustable speed sensitivity.
Soft stall on/off. Motor 150% time programmable.
Reset Fault reset via keypad, remote contact closure, or programming drive
retry. Cycling power also resets fault (display can be maintained)
Regeneration power Some G3 ratings can use regen energy from motor to maintain
ride-through control operation during brown-outs.
Output signals Fault detection signal NC/NO form C contact (250VDC, 2A)
Low speed/reach signals Dry contacts (250VDC, 2A)
Upper limit/lower limit Dry contacts (250VDC, 2A)
Programmable meter Pre-compensation reference frequency, post-compensation output
output signals frequency, frequency setting value, output current, DC voltage,
output voltage, torque current, excitation current, PID feedback value,
motor/inverter/DBR overload ratio, input/output power.
Pulse-train frequency Open collector output (max. 24 Vdc, 50mA)
Communication functions RS232C equipped as standard ( connector: modular 6P), RS485,
TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-F20, RIO, DN, and MB+ are options.
Enclosure Type NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R
Cooling method Forced air cooling . Fan can be automatically stopped when not
necessary for extended fan life.
Color ANSI gray #61polyurethane textured finish
Service environment Indoor and outdoor ratings. Consult factory for elevations above
1372m (requires derate). For example, at 2000m, derate drive FLA
by 11%. Must not be exposed to direct sunlight, corrosive and/or
explosive gases or mists, fibers and dusts.
Ambient temperature From -10°C to 50°C (14°F to 122°F).
Relative humidity 20 to 95% maximum (non-condensating)
Vibration 5.9 m/s 2(0.6G) maximum (10 to 55Hz)
Climatic class 3K3
Polution degree 2
IP rating 2X

3-3
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G34660+3 through G3411K+3

Note: Legend:
- Dimensions are in Inches 1 - Input terminations (side entry)
- Dimensions for reference only 1 x (14 AWG ~ 1/0 AWG) per phase (50~66kVA)
- Color ANSI 61 Gray 1 x (6 AWG ~ 350MCM) per phase (83~110kVA)

2 - Output terminations (side entry)

1 x (4 AWG ~ 500MCM) per phase

4-1
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G3416K+3 through G3420K+3

Note: Legend:
- Dimensions are in Inches 1 - Input terminations (side entry)
- Dimensions for reference only 1 x (14 AWG ~ 1/0 AWG) per phase (50~66kVA)
- Color ANSI 61 Gray 1 x (6 AWG ~ 350MCM) per phase (83~110kVA)

2 - Output terminations (side entry)

1 x (4 AWG ~ 500MCM) per phase

4-2
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G3426K+3 through G3445K+3

Note:
- Dimensions are in Inches Legend:
- Dimensions for reference only H - Ground Lug (2AWG ~ 4/0)
- Color ANSI 61 Gray
- Input/Output termination bending I - Input terminations (side entry)
space in accordance with 1 x (2 AWG ~ 500MCM) per phase (280kVA)
NEC table 373-6(b) 2 x (2 AWG ~ 500MCM) per phase (325kVA, 390kVA)
4 x (4/0 ~ 500MCM) per phase (454kVA)

K - Output terminations (side entry)

2 x (6 AWG ~ 350MCM) per phase

4-3
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G3460K+3 through G3481K+3

Legend:
H - Ground Lug (1/0 ~ 350MCM)
Note:
- Dimensions are in Inches
I - Input terminations (side entry)
- Dimensions for reference only
4 x (3/0 ~ 500MCM) per phase
- Color ANSI 61 Gray
- Input/Output termination bending
J - DB Resistor connections (when installed)
space in accordance with
2 x (4 AWG ~ 350MCM) per terminal
NEC table 373-6(b)
K - Output terminations (side entry)
2 x (6 AWG ~ 350MCM) per phase

4-4
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Dimensions for Models G3410L+3 through G3412L+3 and G3410L+1 through G3412L+1

Legend:
H - Ground Lug (1/0 ~ 350MCM)
Note:
- Dimensions are in Inches I - Input terminations (side entry)
- Dimensions for reference only 4 x (3/0 ~ 500MCM) per phase Y-side
- Color ANSI 61 Gray 4 x (3/0 ~ 500MCM) per phase -side
- Input/Output termination bending
J - DB Resistor connections (when installed)
space in accordance with 2 x (4 AWG ~ 350MCM) per terminal
NEC table 373-6(b)
K - Output terminations
4 x (1/0 AWG ~ 750MCM) per phase

4-5
 TOSHIBA

Section 4: Dimensions and Weights

Unit Weights

G3
Plus-Pack Pounds Kg
4660+3 625 283
4830+3 625 283
411K+3 625 283
416K+3 750 340
420K+3 750 340
426K+3 1250 567
432K+3 1250 567
439K+3 1250 567
445K+3 1250 567
460K+3 2500 1134
470K+3 2500 1134
481K+3 2500 1134
410L+3 3500 1588
412L+3 3500 1588
410L+1 3200 1451
412L+1 3200 1451

4-6
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 West Little York Rd., Houston Texas 77041
Tel: [800] 231-1412 Fax: [713] 466-8773 Telex: 762078
World Wide Web http://www.tic.toshiba.com

Printed in U.S.A.
Typeform is the value that is typically used when referencing the VSD
Drawings

KVA is the KVA rating for the VSDs at 480 Volts on the supply of the unit.

Hex Value is the value that you would see if you were to access the
typeform using the Toshiba Keypad or Wellview.

Decimal Value is the value that you will see if you access the menus in the
UniConn and is a direct conversion back to the Hex Value.

Rated Amps is the rated output amperage of the VSD.

If the unit is rated for 469 amps at 480 Volts then the KVA for that VSD
would be (469 X 480 X 1.732) / 1000 = 390 KVA.

If the input voltage were lowered to 380 Volts the KVA for the same VSD
would be (469 X 380 X 1.732) / 1000 = 308 KVA

Hex Decimal Rated

Typeform KVA
Value Value Amps
4500 50 4D 77 60
4660 66 4E 78 79
4830 83 4F 79 100
411K 111 50 80 133
413K 130 51 81 156
416K 163 52 82 196
420K 200 53 83 241
426K 260 54 84 313
432K 325 55 85 391
439K 390 56 86 469
445K 454 57 87 546
451K 518 58 88 623
460K 600 59 89 722
470K 700 5A 90 842
481K 815 5B 91 980
493K 932 5C 92 1121
410L 1000 5D 93 1203
412L 1200 5E 94 1443
Error codes from the Toshiba G3 RS232 Communications Manual

LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation

NO ERROR ××00 No error has been recorded since the last inverter
reset or trip clear
OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) ××01 Overcurrent during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (DECEL) ××02 Overcurrent during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××03 Overcurrent during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOAD-END OVERCURRENT ××04 Load-end overcurrent detected at start-up (output
(PRESS CLEAR) terminals, motor wiring etc.)
U-PHASE SHORT CKT ××05 U-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
V-PHASE SHORT CKT ××06 V-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
W-PHASE SHORT CKT ××07 W-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST INPUT PHASE ××08 Lost input phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST OUTPUT PHASE ××09 Lost output phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) ××0A Overvoltage during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (DECEL) ××0B Overvoltage during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (RUN) ××0C Overvoltage during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
INVERTER OVERLOAD ××0D Inverter overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
MOTOR OVERLOAD ××0E Motor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERLOAD TRIP ××0F Dynamic braking resistor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERHEAT TRIP ××10 Inverter overheat
(PRESS CLEAR)
EMERGENCY OFF ××11 Emergency off
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE ××12 EEPROM failure during write
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM READ FAILURE ××13 EEPROM failure during initial read
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××14 Unused
RAM ERROR ××15 RAM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
ROM ERROR ××16 ROM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CPU ERROR ××17 CPU error
(PRESS CLEAR)

1
 LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation
COMMUNICATION ERROR ××18 RS232C timer time-out
(PRESS CLEAR)
GATE ARRAY FAULT ××19 Gate array error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CURRENT DETECT ERROR ××1A Output current detection circuit error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION PCB ERROR ××1B Option PCB error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION ROM ERROR ××1C Option ROM error
LOW CURRENT TRIP ××1D Low current
(PRESS CLEAR)
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP ××1E Main circuit undervoltage
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××1F Unused
OVERTORQUE TRIP ××20 Overtorque
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (SOFT) ××21 Earth fault (software)
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (HARD) ××22 Earth fault (hardware)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPEN FUSE TRIP ××23 Open fuse
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERCURRENT TRIP ××24 Dynamic braking resistor overcurrent
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (ACC) ××25 Overcurrent in DC section during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (DEC) ××26 Overcurrent in DC section during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××27 Overcurrent in DC section during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
AUTO-TUNING ERROR ××28 Auto-tuning error
(PRESS CLEAR)
INV TYPEFORM ERROR ××29 Inverter typeform error
(PRESS READ/WRITE)

2
G3 Fault Explanations - Any comments here that refer to a Page (see page 9-16) or Item
(289, 290) for example should be referrenced in the Toshiba G3 Manual

OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) or DC OVERCURRENT (ACC)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. ACCELERATION TIME may be too small. VOLTAGE
BOOST may be too high. Is motor/machine jammed? Is mechanical brake engaged while drive is
running? If G3 is starting into a rotating motor, see Item 157, AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR SPEED
SEARCH). If there is a contactor between motor and drive, wire so that contactor changes state
only when drive is outputting 0.0 Hz. Drive will automatically adjust accel time with Item 12, ACC/
DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION set to "1".

OVERCURRENT (DECEL) or DC OVERCURRENT (DEC)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. DECELERATION TIME may be too small. Is motor/
machine jammed? Is mechanical brake engaged while drive is running? Adding appropriate
braking resistor across "PA" and "PB" terminals may solve problem (see page 9-16). Drive will
automatically adjust decel time with Item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION set to "1".

OVERCURRENT (RUN) or DC OVERCURRENT (RUN)

Cause: Drive current exceeded 215% of its rated FLA (190% above 100 HP).
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. Is motor/machine jammed? Is mechanical brake
engaged while drive is running? Adding appropriate dynamic braking resistor across "PA" and
"PB" terminals may solve problem (see page 9-16). If there are severe load fluctuations, adding
mechanical dampening or an output line reactor may help to electrically damp.

U-PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT or V PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT or W PHASE SHORT-CIRCUIT

Cause: Drive detected short-circuit in transistor.
Comments: Replace transistor. Contact your Toshiba distributor for authorized repair.

LOAD-END OVERCURRENT
Cause: Drive detected short-circuit on output.
Comments: Check for phase-phase short. Meg motor/leads with leads disconnected from
drive. Remove any power factor correction caps on motor. See Item 169, OUTPUT SHORT-
CIRCUIT DETECTION SELECT.

OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) or OVERVOLTAGE (RUN)

Cause: Bus exceeded 393 VDC (230 V G3), 787 VDC (460 V G3), or 1179 VDC (600 V G3).
Comments: Incoming AC may have gone high or spiked (verify with Item 289,290, 291, or 292 set
to "16"); a line reactor or a lower tap on transformer may help. Motor may be mechanically forced
to run faster than drive is commanding; install appropriate dynamic braking resistor (see page 9-
16). On eccentric cyclic loads like presses or pump jacks, contact your Toshiba distributor for
special programming instructions that may make a DBR unnecessary.

OVERVOLTAGE (DEC)
Cause: Bus exceeded 393 VDC (230 V G3), 787 VDC (460 V G3), or 1179 VDC (600 V G3).
Comments: Incoming AC may have gone high or spiked (verify with Item 289 set to "16"); a line
reactor or a lower tap on transformer may help. Item 11, DECELERATION TIME #1 may be too
short. Drive will automatically change decel time with Item 12, ACC/DEC PATTERN ADJUST
LOW set to "1". Make sure Item 145, OVERVOLTAGE STALL PROTECTION is set to "0". Motor
may be mechanically forced to run faster than drive is commanding (due to large load inertias
mechanical couplings); install appropriate dynamic braking resistor (see page 9-16). On eccentric
cyclic loads like presses or pump jacks, contact your Toshiba distributor for special programming
instructions that may make a DBR unnecessary.

3
INVERTER OVERLOAD
Cause: Drive exceeded 110% of its rated current for too long of a time.
Comments: This trip indicates that the G3 output more than its rated current for specific
amounts of time. For example, 100 HP and smaller G3s can output 150% of their rated current for
120 seconds, 130% for 240 seconds, 170% for 3.5 seconds, and 185% for 0.5 seconds. If using
DC Injection, Item 147, DC INJECTION CURRENT MAGNITUDE or Item 148 DC INJECTION
TIME they may be too large. If Item 42, PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY is greater than 8 KHz, try
carrier frequencies less than 8 KHz. Programming Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION to "1" or "3"
(soft stall on) makes the drive reduce output frequency/voltage to shed load (works best on
variable torque applications). Motor or load bearings may have seized. Enabling True Torque
Control (see page 9-31) may reduce drive's current output and solve problem. Make sure that
drive is seeing voltage on all three of its input phases. Drive may be undersized.

MOTOR OVERLOAD
Cause: Motor is in danger of overheating because it drew too much current for too long of a time,
as determined by drive.
Comments: See page 9-17. Check Items 158, 159, 160, and 161. If trip occurred at a low
frequency, the setting of Item 159, OVERLOAD REDUCTION START FREQUENCY is probably
critical. Motor overload protection can be turned off by placing a "2" or "3" in Item 161. Check
value in Item 160, MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME LIMIT.

DBR OVERCURRENT
Cause: IGBT7 (dynamic braking transistor) is damaged
Comments: Check ohm value connected to "PA" and "PB" terminals (see page 9-16 for minimum
ohm values). If using multiple resistors, make sure parallel-series combination is wired correctly.
Check IGBT7. Check DC bus fuse for continuity; if open, check output transistors. Consult
your Toshiba distributor for authorized service.

DBR OVERLOAD
Cause: Dynamic braking resistor is in danger of overheating (as determined by drive).
Comments: Check that the values entered into Item 143, BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE and Item
144, BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING are correct.

OVERHEAT
Cause: Drive's heatsink exceeded 90o C.
Comments: Check drive's muffin fans (if any). Clear heatsinks of anything blocking airflow.
The enclosure that the drive is installed in may be too small or there may be to many heat sources
in the same enclosure. Drive may not have been properly sized for operating altitude. Thermistor
on heatsink may be bad.

EMERGENCY OFF
Cause: Drive received one of the following ESTOP commands:
1. Drive was receiving STOP/START command via terminal strip when STOP button on keypad
was pressed.
2. One of the drive's input terminal's function is set to "10" (see Items 44-55 and page 9-9), and
terminal is being opened/closed to command ESTOP.

EEPROM WRITE FAILURE or EEPROM READ FAILURE

Cause: EEPROM was unable to read/write to peripherals.
Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.) Control board may need to be replaced (part
number 03784). See picture of board on page 5-2.

4
RAM ERROR or ROM ERROR
Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). Replace control board (part number 03784).
See picture of board on page 5-2.

OPTION ROM ERROR

Comments: Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as "CC" connected to ground,
an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). If drive is energized with option ROM installed
and is later energized without option ROM installed, this fault will appear. Reset in normal fashion.

CPU ERROR
Comments: If option ROM or option board is installed or removed when drive is powered, this
fault will appear. Reset like any fault. Check for miswiring that may be causing noise (such as
"CC" connected to ground, an external 10 volt source connected to "PP" etc.). If the CPU is truly
damaged, the fault will not reset and replacement of the control board (part number 03784) is
necessary. See picture of control board on page 5-2.

COMMUNICATION ERROR
Cause: RS232 or RS485 timer did not respond
Comments: Check wiring to RS232 or RS485 ports. Check setting of Item 264,
COMMUNICATION SELECTION (should be "1" for RS485). Check jumpers J1, J2, and J3 on
RS485 option board (see RS485 Communications Option Manual). Cable may be broken.

OPTION PCB ERROR

Comments: If drive is energized with an option board installed and is later energized without the
board installed, this fault will appear. Check connectors between control board and option board.
Check settings of Item 80, FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1, Item 81, FREQUENCY
PRIORITY SELECTION #2, and Item 264, COMMUNICATION SELECTION. Use stand-offs to
secure board.

LOW CURRENT TRIP

Cause: The drive's output current went below the current value entered in Item 167, LOW
CURRENT DETECT LEVEL for at least the amount of time entered in Item 168, LOW
CURRENT DETECTION TIME.

UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP
Cause: The drive's DC bus voltage went below 217 VDC (230 V G3), 413 VDC (460 V G3), or
594 VDC (600 V G3) for at least the time entered in Item 165, UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME.
Comments: Item 164, UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION turns the ability to undervoltage trip
on/off. On G3 models 2080-2110 and 4080-4270, turning on Item 155, REGENERATION POWER
RIDE-THROUGH and adjusting Item 156, REGENERATION RIDE-THROUGH TIME may keep bus
up during brown out if there is sufficient regen energy from the load.

OVERTORQUE TRIP
Cause: The drive's torque current went above the current value programmed in Item 171,
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL. The G3 can be programmed to torque current limit; contact your
Toshiba distributor and request the torque limit application guideline.

EARTH FAULT (SOFT) or EARTH FAULT (HARD)

Cause: Drive detected some current to ground. Depending on rating, drive senses ground fault via
ZCT (hard fault) or Hall CTs (soft fault).
Comments: With leads disconnected from drive, meg motor and leads. Look for any moisture that
may provide current path to ground. Make sure that control wiring is separated from power wiring.
Adding noise supressors on coils of starters on same line as drive may snub noise picked up by
ZCT. RF/EMI filter may help remove noise generated by SCR rectifiers in the vicinity. Make sure
drive chassis and motor are grounded.
5
AUTO-TUNING ERROR
Cause: Motor's physical characteristics are not within the window of allowable values for modeling.
Comments: Try a different inertia setting in Item 323, LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA. Motor must
be at rest to perform auto-tuning. Motor must be one HP size within the drive's HP size.
Auto-tuning is best done with motor at full-load temperature (if temperature is very cold, auto-tune
error may appear).

GATE ARRAY FAULT

Comments: Replace control board, part number 03784. See picture of board on page 5-2.

CURRENT DETECT ERROR

Comments: Occurs when drive is stopped but CPU detects current flowing. This fault could be
caused by plugging in RS232 cable with drive powered (resulting in damage to control board).
Adding a RF/EMI filter may remove noise spikes from nearby SCR rectifiers. If damaged, replace
control board, part number 03784. See picture of board on page 5-2.

INV TYPEFORM ERROR

Cause: Control board is not configured to drive's rating.
Comments: Enter "7" into Item 280, STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION.

DC BUS UNDERVOLTAGE
Cause: The drive's DC bus voltage went below approximately 200 VDC (230 V G3), 395 VDC
(460 V G3), or 595 VDC (600 V G3) for at least the time entered in Item 165,
UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME.
Comments: Item 164, UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION turns the ability to undervoltage trip
on/off.

CONTROL POWER LOW

Control Power low warning voltage levels are sensed on DC bus and are set slightly less than DC
BUS UNDERVOLTAGE levels.

OVERLOAD
A flashing overcurrent display means that the drive is outputting more than 110% of its rated
current. If Item 161, OVERLOAD SELECTION is set to "1" or "3" (soft stall on), the drive's output
frequency will automatically decrease in an effort to reduce current. See suggestions for
remedying an inverter overload trip on page 10-4. Setting one of the monitor's functions (Items
289-292) to "10" will give an indication of how close a drive is to tripping.

OVERCURRENT
A flashing overcurrent display means that the drive is stalling. (Stall level is set by Item 160,
STALL PROTECTION CURRENT LEVEL). The drive's output frequency will automatically
decrease.

OVERVOLTAGE
A flashing overvoltage display means that the drive's DC bus has exceeded 360 VDC (230 V G3),
720 VDC (460 V G3), or 1034 VDC (600 V G3).

OVERHEAT
A flashing overheat display means that the drive's heat sink temperature has exceeded 84oC.
Display dissappears when heatsink temperature reaches 80oC.

COMM
A flashing comm display means that the drive has momentarily lost communications. Display will
clear when follower receives valid reference. Cycling power or reinitializing drive will clear warning.

6
 HIGH PERFORMANCE TRANSISTOR INVERTER
VECTOR DRIVE SERIES

RS232C COMMUNICATIONS MANUAL

October, 1996
Part #42709-001
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Toshiba TOSVERT-130 G3 High-Performance Transistor Inverter with
built-in RS232C serial communications. Before using the RS232C communication features, please
be sure to thoroughly read the instructions and precautions contained in this manual. In addition,
please make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user of the inverter unit, and
keep this instruction manual in a safe place for future reference or inverter inspection.

This instruction manual describes the communication specifications, wiring, protocol, functions and
usage methods for the RS232C communications interface.

-1-
Usage Precautions
Usage Precautions
• Do not touch charged parts such as the terminal block while the inverter’s CHARGE lamp is lit.
A charge will still be present in the inverter unit’s internal electrolytic capacitors, and therefore
touching these areas may result in an electrical shock. Always turn all inverter input power
supplies OFF, and wait at least 5 minutes after the CHARGE lamp has gone out before
connecting the communications cable or motor wiring.
• To avoid the possibility of electric shock due to leakage currents, always ground the inverter
unit’s E/GND terminal and the motor.
• When making wiring connections, make certain that no clippings or wiring leads that could
cause device failure fall into the inverter or onto electronic components.
• Route the communications cable separate from the inverter input/output power wiring.
• The inverter’s EEPROM has a life span of 10,000 write cycles. Do not write to the same
EEPROM address (bank 1) more than 10,000 times.
• When the inverter’s control power supply is turned on, the inverter performs initialization
functions for approximately 1 second, during which communications capabilities are disabled.
Communications capabilities will also be disabled for approximately 1 second after momentary
control power supply outages or inverter resets.
• Do not make any connections to the +5v pin (pin #5) on the inverter’s RS232C port (CN4) - this
pin is the power source for the optional parameter writer unit. If connections are made to this
pin, the inverter may cease to function properly or the inverter unit may be damaged.
• Do not plug in or remove the RS232C communications cable into the inverter’s CN4
communications port while power is applied to the inverter. If the cable is plugged in or
removed while power is applied, the inverter’s main control board may be damaged.

-2-
 Table Of Contents

1. Wiring Connections......................................................................................................... 4
2. Overview........................................................................................................................... 5
3. Host Computer ↔ Inverter Data Exchange Process ..................................................... 6
4. Communications Format................................................................................................. 7
4.1 Data Transmissions From Host Computer To Inverter .................................................. 7
4.2 Data Responses From Inverter To Host Computer ....................................................... 8
5. Transmission Commands ............................................................................................. 10
5.1 Command Summaries ................................................................................................ 11
6. Communication Examples ............................................................................................ 15
6.1 Communications Preparation...................................................................................... 15
6.2 Timer Function............................................................................................................ 16
6.3 Examples.................................................................................................................... 17
6.4 Address Increment Function Examples....................................................................... 19
7. Example Communication Programs............................................................................. 20
8. Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 27
8.1 Communications Specification.................................................................................... 27
8.2 Communication Errors ................................................................................................ 29
8.3 Memory Configuration................................................................................................. 31
8.4 Communications Data Tables ..................................................................................... 33
8.5 ASCII Character Codes .............................................................................................. 63
8.6 Notes .......................................................................................................................... 64

-3-
1. Wiring Connections
The built-in RS232C serial communications port (CN4) is located on the lower half of the main control
board. The connector is a modular 6-pin phone-jack type (part number TM3P-66P, made by Hirose
Electric). A typical connection configuration between a G3 inverter and a standard personal computer
with a 9-pin RS232C serial port is shown in Figure 1. Because communication interfaces and signal-
control programming methods vary, however, this configuration may need to be modified on a case-
by-case basis for non-standard interfaces.

C o m p u te r (D B -9) G 3 In ve rte r

SG 5 3
SG
3 4
T xD R xD
2 2
R xD T xD
7 6
RTS CTS
8 1
CTS RTS
6 5
DSR +5V
4
DTR
1
CD (15 m m a xim u m )

① ② ③ ④ ⑤
⑥ ⑦ ⑧ ⑨

(D B -9 b a c k-sid e vie w )

❻❺❹❸❷❶
CN4

Figure 1. Typical Connection Configuration

G3 Inverter RS232C Serial Port (CN4) Pin Definitions

Pin # Name Function
1 RTS request to send (output)
2 TxD transmit data (output)
3 SG signal ground / common return
4 RxD receive data (input)
5 +5V power supply for parameter writer unit (NOTE)
6 CTS clear to send (input)
(NOTE): Do not make any connections to the +5V pin (pin #5) - this pin is to be used only as the
power source for the optional parameter writer unit. If connections are made to this pin, the
inverter may cease to function properly or the inverter unit may be damaged. Also, to avoid
damaging the inverter’s main control board, do not plug in or remove the RS232C
communications cable while power is applied to the inverter.

-4-
2. Overview
The inclusion of RS232C serial communications as standard on the TOSVERT-130 G3 high-
performance transistor inverter provides a wide spectrum of inverter control, status and parameter
setting capabilities when connected to a computer (host). A program can be written on the host
computer that controls communication from the computer to an inverter, processing and analysis of
the inverter’s response, and formatted display of the response data. In the same way, this type of
program can allow a complete set of inverter parameter data to be read and saved onto a storage
disk, and then edited or uploaded to other inverter units. Some example RS232C functions and the
internal access locations associated with them are as follows:

• Monitor functions (output frequency, load current, input voltage, etc.)

❈ read from RAM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from EEPROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from internal ROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from external ROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from the option bus (word/bit ✳1) ✳2

• Command functions (RUN / STOP, JOG, etc.)

❈ read from / write to RAM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ simultaneously write to both EEPROM and RAM ✳2 (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from EEPROM (word/bit ✳1)

• Parameter functions (parameter data setting reading / writing)

❈ read from / write to RAM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from / write to EEPROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ simultaneously write to both EEPROM and RAM ✳3 (word/bit ✳1)

• Additional functions
❈ communications timer function can detect broken cables, etc.
❈ address increment function can automatically increment the address after reads/writes.

Notes
✳1
: Individual bit read/writes can be performed by setting the data mask. When the data mask is
used, bits that are masked off are read as “0”, and are not changed when written to (refer to
the mask setting command in section 5.1.)
✳2
: When reading from the option bus with a TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-S20, DeviceNet or RIO
communications option board installed, the option board’s dual-port RAM is accessed. When
reading from the option bus with an RS485 communications option board installed, the option
board’s USART serial controller is accessed.
✳3
: When writing to EEPROM addresses 03C0H ∼ 04FEH (excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H), both the
EEPROM and RAM are written. When writing to all other addresses, only the EEPROM is
written.
★ Throughout this document, the term “bit” will refer to the smallest computer data element, and
will be represented as either a “0” or “1”. Similarly, 8 bits will be referred to as a byte, and 16
bits (2 bytes) will be called a word.

-5-
3. Host Computer ↔ Inverter Data Exchange Process

(1) The inverter waits for a request from the host computer to establish a computer link.
(2) The inverters ignore all characters received before a “(“ character. If multiple “(“ characters are
received, only the last one received is valid, and all others are discarded.
Ex: HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
W%3R(A03C0) (A03C0)
(3) When an inverter number is included after the “(“ character, only when that number corresponds
to the inverter’s number will the transmission be valid. If the number does not correspond, the
inverter will disregard the transmission without sending any response, and will wait for the next “(“
character.
(4) When an inverter number is not included after the “(“ character, the transmission is regarded as
valid, and the inverter will accept the command.
(5) Only when a carriage return code (0DH) is received will the transmission be considered
terminated. If the transmitted message exceeds the maximum number of characters allowed
(14), a communications error (error code 0001) is generated.
(6) If the inverter’s communications timer is set, and if a transmission is not received within the set
time, a communications error will be generated and the inverter will trip (LCD display will show
“COMMUNICATION ERROR (PRESS CLEAR)”). (Standard shipment setting for the
communications timer is “OFF” (0), so if the timer is to be used, the timer time must be set. For
more information on setting the communications timer, refer to section 6.2 Timer Function).
(7) If the message does not correspond to the format described in section 4. Communications
Format, a communications error will be generated.
(8) After the received command is processed, a response is sent back to the host computer. Typical
response times (inverter processing time only - not including communication time) with
COMMUNICATION SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS set to 0
(standard shipment setting) are on the order of 3.9ms to 5.9ms. Data write commands, however,
may take upwards of 9.7ms to 11.7ms under the same conditions. In addition, if
COMMUNICATION SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS is set
from 1 ∼ 3 (RS485, TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-S20, DeviceNet or RIO boards installed), the time
ranges for these operations may be lengthened by up to a factor of 3 times those given above.

NOTE: When the inverter’s control power supply is turned on, the inverter performs initialization
functions for approximately 1 second, during which communications capabilities are
disabled. Communications capabilities will also be disabled for approximately 1 second
after momentary control power supply outages or inverter resets.

-6-
4. Communications Format
All data is represented in hexadecimal format, and inverter status data is not included in the response
data (except for the addition of the “#” character when the inverter is tripped.) All transmitted
characters conform to the 7-bit (or 8-bit) ASCII (ANSI) standards (refer to section 8.5 ASCII Character
Codes.)
• If monitoring the inverter status is desired, refer to the status monitor portion of section 8.4
Communications Data Tables.

4.1 Data Transmissions From Host Computer To Inverter

Optional Optional Optional

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
“(“ INVNO CMD DATA “+“ “&“ SUM “)“ CR
(28H) (2BH) (26H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits

Optional
1. “(“ (1 character) Header code
2. INVNO (2 characters) Inverter number (optional): 00 (30H, 30H) ∼ 99 (39H, 39H) [base 10]. Only when
this number and the inverter number set via the inverter control panel match will the command be
recognized. If this number does not match the inverter number, or if this number is only 1
character long, the command will not be recognized and no response will be sent.
Note: Because the panel setting is in base 10, the transmitted number must also be in base 10.
3. CMD (1 character) Command (refer to section 5.1 Command Summaries) [base 16].
4. DATA (0 ∼ 4 characters) Data (refer to section 5.1 Command Summaries) [base 16].
5. “+” (1 character) Address increment code (optional). Only valid during R/W commands. After the
R/W command is performed, the inverter’s address data is automatically incremented by 1 word
(address data + 2). (Because the address data is changed, the mask data returns to its
initialization value of FFFFH).
• If there is no “+” character or if an error occurs, the address and mask data remain
unchanged.
6. “&” (1 character) Checksum indicator code (optional). Do not include checksum data when this
character is not used.
7. SUM (2 characters) Checksum (optional). ASCII-coded, least-significant 2-digit value (4 bits/digit) of
the sum total addition of the ASCII code values from the header code to the checksum indicator
code. Do not include a checksum indicator code when the checksum data is not included.
8. “)” (1 character) Termination code (optional).
9. CR (1 character) Carriage return code.

-7-
4.2 Data Responses From Inverter To Host Computer
[Normal Condition]
When an inverter number is transmitted, and that number does not match the inverter’s set number,
the inverter does not transmit a response to the host computer.

Optional Optional Only when tripped

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
“(“ INVNO CMD DATA “+“ “&“ SUM “#“ “)” CR
(28H) (2BH) (26H) (23H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits
Optional
Optional

1. “(“ (1 character) Header code

2. INVNO (2 characters) Inverter number: 00 (30H, 30H) ∼ 99 (39H, 39H) [base 10]. If the
transmitted number does not match the inverter number, or if the transmitted number is
only 1 character long, the command will not be recognized and no response will be
sent.
3. CMD (1 character) Command. The received command is returned.
4. DATA (4 characters) Data. Except for the “R” and “W” commands, the received data is
returned (for the “R” command, the read data is returned, and for the “W” command, the
data after writing is returned.) If the received data was less than 4 characters in length,
the returned data is extended to 4 characters (Ex: (B0) → (B0000)).
5. “+” (1 character) Address increment code. Returned only when initially received. (Only
valid during R/W commands. After the R/W command is performed, the inverter’s
address data is automatically incremented by 1 word (address data + 2), and the mask
data is returned to its initialization value of FFFFH.)
6. “&” (1 character) Checksum indicator code. Returned only when initially received.
7. SUM (2 characters) Checksum. ASCII-coded, least-significant 2-digit value (4 bits/digit) of
the sum total addition of the ASCII code values from the header code to the checksum
indicator code (returned only when a checksum indicator code was initially received).
8. “#” (1 character) Inverter tripped code. Only returned when the inverter is tripped.
9. “)” (1 character) Termination code (returned only when initially received).
10. CR (1 character) Carriage return code.

<< Note >> When a reset command is received, the inverter may reset during the response
process, resulting in an incomplete response.

-8-
[Error Condition]
When any of the errors described below occur while a command is being processed, the
communications error code (N), the error number (refer to section 8.2 Communication Errors), and
checksum data (if initially received), are returned to the host computer. No response will be sent to
the host computer when an inverter number was included in the original transmission but it does not
match the inverter’s set number, when a format error occurs, or when the correct inverter number was
transmitted but a checksum error occurs, as this could cause bus contention.

Optional Only when tripped

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
“(“ INVNO “N” DATA “&“ SUM “#“ “)” CR
(28H) (4EH) (26H) (23H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits

Optional

“(“ (1 character) Error code.

DATA (4 characters) Data (0000 ∼ 0004).
0000 ...cannot execute (communication was correct, but cannot execute command.
Typical causes: attempt to write a parameter that cannot be written while the
inverter is running (MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, VOLTS PER HERTZ
PATTERN, etc.), EEPROM error).
0001 ...data error (data setting value outside of adjustment range, data exceeded 4
characters, etc.)
0002 ...address error (address data outside of adjustment range when a “W” command
was sent, etc.)
0003 ...command error (invalid command).
0004 ...checksum error (checksum data incorrect).
“)” (1 character) Termination code. Returned even when not initially received.

Examples:
(N0000&5C) ........cannot execute (attempt to change MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY while the
inverter was running, etc.)
(N0001&5D) ........data error (attempt to set a preset speed higher than the UPPER LIMIT
FREQUENCY setting, etc.)
(N0002&5E) ........address outside limits (a “W” command was sent with the address data set to
a write-protected area (RAM: address set to less than 3C0H or higher than
516H, EEPROM: less than 3C0H or higher than 59EH), etc.)
(N0003&5F) ........command error (command other than A, B, M, R, W, or T sent, etc.)
(N0004&60) ........checksum error (checksum data incorrect)
no response ..........inverter number error, format error (parity error, overrun error, framing error),
checksum error when an inverter number was transmitted, etc.

-9-
5. Transmission Commands
1) A (41H): address setting command
2) R (52H): read command (word read)
3) W (57H): write command (word write)
4) M (4DH): mask setting command
5) B (42H): bank setting command
6) T (54H): communications confirmation (test) command

• Once set, the address, bank, and mask setting data do not change until they are set to different
values, except for the following conditions:
⇒ whenever the address data is changed, the mask data returns to its initialization value of
FFFFH.
⇒ whenever the address increment function is used in conjunction with the “R” or “W”
commands, the address data is automatically incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the
mask data therefore returns to its initialization value of FFFFH.

Initial Values
When power is first applied to the inverter unit, or after a reset or trip clear, etc., the following data
values are initialized:

Address data = 0510H..... (RS232C frequency command setting address)

Bank data = 0000H..... (RAM)
Mask data = FFFFH .... (all bits can be written to)

- 10 -
5.1 Command Summaries

[A] Address setting command

Sets the address to be used when reading or writing (refer to the “Address” columns of the
communications data tables in section 8.4.)

Address Settings (address data limits: 0000H ∼ FFFFH)

Bank R/W Read Write
Bank = 0 (RAM) R/W 0100H ∼ 077EH 03C0H ∼ 0516H ✳1
Bank = 1 (EEPROM) R/W 0000H ∼ 7FFEH 03C0H ∼ 059EH ✳1 ✳2
Bank = 2 (Internal ROM) R 8000H ∼ FFFEH ×
Bank = 3 (External ROM) R 0000H ∼ FFFEH ×
Bank = 4 (Option bus) R 0000H ∼ 1FFEH ×

✳1
: The following RAM and EEPROM locations cannot be written to:
04D8H ∼ 04F7H, 0500H ∼ 0507H (RAM only), 04FAH bits 4 and 5, 04FBH bit 7, 050AH bits 4 and
5 (RAM only), 050BH bit 7 (RAM only), 0512H bits 4 and 5 (RAM only), 0513H bit 7 (RAM only).

Bit position example: (Address 04FAH)

Address 04FBH Address 04FAH

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

04FBH bit 7 04FAH bits 4 and 5

✳2
: When addresses 03C0H ∼ 04FEH (excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H) are written to, both RAM and
EEPROM contents are changed. Writing to all other addresses changes only the EEPROM
contents.

• Once set, the address data does not change until it is set to a different value, except when the
address increment function is used in conjunction with the “R” or “W” commands, in which case
the address data is automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes). On power-up or after a
reset, etc., the address data is initialized to 0510H (RS232C frequency command).

Caution
The address data should only be set to a maximum of 1 byte less than the bank’s upper
limit. For example, the read limits of RAM (bank 0) are from 0100H ∼ 077FH, so if you would
like to read from address 077FH, set the address to 077EH and then retrieve the data from
the upper byte of the response word. If the address were set to 077FH and a read were
performed, an attempt would be made to access address 0780H, which is above the
maximum address limit.

- 11 -
[B] Bank setting command
Sets the type of memory to be accessed (refer to the “Bank” columns of the communications data
tables in section 8.4.)
Bank Settings (bank data limits: 0000H ∼ 0004H):
0000 ......RAM
0001 ......EEPROM
0002 ......Internal ROM (read-only)
0003 ......External / Option ROM (read-only)
0004 ......Option bus (read-only)

Optional (only the lowest digit is required)

• Once set, the bank data does not change until it is set to a different value. On power-up or after a
reset, etc., the bank data is initialized to 0000H (RAM).

[M] Mask setting command

Allows the access of only the data required during read/write operations. During data writes, data
checking is performed to ensure that the data is being set within adjustment limits, but only that
portion of the data that is within the limits of the mask setting is checked (refer to the “Mask” columns
of the communications data tables in section 8.4.) Mask data limits = 0000H ∼ FFFFH.

When writing data, set the mask bits to binary “1” for those bits that you would like to change, and set
the mask bits to binary “0” for those bits that you do not want to change. When reading data, set the
mask bits to binary “1” for those bits that you would like to read, and set the mask bits to binary “0” for
those bits that you do not want to read. At read time, all data bits for which the corresponding mask
bits are “0” will be read as “0”.
• Once set, the mask data does not change until it is set to a different value or until the address
data changes. When the address data changes (including when the address-increment function
is used in conjunction with the R/W commands), the mask data is automatically set to its
initialization value of FFFFH, which allows all bits to be read/written. Upon inverter power-up or
after a reset, etc., the mask data is initialized to FFFFH.

Ex: To set the Command • frequency mode selection to “RS232C commands valid” (refer to page 34):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... set bank to RAM
(A515) (A0515) ..... set selection address
(M3) (M0003) ..... mask = (0000 0000 0000 0011)2
(W1) (W××××) ..... data depends on other bits

Address 0516H Address 0515H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Due to the mask, only these bits can be changed

- 12 -
[W] Data write command
Writes data to the set address in the set bank. When writing to EEPROM addresses 03C0 H ∼ 04FEH
(excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H), both RAM and EEPROM contents are changed (for data setting limits,
refer to the “Adjustment Range” columns of the communications data tables in section 8.4).
• The data response received after sending a “W” command is the actual data at the address after
writing (word length). This feature combines the write command with the function of the read
command (see Example #1 below.)
• The write command can only be used with RAM (bank 0) and EEPROM (bank 1).
• Address increment function: if a “+” character is included in the “W” command immediately
following the data, the address is automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the
mask data returns to its initialization value of FFFFH. This feature can be used to write large
blocks of data with a minimum number of commands.

<< Note >>

When a data write is performed, only that portion of the data that is within the mask limits is checked
by the data checking routine (see Example #2 on page 14). If the data being written is outside of the
adjustment limits associated with that address, an error is generated, and the data is not written.
Please be sure to correctly set the mask before performing a data write. If the mask is not correctly
set, the data cannot be correctly checked, which may result in data corruption or unpredictable
inverter operation (data checking is not performed on certain parameters: refer to the communications
data tables in section 8.4 for further information).

Caution
The EEPROM has a lifespan of 10,000 write cycles per address. Do not write to the same
EEPROM (bank 1) address more than 10,000 times.

Example #1: Writing RS232C commands (refer to page 34).

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER

(B0) (B0000) ...... set bank to RAM
(A512) (A0512) ...... RS232C command address
(R) (R0009) ...... acc/dec #2, reverse, running
(M4) (M0004) ...... mask forward/reverse selection
(W4) (W000D) ...... forward (acc/dec #2, running)
(R) (R0004) ...... forward ✳1 (verify data)
✳1
: If only whether the inverter is running in forward or reverse is to be determined, the read
command could be sent immediately after the mask command. Note that the data contained in
the response to the write command is the complete, unmasked data at that address.

- 13 -
Example #2: Setting the frequency display resolution parameter (refer to FREQUENCY DISPLAY
RESOLUTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS in section 8.4).
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... set bank to RAM
(A45D) (A045D) ..... frequency display resolution address
(R) (R3111)
(M3) (M0003)
(W6) (W3112)

• Mask overlaid on data prior to write

Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

• Write data
Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

• Data after write

Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
• The adjustment
range for the frequency display resolution parameter is 0 ∼ 2, but because data checking is only
performed on that portion of the data contained in the mask, the written data is viewed as 2. This
is within the adjustment range and, therefore, no error occurs. The end result is that the
frequency display resolution parameter setting is changed to 2 (0.01Hz).

[R] Data read command

Reads the data at the set address in the set bank. No data argument is required for this command:
any included data is ignored.
• The data contained at the set address is returned as the data argument to the host computer. If
the mask data is FFFFH, the returned data word is the complete data at the address. If the mask
data is anything other than FFFFH, those bits set to 0 in the mask will be returned as 0’s.
• Address increment function: if a “+” character is included in the “R” command, the address is
automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the mask data returns to its initialization
value of FFFFH. This feature can be used to read large blocks of data with a minimum number of
commands.

[T] Test command

Transmitted data (0 ∼ 9, A ∼ F) is returned unchanged to the host computer. Data adjustment range:
0000H ∼ FFFFH.

- 14 -
6. Communication Examples
6.1 Communications Preparation
(1) Using the communications cable, connect the G3 inverter and the host computer (refer to section
1. Wiring Connections).
(2) Turn power to the inverter and host computer ON.
(3) Check that the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, etc. are all set correctly.
(4) Run a communications interface application program on the host computer.

Communication should now be possible. The examples that follow were generated with the sample
MS-DOS QBasic RS232 communications program shown in Example #2 of section 7. Example
Communication Programs.
(Note) If using the sample program directly, verify that the inverter’s communication parameters (in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS) are set as follows (standard factory
settings):
RS232 BAUD RATE ............. 2 (9600 baud)
NUMBER OF DATA BITS..... 0 (7 bits)
PARITY SETTING ............... 0 (even parity)

Example: Switching to RS232 command and frequency mode (refer to page 34):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ....set bank to RAM
(A515) (A0515) ....set selection address
(M3) (M0003) ....mask applicable bits
(W3) (W××××) ....“RS232C command & frequency valid”

• Note that because the RS232C command/frequency mode selection has priority, the setting of
COMMAND MODE SELECTION and FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS will have no effect on the actual command/frequency status after the above
example program is executed. Even if the command/frequency mode is not set to RS232C input,
other functions such as parameter setting, inverter status monitoring, etc., can still be performed
via RS232C communications.

- 15 -
6.2 Timer Function
When using RS232C communications with the G3 inverter, a communications timer function can be
implemented. When the communications timer is used, if communication does not take place within
the set time limit, the inverter will trip (“COMMUNICATION ERROR (PRESS CLEAR)“ will be shown on
the LCD display).

If it is desired to have the timer function active even after inverter control power is cycled OFF and
ON, write the timer setting to EEPROM (bank 1). If it is desired to have the timer function disabled
after inverter control power is cycled OFF and ON, write the timer setting to RAM (bank 0). The
following example shows the remaining steps for setting the timer. (NOTE: Because the factory
setting for the timer is 0000H, setting the STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION parameter in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 3 (return to factory settings) will cause the timer setting to return
to 0000H).

Ex: Setting the RS232C communications timer (setting to 15 seconds):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(A445) (A0445) ..... RS232C timer address
(MFF) (M00FF) ..... mask applicable bits
(WF) (W××0F) ..... set timer to 15 seconds
(R) (R××0F) ..... activate timer

< Timer adjustment range > 00H : timer OFF

01H ∼ 64H : 1s ∼ 100s

NOTE
• Setting the timer time alone does not activate the timer. The timer is activated by the first valid
communication that occurs after the timer is set. If the timer setting is written to the EEPROM, the
timer is activated by the first valid communication that occurs after the inverter is powered ON.

• If an inverter number error (number is only 1 character long, number does not match the inverter’s
set number), format error (parity error, overrun error, framing error), or checksum error when an
inverter number was transmitted occurs immediately after the timer time is set, this is not regarded
as a valid communication, and the timer will not be activated / reset.

• To turn the timer function OFF, set the timer setting to “0”. The timer will then be turned OFF
upon the occurrence of the next valid communication (writing “0” to the timer setting alone will not
turn the timer OFF).

- 16 -
6.3 Examples
• Setting the RS232C frequency command value:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A510) (A0510) ..... RS232C frequency command address
(R) (R1F40) ..... currently set to 80.00Hz
(W1770) (W1770) ..... change to 60.00Hz

• Performing RUN/STOP commands:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A512) (A0512) ..... RS232C command address
(M1) (M0001) ..... mask RUN/STOP bit
(W1) (W××××) ..... execute RUN command
(W0) (W××××) ..... execute STOP command

• Monitoring the command mode status:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A5B8) (A05B8) ..... command mode status address
(M3) (M0003) ..... mask status bits
(R) (R0003) ..... command mode currently = RS232C

• Switching to JOG mode:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A512) (A0512) ..... RS232C command address
(M80) (M0080) ..... mask JOG mode selection bit
(W80) (W××××) ..... select JOG mode

• Selecting between acc/dec #1/#2 (setting acc/dec #2):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A512) (A0512) ..... RS232C command address
(M8) (M0008) ..... mask acc/dec #1/#2 selection bit
(W8) (W××××) ..... select acc/dec #2

• Monitoring operating frequency:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A524) (A0524) ..... operating frequency monitor address
(R) (R1770) ..... inverter is running at 60.00Hz

- 17 -
• Monitoring the cumulative run time:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A5D2) (A05D2) ..... run time rollover bit address
(M8) (M0008) ..... mask run time rollover bit
(R) (R0000) ..... timer has not rolled over
(A5A6) (A05A6) ..... cumulative run time address
(R) (R0064) ..... timer is currently at 100 hours

• Executing emergency off command (inverter will trip):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A513) (A0513) ..... RS232C command address
(M10) (M0010) ..... mask emergency off command bit
(W10) (W××××) ..... execute emergency off
❈ Because the inverter has tripped, all responses from the inverter will have the inverter
tripped “#” character included until a trip clear command is performed.

• Monitoring the present trip code:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000#) .... select RAM (bank 0)
(A591) (A0591#) .... present trip monitor address
(refer to Table 1 on page 40)
(M7F) (M007F#) .... mask trip code bits
(R) (R0011#) .... 11H = emergency off trip

• Performing reset (trip clear):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000#) .... select RAM (bank 0)
(A513) (A0513#) .... RS232C command address
(M20) (M0020#) .... mask reset command bit
(W20) no response .. reset
❈ Note that whether or not a response to the reset command is generated is dependent upon
system and reset timing. After resetting, the RAM data, address and mask data, etc., will
have returned to their initialized values, and the inverter tripped “#” character will no longer
be included in the inverter responses.

• Executing “return to factory settings” (STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION = 3) command

(can only be performed when the inverter is stopped):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B0) (B0000) ..... select RAM (bank 0)
(A4C2) (A04C2) ..... standard setting mode address
(M00FF) (M00FF) ..... mask selection bits
(W3) (W××03) ..... 3 = return to factory settings

- 18 -
6.4 Address Increment Function Examples
Example #1: Parameter writing
• Writing MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, LOWER LIMIT
FREQUENCY, ACCELERATION TIME #1 and DECELERATION TIME #1 parameter settings
using the address increment feature:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(B1) (B0001) ..... select EEPROM (bank 1)
(A3C0) (A03C0) ..... maximum frequency address
(W1F40+) (W1F40+) .... write 1F40H (80.00Hz) - address is
then auto-incremented to 03C2H
(W1F40+) (W1F40+) .... write 80.00Hz to 03C2H (UPPER
LIMIT FREQUENCY)
(W0+) (W0000+) .... write 0.00Hz to 03C4H (LOWER
LIMIT FREQUENCY)
(W64+) (W0064+) .... write 10.0s to 03C6H
(ACCELERATION TIME #1)
(W64) (W0064) ..... write 10.0s to 03C8H
(DECELERATION TIME #1)
❈ Note that because the data is being written to bank 1 (EEPROM) in the above example, the
same data is also automatically written to bank 0 (RAM) (refer to page 13). When a data
write is performed, data checking is also performed to ensure that the data is within the
adjustment range specified in the data tables in section 8.4. If the address or data is out of
its adjustment range, an error will be generated, and the data will not be valid (please note
that data checking is not performed on those parameters in the data tables in section 8.4
whose mask and adjustment range columns are shaded.) If a “+” character is included in
the “W” command immediately following the data, the address is automatically post-
incremented by 1 word (2 bytes).

Example #2: Parameter reading

• Reading MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, LOWER LIMIT
FREQUENCY, ACCELERATION TIME #1 and DECELERATION TIME #1 parameter settings
using the address increment feature (assuming continuation from Example #1 above):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(A3C0) (A03C0) ..... MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY addr.
(R+) (R1F40+) .... read 1F40H (80.00Hz) - address is
then auto-incremented to 03C2H
(R+) (R1F40+) .... read 80.00Hz from 03C2H
(R+) (R0000+) .... read 0.00Hz from 03C4H
(R+) (R0064+) .... read 10.0s from 03C6H
(R) (R0064) ..... read 10.0s from 03C8H
These data values would be the same whether read from bank 0 (RAM) or bank 1 (EEPROM).

- 19 -
7. Example Communication Programs

Example #1: MS-DOS QBasic program which continuously monitors a user-input address (program
written in MS-DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):

Program listing
OPEN ”COM1:9600,E,7,1” FOR RANDOM AS #1 ---- 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits
INPUT ”Monitor Address (0000-FFFF):”; C$ ---- input the address to monitor
B$ = ”B0” ---- set RAM bank
C$ = ”A” + C$ ---- build address (A) command
MonitorLoop:
PRINT #1, ”(” + B$ + ”)” ---- transmit data packet to inverter
INPUT #1, D$ ---- read inverter response
PRINT ”Received Data = ”; D$ ---- display the response
B$ = C$ ---- advance command (B → A → R)
C$ = ”R” ---- set “R” command
GOTO MonitorLoop ---- loop forever ([CTRL] + [BREAK] exits)

Execution Example (operating frequency monitor)

Monitor Address (0000-FFFF):? 524 ---- operating frequency monitor address
Received Data = (B0000)
Received Data = (A0524)
Received Data = (R1770) ---- current operating frequency = 60.00Hz
Received Data = (R1770)
Received Data = (R1770)
:
:

- 20 -
Example #2: Sample MS-DOS QBasic RS232C communications program (program written in MS-
DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):

Program listing
OPEN ”COM1:9600,E,7,1” FOR RANDOM AS #1 ----- 9600 baud,even parity,7 data bits
CommLoop:
INPUT ”Send Data =”;B$ ----- input command to send
PRINT #1,B$ ----- transmit command to inverter
INPUT #1,A$ ----- read inverter response
PRINT ”Received Data = ”;A$ ----- display inverter response
GOTO CommLoop ----- loop forever ([CTRL] + [BREAK] exits)

Execution Example
Send Data =? (A3C0) ----- maximum output frequency address
Received Data = (A03C0)
Send Data =? (W1770) ----- set maximum output frequency to 60.00Hz
Received Data = (W1770)
Send Data =?
:
:

Example #3: Sample data conversion QBasic programs (programs written in MS-DOS QBasic
Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):

A) Decimal to hexadecimal conversion B) Hexadecimal to decimal conversion

Program listing Program listing
Start: Start:
INPUT ”Decimal Data =”; A INPUT ”Hexadecimal Data =”; A$
INPUT ”Multiplier =”; B INPUT ”Multiplier =”; B
C$ = HEX$(A / B) A$ = ”&H” + A$
PRINT ”Hexadecimal Data = ”;C$ X = VAL(A$) * B
GOTO Start PRINT ”Decimal Data = ”; X
GOTO Start
Execution Example
Decimal Data =? 60 Execution Example
Multiplier =? 0.01 Hexadecimal Data =? 1F40
Hexadecimal Data = 1770 Multiplier =? 0.01
Decimal Data =? 80 Decimal Data = 80
Multiplier =? 0.01 Hexadecimal Data =? 1770
Hexadecimal Data = 1F40 Multiplier =? 0.01
: Decimal Data = 60
: :
:

- 21 -
Example #4: Sample MS-DOS QBasic RS232C communications program #2 (program written in
MS-DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):
Program listing

DECLARE SUB TxRx (Comd$, Data$, RXdata$, CommErr%)

DIM BRT$, PRT$, BLN$, CMD$, DAT$, rxd$, CommErr%

INPUT "Baud Rate ="; BRT$ ----- input baud rate

INPUT "Parity ="; PRT$ ----- input parity
INPUT "Length ="; BLN$ ----- input number of data bits
OPEN "COM1:" + BRT$ + "," + PRT$ + "," + BLN$ + ",1" FOR RANDOM AS #1
----- open communications port
CommLoop: ----- main program loop
INPUT "Command ="; CMD$ ----- input command (A,R,W,M,B,T)
INPUT "Data ="; DAT$ ----- input data
CALL TxRx(CMD$, DAT$, rxd$, CommErr%) ----- call main Tx/Rx subroutine
IF CommErr% = 0 THEN ----- OK/error check
PRINT "Received Data = "; rxd$ ----- display received data if OK
ELSE ----- else, indicate error
PRINT "A Communications Error Has Occurred!"
END IF
PRINT ----- print blank line
GOTO CommLoop ----- loop ([CTRL]+[BREAK] exits)

SUB TxRx (Comd$, Data$, RXdata$, CommErr%) ----- main Tx/Rx subroutine
DIM TXdata$, Sum&, I%, CKsum$, Retry%, RXbuf$, StartTime&, RXchar$

TXdata$ = "(" + Comd$ + Data$ + "&" ----- build checksum string

Sum& = 0 ----- initialize checksum data
FOR I% = 1 TO LEN(TXdata$)
Sum& = Sum& + ASC(MID$(TXdata$, I%, 1)) ----- calculate checksum
NEXT I%
CKsum$ = RIGHT$(HEX$(Sum&), 2) ----- convert to characters
TXdata$ = TXdata$ + CKsum$ + ")" ----- build complete Tx string
Retry% = 0 ----- initialize retry counter

Txloop: ----- transmission loop

IF LOC(1) <> 0 THEN RXchar$ = INPUT$(LOC(1), #1) ----- ensure Rx buffer is empty
PRINT #1, Txdata$ ----- transmit data
PRINT "Transmitted Data = "; Txdata$ ----- display transmitted data
RXbuf$ = "" ----- initialize receive buffer
StartTime& = TIMER ----- initialize 1s timer

Rxloop: ----- reception loop

IF (TIMER - StartTime&) > 1 THEN ----- check for time-out (1s)
Retry% = Retry% + 1 ----- increment retry counter
IF Retry% < 3 THEN GOTO Txloop ----- 3 Tx attempts allowed
CommErr% = 1 ----- indicate time-out error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program

- 22 -
 END IF
IF (TIMER - StartTime&) < 0 THEN StartTime& = TIMER
----- timer overflow check
RXchar$ = "" ----- initialize received char
IF LOC(1) <> 0 THEN RXchar$ = INPUT$(1, #1) ----- if available, retrieve char

IF RXchar$ = CHR$(13) THEN ----- [CR] received?

RXdata$ = RXbuf$ ----- transfer received data
RXbuf$ = "" ----- initialize receive buffer
IF LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + Comd$)) = "(" + Comd$ THEN
----- data packet error check
CommErr% = 0 ----- indicate no error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program
ELSE
PRINT "Error - Received Data = "; Rxdata$ ----- indicate data error
Retry% = Retry% + 1 ----- increment retry counter
IF Retry% < 3 THEN GOTO Txloop ----- 3 Tx attempts allowed
CommErr% = 2 ----- indicate data error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program
END IF
ELSE ----- [CR] not retrieved
RXbuf$ = RXbuf$ + RXchar$ ----- append char to data
GOTO Rxloop ----- continue receiving data
END IF

END SUB

- 23 -
Execution Example

Baud Rate =? 9600 ------- baud rate = 9600

Parity =? E ------- even parity
Length =? 7 ------- 7 data bits
Command =? A ------- set address data command
Data =? 3C0 ------- maximum frequency address
Transmitted Data = (A3C0&35) ------- transmitted data packet
Received Data = (A03C0&65) ------- data response received OK
:
:
Command =? 00A ------- using an inverter number
Data =? 3C0
Transmitted Data = (00A3C0&95)
Received Data = (00A03C0&C5)
:
:
Command =? 01A ------- example communications error (inv. No. error)
Data =? 3C0
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96)
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96)
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96) ------- 3 unsuccessful communication attempts
A Communications Error Has Occurred!
:
:
Command =? A ------- example communications error (address error)
Data =? 0
Transmitted Data = (A0&BF)
Received Data = (A0000&4F)

Command =? W ------- cannot write to address 0!

Data =? 0
Transmitted Data = (W0&D5)
Error - Received Data = (N0002&5E)---- N0002 = address error
Transmitted Data = (W0&D5)
Error - Received Data = (N0002&5E)
Transmitted Data = (W0&D5)
Error - Received Data = (N0002&5E)
A Communications Error Has Occurred!
:
:
Command =? A ------- address auto-increment example
Data =? 3C0 ------- read MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
Transmitted Data = (A3C0&35)
Received Data = (A03C0&65)

Command =? R
Data =? +
Transmitted Data = (R+&CB)
Received Data = (R1F40+&A6) ------- read 80.00Hz: address is then incremented
: ------- to 3C2 (UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY)

- 24 -
Program Comments

Main Program
Overview: Upon program startup, the communication parameters are entered and the
communications port initialized. The main program loop is then initiated, where the
command and data are entered. The transmit/receive subroutine is then called, and the
response status displayed.
Variables: Input - BRT$: baud rate
PRT$: parity (even = E, odd = O)
BLN$: number of data bits (7 or 8)
CMD$: command (A, B, M, R, T, W)
DAT$: data (0000 ∼ FFFF(+))
Output - rxd$: received data
Internal - CommErr%: error code (0=no error, 1=time-out error, 2=data error)
Notes: • The communications port to use is hard-coded as COM1.
• If an inverter number is to be used, it must be entered as 2 decimal numbers included
before the command (see example in the “Execution Example” section).
• To use the address increment feature (R/W commands only), append a “+” to the input
data (DAT$).

Transmit/Receive Subroutine
Overview: A checksum is calculated and added to the command and data, and then the combined
message is transmitted. Receive processing is performed, and the response string is
returned along with an error flag (code). Time-out and data error checks are performed,
and retransmissions can occur up to a set limit of 3 times.
Variables: Input - Comd$: command (A, B, M, R, T, W) (from main routine)
Data$: data (0000 ∼ FFFF(+)) (from main routine)
Output - RXdata$: received data (to main routine)
ComErr%: error code (to main routine)
System - TIMER: system timer
Internal - TXdata$: transmitted data string
SUM&: checksum calculation buffer
I%: checksum calculation loop counter
CKsum$: converted checksum string
Retry%: transmission retry counter
RXchar$: received character buffer
RXbuf$: received message temporary buffer
StartTime&: time-out start time

- 25 -
Notes: • Check the data before entering it into the main routine. This subroutine performs no error
checking.
• This subroutine performs no checksum verification on returned data packets.
• If transmission speed is a concern, the checksum processing may be eliminated. The
TXdata$ variable would then become:
TXdata$ = ”(” + Comd$ + Data$ + ”)”

• If communication error (inverter “N” code response) processing is desired, the line:
IF LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + Comd$)) = "(" + Comd$ THEN

can be replaced by the line:

IF (LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + Comd$)) = "(" + Comd$) OR
(LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN(”(” + ”N”)) = ”(” + ”N”) THEN

RXdata$ will then be returned with the error message, and CommErr% will be set to 0 (no
error).

- 26 -
8. Appendix
8.1 Communications Specification

Item Specification
Applicable Inverter TOSHIBA TOSVERT-130 G3
Communication System Half-duplex, 5-wire system
Connection Control System Centralized control system ✱1
Synchronization Method Start-stop synchronization (1 stop bit)
Communication Speed Default setting: 9600 baud
2400/4800/9600 baud selectable ✱2
Communication Code Default setting: 7-bit (ASCII), even parity
7/8 -bit, even/odd parity selectable✱3
Character Format 10-bit or 11-bit ✱4
Error Detection Methods Parity, checksum
Error Correction Method None
Response Observation Method None
Bit Transmission Order LSB first
Frame Length Variable (15 bytes maximum)
Interface Conforms to EIA RS232 standard
Communication Distance 15m maximum
Other Time-out function available

- 27 -
NOTES:
✱1
: Centralized control system
The controlling equipment master (host) controls connected slave (G3) units. The master
transmits data to a G3 unit, and the G3 transmits its response, according to the communication
process outlined in this manual.
✱2
: Baud rate selection method
The RS232C baud rate is selected by setting parameter RS232 BAUD RATE in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (refer to page 58). When any of the
communication setting parameters are changed, the new settings will not be validated until the
inverter is powered OFF and then back ON again, a reset is performed, the INDUSTRIAL
APPLICATIONS parameter (in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS) setting is changed, or the
STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION parameter (in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS)
setting is changed. Until one of these actions is performed, the communication settings that
were in effect prior to the change will still be valid.
✱3
: Communication Code
All character codes conform to the ASCII (ANSI) standard for 7-bit alphanumeric characters
(refer to section 8.5 ASCII Character Codes). With standard settings, an even parity bit is also
added. Via the following parameter settings, 8-bit data length and odd parity selections are also
available:
• Bit length: NUMBER OF DATA BITS in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
(0 = 7 bits, 1 = 8 bits).
• Parity: PARITY SETTING in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (0 = even
parity, 1 = odd parity).
✱4
: Character Formats
1) 10-bit (7 bits + parity) (standard factory-shipped setting)

START PARITY STOP

BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6
BIT BIT BIT

2) 11-bit (8 bits + parity)

START PARITY STOP

BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7
BIT BIT BIT

- 28 -
8.2 Communication Errors
Error Name Error Description Error Code
Cannot execute communication was correct, but cannot execute command 0000
(attempt to write a parameter that cannot be written while
inverter is running ✳1, EEPROM error)
Data error data setting value outside of adjustment range, 0001
transmission exceeded 14 characters, character other
than a <CR> received after the “)”, data exceeded 4
characters, data not in the range of “0” ∼ “9” or “A” ∼ “F”,
character other than “&”, “)”, <CR>, or “+” (only during
read/write commands) received after data, checksum data
exceeded 2 characters.
Address error address data outside of adjustment range when a “W” 0002
command was sent, attempt to write data at a protected
address ✳2, bank setting was incorrect when a read/write
was performed
Command error command was incorrect 0003
Checksum error checksum was incorrect, character other than “)” or <CR> 0004/
received after the checksum data no response ✳4
Format error communications format was incorrect (parity error, overrun no response
error, framing error) ✳3
Inverter number error inverter number was incorrect, inverter number was only 1 no response
character long

✳1
: Parameters that cannot be set while the inverter is running are MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY,
BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE SELECT, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN, STANDARD SETTING
MODE SELECTION, and INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS.
✳2
: The following RAM and EEPROM locations cannot be written to:
04D8H ∼ 04F7H, 0500H ∼ 0507H (RAM only), 04FAH bits 4 and 5, 04FBH bit 7, 050AH bits 4 and
5 (RAM only), 050BH bit 7 (RAM only), 0512H bits 4 and 5 (RAM only), 0513H bit 7 (RAM only).
✳3
: Parity error:....... parity incorrect
Overrun error:... new data received before previous data could be read from buffer
Framing error:... stop bit position incorrect
✳4
: If an inverter number was sent in the transmission and a checksum error occurs, no response will
be sent.

- 29 -
Communication Error Priority Rankings

1. Format error
2. Inverter number error
3. Checksum error
4. Command error
5. Data error (incorrect data: data characters other than “0” ∼ “9”, “A” ∼ “F”, data length exceeds 4
characters, character other than “+” (only during a R/W command), “&”, “)”, or <CR> after the data,
or character other than <CR> after the “)” character)
6. Address error (only R/W commands)
7. Cannot execute error (only “W” command)
8. Data error (data outside of setting limits during “W” command, attempt to write to a protected
location, or bank data outside of limits during “B” command)

Response Data Matrix

Interface RS232C
Inverter number Yes No
Normal communications ❍ ❍
Cannot execute error ❍ ❍
When Data error ❍ ❍
an Address error ❍ ❍
error Command error ❍ ❍
occurs Checksum error × ❍
Format error × ❏
Inverter number error × ×
❍ ....... Response transmitted.
×......... Response not transmitted.
❏........ Response transmitted when the “(“ character is correctly received. When the “(“ character is
not correctly received, the data is discarded and therefore no response is transmitted.

- 30 -
8.3 Memory Configuration
RAM EEPROM Internal RO M External / Option ROM Option Bus

FFFF H
Program
& Data
8000 H
7FFF H

System
Area
1FFF H

077F H

System
Area 059F H
User Program Option
Param . #2 & Data Data
0517 H Com m . (pattern
Com m and run)
Area
04FF H
User User
Param . #1 Param . #1
04F7 H
System System
04D8 H Param . Param .

User User
Param . #1 Param . #1
03C0 H

System
Area System
0100 H Area
0000 H

[Bank = 0] [Bank = 1] [Bank = 2] [Bank = 3] [Bank = 4]

RAM: Contains parameter settings and other data that the inverter uses for system control
(parameters, commands, status, etc.) When the inverter is powered-off, this data is erased.
When the inverter is powered-on, parameter data is copied from EEPROM to RAM (directly in
the case of User Param. #1). Other data is initialized.
EEPROM: Contains user-set parameters and other data. This data is retained even when the inverter is
powered-off.
Internal ROM: Contains control programming and internal ROM version information.
External ROM: Contains control programming and external ROM version information.
Option Bus: Allows access to data contained in installed options.

- 31 -
<< Note >> Shaded areas cannot be written to (read-only). Also, do not attempt to access those areas
crossed out with an “X”.

- 32 -
8.4 Communications Data Tables
• Symbol Definitions
(#): Depends on inverter rating.
(✳): Cannot be set while inverter is running (attempting to write data while the inverter is running will
result in an error (N0000)).
(Note): Use caution! Because there is no data checking performed on these settings, caution must be used
to not write incorrect data (the “Mask” and “Adjustment Range” sections will be shaded).
• Usage Precautions
1: Refer to the inverter instruction manual in conjunction with this manual.
2: If the mask data is not correctly set when data is written, the data check function cannot correctly
check the data setting.
3: All data is written in hexadecimal (base 16) format (except for “Multiplier” and “Adjustment Range”
data, which is written in decimal (base 10) format).
Parameter Table Usage Method Example

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (✴) 0/1 03C0 FFFF 0BB8 ∼ 9C40 (30.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY #1 0/1 0428 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01

◊ In this example, the MAXIMUM OUTPUT

FREQUENCY setting of the inverter will be
changed from 80Hz to 60Hz.

HOST COMPUTER → INV. INV. → HOST COMPUTER

(B0) (B0000)..............Bank
(A3C0) (A03C0)..............Address
(MFFFF) (MFFFF)..............Mask
(W1770) (W1770)..............Data (within adjustment range)
(Since the mask is automatically set to FFFFH whenever
the address is set, setting it as shown here is optional.)

• Panel display range (base 10)

The actual value displayed on the LCD panel will depend on the setting of FREQUENCY DISPLAY
RESOLUTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. When 0.01Hz resolution is selected and the
above example is performed, 60.00Hz will be displayed on the panel. When 0.1Hz resolution is
selected, 60.0Hz will be displayed. The “Adjustment Range” column shows a maximum of 5
digits, but because the panel can only display 4 digits, the displayed value will be a rounded
representation of the actual data setting value.
(Ex: If 399.95 (9C3BH) is written to MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (upper limit=400.00),
400.0Hz will be displayed.)
• Display Data / Internal Data Conversion Method
Internal data = [display data ÷ Multiplier], converted to hexadecimal.
(Ex: To convert a MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY setting of 60Hz to internal data: 60 ÷ 0.01 = 6000,
converted to hexadecimal → 1770H).

• Shaded Parameters: Data checks are not performed on parameters that appear in the following data
tables with shaded “Mask” and “Adjustment Range” sections. Use extreme caution when setting these
parameters, therefore, as incorrect mask or data settings may cause unpredictable operation.

- 33 -
RS232C Command / Frequency
<< RS232C commands/frequency command will only be valid when the following parameter is respectively configured for
RS232C command, frequency, or both. >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Command • frequency 0 0515 0003 0000: FREQUENCY MODE  0000
mode selection SELECTION, COMMAND
MODE SELECTION
settings
0001: RS232C commands valid
0002: RS232C frequency valid
0003: RS232C commands and
frequency valid

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Frequency command 0 0510 FFFF LL ∼ UL (Note 1) 0.01 0000

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Run • stop command 0 0512 0001 0000: Stop command  0000
Command selection 0001: Run command
Forward • reverse run 0 0512 0004 0000: Reverse  0004
selection 0004: Forward
Acc/dec #1 / #2 0 0512 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1  0000
selection 0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 0512 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode)  0000
0080: Jog mode
Feedback control 0 0513 0001 0000: Feedback valid  0000
(Note 2) 0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC 0 0513 0002 0000: No compulsory DC  0000
injection braking mode injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC
injection below DC
INJECTION START
FREQUENCY
Fundamental 0 0513 0004 0000: V/F #1  0000
parameter switching 0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 0513 0008 0000: Normal  0000
(coast stop command) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off 0 0513 0010 0000: Does nothing  0000
command 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 0513 0020 0000: Does nothing  0000
(trip clear) 0020: Reset
Preset speed run 0 0514 000F 0000: Output frequency 1 0000
command selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C RS232C 0/1 0445 00FF 0000: Timer OFF 1 EEPROM
communications timer 0001 ∼ 0064: 1s ∼ 100s contents

(Note 1) Throughout the remainder of this document, the abbreviations “LL”, “UL”, and “Fmax” will stand for LOWER
LIMIT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, and MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, respectively.
(Note 2) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 34 -
Option Command / Frequency (Valid Only When Option Board Is Installed)
<< The following function is valid only when FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 3 (communication/12-bit binary option input valid). >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
Option Frequency command 0 0508 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01 0000

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 3 (communication option input valid). >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
Option Run • stop command 0 050A 0001 0000: Stop command  0000
Command selection 0001: Run command
Forward • reverse run 0 050A 0004 0000: Reverse  0004
selection 0004: Forward (Note 1)
Acc/dec #1 / #2 0 050A 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1  0000
selection 0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 050A 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode)  0000
0080: Jog mode
Feedback control 0 050B 0001 0000: Feedback valid  0000
(Note 2) 0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC 0 050B 0002 0000: No compulsory DC  0000
injection braking mode injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC
injection below DC
INJECTION START
FREQUENCY
Fundamental 0 050B 0004 0000: V/F #1  0000
parameter switching 0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 050B 0008 0000: Normal  0000
(coast stop command) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off 0 050B 0010 0000: Does nothing  0000
command 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 050B 0020 0000: Does nothing  0000
(trip clear) 0020: Reset
Preset speed run 0 050C 000F 0000: Output frequency 1 0000
command selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS485 RS485 0/1 04CC 00FF 0000: Timer OFF 1 EEPROM
communications timer 0001 ∼ 0064: 1s ∼ 100s contents

(Note 1) The initialized value is 0004 only when an option ROM is installed and a communications option (RS485,
TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-S20, DeviceNet or RIO) is selected (COMMUNICATION SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1 ∼ 3). Otherwise, it is initialized to 0000.
(Note 2) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 35 -
Panel Command / Frequency
<< The following function is valid only when FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>
Group Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Panel FREQUENCY COMMAND 0 04F8 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>
Group Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Panel Run • stop command selection 0 04FA 0001 0000: Stop command 
Command (Note 1) 0001: Run command
DIRECTION SELECTION (FORWARD/REV) 0/1 04FA 0004 0000: Reverse 
0004: Forward
ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 SELECTION 0/1 04FA 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1 
0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 04FA 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode) 
(Note 1) 0080: Jog mode
PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL (Note 2) 0/1 04FB 0001 0000: Feedback valid 
0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC injection braking mode 0 04FB 0002 0000: No compulsory DC 
(Note 1) injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC injection
below DC INJECTION
START FREQUENCY
FUNDAMENTAL PARAM SWITCHING 0/1 04FB 0004 0000: V/F #1 
0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 04FB 0008 0000: Normal 
(Note 1) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off command 0 04FB 0010 0000: Does nothing 
(Note 1) 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 04FB 0020 After writing 0020 (“TRIP 
(Note 1) CLEAR COMMAND (PRESS
CLEAR)“) will be displayed),
write 0000 and the inverter will
reset
Preset speed run command 0 04FC 000F 0000: Output frequency 1
(Note 1) selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

(Note 1) It is also possible to write to bank 1 (EEPROM), but this is not for normal command use. To avoid the possibility
of unpredictable operation, do not write these commands to bank 1.
(Note 2) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 36 -
Inverter Status Monitor (Read Only)

Function Bank Address Mask Data Contents (Units) Multiplier

Length
Operating frequency monitor 0 0524 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Rotation direction monitor 0 05B6 0004 bit → inverter status monitor 1 
Frequency command monitor 0 0500 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Output current monitor 0 0576 00FF byte % 1
Input voltage monitor (Note 1) 0 05B2 FFFF word % 0.1
Output voltage monitor (Note 1) 0 05B0 FFFF word % 0.1
Input terminal status monitor 0 057A FFFF word → bit monitor 1 
Output terminal status monitor 0 0579 00FF byte → bit monitor 2 
Cumulative run time (Note 2) 0 05A6 FFFF word  1
05D2 0008 bit  1
Past trips (Note 3) 0/1 04F3 007F 5 bytes → Table 1, Table 2 
(4 most recent trips) ∼ 04F7
Pre-compensation frequency 0 0524 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Post-compensation frequency 0 0260 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Torque current monitor 0 0684 FFFF word % (Note 4) 0.01
Excitation current monitor 0 0688 00FF byte % 1
PID feedback value 0 0506 FFFF word Hz (Note 4) 0.02
Motor overload ratio 0 0584 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Inverter overload ratio 0 0586 FFFF word % (Note 5)
DBR overload ratio 0 0588 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Input / output power units 0 03AE 0008 bit 0000: 0.01kW (Note 6)
0008: 0.1kW
Input power (%) (Note 7) 0 035C FFFF word % 0.1
Input power (kW) 0 0350 FFFF word kW (Note 6)
Output power (%) (Note 7) 0 035E FFFF word % (Note 4) 0.1
Output power (kW) 0 0352 FFFF word kW (Note 4) (Note 6)
RR input 0 0550 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Present trip 0 0591 007F byte → Table 1 
Command mode status 0 05B8 0003 2 bits 00: terminal 
01: panel
02: option
03: RS232C
Frequency mode selection status 0 05B8 000C 2 bits 00: terminal 
04: panel
08: option
0C: RS232C
CPU version number 2 8000 FFFF word  1
External ROM version number 3 0000 FFFF word  1
EEPROM version number 1 0380 FFFF word  1
Inverter typeform monitor 0 05CA 00FF byte → Table 5 1

(Note 1) These monitor voltage units are not affected by the setting of VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS -
they are always in %.
(Note 2) The time range for the cumulative run timer is 0000H ∼ FFFFH (0 ∼ 65535 hours), counted at address 05A6 in bank 0. When the
timer reaches a count of 65536, bit 3 of address 05D2 in bank 0 is set, and the count at address 05A6 is cleared. At a count of
65537, therefore, address 05A6 will contain 0001H and bit 3 of address 05D2 will be set.
Cumulative run time monitor example:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(A5D2) (A05D2) .................. select rollover bit address
(M0008) (M0008) .................. mask off rollover bit
(R) (R0008) .................. timer has rolled-over ( ≥ 65536 hours)
(A5A6) (A05A6) .................. select timer address
(R) (R000A) .................. timer = 10 (total time = 65546 hours)

- 37 -
(Note 3) Past trips are stored in a ring-buffer format, with the most recent trip located at the address following the 00H starting point.
(Note 4) Uses signed data (data values larger than 7FFFH are negative). If internal data is 8000H or larger, the actual value can be
obtained by: actual value = - [FFFFH - (internal data) + 1].
(Note 5) Multiplier is 100/65535.
(Note 6) If the input / output power units data is 0000, the monitored data is in 0.01kW units, and the multiplier is 0.01. If the input / output
power units data is 0008, the monitored data is in 0.1kW units, and the multiplier is 0.1. These values are automatically set
according to the inverter typeform.
(Note 7) 100% = √3 × rated voltage × rated current (with some variation for losses).

Input Terminal Status Monitor

Bit Monitor 1 057AH Input Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit
Lower Byte Read Mask
bit 0 F terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0001
bit 1 R terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0002
bit 2 S1 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0004
bit 3 S2 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0008
bit 4 S3 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0010
bit 5 S4 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 S5 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 S6 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Bit Monitor 1 057BH Input Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit

Upper Byte Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 unused (always 0)   
bit 3 unused (always 0)   
bit 4 unused (always 0)   
bit 5 S7 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 RES terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 ST terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Ex. 1) Input terminal monitor example:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(A57A) (A057A)
(R) (R8025)

1000 0000 0010 0101

In this example, terminals ST, S4, S1 and F are shorted to CC, and all others are open.

Ex. 2) Example of monitoring only terminals S1 ∼ S4:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(A57A) (A057A)
(M003C) (M003C)
(R) (R0004)
In this example, terminal S1 is shorted to CC, and S2 ∼ S4 are open.

- 38 -
Output Terminal Status Monitor
Bit Monitor 2 0579H Output Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit
Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 FAN OFF ON 0004
bit 3 FL FLB-FLC shorted FLA-FLC shorted 0008
bit 4 MS relay OFF ON 0010
bit 5 OUT (option) OUTB-OUTC shorted OUTA-OUTC shorted 0020
bit 6 RCH RCHA-RCHC open RCHA-RCHC shorted 0040
bit 7 LOW LOWA-LOWC open LOWA-LOWC shorted 0080

Inverter Status Monitor

Inverter 05B6H Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit
Status 1 Read Mask
Lower Byte bit 0 running (acc/dec)  running 0001
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 forward / reverse reverse forward 0004
bit 3 acc/dec #1/#2 acc/dec #1 acc/dec #2 0008
bit 4 for inverter use   
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 jog/normal mode normal (acc/dec) jog mode 0080

Inverter 05B7H Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Status 1 Read Mask
Upper Byte bit 0 feedback ON/OFF OFF feedback active 0001
bit 1 DC inject. braking OFF DC inject. braking active 0002
bit 2 V/F #1/#2 V/F #1 V/F #2 0004
bit 3 coasting not coasting coasting 0008
bit 4 emergency off not in emergency off in emergency off 0010
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 for inverter use   

Inverter 05BBH Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Status 2 Read Mask
bit 0 accelerating not accelerating accelerating 0001
bit 1 decelerating not decelerating decelerating 0002
bit 2 for inverter use   
bit 3 retry not retrying retrying 0008
bit 4 running (including stopped running 0010
DC inject. braking)
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 tripped not tripped tripped 0080

Ex) Inverter status monitoring example (reading the status of inverter number “00”):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A5B6) (00A05B6)
(00R) (00R000D)

0000 0000 0000 1101

In this example, the inverter is running forward in normal acc/dec mode using acc/dec #2 and V/F #1.

- 39 -
Table 1. List of trips (trips registered as past faults)

LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation

NO ERROR ××00 No error has been recorded since the last inverter
reset or trip clear
OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) ××01 Overcurrent during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (DECEL) ××02 Overcurrent during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××03 Overcurrent during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOAD-END OVERCURRENT ××04 Load-end overcurrent detected at start-up (output
(PRESS CLEAR) terminals, motor wiring etc.)
U-PHASE SHORT CKT ××05 U-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
V-PHASE SHORT CKT ××06 V-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
W-PHASE SHORT CKT ××07 W-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST INPUT PHASE ××08 Lost input phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST OUTPUT PHASE ××09 Lost output phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) ××0A Overvoltage during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (DECEL) ××0B Overvoltage during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (RUN) ××0C Overvoltage during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
INVERTER OVERLOAD ××0D Inverter overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
MOTOR OVERLOAD ××0E Motor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERLOAD TRIP ××0F Dynamic braking resistor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERHEAT TRIP ××10 Inverter overheat
(PRESS CLEAR)
EMERGENCY OFF ××11 Emergency off
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE ××12 EEPROM failure during write
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM READ FAILURE ××13 EEPROM failure during initial read
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××14 Unused
RAM ERROR ××15 RAM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
ROM ERROR ××16 ROM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CPU ERROR ××17 CPU error
(PRESS CLEAR)

- 40 -
 LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation
COMMUNICATION ERROR ××18 RS232C timer time-out
(PRESS CLEAR)
GATE ARRAY FAULT ××19 Gate array error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CURRENT DETECT ERROR ××1A Output current detection circuit error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION PCB ERROR ××1B Option PCB error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION ROM ERROR ××1C Option ROM error
LOW CURRENT TRIP ××1D Low current
(PRESS CLEAR)
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP ××1E Main circuit undervoltage
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××1F Unused
OVERTORQUE TRIP ××20 Overtorque
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (SOFT) ××21 Earth fault (software)
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (HARD) ××22 Earth fault (hardware)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPEN FUSE TRIP ××23 Open fuse
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERCURRENT TRIP ××24 Dynamic braking resistor overcurrent
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (ACC) ××25 Overcurrent in DC section during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (DEC) ××26 Overcurrent in DC section during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××27 Overcurrent in DC section during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
AUTO-TUNING ERROR ××28 Auto-tuning error
(PRESS CLEAR)
INV TYPEFORM ERROR ××29 Inverter typeform error
(PRESS READ/WRITE)

- 41 -
Table 2. Trip data configuration ( : starting point)

When a trip occurs, the oldest trip becomes the starting point (00H), and the most recent trip is placed at
the previous starting point address (refer to Table 1 for trip codes):
04F3H 04F4H 04F5H 04F6H 04F7H Trip Status
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Initial status (no trips)
00H 00H 00H 00H 01H 1st trip
00H 01H 03H 0BH 01H 4th trip
0BH 01H 03H 0BH 00H 5th trip
0BH 01H 03H 00H 13H 6th trip

Table 3. Pre-alarm status monitor data (bank 0)

05D4H Function LCD Display Message 0 1
bit 0 ∼ bit 3 unused   
bit 4 overload pre-alarm status OVERLOAD no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 5 overvoltage pre-alarm status OVERVOLTAGE no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 6 overcurrent pre-alarm status OVERCURRENT no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 7 overheat pre-alarm status OVERHEAT no pre-alarm pre-alarm

Table 4. Messages (non-trips)

LCD Display Message Bank Address Mask Data
INVERTER OFF 0 051B 0008 0008: ST-CC open
(ST-CC IS OPEN)
CONTROL POWER LOW 0 05B4 0010 0010: control circuit undervoltage

DC BUS 0 05B4 0001 0001: main circuit undervoltage

UNDERVOLTAGE
FREQUENCY POINT 0 05D4 0002 0002: frequency point setting error alarm
SETTING ERROR

Message monitor example:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER

(B0) (B0000)
(A5B4) (A05B4)
(M0001) (M0001)
(R) (R0001)

In this case, a main circuit undervoltage condition is being indicated.

- 42 -
Table 5. Inverter typeform codes

230v Class 460v Class 575v Class

Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform
Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex)
G3-2010 ××21 G3-4015 ××42 G3-6060 ××65
G3-2015 ××22 G3-4025 ××43 G3-6120 ××67
G3-2025 ××23 G3-4035 ××44 G3-6160 ××68
G3-2035 ××24 G3-4055 ××45 G3-6220 ××69
G3-2055 ××25 G3-4080 ××46 G3-6270 ××6A
G3-2080 ××26 G3-4110 ××47 G3-6330 ××6B
G3-2110 ××27 G3-4160 ××48 G3-6400 ××6C
G3-2160 ××28 G3-4220 ××49 G3-6500 ××6D
G3-2220 ××29 G3-4270 ××4A G3-6600 ××6E
G3-2270 ××2A G3-4330 ××4B G3-6750 ××6F
G3-2330 ××2B G3-4400 ××4C G3-610K ××70
G3-2400 ××2C G3-4500 ××4D G3-612K ××71
G3-4600 ××4E G3-615K ××72
G3-4750 ××4F G3-620K ××73
G3-410K ××50
G3-412K ××51
G3-415K ××52
G3-420K ××53
G3-425K ××54
G3-430K ××55

- 43 -
Parameter List

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (✴) 0/1 03C0 FFFF 0BB8 ∼ 9C40 (30.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY #1 0/1 0428 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE SELECT (Note, ✴) 0/1 04BE 0030 0000: Input voltage level (0) 
0020: Automatic setting (1)
0030: Stationary setting (2)
MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #1 0/1 0426 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
REVERSE OPERATION DISABLE SELECT 0/1 04B6 0020 0000: Reverse allowed (0) 
0020: Reverse not allowed (1)
UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03C2 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03C4 FFFF 0 ∼ UL, Fmax
VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN (Note, ✴) 0/1 042D 000F 0000: Constant torque (1) 
0001: Variable torque (2)
0002: Auto. torque boost (3)
0006: 3 w/ auto. eng. sav. (4)
000A: vector control (5)
000E: 5 w/ auto. eng. sav. (6)
1•2 VOLTAGE BOOST #1 0/1 0424 FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
ACCELERATION TIME #1 (Ref. 1) 0/1 03C6 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 0.01 / 0.1
DECELERATION TIME #1 0/1 03C8 FFFF (0.01 ∼ 600.00 / 0.1 ∼ 6000.0)
ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION 0/1 042D 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST LOW 0/1 04C4 00FF 0003 ∼ 00FD (0 ∼ 50) (Special)
ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST HIGH 0/1 04C5 00FF

Codes used throughout this parameter list:

(✴) : Cannot set while inverter is running.

(Note) : No data checking performed → “Mask” and “Adjustment Range” sections will be shaded.

(Special) : Internal data = (display setting × 5 + 3), converted to hexadecimal.

(Ref. 1) : The adjustment range and multiplier depend on the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS
SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS as follows:
When ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is set for 0.1 sec. units, adjustment range =
0.1 ∼ 6000.0, and multiplier = 0.1.
When ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is set for 0.01 sec. units, adjustment range
= 0.01 ∼ 600.00, and multiplier = 0.01.
In addition, if the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is changed after setting
the ACC/DEC times, the ACC/DEC times will become 10 times or 0.1 times their former
value. Therefore, always reset the ACC/DEC time settings after changing the setting of
ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION.

- 44 -
GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
BASE FREQUENCY #2 0/1 0432 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #2 0/1 0430 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
VOLTAGE BOOST #2 0/1 042E FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LVL #2 0/1 0434 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
STALL PROTECTION SELECTION #2 0/1 0437 0040 0000: ON (0) 
0040: OFF (1)
0 STALL PROTECTION LEVEL #2 0/1 0435 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
ACCELERATION TIME #2 (Ref. 1) 0/1 03CA FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 0.01 / 0.1
DECELERATION TIME #2 0/1 03CC FFFF (0.01 ∼ 600.00 / 0.1 ∼ 6000.0)
ACC/DEC PATTERN #2 SELECTION 0/1 0437 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCH FREQUENCY 0/1 0406 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>

GROUP:PANEL CONTROL PARAMETERS

Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
DIRECTION SELECTION (FORWARD/REV) 0/1 04FA 0004 0000: Reverse (0) 
0004: Forward (1)
STOP PATTERN SELECTION 0/1 045C 0040 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
0040: Coast stop (1)
FUNDAMENTAL PARAM SWITCHING 0/1 04FB 0004 0000: V/F #1 (1) 
0004: V/F #2 (2)
ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 SELECTION 0/1 04FA 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1 (1) 
0008: Acc / dec #2 (2)
PANEL RESET SELECTION 0/1 045C 0030 0000: All possible (0) 
0010: overload only (1)
0020: overload, overcurrent
only (2)
PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL (Note 1) 0/1 04FB 0001 0000: Feedback valid (0) 
0001: Feedback invalid (1)

(Note 1): This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control
is selected. In order to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL
SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 45 -
GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
INPUT TERMINAL SELECTION 0/1 04BB 0001 0000: Standard functions (0) 
0001: Individual selection (1)
1 “R” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 046C FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 54) 
“S1” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 046E FFFF
“S2” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0470 FFFF
“S3” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0472 FFFF
“S4” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0474 FFFF Refer to Table 6
“F” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0476 FFFF
“RES” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0478 FFFF (Note)
“ST” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047A FFFF
“S5” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047C FFFF
“S6” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047E FFFF
“S7” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0480 FFFF
POTENTIAL TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0482 FFFF
R,S1-S7 TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0462 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
F INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0463 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RES INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0464 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
ST INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0465 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
“RCH” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0490 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“RCH” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 0492 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“RCH” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 0493 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“LOW” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 048C FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“LOW” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 048E 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“LOW” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 048F 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“FL” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0494 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“FL” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 0496 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“FL” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 0497 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“OUT” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0498 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“OUT” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 049A 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“OUT” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 049B 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
LOW SPEED SIGNAL OUTPUT FREQ 0/1 03FE FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
ACC/DEC COMPLETE DETECT BAND 0/1 0400 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
SPEED REACH MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 0/1 0404 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
SPEED REACH MINIMUM FREQUENCY 0/1 0402 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
COMMERCIAL POWER/INV SWITCHING OUTPUT 0/1 04C1 00C0 0000: OFF (0) 
0040: Auto. switch on trip (1)
0080: Switch at COMMERCIAL
POWER/INV SWITCH
FREQ (2)
00C0: Both (1) and (2) (3)
2 • 3 COMMERCIAL POWER/INV SWITCH FREQ 0/1 041C FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
“FP” OUTPUT TERMINAL PULSE FREQUENCY 0/1 04C0 0003 0000: 48f (0) 
0001: 96f (1)
0002: 360f (2)
RR INPUT SPECIAL FUNCTION SELECT (Note) 0/1 04B8 00E0 0000: Standard (0) 
0040: Fmax (1)
0080: TACC/TDEC mult. (2)
00C0: VB mult. factor (3)
0020: CL mult. factor (4)

- 46 -
Table 6. Input terminal selections

Setting Data Function Setting Data Function

Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 10C8 R (reverse run) 28 04AF Binary bit #6
1 011C SS1 (preset speed selection) 29 08AF Binary bit #7
2 021C SS2 (preset speed selection) 30 10AF Binary bit #8
3 041C SS3 (preset speed selection) 31 20AF Binary bit #9
4 081C SS4 (preset speed selection) 32 40AF Binary bit #10
5 20C8 F (forward run) 33 04CE No effect
6 201B RES (fault reset) 34 01C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting
(UP)
7 C0C9 ST (gate ON/OFF) 35 02C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting
(DOWN)
8 0CC8 JOG selection 36 04C7 UP/DOWN frequency clear
9 081A Acc/dec #1/#2 selection 37 08C7 PUSH-type RUN key
10 101B Emergency off 38 10C7 PUSH-type STOP key
11 021B DC injection braking 39 02B9 No effect
ON/OFF
12 041B Fundamental parameter 40 C0C8 Forward/reverse run selection
switching (V/F #2)
13 011B Feedback control ON/OFF 41 20C7 RUN
14 10CE Pattern run selection #1 42 30C9 Binary data write
15 20CE Pattern run selection #2 43 0198 [LOCAL/REMOTE] key
16 40CE Pattern run selection #3 44 0298 [MON] key
17 80CE Pattern run selection #4 45 0498 [PRG] key
18 02CE Pattern run continue signal 46 0898 [UP] (▲) key
19 01CE Pattern run step trigger 47 1098 [DOWN] (▼) key
signal
20 0AC9 JOG forward run 48 2098 [READ/WRITE] key
21 06C9 JOG reverse run 49 4098 [RUN] key
22 10AE Binary bit #0 50 8098 [STOP/CLEAR] key
23 20AE Binary bit #1 51 08CE Commercial power / inverter
switching signal
24 40AE Binary bit #2 52 40C7 Reserved for option use
25 80AE Binary bit #3 53 10CB RR frequency switching input
26 01AF Binary bit #4 54 20CB IV frequency switching input
27 02AF Binary bit #5

(Note): In order for binary bit #0 ∼ #10 (setting values 22 ∼ 32) and UP/DOWN frequency setting (setting
values 34 & 35) inputs to be valid, parameter FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 or
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #2 in GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS must be
set to 5 (BIN (binary setting or UP/DOWN setting)).

- 47 -
Table 7. Output terminal selections (RCH, LOW, FL, OUT relay contacts)

Setting Data Function Setting Data Function

Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 0000 Lower limit frequency 32 C5B7 Executing emergency off
1 0100 /Lower limit frequency 33 CDB7 /Executing emergency off
2 0200 Upper limit frequency 34 B5BB Executing retry
3 0300 /Upper limit frequency 35 BDBB /Executing retry
4 0400 Low speed signal 36 D5CF Pattern run switching output
5 0500 /Low speed signal 37 DDCF /Pattern run switching output
6 0600 Accel/decel complete 38 D5D8 PID deviation limit
7 0700 /Accel/decel complete 39 DDD8 /PID deviation limit
8 0800 Selected speed reach signal 40 C5BB Run/stop
9 0900 /Selected speed reach signal 41 CDBB /Run/stop
10 0A00 Fault 42 1400 Severe fault (armature short,
load-end short, open phase,
output error, earth fault)
11 0B00 /Fault 43 1500 /Severe fault (armature short,
load-end short, open phase,
output error, earth fault)
12 0C00 Fault other than earth fault or 44 1600 Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
13 0D00 /Fault other than earth fault or 45 1700 /Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
14 95B5 Overcurrent pre-alarm 46 E5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
15 9DB5 /Overcurrent pre-alarm 47 EDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
16 85C5 Inverter overload pre-alarm 48 F5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
17 8DC5 /Inverter overload pre-alarm 49 FDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
18 95C5 Motor overload pre-alarm 50 85C0 Fan ON/OFF
19 9DC5 /Motor overload pre-alarm 51 8DC0 /Fan ON/OFF
20 D5C5 Overheat pre-alarm 52 F5B6 Executing JOG
21 DDC5 /Overheat pre-alarm 53 FDB6 /Executing JOG
22 A5B4 Overvoltage pre-alarm 54 1800 Local/remote operation
23 ADB4 /Overvoltage pre-alarm 55 1900 /Local/remote operation
24 E5B4 Undervoltage alarm 56 A5D1 Cumulative timer alarm
25 EDB4 /Undervoltage alarm 57 ADD1 /Cumulative timer alarm
26 85B5 Undercurrent alarm 58 1A00 Communication error alarm
27 8DB5 /Undercurrent alarm 59 1B00 /Communication error alarm
28 85D1 Overtorque alarm 60 A5B6 F/R
29 8DD1 /Overtorque alarm 61 ADB6 /F/R
30 E5BB Braking resistor OL pre-alarm 62 1E00 Run preparation complete

- 48 -
31 EDBB /Braking resistor OL pre- 63 1F00 /Run preparation complete
alarm

- 49 -
GROUP:SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
START-UP FREQUENCY 0/1 03F8 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
END FREQUENCY 0/1 03FA FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 0408 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RUN FREQUENCY HYSTERESIS 0/1 040A FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
ENABLE JUMP FREQUENCIES 0/1 04BB 0080 0000: Function OFF (0) 
0080: Function ON (1)
1 JUMP FREQUENCY #1 0/1 03EE FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #1 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03EC FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #2 0/1 03F2 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #2 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03F0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #3 0/1 03F6 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #3 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03F4 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY (#) 0/1 0439 00FF 0005 ∼ 0064 (0.5 ∼ 10.0) 0.1

(#) : Adjustment range depends on inverter rating.

- 50 -
GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 0/1 04BA 0007 0001: RR (1) 
0002: IV (2)
0003: RX (3)
0004: PG (4)
0005: BIN (5)
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #2 0/1 04BA 0038 0008: RR (1) 
0010: IV (2)
0018: RX (3)
0020: PG (4)
0028: BIN (5)
ANALOG INPUT FILTER 0/1 04BC 0003 0000: No filter (0) 
0001: Small filter (1)
0002: Medium filter (2)
0003: Large filter (3)
RR TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0002 0000: Standard (0) 
0002: Adjustable (1)
1 RR REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 0449 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RR REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DA FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RR REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044A 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RR REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DC FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
IV TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0004 0000: Standard (0) 
0004: Adjustable (1)
1 IV REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044B 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
IV REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DE FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
IV REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044C 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
IV REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E0 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RX TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0008 0000: Standard (0) 
0008: Adjustable (1)
1 RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044D 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
RX REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E2 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044E 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
RX REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E4 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
PG TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0010 0000: Standard (0) 
0010: Adjustable (1)
1 PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044F 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
PG REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E6 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 0450 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
PG REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E8 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
BINARY INPUT STD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0001 0000: Standard (0) 
0001: Adjustable (1)
1 BINARY REF SETTING POINT #1 0/1 0447 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03D6 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
BINARY REF SETTING POINT #2 0/1 0448 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03D8 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
JOG RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 03EA FFFF 0000 ∼ 07D0 (0.00 ∼ 20.00) 0.01
Other JOG STOP METHOD 0/1 04B6 00C0 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
than 0
0040: Coast stop (1)
0080: DC injection stop (2)
PRESET SPEED SELECTION 0/1 04A6 000F 0000 ∼ 000F (0 ∼ 15) 1

- 51 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Other PRESET SPEED MODE ACTIVATION 0/1 04BB 0004 0000: Deactivated (0) 
than 0 0004: Activated (1)
PRESET SPEED #1 FREQUENCY 1 0528 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
PRESET SPEED #1 OPERATING MODE 1 052A 040C 0004 (0) 1
0000 (1)
000C (2)
0008 (3) (Note 1)
0404 (4)
0400 (5)
040C (6)
0408 (7)
2 or PRESET SPEED #2 FREQUENCY 1 0530 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #2 OPERATING MODE 1 0532 040C (Note 2) 1
3 or PRESET SPEED #3 FREQUENCY 1 0538 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #3 OPERATING MODE 1 053A 040C (Note 2) 1
4 or PRESET SPEED #4 FREQUENCY 1 0540 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #4 OPERATING MODE 1 0542 040C (Note 2) 1
5 or PRESET SPEED #5 FREQUENCY 1 0548 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #5 OPERATING MODE 1 054A 040C (Note 2) 1
6 or PRESET SPEED #6 FREQUENCY 1 0550 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #6 OPERATING MODE 1 0552 040C (Note 2) 1
7 or PRESET SPEED #7 FREQUENCY 1 0558 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #7 OPERATING MODE 1 055A 040C (Note 2) 1
8 or PRESET SPEED #8 FREQUENCY 1 0560 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #8 OPERATING MODE 1 0562 040C (Note 2) 1
9 or PRESET SPEED #9 FREQUENCY 1 0568 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #9 OPERATING MODE 1 056A 040C (Note 2) 1
10 or PRESET SPEED #10 FREQUENCY 1 0570 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #10 OPERATING MODE 1 0572 040C (Note 2) 1
11 or PRESET SPEED #11 FREQUENCY 1 0578 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #11 OPERATING MODE 1 057A 040C (Note 2) 1
12 or PRESET SPEED #12 FREQUENCY 1 0580 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #12 OPERATING MODE 1 0582 040C (Note 2) 1
13 or PRESET SPEED #13 FREQUENCY 1 0588 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #13 OPERATING MODE 1 058A 040C (Note 2) 1
14 or PRESET SPEED #14 FREQUENCY 1 0590 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #14 OPERATING MODE 1 0592 040C (Note 2) 1
15 PRESET SPEED #15 FREQUENCY 1 0598 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
PRESET SPEED #15 OPERATING MODE 1 059A 040C (Note 2) 1

Caution! • Frequency parameters RX REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY ∼ BINARY REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY use signed data (data values
larger than 7FFFH are negative). If internal data is 8000H or larger, the actual setting can be obtained by using the conversion
formula: actual setting = - [FFFFH - (internal data) + 1]. In addition, due to the fact that the multiplier is 0.02, use Fmax ÷ 2
(converted to hexadecimal) for adjustment limits (-Fmax ÷ 2 ∼ Fmax ÷ 2 corresponds to -Fmax ∼ Fmax).
• Setting point parameters RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 ∼ PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 use signed data (data
values from 0080H to 00FFH are negative). If internal data is between 0080H and 00FFH, the actual setting can be obtained by
using the conversion formula: actual setting = - [00FFH - (internal data) + 1].
(Note 1): Use caution with these parameters, as the internal data values do not follow the same setting format as those set from the
operating panel. A look-up table, etc., can be used in the application program to reference these values properly.
(Note 2): Adjustment range is the same as PRESET SPEED #1 OPERATING MODE.

- 52 -
GROUP:PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
DYNAMIC BRAKING SELECTION (Note) 0/1 04BD 0003 0000: no dynam. braking (0) 
0001: with dynamic braking,
no DBR OL trip (1)
0003: with dynamic braking
and DBR OL trip (2)
2 BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE 0/1 0416 FFFF 000A ∼ 2710 (1.0 ∼ 1000) 0.1
BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING 0/1 0418 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01 ∼ 600.00) 0.01
OVERVOLTAGE STALL PROTECTION 0/1 04BD 0004 0000: ON (0) 
0004: OFF (1)
DC INJECTION START FREQUENCY 0/1 03FC FFFF 0000 ∼ 2EE0 (0.00 ∼ 120.00) 0.01
Other DC INJECTION CURRENT MAGNITUDE 0/1 043A 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
than 0 DC INJECTION TIME 0/1 043B 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
FWD/REV DC INJECTION PRIORITY CTRL 0/1 04BC 0040 0000: OFF (0) 
0040: ON (1)
MOTOR SHAFT STATIONARY CTRL 0/1 04BC 0080 0000: OFF (0) 
0080: ON (1)
EMERGENCY OFF MODE SELECTION 0/1 04BC 0030 0000: Coast stop (0) 
0010: Decelerated stop (1)
0020: DC injection stop (2)
2 EMERGENCY OFF DC INJECTION TIME 0/1 043D 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
NUMBER OF RETRY ATTEMPTS 0/1 043F 00FF 0000 ∼ 000A (0 ∼ 10) 1
Other TIME BETWEEN RETRY ATTEMPTS 0/1 0440 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
than 0
REGENERATION POWER RIDE-THROUGH 0/1 04BD 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: ON (1)
1 REGENERATION RIDE-THROUGH TIME 0/1 0446 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FA (0.0 ∼ 25.0) 0.1
AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR SPEED SEARCH) 0/1 04B6 0018 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: On power failure (1)
0010: On ST make/break (2)
0018: Both (1) and (2) (3)
ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LVL #1 0/1 042A 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
OVERLOAD REDUCTION START FREQ 0/1 0410 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME LIMIT 0/1 0444 00FF 0001 ∼ 00F0 (10 ∼ 2400) 10
OVERLOAD SELECTION 0/1 04BD 0030 0000: with motor overload trip, 
w/o soft-stall (0)
0010: with motor overload trip
and soft-stall (1)
0020: w/o soft-stall or motor
overload trip (2)
0030: with soft-stall, w/o motor
overload trip (3)
STALL PROTECTION ENABLE 0/1 042D 0040 0000: ON (0) 
0040: OFF (1)
0 STALL PROTECTION CURRENT LEVEL 0/1 042B 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION 0/1 04BD 0080 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0080: Trip (during run) (1)
UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME 0/1 0414 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
LOW CURRENT DETECT SELECTION 0/1 04BC 0008 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0008: Trip on detection (1)
LOW CURRENT DETECT LEVEL 0/1 0441 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
LOW CURRENT DETECTION TIME 0/1 0442 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1

- 53 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
OUTPUT SHORT-CIRCUIT DETECTION SELECT 0/1 04BE 0003 0000: Standard motor (0) 
0001: High-speed motor (1)
0002: Positioning use
(standard motor) (2)
0003: Positioning use (high-
speed motor) (3)
OVERTORQUE TRIP SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0040 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0040: Trip enabled (1)
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL 0/1 0443 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 200) 1
FAULT TRIP EEPROM SAVE ENABLE 0/1 04B6 0002 0000: Data cleared when 
powered OFF (0)
0002: Data retained when
powered OFF (1)
COOLING FAN CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0004 0000: Automatic (temperature 
detection) (0)
0004: Always ON (1)
CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER ALARM SETTING 0/1 0422 FFFF 0000 ∼ C34B (0.00 ∼ 999.90) 0.02

- 54 -
GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
PATTERN RUN SELECTION 0/1 04A7 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: ON (1)
1 PATTERN RUN CONTINUE MODE 0/1 04A7 0001 0000: reset on stop (0) 
0001: switch when done (1)
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #0 1 0500 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #1 1 0501 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #2 1 0502 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #3 1 0503 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #4 1 0504 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #5 1 0505 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #6 1 0506 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #7 1 0507 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 049E 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #0 1 0508 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #1 1 0509 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #2 1 050A 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #3 1 050B 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #4 1 050C 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #5 1 050D 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #6 1 050E 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #7 1 050F 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A0 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #0 1 0510 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #1 1 0511 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #2 1 0512 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #3 1 0513 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #4 1 0514 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #5 1 0515 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #6 1 0516 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #7 1 0517 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A2 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #0 1 0518 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #1 1 0519 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #2 1 051A 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #3 1 051B 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #4 1 051C 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #5 1 051D 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #6 1 051E 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #7 1 051F 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A4 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
SPEED #1 CONTINUE MODE 1 052E 00FF 0000: Count in seconds from 
time of activation (0)
0001: Count in minutes from
time of activation (1)
0002: Count in seconds from
speed reach (2)
0003: Count in minutes from
speed reach (3)
0004: Non-stop (continue until
STOP command) (4)
0005: Continue until next step
command (5)
Less than 4 SPEED #1 DRIVE TIME 1 052C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1

- 55 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
SPEED #2 CONTINUE MODE 1 0536 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #2 DRIVE TIME 1 0534 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #3 CONTINUE MODE 1 053E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #3 DRIVE TIME 1 053C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #4 CONTINUE MODE 1 0546 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #4 DRIVE TIME 1 0544 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #5 CONTINUE MODE 1 054E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #5 DRIVE TIME 1 054C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #6 CONTINUE MODE 1 0556 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #6 DRIVE TIME 1 0554 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #7 CONTINUE MODE 1 055E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #7 DRIVE TIME 1 055C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #8 CONTINUE MODE 1 0566 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #8 DRIVE TIME 1 0564 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #9 CONTINUE MODE 1 056E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #9 DRIVE TIME 1 056C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #10 CONTINUE MODE 1 0576 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #10 DRIVE TIME 1 0574 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #11 CONTINUE MODE 1 057E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #11 DRIVE TIME 1 057C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #12 CONTINUE MODE 1 0586 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #12 DRIVE TIME 1 0584 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #13 CONTINUE MODE 1 058E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #13 DRIVE TIME 1 058C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #14 CONTINUE MODE 1 0596 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #14 DRIVE TIME 1 0594 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #15 CONTINUE MODE 1 059E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #15 DRIVE TIME 1 059C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1

- 56 -
GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04B9 0060 0020: No feedback (0) 
0040: PID control (1)
0060: Speed feedback (2)
1•2 FEEDBACK INPUT SIGNAL SELECTION 0/1 04B9 001C 0004: RR input (1) 
0008: IV input (2)
000C: RX input (3)
0010: PG feedback (4)
0014: RS232C input (5)
0018: Communication/12-bit
binary option board (6)
001C: BIN input (7)
PROPORTIONAL GAIN 0/1 04A8 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF (0.01 ∼ 2.55) 0.01
INTEGRAL GAIN 0/1 04AA FFFF 0001 ∼ 8CA0 (0.01 ∼ 360.00) 0.01
ANTI-HUNTING GAIN 0/1 04AC 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0.0 ∼ 25.5) 0.1
LAG TIME CONSTANT 0/1 04AD 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
PID LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03D2 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
PID DEVIATION LIMIT SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0080 0000: No PID deviation lim. (0) 
0080: PID deviation limited (1)
1 PID DEVIATION UPPER LIMIT 0/1 04C8 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
PID DEVIATION LOWER LIMIT 0/1 04C9 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PULSES 0/1 040E FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (1 ∼ 9999) 1
PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PHASES 0/1 04B9 0001 0000: Single-phase input (1) 
0001: Two-phase input (2)
DROOPING CONTROL ENABLE 0/1 04B9 0002 0000: OFF (0) 
0002: ON (1)
1 DROOPING CONTROL AMOUNT 0/1 0451 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
OVERRIDE CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04C1 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: FCRR (1)
0002: FCIV (2)
0003: FCRX (3)
0004: FCPG (4)
0005: FCPNL (5)
0006: FCOPT (6)
0007: FCMLT (7)
7 OVERRIDE MULTIPLIER INPUT 0/1 04C1 0038 0000: Reference (0) 
SELECTION 0008: KRR (1)
0010: KIV (2)
0018: KRX (3)
0020: KBIN (4)
OVERRIDE CHANGE MULTIPLIER 0/1 0420 FFFF FC18 ∼ 03E8 (-100.0 ∼ 100.0) 0.1

- 57 -
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
RS232 BAUD RATE 1 04AE 0018 0000: 2400 baud (0) 
0008: 4800 baud (1)
0010: 9600 baud (2)
NUMBER OF DATA BITS 1 04AE 0040 0000: 7 bits (0) 
0040: 8 bits (1)
PARITY SETTING 1 04AE 0080 0000: Even parity (0) 
0080: Odd parity (1)
INVERTER ID NUMBER 1 04B1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
COMMUNICATION SELECTION 1 04AE 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: RS485 (1)
0002: F-10, DNet, RIO (2)
0003: TOSLINE S-20 (3)
0004: 12 bit binary input (4)
0005: 3-digit BCD (0.1Hz) (5)
0006: 3-digit BCD (1Hz) (6)
1 MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION 1 04AF 0018 0000: Slave (0) 
0008: Master (frequency
command) (1)
0010: Master (output
frequency) (2)
RS485 BAUD RATE 1 04AF 0004 0000: Normal mode (0) 
0004: High-speed mode (1)
2 TOSLINE-F10 COMMAND INPUT 1 04B0 0003 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: Frequency command (1)
0002: Command input (2)
0003: Both (1) and (2) (3)
TOSLINE-F10 MONITOR OUTPUT 1 04B0 003C 0000: (0) 0020: (8) 
0004: (1) 0024: (9)
0008: (2) 0028: (10)
000C: (3) 002C: (11)
0010: (4) 0030: (12)
0014: (5) 0034: (13)
0018: (6) 0038: (14)
001C: (7) 003C: (15)
TOSLINE-F10 COMM ERROR MODE 1 04B0 0080 0000: Data cleared (0) 
0080: Data retained (1)
3 TOSLINE-S20 RECEIVE ADDRESS 1 04CE FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
TOSLINE-S20 TRANSMIT ADDRESS 1 04D0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
TOSLINE-S20 COMMAND INPUT 1 04D2 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
TOSLINE-S20 MONITOR OUTPUT 1 04D3 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
TOSLINE-S20 FREQ REF ADDR SELECT 1 04D4 0001 0000: Disable (0) 1
0001: Enable (1)
1 TOSLINE-S20 FREQ REFERENCE 1 04D5 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
ADDR
TOSLINE-S20 COMM ERROR MODE 1 04D4 0002 0000: Data cleared (0) 1
0002: Data retained (1)
TOSLINE-S20 COMM OPTION RESET 1 02DC 0004 0000: No effect (0) 1
0004: Reset (1)
RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN 0/1 04AF 0020 0000: OFF (0) 
0020: ON (1)
1 RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 (Ref. 1) 0/1 04CA 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1 FREQ 0/1 04B2 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01
RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2 (Ref. 1) 0/1 04CB 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #2 FREQ 0/1 04B4 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01

- 58 -
(Note) All parameters in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (except for RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN, RS485/12-
BIT BINARY POINT #1, RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1 FREQ, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2, and RS485/12-BIT
BINARY PT. #2 FREQ) must be set in the EEPROM (bank 1) to be valid. (These parameters can be set in bank 0 (RAM), but the
data settings will be written over by the values contained in the EEPROM the next time RAM is reset. Therefore, always write the
data settings for these parameters to the EEPROM (bank 1)). After changing the settings of these communication parameters, reset
the inverter to validate the data.
(Ref. 1) The data settings for parameters RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 and RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2 are proportional to
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY in GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1.
Ex: If MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY = 80Hz, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 = 10%, RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1
FREQ = 20Hz, and an 8Hz frequency command is input, the output frequency will be 20Hz.

GROUP:AM/FM TERMINAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMS

Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION 0/1 0484 FFFF 1194: Pre-compensation 
reference frequency (0)
6686: Post-compensation
(Note)
output frequency (1)
1500: Frequency setting (2)
2576: Output current (3)
2689: DC voltage (4)
5668: Output voltage (5)
3684: Torque current (6)
2688: Excitation current (7)
7506: PID feedback value (8)
0584: Motor overload ratio (9)
0586: Inv. overload ratio (10)
0588: Dynamic braking resistor
OL ratio (11)
835C: Input power (12)
835E: Output power (13)
A000: Fixed output (14)
2304: Peak output current (15)
8302: Peak input voltage (16)
FREQUENCY METER ADJUSTMENT 0/1 0486 FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1
AM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION (Note) 0/1 0488 FFFF Same as FM TERMINAL 
FUNCTION SELECTION
CURRENT METER ADJUSTMENT 0/1 048A FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1

- 59 -
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 0/1 0438 00FF 0000: Std. shpmt. setting (0) 
(previous setting monitor for read use) 0001: Pump application (1)
0002: Fan application (2)
Note: If data is written to this address, the previous 0003: Conveyor application (3)
setting displayed on the panel will be changed. 0004: Hoist application (4)
0005: Textiles application (5)
0006: Machine tools appl. (6)
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 0/1 04C2 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
(for write use) 0011: Pump application (1)
0012: Fan application (2)
(Note, ✳) 0013: Conveyor application (3)
0014: Hoist application (4)
0015: Textiles application (5)
0016: Machine tools appl. (6)
STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION 0/1 04C2 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
0001: 50Hz std. settings (1)
0002: 60Hz std. settings (2)
(Note, ✳) 0003: Factory settings (3)
(Ref. 1) 0004: Trip clear (4)
0005: Save user-set param. (5)
0006: TYPE 5 reset (6)
0007: Initialize typeform (7)
COMMAND MODE SELECTION 0/1 04B7 0007 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
0001: Terminal input valid (1)
0002: Panel input valid (2)
0003: Communication option
input valid (3)
0004: local/remote valid (4)
FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION 0/1 04B7 0038 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
0008: Terminal input valid (1)
0010: Panel input valid (2)
0018: Comm./12-bit binary
option input valid (3)
0020: local/remote valid (4)
PANEL OPERATION MODE SELECTION (Ref. 2) 0/1 0452 00FB 0000 ∼ 003F (0 ∼ 63) 1
(except 0004, 0008, 000C....)
PASS NUMBER 0/1 049D 00FF 0000 ∼ 0063 (0 ∼ 99) 1
CPU VERSION 2 8000
ROM VERSION 3 0000  (Monitor only) 1
EEPROM VERSION 1 0380
INVERTER TYPEFORM 0 05CA  (Monitor only) 
STATUS MONITOR #1 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0454 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #2 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0456 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #3 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0458 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #4 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 045A FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
FREQUENCY UNITS SCALE FACTOR 0/1 0412 FFFF 0000 ∼ 4E20 (0.00 ∼ 200.00) 0.01
FREQUENCY DISPLAY RESOLUTION 0/1 045D 0003 0000: 1Hz (0) 
0001: 0.1Hz (1)
0002: 0.01Hz (2)
ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION (Ref. 3) 0/1 045D 0004 0000: 0.1 sec. (0) 
0004: 0.01 sec. (1)

- 60 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
CURRENT UNITS SELECTION 0/1 045D 0008 0000: % (0) 
0008: A (1)
VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION 0/1 045D 0010 0000: % (0) 
0010: V (1)
BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 0/1 045E 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Selective unblinding (1)
1 FUNDAMENTAL PARAMS #2 BLIND 0/1 045E 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
0040: Unblind (1)
PANEL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045E 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
0080: Unblind (1)
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
0002: Unblind (1)
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)
PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
0008: Unblind (1)
PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
0010: Unblind (1)
FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0020 0000: Blind (0) 
0020: Unblind (1)
COMMUNICATION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
0040: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL:PUMP PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
0080: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL:FAN PARAMS BLIND 0/1 0460 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: CONVEYOR BLIND 0/1 0460 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
0002: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: HOIST BLIND 0/1 0460 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: TEXTILES BLIND 0/1 0460 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
0008: Unblind (1)
INDUST APPL:MACHINE TOOLS BLIND 0/1 0460 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
0010: Unblind (1)
AM/FM ADJUSTMENT PARAMS BLIND 0/1 0461 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
MOTOR PARAMETERS BLIND 0/1 0461 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)

(Ref. 1): The data setting value will be retained in the EEPROM even if it was written to RAM (bank 0).
Note) If 0000 (does nothing) is written to the EEPROM, the previous setting monitor value will
become 0. Also, if the industrial application parameters selection is written to after writing to the
standard setting mode selection, the standard setting mode selection’s previous data setting will be
cleared.
(Ref. 2): If the setting value is written to RAM only, the value displayed on the panel will not change. Also,
when the setting value is written to EEPROM, the value displayed on the panel will not change until a
reset is performed.
(Ref. 3): If the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is changed after setting the ACC/DEC times,
the ACC/DEC times will become 10 times or 0.1 times their former value. Therefore, always reset
the ACC/DEC time settings after changing the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION.

- 61 -
GROUP:MOTOR RATING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES 0/1 04C3 00FF 0001: (2) 2
0002: (4)
0003: (6)
0004: (8)
0005: (10)
0006: (12)
0007: (14)
0008: (16)
MOTOR RATED CAPACITY 0/1 041E FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (0.1 ∼ 999.9) 0.1
MOTOR TYPE 0/1 04BF 0030 0000:Toshiba EQPIII motor (0) 
0010:Toshiba STD motor (1)
0020:Other (2)
2 MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE
(230 / 460v units) 0/1 04C6 00FF 0012 ∼ 0078 (90 ∼ 600) 5
(575v units) 042C 001A ∼ 00AC (130 ∼ 860)
MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY 0/1 04C7 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 400) 2
MOTOR RATED RPM 0/1 040C FFFF 0000 ∼ 270F (0 ∼ 9999) 1
AUTO-TUNING ENABLE 0 04BE 0008 0000: Auto-tuning disabled (0) 
0008: Auto-tuning enabled (1)
LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA 0/1 04BF 00C0 0000: Small (0) 
0040: Medium (1)
0080: Large (2)
00C0: Very large (3)

- 62 -
8.5 ASCII Character Codes

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 “ 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ‘ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL

Note: Shaded items in the above table indicate valid RS232 communication codes.

- 63 -
8.6 Notes

- 64 -
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 W est Little York Rd., Houston, TX 77041
Tel: [800] 231-1412 Fax: [713] 466-8773 Telex: 762078

Printed in U.S.A
 HIGH PERFORMANCE TRANSISTOR INVERTER
VECTOR DRIVE SERIES

RS485 COMMUNICATIONS OPTION MANUAL

September, 1996
Part #42710-001
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the “RS485 option kit” for the Toshiba TOSVERT-130 G3 High-
Performance Transistor Inverter. Before using the RS485 option, please be sure to thoroughly read
the instructions and precautions contained in this manual. In addition, please make sure that this
instruction manual is delivered to the end user of the inverter unit into which the RS485 option kit is
installed, and keep this instruction manual in a safe place for future reference or inverter inspection.

This instruction manual describes the device specifications, wiring methods, maintenance
procedures, protocol, functions and usage methods for the RS485 communications interface option.

-1-
Usage Precautions
Operating Environment
• Please use the option board only when the ambient temperature of the inverter unit into which
the option board is installed is within the following specified temperature limits:
Operation: -10 ∼ +40°C (+14 ∼ +104°F)
Storage: -25 ∼ +65°C (-13 ∼ +149°F)
• Avoid installation locations that may be subjected to large shocks or vibrations.
• Avoid installation locations that may be subjected to rapid changes in temperature or humidity.

Installation • Wiring
• Do not touch charged parts such as the terminal block while the inverter’s CHARGE lamp is lit.
A charge will still be present in the inverter unit’s internal electrolytic capacitors, and therefore
touching these areas may result in an electrical shock. Always turn all inverter input power
supplies OFF, and wait at least 5 minutes after the CHARGE lamp has gone out before wiring
the communication cables or motor wiring.
• When installing the option board into the inverter and making wiring connections, make certain
that no clippings or wiring leads that could cause device failure fall into the inverter or onto
electronic components.
• Proper ground connections are vital for both safety and signal reliability reasons. For proper
grounding procedures, please refer to the section in this manual pertaining to grounding
(section 2.1).
• Route the communication cables separate from the inverter input/output power wiring.
• To avoid the possibility of electric shock due to leakage currents, always ground the inverter
unit’s E/GND terminal and the motor. To avoid misoperation, do not connect the RS485 option
board’s SHLD terminal to either of the above-mentioned grounds or any other power ground.

Other Precautions
• The inverter’s EEPROM has a life span of 10,000 write cycles. Do not write to the same
EEPROM address (bank 1) more than 10,000 times.
• When using broadcast communications, be sure to allow a time interval between broadcasts
longer than that specified in section 7.4 Communications Interval.
• Do not touch or insert a rod or any other item into the inverter while power is applied, as this
may lead to electrical shock or inverter damage.
• Always supply power first to the slave units and then to the master.
• Commission the disposal of the option board to a specialist.
• Do not assign the same inverter number to more than one inverter in the same system.
• Do not assign more than one inverter in the same system to be the master.
• When the inverter’s control power supply is turned on, the inverter performs initialization
functions for approximately 1 second, during which communications capabilities are disabled.
Communications capabilities will also be disabled for approximately 1 second after momentary
control power supply outages or inverter resets.

-2-
 Table Of Contents

1. Option Board Installation / Removal .............................................................................. 5

1.1 Installation .................................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Removal ....................................................................................................................... 8
2. Connections................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Grounding ................................................................................................................... 10
2.2 Communications Cable Wiring.................................................................................... 10
3. Equipment Specification ............................................................................................... 13
4. Maintenance And Inspection......................................................................................... 13
5. Storage And Warranty ................................................................................................... 14
5.1 Storage ....................................................................................................................... 14
5.2 Warranty ..................................................................................................................... 14
6. RS485 Communications Function Overview ............................................................... 15
6.1 Computer Link Overview............................................................................................. 15
6.2 Peer-To-Peer Communications Overview ................................................................... 16
7. Computer Link ............................................................................................................... 17
7.1 Computer Link Parameter Settings ............................................................................. 17
7.2 Computer Link Processing Flow.................................................................................. 18
7.3 Sequence Explanation ................................................................................................ 19
7.4 Communications Intervals........................................................................................... 20
7.5 Communications Format............................................................................................. 21
7.5.1 Data Transmissions From Host Computer To Inverter .......................................... 21
7.5.2 Data Responses From Inverter To Host Computer................................................ 22
7.6 Transmission Commands ........................................................................................... 24
7.6.1 Command Summaries........................................................................................... 25
7.7 Communication Examples .......................................................................................... 29
7.7.1 Communications Preparation ................................................................................ 29
7.7.2 Timer Function ...................................................................................................... 30
7.7.3 Examples .............................................................................................................. 31
7.7.4 Address Increment Function Examples ................................................................. 33
7.8 Example Host Computer Communication Programs ................................................... 34
8. Peer-To-Peer Communication....................................................................................... 41
8.1 Peer-To-Peer Communication Parameter Settings ..................................................... 41
8.2 Peer-To-Peer Communication Processing Flow.......................................................... 42
8.3Sequence Explanation ................................................................................................. 42
8.4 Response Times......................................................................................................... 43

-3-
 8.5 Transmission Format .................................................................................................. 45
8.6 Proportional Control .................................................................................................... 47
8.7 Peer-To-Peer Communication Timer Function ............................................................ 49
9. Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 50
9.1 Communications Specification.................................................................................... 50
9.2 Communication Errors ................................................................................................ 52
9.3 Memory Configuration................................................................................................. 55
9.4 Communications Data Tables ..................................................................................... 57
9.5 ASCII Character Codes .............................................................................................. 87
9.6 Notes .......................................................................................................................... 88

-4-
1. Option Board Installation / Removal
1.1 Installation
Installation of the TOSHIBA RS485 option board into a TOSVERT-130 G3 inverter should only be
performed by a qualified technician familiar with the maintenance and operation of the G3. To install
the option board, complete the following steps:

1. CAUTION! Verify that all input power sources to the inverter have been turned OFF
and are locked and tagged out.

2. DANGER! Wait at least 5 minutes for the inverter’s electrolytic capacitors to

discharge before proceeding to step 3. Do not touch any internal parts with power applied to
the inverter, or for at least 5 minutes after power to the inverter has been removed. A
hazard exists temporarily for electrical shock even if the source power has been removed.

3. Remove the inverter’s cover (open the door on units with hinged doors). Verify that the
CHARGE LED has gone out before continuing the installation process.
4. Loosen the 4 screws attaching the G3’s operation panel support bracket to the control board
support bracket and remove the operation panel and support bracket as a unit (refer to Figure 1).

-5-
 operation panel
support bracket

operation panel support

bracket screws

Figure 1: G3 with front cover removed

-6-
5. Install the 4 plastic option board standoffs into the holes provided in the control board support
bracket (refer to Figure 2).

standoff mounting holes

Figure 2: G3 with front cover and operation panel

support bracket removed

6. CAUTION! The RS485 option board is a static-sensitive device. Standard

electrostatic-sensitive component handling precautions should be observed. Install the RS485
cable through the access holes at the bottom of the inverter and route the cable in order to make
connections to the option board connector (TB1). Take care to not route the cable near any sharp
edges or in positions where it may be pinched.
7. Connect the RS485 cable to the option board connector (TB1) according to the terminal markings
(refer to section 2, Connections).
8. Install the option board into the inverter by carefully aligning the 4 plastic supports with the 4
mounting holes provided in the option board. Ensure that connector CN5A on the back side of the
option board is aligned with connector CN5 on the front side of the control board.
9. Press the option board firmly onto the standoffs and connector CN5 until the standoff retaining
tabs lock.
10. Carefully re-install the operation panel and support bracket and tighten the 4 screws that attach
the operation panel support bracket to the control board support bracket.
11. Reinstall the inverter’s cover (close and latch the door on units with hinged doors).

DANGER! Do not operate the unit with the cover off / cabinet door open.

-7-
12. Turn all power sources to the inverter unit ON, and verify that the inverter functions properly. If the
inverter unit does not appear to power up, or does not function properly, immediately turn power
OFF. Repeat steps 1 ∼ 3 to remove all power from the inverter. Then, verify all connections.
Contact Toshiba International Corporation for assistance if the problem persists.

1.2 Removal
Removal of the TOSHIBA RS485 option board from a TOSVERT-130 G3 inverter should only be
performed by a qualified technician familiar with the maintenance and operation of the G3. In order to
protect the option board connector’s reliability, do not repeatedly connect and disconnect the option
board. Use the following procedure if it becomes necessary to remove the RS485 option board from
the inverter.

CAUTION! Do not remove the option board while power is applied to the inverter.
Removing the option board with power applied may damage the inverter.

1. CAUTION! Verify that all input power sources to the inverter have been turned OFF
and are locked and tagged out.

2. DANGER! Wait at least 5 minutes for the inverter’s electrolytic capacitors to

discharge before proceeding to step 3. Do not touch any internal parts with power applied to
the inverter, or for at least 5 minutes after power to the inverter has been removed. A
hazard exists temporarily for electrical shock even if the source power has been removed.

3. Remove the inverter’s cover (open the door on units with hinged doors). Verify that the
CHARGE LED has gone out before continuing the removal process.
4. Loosen the 4 screws attaching the G3’s operation panel support bracket to the control board
support bracket and remove the operation panel and support bracket as a unit (refer to Figure 3).

5. CAUTION! The RS485 option board is a static-sensitive device. Standard

electrostatic-sensitive component handling precautions should be observed. Release the 4
corners of the option board from the standoffs by pressing down on the standoff locking tabs with
a small flat-headed screwdriver. Be careful to not apply any abnormal stress to the option board
while performing this, as this may damage the option board or control board connectors.
6. Remove the option board from the inverter.
7. Disconnect the communications cable from the option board connector (TB1), and pull the cable
out through the access holes at the bottom of the inverter.
8. Carefully re-install the operation panel and support bracket and tighten the 4 screws that attach
the operation panel support bracket to the control board support bracket.

-8-
 operation panel
support bracket

operation panel support

bracket screws

Figure 3: G3 with front cover removed

9. Reinstall the inverter’s cover (close and latch the door on units with hinged doors).

DANGER! Do not operate the unit with the cover off / cabinet door open.
10. Turn all power sources to the inverter unit ON, and verify that the inverter functions properly. If the
inverter unit does not appear to power up, or does not function properly, immediately turn power
OFF. Repeat steps 1 ∼ 3 to remove all power from the inverter. Then, verify all connections.
Contact Toshiba International Corporation for assistance if the problem persists.

-9-
2. Connections
2.1 Grounding
Grounding is of particular importance for reliable, stable operation. Communication system
characteristics may vary from system to system, depending on the system environment and
grounding method used. A ground connection with an impedance of less than 100Ω should be used.
Please be sure to consider the following points for making proper ground connections:

Grounding method checkpoints

1) Make all ground connections such that no ground current flows through the inverter case.
2) Ensure that all grounds are connected to points that are at the same potential as inverter grounds.
3) Do not connect the RS485 board SHLD terminal to a power ground or any other noise-producing
ground connection (such as the inverter’s E/GND terminal).
4) Do not make connections to unstable grounds (paint-coated screw heads, grounds that are
subjected to inductive noise, etc.)
5) Use copper wire with a cross-sectional area of 2mm2 or larger, or aluminum wire with a cross-
sectional area of 2.6mm2 or larger for grounding.

2.2 Communications Cable Wiring

Wiring
By using twisted-pair cable connected as shown in Figure 4, a complete communications system can
be created. Connect each A to A, B to B, and SG to SG terminals throughout the system. Use
twisted-pair cable that has a twisted A and B pair and a separate SG wire. If a peer-to-peer
communication system is going to be used, substitute a G3 inverter (with jumper J3 set to the “TERM”
position) in place of the host computer. If the host computer to be used is a standard personal
computer with an RS232C serial port, the connection configuration of Figure 4 can be achieved by
using an RS232C-to-RS485 converter.

- 10 -
 Host Computer J3=OPEN J3=OPEN J3=TERM

twisted-pair shielded cable

Terminating A A A A
Resistor
(120Ω, 1/2 W) B B B B

SG SG SG SG
Ground
(100Ω or less) SHLD SHLD SHLD SHLD

Figure 4. RS485 Communications Cable Connection

• Do not make any branch or star connections, etc., when connecting the signal wires. Always
connect each unit in a successive series fashion, as shown in the figure above. For impedance-
matching, always install a terminating resistor at the host computer-end of the system, and set
jumper J3 on the RS485 option board in the inverter at the opposite end of the system from the
host computer to the “TERM” position. Jumper J3 on all other RS485 option boards must be set
to the “OPEN” position.
• The shield of the twisted-pair cable can either be connected to the SHLD terminal on each option
board (as shown above), or only to the ground connection. In either case, please remember to
keep these connections adequately isolated from any power or noise-producing grounds.

Notice
• When wiring the communications cable, do not make any branch or repeater
connections, or use a mixture of different types of cable, as shown below:

repeater

Correct Wiring Branch/Repeater Different Type Cable

• Always keep the communications cable separated from inverter power wiring.

Termination
The RS485 option board conforms to all EIA RS485 standards. To ensure signal integrity, always
properly terminate the communication signal wires (A & B) at the extreme ends of the system. If a G3
inverter is located at a system endpoint, set jumper J3 on the RS485 option board installed in that
inverter to the “TERM” position. If a different RS485 device is located at a system endpoint, ensure
that a 120Ω, 1/2 W resistor is installed between the A and B terminals on that device. Inverters that
are not located at endpoints of the system must have RS485 option board jumper J3 set to the
“OPEN” position to achieve proper system operation.

- 11 -
Communications Cable Shield
Connect the shield of the twisted-pair cable either to the SHLD terminal on each option board in the
system or to the ground connection only. Use a ground wire with a cross-sectional area of 2mm2 or
larger (refer to Figure 4).

Notice
Do not connect the shield wire to the inverter’s E/GND terminal, or any other power or noise-
producing ground.

Communication System Connection Specifications

Item Specification
Configuration bus type (terminating resistor selection on option card)
Cable twisted-pair shielded cable
Cable Length total 1000m maximum
Connection Points 32 maximum (including host computer in computer-link networks)
Connection Method A, B, SG successive series connection. Connect to A and B with twisted-pair
cable as shown in Figure 4.
Note) Ensure that the signal lines (A & B) are properly terminated at the
system endpoints.

Terminal Block Configuration (TB1)

Signal Name Function
A Tx/Rx data positive line
B Tx/Rx data negative line
SG signal ground signal line ground
SHLD shield protective shield connection for noise immunity
Note) Make all A/B/SG connections using twisted-pair cable AWG size 28 or larger.

- 12 -
3. Equipment Specification
Item Specification
Operating Environment Indoors, less than 1000m above sea level, do not expose to direct sunlight
or corrosive / explosive gasses.
Operating Temperature -10 ∼ +40°C (+14 ∼ +104°F)
Storage Temperature -25°C ∼ +65°C (-13 ∼ +149°F)
Relative Humidity 20% ∼ 90% (without condensation)
Vibration 5.9m/s2 {0.6G} or less (10 ∼ 55Hz)
Grounding Use a ground connection with an impedance of less than 100Ω.
Cooling Method Self-cooled

4. Maintenance And Inspection

Preventive maintenance and inspection is required to maintain the RS485 option in its optimal
condition, and to ensure a long operational lifetime. Depending on usage and operating conditions,
perform a periodic inspection once every three to six months. Before starting inspections, always turn
off all power supplies to the inverter unit, and wait at least five minutes after the inverter’s “CHARGE”
lamp has gone out.

DANGER! Do not touch any internal parts with power applied to the inverter,
or for at least 5 minutes after power to the inverter has been removed. A hazard exists
temporarily for electrical shock even if the source power has been removed.

Inspection Points
• Check that the wiring terminal screws are not loose. Tighten if necessary.
• Check that there are no defects in any wire terminal crimp points. Visually check that the crimp
points are not scarred by overheating.
• Visually check the wiring and cables for damage.
• Clean off any accumulated dust and dirt. Place special emphasis on cleaning the ventilation ports
of the inverter and all installed PCBs. Always keep these areas clean, as adherence of dust and
dirt can cause premature component failure.
• If use of the inverter unit is discontinued for extended periods of time, turn the power on at least
once every two years and confirm that the unit still functions properly.
• Do not perform hi-pot tests on the inverter or RS485 option card, as they may damage the unit’s
internal components.

Please pay close attention to all periodic inspection points and maintain a good operating
environment.

- 13 -
5. Storage And Warranty

5.1 Storage
Observe the following points when the RS485 option board is not used immediately after purchase or
when it is not used for an extended period of time.
• Avoid storing the option board in places that are hot or humid, or that contain large quantities of
dust or metallic dust. Store the option board in a well-ventilated location.
• When not using the RS485 option board for an extended period of time, turn the power on at least
once every two years and confirm that it still functions properly.

5.2 Warranty
The RS485 option kit is covered under warranty for a period of 12 months from the date of installation,
but not to exceed 18 months from the date of shipment from the factory. For further warranty or
service information, please contact Toshiba International Corporation.

Please perform adequate maintenance and inspection procedures.

- 14 -
6. RS485 Communications Function Overview
6.1 Computer Link Overview
By using RS485 option boards, a network can be constructed that allows communication between a
host computer and multiple inverter units. The computer link functions listed below allow for data
transfers between the host computer and the inverter units connected to the system. By using these
functions, the host computer can perform inverter operation control, data setting, and status
monitoring. A computer program can be written that controls communication from the computer to an
inverter, processing and analysis of the inverter’s response, and formatted display of the response
data. In the same way, the computer link functions allow a complete set of inverter parameter data to
be read and saved on a floppy disk, and then edited or uploaded to other inverter units.

When performing computer link communication, both individual communication and broadcast
communication are possible by selecting whether or not an inverter number is used:
• Individual communication from the host computer to a single inverter (inverter number used)
• Broadcast communication from the host computer to all inverters connected to the system
(inverter number not used)

• Monitor functions (output frequency, etc., status observation)

• Command functions (run/stop commands, etc.)
• Parameter functions (parameter data setting/reading)
• Additional functions (communication timer function, etc.)

G3 G3 G3

• Monitor functions (inverter status observation {output frequency, current, voltage etc.})
❈ read from RAM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from EEPROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from internal ROM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from external ROM (word/bit ✳1)

• Command functions {inverter RUN/STOP etc., commands}

❈ write to RAM (word/bit ✳1)

- 15 -
• Parameter functions (parameter setting and reading)
❈ read from/write to RAM (word/bit ✳1)
❈ read from/write to EEPROM (word/bit ✳1)
✳2
❈ simultaneously write to both EEPROM and RAM (word/bit ✳1)

• Additional functions
❈ communication timer function can detect broken cables, etc.
❈ address increment function can automatically increment the address after reads/writes.

Notes
✳1
: Individual bit read/write can be performed by setting the data mask. When the data mask is
used, bits that are masked off are read as “0”, and are not changed when written to (refer to
the mask setting command in section 7.6.1).
✳2
: When writing to EEPROM addresses 03C0H ∼ 04FEH (excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H), both the
EEPROM and RAM are written. When writing to all other addresses, only the EEPROM is
written.
★ Throughout this document, the term “bit” will refer to the smallest computer data element, and
will be represented as either a “0” or “1”. Similarly, 8 bits will be referred to as a byte, and 16
bits (2 bytes) will be called a word.

6.2 Peer-To-Peer Communications Overview

By using RS485 option boards, a network can be constructed that allows communication between
multiple inverter units (a host computer is unnecessary), in which frequency data is transferred
between inverters in order to produce proportional operation. The frequency data is transmitted from
the master (1 unit per system) to the slaves (1 ∼ 31 units per system), which then operate at
frequencies proportional to the master (for more information pertaining to proportional operation, refer
to section 8.6).

• Proportional operation
• Additional functions (timer function)

G3 G3 G3 G3
Master Slave Slave Slave

• Proportional operation
Frequency data is transmitted from the inverter selected to be the master to those selected to be
the slaves. The slaves then operate according to the data received from the master.

• Additional functions
The communications timer function can detect broken cables, etc.

- 16 -
7. Computer Link
7.1 Computer Link Parameter Settings
Before using computer link communications, the following parameters must be set:

[1] Unblind the communication parameters:

• Set BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• Set COMMUNICATION PARAMS BLIND in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.

[2] With the communication selection parameter, select RS485:

• Set COMMUNICATION SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to
1.

[3] Select slave device:

• Set MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to 0.

[4] Select the baud rate, number of data bits, and parity:
• Baud rate: set by RS485 BAUD RATE in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
and option board jumpers J1 and J2 (refer to section 9.1 Communications Specification).
• Number of data bits: set by NUMBER OF DATA BITS in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING
PARAMETERS.
• Parity: set by PARITY SETTING in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.

[5] Select inverter numbers (Note: Do not assign the same inverter number to more than one
inverter per system):
• Select a number for each inverter with INVERTER ID NUMBER in GROUP:COMMUNICATION
SETTING PARAMETERS.

[6] Set the frequency mode:

• To use the RS485 frequency command value, set FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 3.
• To use a terminal input frequency command value, set FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• To use the panel input frequency command value, set FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 2.

[7] Set the command mode:

• To control RUN/STOP, etc., via RS485, set COMMAND MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 3.
• To control RUN/STOP, etc., via terminal input, set COMMAND MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• To control RUN/STOP, etc., via panel input, set COMMAND MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 2.

- 17 -
7.2 Computer Link Processing Flow
In computer link communications, the inverters are always in a state of waiting for commands
from the host computer. From the time data is received until the data processing is over, however,
additional data cannot be received. When data is transmitted from the host computer, all inverters
connected to the system check to see if an inverter number has been included in the transmission,
and if so, whether or not the transmitted number matches their own number.
If an inverter number was included and the number matches, the inverter decodes the
command it has received, and then transmits a response back to the host computer. If an inverter
number error, parity error, framing error, overrun error, or checksum error occurs, however, no
response is transmitted (refer to section 9.2 Communication Errors for more information).
If an inverter number was included and the number does not match, the inverter discontinues
processing, discards the data, and prepares for the next data reception.
If an inverter number was not included in the transmission from the host computer, the
transmission is considered to be a broadcast message, and all inverters connected to the system
process the data. After processing a broadcast message, the inverters prepare for the next data
reception without transmitting a response back to the host computer.

Individual Communications
Ex: All inverters are operating at 60Hz. The host computer sends a 50Hz operating frequency command to inverter #3.

H ost C om puter W iring

D ata (host → inverters)
R esponse data (inverter → host)

Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv.

#1 #2 #3 #4 #30 #31

D iscard D iscard Pro cess D iscard D iscard D iscard

(1) The host computer transmits the data.

(2) All inverters receive the data and check for an inverter number.
(3) Only the inverter whose number matches decodes the command and processes the data.
(4) The inverter adds its inverter number to the processing result, and sends this as a response.
(5) In this example, only Inv. #3 will begin operating at 50Hz. All others will continue operating at 60Hz.

Broadcast Communications
Ex: All inverters are operating at 60Hz. The host computer broadcasts a 50Hz frequency command to all inverters.

H ost C om puter W iring

D ata (host → inverters)

Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv. Inv.

#1 #2 #3 #4 #30 #31

(1) The host computer transmits the data.

(2) All inverters receive the data and check for an inverter number.
(3) Because an inverter number was not sent, all inverters decode the command and process the data.
(4) So that bus contention does not occur, no responses are sent to the host computer.
(5) In this example, all inverters will begin operating at 50Hz.

- 18 -
7.3 Sequence Explanation
(Host computer and inverter data exchanges)
(1) The inverters wait for a request from the host computer to establish a computer link.
(2) The inverters ignore all characters received before a “(“ character. If multiple “(“ characters are
received, only the last one received is valid, and all others are discarded.
Ex: HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
W%3R(00A03C0) (00A03C0)
(3) When an inverter number is included after the “(“ character, only when that number corresponds
to the inverter’s number will the transmission be valid. If the number does not correspond, the
inverter will not send any response, and will wait for the next “(“ character.
(4) When an inverter number is not included after the “(“ character, the transmission is regarded as a
broadcast message, and all inverters connected to the system will accept the command. In order
to avoid bus contention, no responses will be sent to the host computer.
(5) Only when a carriage return code (0DH) is received will the transmission be considered
terminated. If the transmitted message exceeds the maximum number of characters allowed
(14), a communications error (error code 0001) is generated.
(6) If an inverter’s communication timer is set, and if a transmission is not received within the set
time, a communications error will be generated and the inverter will trip (LCD display will show
“OPTION PCB ERROR (PRESS CLEAR)”). (Standard shipment setting for the communications
timer is “OFF” (0), so if the timer is to be used, the timer time must be set. For more information
on setting the communication timer, refer to section 7.7.2 Timer Function).
(7) If the message does not correspond to the format described in section 7.5 Communications
Format, a communications error will be generated. If an error occurs after the “(“ character is
received, the communications alarm indicator “COMM” will flash on the LCD display until the next
correct data message is received.
(8) After the received command is processed, a response is sent back to the host computer. If an
inverter number was not included in the original transmission, however, no response will be sent,
as the transmission was a broadcast message.
(9) During the time period from when the data has been received until the command processing is
completed, subsequent transmissions cannot be received. When using broadcast
communications, be sure to allow a time interval between broadcasts longer than that specified
in section 7.4 Communications Interval.
In addition, when using individual communications (inverter number used), do not begin the next
transmission until 2ms after a reply has been received from the inverter (4ms when
simultaneously using RS232C communications). However, if no reply is received within about
300ms after the transmission has been sent (about 320ms when simultaneously using RS232C
communications), a “no response” error has occurred (refer to section 9.2 Communication
Errors). When this occurs, after the 300ms interval (or 320ms when simultaneously using
RS232C communications), the next data transmission can be sent. For more information, refer
to section 7.4 Communications Interval.

- 19 -
7.4 Communications Intervals
When transmitting data from the host computer to G3 inverters, please observe the following items
regarding the communications time interval.

Broadcast communication time interval

When performing broadcast communications, always provide a time interval between transmissions
as long or longer than the value shown in the table below. If the time between transmissions is
shorter than the value shown, the latter transmission will not be received correctly by the inverter.
Ex: “W” command (without RS232C), 9600 baud, 7-bit length and even parity: the data
transmissions (a), (b), and (c) are being sent at intervals shorter than the specified limit.

34ms

Actual Time
Interval

(a) (b) (c)

t

Data (a) and (c) will be received correctly, but data (b) will not be received correctly. In order for all
transmissions to be received correctly, an interval of 34ms or more (found in the following table) must
be allotted between transmissions.

7-Bit Data Length 8-Bit Data Length

Baud rate No RS232C RS232C No RS232C RS232C
1200 baud 122ms 143ms 142ms 153ms
2400 baud 72ms 93ms 77ms 98ms
4800 baud 47ms 68ms 49ms 70ms
9600 baud 34ms 55ms 36ms 57ms
19200 baud 28ms 49ms 29ms 50ms
38400 baud 25ms 46ms 25ms 46ms

Individual communications time interval

When using individual communications, the following time intervals must be observed after receiving
a data response from an inverter before the next transmission can be sent:
• After a data response is sent from an inverter to the host computer, that inverter cannot receive
subsequent transmissions from the host computer for a maximum of 2ms (4ms when
simultaneously using RS232C communications).
• When an inverter receives a transmission with an inverter number different than its own, that
inverter cannot receive subsequent transmissions from the host computer for a maximum of 4ms
(8ms when simultaneously using RS232C communications).
Remember that when a time interval violation occurs, no response will be sent from the inverter.

Caution
Always allow a time interval of at least the minimum time given above.

- 20 -
7.5 Communications Format
All data is represented in hexadecimal format, and inverter status data is not included in the response
data (except for the addition of the “#” character when the inverter is tripped). All transmitted
characters conform to the 7-bit (or 8-bit) ASCII (ANSI) standards (refer to section 9.5 ASCII Character
Codes).
• If monitoring the inverter status is desired, refer to the status monitor portion of section 9.4
Communications Data Tables.

7.5.1 Data Transmissions From Host Computer To Inverter

Not Used During Broadcast Optional Optional

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
“(“ “+“ “&“ “)“ CR
INVNO CMD DATA SUM
(28H) (2BH) (26H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits

Optional
1. “(“ (1 character) Header code
2. INVNO (2 characters) Inverter number (not used during broadcast communications):
00 (30H, 30H) ∼ 99 (39H, 39H) [base 10]. Only when this number and the inverter number set via
the inverter control panel match will the command be recognized. If this number does not match
the inverter number, or if this number is only 1 character long, the command will not be
recognized and no response will be sent. Please note that only a maximum of 31 inverter units
can be connected to a system. Do not use an inverter number when performing broadcast
communications. Also, during broadcast communications, no data responses will be sent.
Note: Because the panel setting is in base 10, the transmitted number must also be in base 10.
3. CMD (1 character) Command (refer to section 7.6.1 Command Summaries) [base 16].
4. DATA (0 ∼ 4 characters) Data (refer to section 7.6.1 Command Summaries) [base 16].
5. “+” (1 character) Address increment code (optional). Only valid during R/W commands. After the
R/W command is performed, the inverter’s address data is automatically incremented by 1 word
(address data + 2). (Because the address data is changed, the mask data returns to its
initialization value of FFFFH).
• If there is no “+” character or if an error occurs, the address and mask data remain
unchanged.
6. “&” (1 character) Checksum indicator code (optional). Do not include checksum data when this
character is not used.
7. SUM (2 characters) Checksum (optional). ASCII-coded, least-significant 2-digit value (4 bits/digit) of
the sum total addition of the ASCII code values from the header code to the checksum indicator
code. Do not include a checksum indicator code when the checksum data is not included.
8. “)” (1 character) Termination code (optional).
9. CR (1 character) Carriage return code.

- 21 -
7.5.2 Data Responses From Inverter To Host Computer

[Normal Condition]
When an inverter number is not included in a data transmission from the host computer (broadcast
communication), or when the transmitted inverter number does not match an inverter’s set number,
the inverter does not transmit a response to the host computer.

Optional Only when tripped

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
“(“ INVNO CMD DATA “+“ “&“ SUM “#“ “)” CR
(28H) (2BH) (26H) (23H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits
Optional
Optional

1. “(“ (1 character) Header code

2. INVNO (2 characters) Inverter number: 00 (30H, 30H) ∼ 99 (39H, 39H) [base 10]. If the
transmitted number does not match the inverter number, or if the transmitted number is
only 1 character long, the command will not be recognized and no response will be
sent (in addition, no response is sent when no inverter number was initially transmitted).
3. CMD (1 character) Command. The received command is returned.
4. DATA (4 characters) Data. Except for the “R” and “W” commands, the received data is
returned (for the “R” command, the read data is returned, and for the “W” command, the
data after writing is returned). If the received data was less than 4 characters in length,
the returned data is extended to 4 characters (Ex: (00B0) → (00B0000)).
5. “+” (1 character) Address increment code. Returned only when initially received. (Only
valid during R/W commands. After the R/W command is performed, the inverter’s
address data is automatically incremented by 1 word (address data + 2), and the mask
data is returned to its initialization value of FFFFH).
6. “&” (1 character) Checksum indicator code. Returned only when initially received.
7. SUM (2 characters) Checksum. ASCII-coded, least-significant 2-digit value (4 bits/digit) of
the sum total addition of the ASCII code values from the header code to the checksum
indicator code (returned only when a checksum indicator code was initially received).
8. “#” (1 character) Inverter tripped code. Only returned when the inverter is tripped.
9. “)” (1 character) Termination code (returned only when initially received).
10. CR (1 character) Carriage return code.

<< Note >> When a reset command is received, the inverter may reset during the response
process, resulting in an incomplete response.

- 22 -
[Error Condition]
When any of the errors described below occur while a command is being processed, the
communications error code (N), the error number (refer to section 9.2 Communication Errors), and
checksum data (if initially received), are returned to the host computer. No response will be sent to
the host computer during broadcast communications, when the inverter number does not match,
when a format error occurs, or when an inverter number was transmitted but a checksum error
occurs, as this could cause bus contention (when an error occurs, the communications error alarm
“COMM” will blink on and off on the LCD display until the next correct transmission is received).

Only when tripped

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
“(“ “N” “&“ “#“ “)” CR
INVNO DATA SUM
(28H) (4EH) (26H) (23H) (29H) (0DH)

Checksum Limits

Optional

“(“ (1 character) Error code.

DATA (4 characters) Data (0000 ∼ 0003).
0000 ...cannot execute (communication was correct, but cannot execute command.
Typical causes: attempt to write a parameter that cannot be written while the
inverter is running (MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, VOLTS PER HERTZ
PATTERN, etc.), EEPROM error).
0001 ...data error (data setting value outside of adjustment range, data exceeded 4
characters, etc.)
0002 ...address error (address data outside of adjustment range when a “W” command
was sent, etc.)
0003 ...command error (invalid command).
“)” (1 character) Termination code. Returned even when not initially received.

Examples (using inverter number “01”):

(01N0000&BD) ....cannot execute (attempt to change MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY while the
inverter was running, etc.)
(01N0001&BE) ....data error (attempt to set a preset speed higher than the UPPER LIMIT
FREQUENCY setting, etc.)
(01N0002&BF) ....address outside limits (a “W” command was sent with the address data set to
a write-protected area (RAM: address set to less than 3C0H or higher than
516H, EEPROM: less than 3C0H or higher than 59EH), etc.)
(01N0003&C0) ....command error (command other than A, B, M, R, W, or T sent, etc.)
no response ..........inverter number only 1 digit long, inverter number does not correspond to any
inverter in the system, format error (parity error, overrun error, framing error),
checksum error, etc.

- 23 -
7.6 Transmission Commands

1) A (41H): address setting command

2) R (52H): read command (word read)
3) W (57H): write command (word write)
4) M (4DH): mask setting command
5) B (42H): bank setting command
6) T (54H): communications confirmation (test) command

• Once set, the address, bank, and mask setting data do not change until they are set to different
values, except for the following conditions:
⇒ whenever the address data is changed, the mask data returns to its initialization value of
FFFFH.
⇒ whenever the address increment function is used in conjunction with the “R” or “W”
commands, the address data is automatically incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the
mask data therefore returns to its initialization value of FFFFH .

Initial Values
When power is first applied to the inverter unit, or after a reset or trip clear, etc., the following data
values are initialized:

Address data = 0508H..... (option (RS485) frequency command setting address)

Bank data = 0000H..... (RAM)
Mask data = FFFFH .... (all bits can be written to)

- 24 -
7.6.1 Command Summaries

[A] Address setting command

Sets the address to be used when reading or writing (refer to the “Address” columns of the
communications data tables in section 9.4).

Address Settings (address data limits: 0000H ∼ FFFFH)

Bank R/W Read Write
Bank = 0 (RAM) R/W 0100H ∼ 077EH 03C0H ∼ 0516H ✳1
Bank = 1 (EEPROM) R/W 0000H ∼ 7FFEH 03C0H ∼ 059EH ✳1 ✳2
Bank = 2 (Internal ROM) R 8000H ∼ FFFEH ×
Bank = 3 (External ROM) R 0000H ∼ FFFEH ×
Bank = 4 (Option bus) R 0000H ∼ 1FFEH ×

✳1
: The following RAM and EEPROM locations cannot be written to:
04D8H ∼ 04F7H, 0500H ∼ 0507H (RAM only), 04FAH bits 4 and 5, 04FBH bit 7, 050AH bits 4 and
5 (RAM only), 050BH bit 7 (RAM only), 0512H bits 4 and 5 (RAM only), 0513H bit 7 (RAM only).

Bit position example: (Address 04FAH)

Address 04FBH Address 04FAH

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

04FBH bit 7 04FAH bits 4 and 5

✳2
: When addresses 03C0H ∼ 04FEH (excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H) are written to, both RAM and
EEPROM contents are changed. Writing to all other addresses changes only the EEPROM
contents.

• Once set, the address data does not change until it is set to a different value, except when the
address increment function is used in conjunction with the “R” or “W” commands, in which case
the address data is automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes). On power-up or after a
reset, etc., the address data is initialized to 0508H (option frequency command).

Caution
The address data should only be set to a maximum of 1 byte less than the bank’s upper
limit. For example, the read limits of RAM (bank 0) are from 0100H ∼ 077FH, so if you would
like to read from address 077FH, set the address to 077EH and then retrieve the data from
the upper byte of the response word. If the address were set to 077FH and a read were
performed, an attempt would be made to access address 0780H, which is above the
maximum address limit.

- 25 -
[B] Bank setting command
Sets the type of memory to be accessed (refer to the “Bank” columns of the communications data
tables in section 9.4).
Bank Settings (bank data limits: 0000H ∼ 0004H):
0000 ......RAM
0001 ......EEPROM
0002 ......Internal ROM (read-only)
0003 ......External ROM / Option ROM (read-only)
0004 ......Option bus (read-only)

Optional (only the lowest digit is required)

• Once set, the bank data does not change until it is set to a different value. On power-up or after a
reset, etc., the bank data is initialized to 0000H (RAM).

[M] Mask setting command

Allows the access of only the data required during read/write operations. During data writes, data
checking is performed to ensure that the data is being set within adjustment limits, but only that
portion of the data that is within the limits of the mask setting is checked (refer to the “Mask” columns
of the communications data tables in section 9.4). Mask data limits = 0000H ∼ FFFFH.

When writing data, set the mask bits to binary “1” for those bits that you would like to change, and set
the mask bits to binary “0” for those bits that you do not want to change. When reading data, set the
mask bits to binary “1” for those bits that you would like to read, and set the mask bits to binary “0” for
those bits that you do not want to read. At read time, all data bits for which the corresponding mask
bits are “0” will be read as “0”.
• Once set, the mask data does not change until it is set to a different value or until the address
data changes. When the address data changes (including when the address-increment function
is used in conjunction with the R/W commands), the mask data is automatically set to its
initialization value of FFFFH, which allows all bits to be read/written. Upon inverter power-up or
after a reset, etc., the mask data is initialized to FFFFH.

Ex: To set the command mode selection on inverter number 00 to “communication option input valid”
(refer to COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS in section 9.4):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B1) (00B0001).... set bank to EEPROM
(00A4B7) (00A04B7).... command mode selection address
(00M7) (00M0007).... mask = (0000 0000 0000 0111)2
(00W3) (00W××××) .... data depends on other bits

Address 04B8H Address 04B7H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

Due to the mask, only these bits can be changed

- 26 -
[W] Data write command
Writes data to the set address in the set bank. When writing to EEPROM addresses 03C0 H ∼ 04FEH
(excluding 04D8H ∼ 04F7H), both RAM and EEPROM contents are changed (for data setting limits,
refer to the “Adjustment Range” columns of the communications data tables in section 9.4).
• The data response received after sending a “W” command is the actual (complete, unmasked)
data at the address after writing (word length). This feature combines the write command with the
function of the read command (see Example #1 below).
• The write command can only be used with RAM (bank 0) and EEPROM (bank 1).
• Address increment function: if a “+” character is included in the “W” command immediately
following the data, the address is automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the
mask data returns to its initialization value of FFFFH. This feature can be used to write large
blocks of data with a minimum number of commands.

<< Note >>

When a data write is performed, only that portion of the data that is within the mask limits is checked
by the data checking routine (see Example #2 on page 28). If the data being written is outside of the
adjustment limits associated with that address, an error is generated, and the data is not written.
Please be sure to correctly set the mask before performing a data write. If the mask is not correctly
set, the data cannot be correctly checked, which may result in data corruption or unpredictable
inverter operation (data checking is not performed on certain parameters: refer to the communications
data tables in section 9.4 for further information).

Caution
The EEPROM has a lifespan of 10,000 write cycles per address. Do not write to the same
EEPROM (bank 1) address more than 10,000 times.

Example #1: Writing option commands (refer to page 58).

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER

(00B0) (00B0000) ..... set bank to RAM
(00A50A) (00A050A) ..... option command address
(00R) (00R0009) ..... acc/dec #2, reverse, running
(00M4) (00M0004) ..... mask forward/reverse selection
(00W4) (00W000D) ..... forward (acc/dec #2, running)
(00R) (00R0004) ..... forward ✳1 (verify data)
✳1
: If only whether the inverter is running in forward or reverse is to be determined, the read
command could be sent immediately after the mask command. Note that the data contained in
the response to the write command is the complete, unmasked data at that address.

- 27 -
Example #2: Setting the frequency display resolution parameter (refer to FREQUENCY DISPLAY
RESOLUTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS in section 9.4).
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000) ..... set bank to RAM
(00A45D) (00A045D) ..... frequency display resolution address
(00R) (00R3111)
(00M3) (00M0003)
(00W6) (00W3112)

• Mask overlaid on data prior to write

Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

• Write data
Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

• Data after write

Address 045EH Address 045DH
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
• The adjustment
range for the frequency display resolution parameter is 0 ∼ 2, but because data checking is only
performed on that portion of the data contained in the mask, the written data is viewed as 2. This
is within the adjustment range and, therefore, no error occurs. The end result is that the
frequency display resolution parameter setting is changed to 2 (0.01Hz).

[R] Data read command

Reads the data at the set address in the set bank. No data argument is required for this command:
any included data is ignored.
• The data contained at the set address is returned as the data argument to the host computer. If
the mask data is FFFFH, the returned data word is the complete data at the address. If the mask
data is anything other than FFFFH, those bits set to 0 in the mask will be returned as 0’s.
• Address increment function: if a “+” character is included in the “R” command, the address is
automatically post-incremented by 1 word (2 bytes), and the mask data returns to its initialization
value of FFFFH. This feature can be used to read large blocks of data with a minimum number of
commands.

[T] Test command

Transmitted data (0 ∼ 9, A ∼ F) is returned unchanged to the host computer. Data adjustment range:
0000H ∼ FFFFH.

- 28 -
7.7 Communication Examples

7.7.1 Communications Preparation

(1) Install the RS485 board into an inverter and connect the communications cable (refer to section
2.2 Communications Cable Wiring).
(2) Turn power to the inverter and host computer ON.
(3) Check that the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, etc. are all set correctly, and then reset the
inverter to validate the settings.
(4) Run a communications interface application program on the host computer.

Communication should now be possible. The examples that follow were generated with the sample
MS-DOS QBasic RS485 communications program shown in Example #2 of section 7.8 Example
Host Computer Communication Programs.
(Note) If using the sample program directly, verify that the inverter’s communication parameters (in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS) are set as follows (standard factory
settings):
NUMBER OF DATA BITS..... 0 (7 bits)
PARITY SETTING ............... 0 (even parity)
INVERTER ID NUMBER....... 0
The baud rate (9600 baud) is set by both parameter RS485 BAUD RATE in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS and jumpers J1 and J2 on the RS485
board. For the baud rate setting method, refer to section 9.1 Communications Specification.

Example: Switching to RS485 (option) command mode and frequency mode:

• Switching to communication option board input command mode (refer to page 84).
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B1) (00B0001)..... set bank to EEPROM
(00A4B7) (00A04B7)..... command mode selection address
(00M7) (00M0007)..... mask applicable bits
(00W3) (00W××××) ..... select “option input valid”

• Switching to communication option board input frequency setting mode (refer to page 84).
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B1) (00B0001)..... set bank to EEPROM
(00A4B7) (00A04B7)..... frequency mode selection address
(00M38) (00M0038)..... mask applicable bits
(00W18) (00W××××) ..... select “option input valid”
• Note that dependent upon the setting of the RS232C command/frequency mode selection (see
page 59), the setting of the COMMAND MODE SELECTION and FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION
parameters in the above example may have no effect on the actual command/frequency status
(the RS232C command/frequency mode selection has priority). Even if the command/frequency
mode is not set to option input, other functions such as parameter setting, inverter status
monitoring, etc., can still be performed via RS485.

- 29 -
7.7.2 Timer Function

When the RS485 system is set up in a computer link configuration, a communications timer function
can be used. When the communications timer is used, if communication does not take place within
the set time limit, the inverter will trip (“OPTION PCB ERROR (PRESS CLEAR)“ will be shown on the
LCD display).

If it is desired to have the timer function active even after inverter control power is cycled OFF and
ON, write the timer setting to EEPROM (bank 1). If it is desired to have the timer function disabled
after inverter control power is cycled OFF and ON, write the timer setting to RAM (bank 0). The
following example shows the remaining steps for setting the timer. (NOTE: Because the factory
setting for the timer is 0000H, setting the STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION parameter in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 3 (return to factory settings) will cause the timer setting to return
to 0000H).

Ex: Setting the RS485 communications timer for computer link use (setting to 15 seconds):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A4CC) (00A04CC).... RS485 timer address
(00MFF) (00M00FF).... mask applicable bits
(00WF) (00W××0F) .... set timer to 15 seconds
(00R) (00R××0F) .... activate timer

< Timer adjustment range > 00H : timer OFF

01H ∼ 64H : 1s ∼ 100s

NOTE
• Setting the timer time alone does not activate the timer. The timer is activated by the first valid
communication that occurs after the timer is set. If the timer setting is written to the EEPROM, the
timer is activated by the first valid communication that occurs after the inverter is powered ON.

• If an inverter number error (number is only 1 character long, number does not match the inverter’s
set number), format error (parity error, overrun error, framing error), or checksum error occurs
immediately after the timer time is set, this is not regarded as a valid communication, and the
timer will not be activated / reset.

• To turn the timer function OFF, set the timer setting to “0”. The timer will then be turned OFF
upon the occurrence of the next valid communication (writing “0” to the timer setting alone will not
turn the timer OFF).

• The timer used during peer-to-peer communications is fixed at 1 second. It is not related to the
computer link timer function.

- 30 -
7.7.3 Examples
• Setting the option frequency command value:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A508) (00A0508).... option frequency command address
(00R) (00R1F40).... currently set to 80.00Hz
(00W1770) (00W1770).... change to 60.00Hz

• Performing RUN/STOP commands:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A50A) (00A050A).... option command address
(00M1) (00M0001).... mask RUN/STOP bit
(00W1) (00W××××) .... execute RUN command
(00W0) (00W××××) .... execute STOP command

• Monitoring the command mode status:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A5B8) (00A05B8).... command mode status address
(00M3) (00M0003).... mask status bits
(00R) (00R0002).... command mode currently = option

• Switching to JOG mode:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A50A) (00A050A).... option command address
(00M80) (00M0080).... mask JOG mode selection bit
(00W80) (00W××××) .... select JOG mode

• Selecting between acc/dec #1/#2 (setting acc/dec #2):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A50A) (00A050A).... option command address
(00M8) (00M0008).... mask acc/dec #1/#2 selection bit
(00W8) (00W××××) .... select acc/dec #2

• Monitoring operating frequency:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A524) (00A0524).... operating frequency monitor address
(00R) (00R1770).... inverter is running at 60.00Hz

- 31 -
• Monitoring the cumulative run time:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A5D2) (00A05D2).... run time rollover bit address
(00M8) (00M0008).... mask run time rollover bit
(00R) (00R0000).... timer has not rolled over
(00A5A6) (00A05A6).... cumulative run time address
(00R) (00R0064).... timer is currently at 100 hours

• Executing emergency off command (inverter will trip):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A50B) (00A050B).... option command address
(00M10) (00M0010).... mask emergency off command bit
(00W10) (00W××××) .... execute emergency off
❈ Because the inverter has tripped, all responses from the inverter will now have the inverter
tripped “#” character included until a trip clear command is performed.

• Monitoring the present trip code:

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000#)... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A591) (00A0591#)... present trip monitor address
(refer to Table 1 on page 64)
(00M7F) (00M007F#)... mask trip code bits
(00R) (00R0011#)... 11H = emergency off trip

• Performing reset (trip clear):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000#)... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A50B) (00A050B#)... option command address
(00M20) (00M0020#)... mask reset command bit
(00W20) no response ... reset
❈ Note that whether or not a response to the reset command is generated is dependent upon
system and reset timing. After resetting, the RAM data, address and mask data, etc., will
have returned to their initialized values, and the inverter tripped “#” character will no longer
be included in the inverter responses.

• Executing “return to factory settings” (STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION = 3) command

(can only be performed when the inverter is stopped):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B0) (00B0000).... select RAM (bank 0)
(00A4C2) (00A04C2).... standard setting mode address
(00M00FF) (00M00FF).... mask selection bits
(00W3) (00W××03) .... 3 = return to factory settings

- 32 -
7.7.4 Address Increment Function Examples

Example #1: Parameter writing

• Writing MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, LOWER LIMIT
FREQUENCY, ACCELERATION TIME #1 and DECELERATION TIME #1 parameter settings
using the address increment feature:
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00B1) (00B0001).... select EEPROM (bank 1)
(00A3C0) (00A03C0).... maximum frequency address
(00W1F40+) (00W1F40+)... write 1F40H (80.00Hz) - address is
then auto-incremented to 03C2H
(00W1F40+) (00W1F40+)... write 80.00Hz to 03C2H (UPPER
LIMIT FREQUENCY)
(00W0+) (00W0000+)... write 0.00Hz to 03C4H (LOWER
LIMIT FREQUENCY)
(00W64+) (00W0064+)... write 10.0s to 03C6H
(ACCELERATION TIME #1)
(00W64) (00W0064).... write 10.0s to 03C8H
(DECELERATION TIME #1)
❈ Note that because the data is being written to bank 1 (EEPROM) in the above example, the
same data is also automatically written to bank 0 (RAM) (refer to page 27). When a data
write is performed, data checking is also performed to ensure that the data is within the
adjustment range specified in the data tables in section 9.4. If the address or data is out of
its adjustment range, an error will be generated, and the data will not be valid (please note
that data checking is not performed on those parameters in the data tables in section 9.4
whose mask and adjustment range columns are shaded). If a “+” character is included in
the “W” command immediately following the data, the address is automatically post-
incremented by 1 word (2 bytes).

Example #2: Parameter reading

• Reading MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, LOWER LIMIT
FREQUENCY, ACCELERATION TIME #1 and DECELERATION TIME #1 parameter settings
using the address increment feature (assuming continuation from Example #1 above):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A3C0) (00A03C0).... MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY addr.
(00R+) (00R1F40+)... read 1F40H (80.00Hz) - address is
then auto-incremented to 03C2H
(00R+) (00R1F40+)... read 80.00Hz from 03C2H
(00R+) (00R0000+)... read 0.00Hz from 03C4H
(00R+) (00R0064+)... read 10.0s from 03C6H
(00R) (00R0064).... read 10.0s from 03C8H
These data values would be the same whether read from bank 0 (RAM) or bank 1 (EEPROM).

- 33 -
7.8 Example Host Computer Communication Programs
Program Development Notes
1. Because the G3 RS485 system operates in half-duplex mode (only 1 set of communication lines
are used for both transmitting and receiving), the host computer will receive its own data after
transmission, unless an RS232C to RS485 converter that has “ECHO ON/OFF” control is used. In
order to avoid buffer overflow in “ECHO ON” mode, therefore, it is necessary to read the
transmitted data from the computer’s buffer in both broadcast and individual communications.
2. When broadcast communication is used, be sure to allow at least the minimum time interval
between transmissions (refer to section 7.4 Communications Interval.) If an insufficient time
interval is used, the data cannot be processed correctly by the inverter.
3. When individual communication is used, do not send the next data transmission until the
previous transmission’s response has been received. If data is transmitted before the previous
transmission’s response has been received, bus contention will occur.

Example #1: MS-DOS QBasic program which continuously monitors a user-input address (program
written in MS-DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):
Program listing
OPEN ”COM1:9600,E,7,1” FOR RANDOM AS #1 ---- 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits
INPUT ”Inverter Number (00-99):”; A$ ---- input inverter number
INPUT ”Monitor Address (0000-FFFF):”; C$ ---- input the address to monitor
B$ = ”B0” ---- set RAM bank
C$ = ”A” + C$ ---- build address (A) command
MonitorLoop:
PRINT #1, ”(” + A$ + B$ + ”)” ---- transmit data packet to inverter
INPUT #1, D$ ---- read transmitted data from buffer (see
Program Development Note #1 at the top
of this page: no echo control assumed)
INPUT #1, D$ ---- read inverter response
PRINT ”Received Data = ”; D$ ---- display the response
B$ = C$ ---- advance command (B → A → R)
C$ = ”R” ---- set “R” command
GOTO MonitorLoop ---- loop forever ([CTRL] + [BREAK] exits)

Execution Example (operating frequency monitor)

Inverter Number (00-99):? 00
Monitor Address (0000-FFFF):? 524 ---- operating frequency monitor address
Received Data = (00B0000)
Received Data = (00A0524)
Received Data = (00R1770) ---- current operating frequency = 60.00Hz
Received Data = (00R1770)
Received Data = (00R1770)
:
:

- 34 -
Example #2: Sample MS-DOS QBasic RS485 communications program (program written in MS-
DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer) (Note: the
following program cannot be used “as is” to perform broadcast communications):
Program listing
OPEN ”COM1:9600,E,7,1” FOR RANDOM AS #1 ----- 9600 baud,even parity,7 data bits
CommLoop:
INPUT ”Send Data =”;B$ ----- input command to send
PRINT #1,B$ ----- transmit command to inverter
INPUT #1,A$ ----- read transmitted data from buffer
INPUT #1,A$ ----- read inverter response
PRINT ”Received Data = ”;A$ ----- display inverter response
GOTO CommLoop ----- loop forever ([CTRL] + [BREAK] exits)

Execution Example
Send Data =? (00A3C0) ----- maximum output frequency address
Received Data = (00A03C0)
Send Data =? (00W1770) ----- set maximum output frequency to 60.00Hz
Received Data = (00W1770)
Send Data =?
:
:

Example #3: Sample data conversion QBasic programs (programs written in MS-DOS QBasic
Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):

A) Decimal to hexadecimal conversion B) Hexadecimal to decimal conversion

Program listing Program listing
Start: Start:
INPUT ”Decimal Data =”; A INPUT ”Hexadecimal Data =”; A$
INPUT ”Multiplier =”; B INPUT ”Multiplier =”; B
C$ = HEX$(A / B) A$ = ”&H” + A$
PRINT ”Hexadecimal Data = ”;C$ X = VAL(A$) * B
GOTO Start PRINT ”Decimal Data = ”; X
GOTO Start
Execution Example
Decimal Data =? 60 Execution Example
Multiplier =? 0.01 Hexadecimal Data =? 1F40
Hexadecimal Data = 1770 Multiplier =? 0.01
Decimal Data =? 80 Decimal Data = 80
Multiplier =? 0.01 Hexadecimal Data =? 1770
Hexadecimal Data = 1F40 Multiplier =? 0.01
: Decimal Data = 60
: :
:

- 35 -
Example #4: Sample MS-DOS QBasic RS485 communications program #2 (program written in MS-
DOS QBasic Version 1.1 and executed on an IBM-compatible computer):
Program listing

DECLARE SUB TxRx (InvNum$, Comd$, Data$, RXdata$, CommErr%)

DIM BRT$, PRT$, BLN$, NUM$, CMD$, DAT$, rxd$, CommErr%

INPUT "Baud Rate ="; BRT$ ----- input baud rate

INPUT "Parity ="; PRT$ ----- input parity
INPUT "Length ="; BLN$ ----- input number of data bits
OPEN "COM1:" + BRT$ + "," + PRT$ + "," + BLN$ + ",1" FOR RANDOM AS #1
----- open communications port
CommLoop: ----- main program loop
INPUT "Inverter Number ="; NUM$ ----- input inv. # ([CR] = broadcast)
INPUT "Command ="; CMD$ ----- input command (A,R,W,M,B,T)
INPUT "Data ="; DAT$ ----- input data
CALL TxRx(NUM$, CMD$, DAT$, rxd$, CommErr%) ----- call main Tx/Rx subroutine
IF CommErr% = 0 THEN ----- OK/error check
PRINT "Received Data = "; rxd$ ----- display received data if OK
ELSE ----- else, indicate error
PRINT "A Communications Error Has Occurred!"
END IF
PRINT ----- print blank line
GOTO CommLoop ----- loop ([CTRL]+[BREAK] exits)

SUB TxRx (InvNum$, Comd$, Data$, RXdata$, CommErr%) ----- main Tx/Rx subroutine
DIM TXdata$, Sum&, I%, CKsum$, Retry%, CRcount%
DIM RXbuf$, StartTime&, RXchar$

TXdata$ = "(" + InvNum$ + Comd$ + Data$ + "&" ----- build checksum string
Sum& = 0 ----- initialize checksum data
FOR I% = 1 TO LEN(TXdata$)
Sum& = Sum& + ASC(MID$(TXdata$, I%, 1)) ----- calculate checksum
NEXT I%
CKsum$ = RIGHT$(HEX$(Sum&), 2) ----- convert to characters
TXdata$ = TXdata$ + CKsum$ + ")" ----- build complete Tx string
Retry% = 0 ----- initialize retry counter

Txloop: ----- transmission loop

IF LOC(1) <> 0 THEN RXchar$ = INPUT$(LOC(1), #1) ----- ensure Rx buffer is empty
PRINT #1, Txdata$ ----- transmit data
PRINT "Transmitted Data = "; Txdata$ ----- display transmitted data
CRcount% = 0 ----- initialize [CR] Rx counter
IF InvNum$ = "" THEN CRcount% = 1 ----- if broadcast, only 1 [CR]
RXbuf$ = "" ----- initialize receive buffer
StartTime& = TIMER ----- initialize 1s timer

Rxloop: ----- reception loop

IF (TIMER - StartTime&) > 1 THEN ----- check for time-out (1s)

- 36 -
 Retry% = Retry% + 1 ----- increment retry counter
IF Retry% < 3 THEN GOTO Txloop ----- 3 Tx attempts allowed
CommErr% = 1 ----- indicate time-out error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program
END IF
IF (TIMER - StartTime&) < 0 THEN StartTime& = TIMER
----- timer overflow check
RXchar$ = "" ----- initialize received char
IF LOC(1) <> 0 THEN RXchar$ = INPUT$(1, #1) ----- if available, retrieve char

IF RXchar$ = CHR$(13) THEN ----- [CR] received?

CRcount% = CRcount% + 1 ----- if yes, incr. [CR] counter
RXdata$ = RXbuf$ ----- transfer received data
RXbuf$ = "" ----- initialize receive buffer
IF LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + InvNum$ + Comd$)) = "(" + InvNum$ +
Comd$ THEN ----- data packet error check
IF CRcount% < 2 THEN GOTO Rxloop ----- check [CR] Rx counter
IF InvNum$ = "" THEN RXdata$ = "" ----- if broadcast, no Rx data
CommErr% = 0 ----- indicate no error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program
ELSE
PRINT "Error - Received Data = "; Rxdata$ ----- indicate data error
Retry% = Retry% + 1 ----- increment retry counter
IF Retry% < 3 THEN GOTO Txloop ----- 3 Tx attempts allowed
CommErr% = 2 ----- indicate data error
EXIT SUB ----- return to main program
END IF
ELSE ----- [CR] not retrieved
RXbuf$ = RXbuf$ + RXchar$ ----- append char to data
GOTO Rxloop ----- continue receiving data
END IF

END SUB

- 37 -
Execution Example

Baud Rate =? 9600 ------- baud rate = 9600

Parity =? E ------- even parity
Length =? 7 ------- 7 data bits
Inverter Number =? 00 ------- inv. number used (individual communications)
Command =? A ------- set address data command
Data =? 3C0 ------- maximum frequency address
Transmitted Data = (00A3C0&95) ------- transmitted data packet
Received Data = (00A03C0&C5) ------- data response received OK
:
:
Inverter Number =? ------- no inv. number used (broadcast communications)
Command =? A
Data =? 3C0
Transmitted Data = (A3C0&35)
Received Data = ------- no response received after broadcast
:
:
Inverter Number =? 01 ------- example communications error
Command =? A
Data =? 3C0
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96)
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96)
Transmitted Data = (01A3C0&96) ------- 3 unsuccessful communication attempts
A Communications Error Has Occurred!
:
:

- 38 -
Program Comments

Main Program
Overview: Upon program startup, the communication parameters are entered and the
communications port initialized. The main program loop is then initiated, where the target
inverter number (or none, if a broadcast message), command, and data are entered. The
transmit/receive subroutine is then called, and the response status displayed.
Variables: Input - BRT$: baud rate
PRT$: parity (even = E, odd = O)
BLN$: number of data bits (7 or 8)
NUM$: inverter number (00 ∼ 99, none)
CMD$: command (A, B, M, R, T, W)
DAT$: data (0000 ∼ FFFF(+))
Output - rxd$: received data
Internal - CommErr%: error code (0=no error, 1=time-out error, 2=data error)
Notes: • The communications port to use is hard-coded as COM1.
• If an inverter number (NUM$) is used, it must be entered as 2 decimal numbers. To
broadcast the message, hit the enter key at the inverter number prompt (NUM$=“”).
• To use the address increment feature (R/W commands only), append a “+” to the input
data (DAT$).

Transmit/Receive Subroutine
Overview: A checksum is calculated and added to the inverter number, command, and data, and then
the combined message is transmitted. Receive processing is performed, and the
response string is returned along with an error flag (code). Time-out and data error checks
are performed, and retransmissions can occur up to a set limit of 3 times. If no inverter
number was input (broadcast communication), no response message is received.
Variables: Input - InvNum$: inverter number (00 ∼ 99, none) (from main routine)
Comd$: command (A, B, M, R, T, W) (from main routine)
Data$: data (0000 ∼ FFFF(+)) (from main routine)
Output - RXdata$: received data (to main routine)
ComErr%: error code (to main routine)
System - TIMER: system timer
Internal - TXdata$: transmitted data string
SUM&: checksum calculation buffer
I%: checksum calculation loop counter
CKsum$: converted checksum string
Retry%: transmission retry counter
RXchar$: received character buffer
CRcount%: counter for number of [CR] characters received
RXbuf$: received message temporary buffer
StartTime&: time-out start time

- 39 -
Notes: • Check the data before entering it into the main routine. This subroutine performs no error
checking.
• If transmission speed is a concern, the checksum processing may be eliminated. The
TXdata$ variable would then become:
TXdata$ = ”(” + InvNum$ + Comd$ + Data$ + ”)”

• If communication error (inverter “N” code response) processing is desired, the line:
IF LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + InvNum$ + Comd$)) = "(" + InvNum$ +
Comd$ THEN

can be replaced by the line:

IF (LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN("(" + InvNum$ + Comd$)) = "(" + InvNum$ +
Comd$) OR (LEFT$(RXdata$, LEN(”(” + InvNum$ + ”N”)) = ”(” +
InvNum$ + ”N”) THEN

RXdata$ will then be returned with the error message, and CommErr% will be set to 0 (no
error).

- 40 -
8. Peer-To-Peer Communication
8.1 Peer-To-Peer Communication Parameter Settings
Before using peer-to-peer communications, set the inverter parameters as shown below:

[1] Unblind the communication parameters:

• Set BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• Set COMMUNICATION PARAMS BLIND in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
[2] With the communication selection parameter, select RS485:
• Set COMMUNICATION SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to
1.
[3] Select the master and slave devices.
1) Select 1 inverter unit to be the master
(to avoid bus contention, be sure to set only 1 unit per system to be the master).
2) Select the type of frequency data that the master will transmit to the slaves.
(Note: Use caution when “master (frequency command)” is selected, because the
slaves will start running if they are given run commands, regardless of whether or not
the master is running).
• To select the frequency command value, set MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to 1.
• To select the output frequency, set MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to 2.
3) Set all other inverter units to be slaves:
• Set MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS to 0.
[4] Select the baud rate, number of data bits, and parity:
• Baud rate: set by RS485 BAUD RATE in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
and option board jumpers J1 and J2 (refer to section 9.1 Communications Specification).
• Number of data bits: set by NUMBER OF DATA BITS in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING
PARAMETERS.
• Parity: set by PARITY SETTING in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.
[5] Set the frequency mode:
1) Master: • To use a terminal input frequency command value, set FREQUENCY MODE
SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• To use the panel input frequency command value, set FREQUENCY MODE
SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 2.
2) Slaves: • Set FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 3.
[6] Set the command mode:
• To control RUN/STOP etc., via terminal input, set COMMAND MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 1.
• To control RUN/STOP etc., via panel input, set COMMAND MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS to 2.

- 41 -
8.2 Peer-To-Peer Communication Processing Flow
In peer-to-peer communications, the master inverter always transmits frequency (output frequency or
frequency command) information to the slave inverters. The slaves are always in a state of waiting
for frequency information from the master. From the time data is received until the data processing is
completed, however, the slave inverters cannot receive additional data.
Inter-Inverter Communications
Ex: The master is operating at 100Hz, and all slaves connected to the system are also to operate at 100Hz (assume that no bias or gain
settings are set, and that the maximum frequency of all inverters is set to 100Hz).
W irin g
M a ste r
In v erte r D a ta (m a ste r → sla v es)

In v . In v . In v . In v . In v . In v .
#1 #2 #3 #4 # 30 # 31

(1) The master transmits a frequency command to the slaves. The data which the master transmits is:
master frequency (frequency command or output frequency) × 10000 ÷ master maximum frequency.
(2) After the frequency command value has been processed by the proportionality calculations, the slaves write it to the option frequency
command memory location (RAM (bank 0) address 0508H).

8.3 Sequence Explanation

(Master and slave data exchanges)
(1) The master always transmits data - it cannot receive data.
(2) The slaves always receive data - they cannot transmit data. Note that this also means that the
slaves cannot transmit error responses (if an error occurs, the communications error alarm “COMM”
will blink on and off on the slave’s display panel until the next correct communication is received).
Essentially, the data reception method of the slave inverters is identical to that of the inverters in a
computer link system. The slaves ignore all characters received before a “(“ character. If multiple
“(“ characters are received, only the last one received is valid, and all others are discarded.
(3) Only when the slaves receive a carriage return code (0DH) is the transmission considered
terminated.
(4) If a time period of 1 second or longer passes without a transmission being received, the peer-to-
peer communications timer will display the “COMM” alarm on the slave’s display panel and write a
value of 0Hz to the frequency command. The alarm will continue to blink on and off on the display
panel until the next correct transmission is received (refer to section 8.7 Peer-To-Peer
Communication Timer Function).
(5) If the master trips, the “COMM” alarm will be displayed on the display panels of all slave units.
(6) Simultaneous RS232C communication with both slaves and the master is possible while engaging
in peer-to-peer communication, but depending on system timing conditions, the slaves may
occasionally miss the start bits of the RS485 transmission. This may result in the communications
alarm “COMM” occasionally being displayed. In addition, the communications response time will
become longer.
Note: Always supply power to the slave units first, and then to the master.

- 42 -
8.4 Response Times
The maximum response time from when the frequency command is changed at the master until the
slaves respond depends on the RS485 baud rate, bit length, and the following 2 conditions:
1) When neither the master nor slaves uses simultaneous RS232C communication.
2) When only the master uses simultaneous RS232C communication.
A diagram of the measurement method is shown below, and a table of the maximum response times
is given on page 44. From the table, it is apparent that the shortest response time occurs when
simultaneous RS232C communication is not used and the baud rate is set to 38400 baud. It is also
apparent that the longest response time occurs when simultaneous RS232C communication takes
place with the master, and RS485 communication settings are 1200 baud and 8 data bits. The table
gives the absolute maximum response times: actual times will be shorter. The times shown with
simultaneous RS232C communication assume that this is being performed only with the master: it is
possible to perform simultaneous RS232C communications with slave inverters, but depending on
system timing conditions, the slaves may occasionally miss the start bits of the RS485 transmission.
This will result in the slave missing frequency data transmissions, and the communications response
time will also become longer. Because of this, do not perform simultaneous RS232C communication
with slave inverters unless absolutely necessary.
The frequency command value that is active at the start of a master processing cycle is the one that
is processed and then transmitted during the next transmission cycle. If the master frequency
command is changed after the start of a processing cycle, therefore, it must wait until the next cycle to
be processed. Referring to the diagram below, if the master frequency command input is changed
just slightly after point A, it will not be processed until the next master processing cycle (①). It will
then be transmitted by the master (②), received by the slaves (③), and will become the new slave
frequency command at the end of the slave processing cycle (point B). The maximum response time,
therefore, is defined as B - A.

Master: Transmission Transmission Transmission ②

Processing Processing ① Processing

Slaves: Reception Reception Reception ③

Processing Processing Processing

Response Time
A B

- 43 -
 Peer-To-Peer Communication:
Maximum Input-To-Slave Frequency Command Response Times
7-Bit Length 8-Bit Length
Baud rate No RS232C RS232C No RS232C RS232C
1200 baud 260ms 273ms 285ms 295ms
2400 baud 142ms 165ms 153ms 176ms
4800 baud 82ms 111ms 93ms 116ms
9600 baud 61ms 84ms 63ms 86ms
19200 baud 47ms 70ms 48ms 71ms
38400 baud 40ms 63ms 41ms 64ms

The diagram below shows the derivation of the minimum update time, which is the shortest amount of
time that the slave’s frequency command value can change from one value to another. As can be
seen in the diagram, the slave’s frequency command value cannot be updated faster than B - A. The
table below lists the minimum slave frequency command update times as a function of baud rate, bit
length settings, and whether or not simultaneous RS232C communication is taking place with the
master.

Master: Transmission Transmission

Processing Processing

Slaves: Reception Reception

Processing Processing

Update Time
A B

Peer-To-Peer Communication:
Minimum Slave Frequency Command Update Times
7-Bit Length 8-Bit Length
Baud rate No RS232C RS232C No RS232C RS232C
1200 baud 117ms 128ms 129ms 139ms
2400 baud 69ms 78ms 74ms 83ms
4800 baud 41ms 53ms 43ms 80ms
9600 baud 28ms 40ms 30ms 41ms
19200 baud 22ms 34ms 23ms 34ms
38400 baud 19ms 31ms 19ms 31ms

- 44 -
8.5 Transmission Format
All transmitted data is hexadecimal and conforms to ASCII (ANSI) standards.

Inverter (master) → inverter (slave)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
“(“ “S“ “&“ CR
DATA SUM
(28H) (50H) (26H) (0DH)

1. “(“ (1 character) Header code.

2. “S” (1 character) Peer-to-peer communication to slave inverter command.
3. DATA (4 characters) Data transmitted to the slaves (0000H ∼ FFFFH).
4. “&” (1 character) Checksum indicator code.
5. SUM (2 characters) Checksum. ASCII-coded, least-significant 2-digit value (4 bits/digit) of
the sum total addition of the ASCII code values from the header code to the checksum
indicator code.
6. CR (1 character) Carriage return code.

Peer-To-Peer Communication Errors

Error determination during peer-to-peer communications is essentially the same as that during
computer link communications, with the exception that when an error occurs, an error response is
never sent (refer to section 9.2 Communication Errors).

- 45 -
Peer-To-Peer Communication Data Explanation

Master Processing
The data that the master transmits takes the form “S××××”, where ×××× is the result of the
equation:
[selected master frequency] × 10000 ÷ [master maximum frequency]
When the master is tripped, a “#” character is also appended to the data.

Slave Processing
The 1-second peer-to-peer communication timer function is continually being executed. Bank 0
(RAM) and the address for option frequency command are automatically set, and the post-
calculation data is written to this location (no data checking is performed). The data calculations
performed are as follows:

1) When bias and gain settings are selected (RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1), the following equation is used to
determine the frequency command value:

[ RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY

PT. #2 FREQ ][
− PT. #1 FREQ ](
RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY
data
)[
 RS485 / 12 - BIT  RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY
]
[ ][ ]
frequency command = × −  BINARY POINT #1 +
RS485 / 12 - BIT RS485 / 12 - BIT 100   PT. #1 FREQ
BINARY POINT #2 − BINARY POINT #1

All parameters shown in the above equation are parameters in each slave inverter’s
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.

2) When bias and gain settings are not selected (RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 0), the following equation is used to
determine the frequency command value:
frequency command = (data × [slave’s maximum frequency] ÷ 10000).

3) If a time-out occurs, the slave stops running (frequency command is set to 0Hz) and the
communications alarm “COMM” will blink on and off on the LCD display panel.

4) If the master trips, the communications alarm “COMM” will blink on and off on the display
panels of all slaves, but the data received from the master will continue to be processed as
usual.

- 46 -
8.6 Proportional Control
By sending frequency information to up to 31 slave inverters, the master inverter controls the system’s
proportional operation (this feature is not used in computer link systems). This proportional operation
is configured by a preset ratio in each slave inverter. There are 2 different methods to accomplish
this, as explained below.

Problem: An RS485 peer-to-peer communication system is comprised of 1 master and 2 slave

inverters. Slave #1 is to operate at 9/10 the master’s operating frequency, and slave #2 is
to operate at 8/10 the master’s operating frequency.

Solution #1: Proportional control via maximum frequency ratios.

1) Do not enable the bias and gain settings (RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 0).
2) Set the master’s frequency command to 50Hz.
3) Set the master to transmit frequency command data (MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1), set the master and slave’s MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY parameters in GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 according to
the following table, and the frequency command results will be as shown:

Inverter MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY Frequency Command

Master 100.0Hz 50.0Hz (input)
Slave #1 90.0Hz 45.0Hz (result)
Slave #2 80.0Hz 40.0Hz (result)

• The data sent by the master is:

master frequency command × 10000 ÷ master MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
= 50 × 10000 ÷ 100
= 5000
5000 in hexadecimal is 1388H, so the actual transmitted command will be (S1388&75.
• After the slave receives the command, it checks if the bias and gain parameters are enabled,
and when they are not selected (as in this example), it calculates its frequency command as:
frequency command = data × MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY ÷ 10000
Therefore,
Slave #1: frequency command = 5000 × 90 ÷ 10000 = 45Hz
Slave #2: frequency command = 5000 × 80 ÷ 10000 = 40Hz.

- 47 -
Solution #2: Proportional control via bias and gain settings.
1) Enable the slave’s bias and gain settings (RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1).
2) Set the master’s frequency command to 50Hz.
3) Set the master to transmit frequency command data (MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1), set the master and slave’s MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1, RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT.
#1 FREQ, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2, and RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #2
FREQ parameters according to the following table, and the frequency command results will be
as shown:

Inverter MAXIMUM RS485/12- RS485/12- RS485/12- RS485/12- Frequency

OUTPUT BIT BIT BINARY BIT BINARY BIT BINARY Command
FREQUENCY BINARY PT. #1 FREQ POINT #2 PT. #2 FREQ
POINT #1
Master 100.0Hz     50.0Hz (input)
Slave #1 100.0Hz 0% 0.0Hz 100% 90.0Hz 45.0Hz
(result)
Slave #2 100.0Hz 0% 0.0Hz 100% 80.0Hz 40.0Hz
(result)

• The data sent by the master is:

master frequency command × 10000 ÷ master MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY
= 50 × 10000 ÷ 100
= 5000
5000 in hexadecimal is 1388H, so the actual transmitted command will be (S1388&75.
• After the slave receives the command, it checks if the bias and gain parameters are enabled,
and when they are selected (as in this example), it calculates its frequency command as:

[ RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY

PT. #2 FREQ ][
− PT. #1 FREQ ](
RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY
data
)[
 RS485 / 12 - BIT  RS485 / 12 - BIT BINARY
]
[ ][ ]
frequency command = × −  BINARY POINT #1 +
RS485 / 12 - BIT RS485 / 12 - BIT 100   PT. #1 FREQ
BINARY POINT #2 − BINARY POINT #1

90.0 − 0.0  5000 

Slave #1: frequency command = × − 0 + 0.0 = 0.9 × 50 = 45.0 Hz
100 − 0  100 

80.0 − 0.0  5000

Slave #2: frequency command = × − 0 + 0.0 = 0.8 × 50 = 40.0 Hz
100 − 0  100 

- 48 -
8.7 Peer-To-Peer Communication Timer Function
When using computer link communications, the communications timer can be set between 1 ∼ 100
seconds. The peer-to-peer communications timer, however, functions differently. When a slave
inverter receives an “S” command (peer-to-peer frequency data command), it automatically sets its
communications timer to 1 second. The timer function is then enabled until the inverter is re-
initialized (control power is turned OFF and ON, a reset is performed, etc.) If a 1-second or longer
length of time passes without the slave receiving a transmission, a time-out will occur. This will cause
the communications alarm indicator “COMM” to blink on and off on the slave’s LCD display panel, and
0Hz will be written to the slave’s frequency command (the slave will stop). Once a time-out occurs,
normal peer-to-peer communications will again begin upon the reception of the next “S” command. In
the same way as the computer link timer, if an error occurs (format error, parity error, etc.), the
communication will not be considered valid, and therefore will not restart peer-to-peer
communications after a time-out.

- 49 -
9. Appendix
9.1 Communications Specification

Item Specification
Applicable Inverter TOSHIBA TOSVERT-130 G3
Communication System Half-duplex, 2-wire system
Connection Control System Centralized control system ✱1
Synchronization Method Start-stop synchronization (1 stop bit)
Communication Speed Default setting: 9600 baud
1200/2400/4800/9600/19200/38400 baud selectable ✱2
Communication Code Default setting: 7-bit (ASCII) ✱3, even parity ✱3
7/8 -bit ✱4, even/odd parity ✱4 selectable
Character Format 10-bit or 11-bit ✱5
Error Detection Methods Parity, checksum
Error Correction Method None
Response Observation Method None
Bit Transmission Order LSB first
Frame Length Variable (15 bytes maximum)
Interface Conforms to EIA RS485 standard
Communication Distance 1000m maximum
Connection Points 32 units maximum (including host)
Other Time-out function available.
When a communication error occurs, alarm indicator is a
blinking “COMM” on the LCD display.

- 50 -
NOTES:
✱1
: Centralized control system
The controlling equipment master (host) controls all of the connected slave (G3) units, and data
transmission is allowed only between the master and the slave units. The master transmits data
to a G3 unit, and the G3 transmits its response, according to the communication process
outlined in this manual.
✱2
: Baud rate selection method
Factory-shipped setting is normal mode, J1 & J2 OFF (9600 baud).

Jumper Settings RS485 BAUD RATE

J1 J2 Normal Mode (0) High-Speed Mode (1)
OFF OFF 9600 38400
ON OFF 4800 19200
OFF ON 2400 9600
ON ON 1200 4800
NOTE: 9600 baud and 4800 baud can be selected in both normal and high-speed mode. There
is no difference in operation in either mode.
✱3
: Communication Code
All character codes conform to the ASCII (ANSI) standard for 7-bit alphanumeric characters
(refer to section 9.5 ASCII Character Codes). With standard settings, an even parity bit is also
added. Via parameter settings, 8-bit data length and odd parity selections are also available.
✱4
: Bit Length / Parity
The bit length and parity settings are shared with RS232C communications. When
simultaneously using RS232C communications, therefore, please use the same bit length and
parity.
• Bit length: NUMBER OF DATA BITS in GROUP:COMMUNICATION
SETTING PARAMETERS (0 = 7 bits, 1 = 8 bits).
• Parity: PARITY SETTING in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING
PARAMETERS (0 = even parity, 1 = odd parity).
✱5
: Character Formats
1) 10-bit (7 bits + parity) (standard factory-shipped setting)

START PARITY STOP

BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6
BIT BIT BIT

2) 11-bit (8 bits + parity)

START PARITY STOP

BIT 0 BIT 1 BIT 2 BIT 3 BIT 4 BIT 5 BIT 6 BIT 7
BIT BIT BIT

- 51 -
9.2 Communication Errors
When a communication error occurs, the communication error alarm “COMM” will be displayed on the
operating panel, and if the transmission was not a broadcast, the error code corresponding to the
error that occurred will be returned (refer to the table below and section 7.5.2 Data Responses From
Inverter To Host Computer).

Error Name Error Description Error Code

Cannot execute communication was correct, but cannot execute command 0000
(attempt to write a parameter that cannot be written while
inverter is running ✳1, EEPROM error)
Data error data setting value outside of adjustment range, character 0001
other than a <CR> received after the “)”, data exceeded 4
characters, data not in the range of “0” ∼ “9” or “A” ∼ “F”,
character other than “&”, “)”, <CR>, or “+” (only during
read/write commands) received after data
Address error address data outside of adjustment range when a “W” 0002
command was sent, attempt to write data at a protected
address ✳2, bank setting was incorrect when a read/write
was performed
Command error command was incorrect 0003
Checksum error checksum was incorrect, character other than “)” or <CR> no response ✳4
received after the checksum data (includes the case of
the checksum data exceeding 2 characters)
Format error communications format was incorrect (parity error, overrun no response ✳4
error, framing error) ✳3
Inverter number error inverter number was incorrect, inverter number was only 1 no response ✳4
character long

✳1
: Parameters that cannot be set while the inverter is running are MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY,
BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE SELECT, VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN, STANDARD SETTING
MODE SELECTION, and INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS.
✳2
: The following RAM and EEPROM locations cannot be written to:
04D8H ∼ 04F7H, 0500H ∼ 0507H (RAM only), 04FAH bits 4 and 5, 04FBH bit 7, 050AH bits 4 and
5 (RAM only), 050BH bit 7 (RAM only), 0512H bits 4 and 5 (RAM only), 0513H bit 7 (RAM only).
✳3
: Parity error:....... parity incorrect
Overrun error:... new data received before previous data could be read from buffer
Framing error:... stop bit position incorrect
✳4
: Due to the possibility of bus contention, the inverter will not respond when an inverter number
error, format error, or checksum error occurs.

- 52 -
RS485 Communication Error Priority Rankings

1. Format error
2. Inverter number error
3. Checksum error
4. Command error
5. Data error (incorrect data: data characters other than “0” ∼ “9”, “A” ∼ “F”, data length exceeds 4
characters, character other than “+” (only during a R/W command), “&”, “)”, or <CR> after the data,
or character other than <CR> after the “)” character)
6. Address error (only R/W commands)
7. Cannot execute error (only “W” command)
8. Data error (data outside of setting limits during “W” command, attempt to write to a protected
location, or bank data outside of limits during “B” command)

Response Data Matrix

Interface RS232C RS485
Inverter number Yes No Yes No
Normal communications ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
Cannot execute error ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
When Data error ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
an Address error ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
error Command error ❍ ❍ ❍ ×
occurs Checksum error × ❍ × ×
Format error × ❏ × ×
Inverter number error × × × ×
❍ ....... Response transmitted.
×......... Response not transmitted.
❏........ Response transmitted when the “(“ character is correctly received. When the “(“ character is
not correctly received, the data is discarded and therefore no response is transmitted.

- 53 -
“COMM” Alarm Causes
1) During computer link communications
• When any previously-mentioned communication error occurs.

2) During peer-to-peer communications (pertains only to slaves)

• When any previously-mentioned communication error occurs.
• When a communications timer time-out occurs.
• When the master inverter trips.

RS485 Option-Related Trips

OPTION PCB ERROR (PRESS CLEAR)
• During computer link communications, when the communications timer is set and a time-out
occurs (if a time-out occurs during peer-to-peer communications, the inverter will not trip, but will
only stop operation and display the “COMM” alarm).

• When RS485 communication is selected (COMMUNICATION SELECTION in

GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1), and the RS485 option board is not
installed (or is installed improperly), or a different option board is installed.

• When the RS485 option board is damaged.

- 54 -
9.3 Memory Configuration
RAM EEPROM Internal RO M External / Option ROM Option Bus

FFFF H
Program
& Data
8000 H
7FFF H

System
Area
1FFF H

077F H

System
Area 059F H
User Program Option
Param . #2 & Data Data
0517 H Com m . (pattern
Com m and run)
Area
04FF H
User User
Param . #1 Param . #1
04F7 H
System System
04D8 H Param . Param .

User User
Param . #1 Param . #1
03C0 H

System
Area System
0100 H Area
0000 H

[Bank = 0] [Bank = 1] [Bank = 2] [Bank = 3] [Bank = 4]

RAM: Contains parameter settings and other data that the inverter uses for system control
(parameters, commands, status, etc.) When the inverter is powered-off, this data is erased.
When the inverter is powered-on, parameter data is copied from EEPROM to RAM (directly in
the case of User Param. #1). Other data is initialized.
EEPROM: Contains user-set parameters and other data. This data is retained even when the inverter is
powered-off.
Internal ROM: Contains control programming and internal ROM version information.
External ROM: Contains control programming and external ROM version information.
Option Bus: Allows access to data contained in installed options.

- 55 -
<< Note >> Shaded areas cannot be written to (read-only). Also, do not attempt to access those areas
crossed out with an “X”.

- 56 -
9.4 Communications Data Tables
• Symbol Definitions
(#): Depends on inverter rating.
(✳): Cannot be set while inverter is running (attempting to write data while the inverter is running will
result in an error (N0000)).
(Note): Use caution! Because there is no data checking performed on these settings, caution must be used
to not write incorrect data (the “Mask” and “Adjustment Range” sections will be shaded).
• Usage Precautions
1: Refer to the inverter instruction manual in conjunction with this manual.
2: If the mask data is not correctly set when data is written, the data check function cannot correctly
check the data setting.
3: All data is written in hexadecimal (base 16) format (except for “Multiplier” and “Adjustment Range”
data, which is written in decimal (base 10) format).
Parameter Table Usage Method Example

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (✴) 0/1 03C0 FFFF 0BB8 ∼ 9C40 (30.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY #1 0/1 0428 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01

◊ In this example, the MAXIMUM OUTPUT

FREQUENCY setting of the inverter numbered
“00” will be changed from 80Hz to 60Hz.

HOST COMPUTER → INV. INV. → HOST COMPUTER

(00B0) (00B0000)............Bank
(00A3C0) (00A03C0)............Address
(00MFFFF) (00MFFFF)............Mask
(00W1770) (00W1770)............Data (within adjustment range)
(Since the mask is automatically set to FFFFH whenever
the address is set, setting it as shown here is optional).

• Panel display range (base 10)

The actual value displayed on the LCD panel will depend on the setting of FREQUENCY DISPLAY
RESOLUTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. When 0.01Hz resolution is selected and the
above example is performed, 60.00Hz will be displayed on the panel. When 0.1Hz resolution is
selected, 60.0Hz will be displayed. The “Adjustment Range” column shows a maximum of 5
digits, but because the panel can only display 4 digits, the displayed value will be a rounded
representation of the actual data setting value.
(Ex: If 399.95 (9C3BH) is written to MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (upper limit=400.00),
400.0Hz will be displayed).
• Display Data / Internal Data Conversion Method
Internal data = [display data ÷ Multiplier], converted to hexadecimal.
(Ex: To convert a MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY setting of 60Hz to internal data: 60 ÷ 0.01 = 6000,
converted to hexadecimal → 1770H).

• Shaded Parameters
Data checks are not performed on parameters that appear in the following data tables with shaded “Mask”
and “Adjustment Range” sections. Use extreme caution when setting these parameters, therefore, as
incorrect mask or data settings may cause unpredictable operation.

- 57 -
Option Command / Frequency
<< The following function is valid only when FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 3 (communication/12-bit binary option input valid). >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
Option Frequency command 0 0508 FFFF LL ∼ UL (Note 1) 0.01 0000

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 3 (communication option input valid). >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
Option Run • stop command 0 050A 0001 0000: Stop command  0000
Command selection 0001: Run command
Forward • reverse run 0 050A 0004 0000: Reverse  0004
selection 0004: Forward (Note 2)
Acc/dec #1 / #2 0 050A 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1  0000
selection 0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 050A 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode)  0000
0080: Jog mode
Feedback control 0 050B 0001 0000: Feedback valid  0000
(Note 3) 0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC 0 050B 0002 0000: No compulsory DC  0000
injection braking mode injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC
injection below DC
INJECTION START
FREQUENCY
Fundamental 0 050B 0004 0000: V/F #1  0000
parameter switching 0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 050B 0008 0000: Normal  0000
(coast stop command) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off 0 050B 0010 0000: Does nothing  0000
command 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 050B 0020 0000: Does nothing  0000
(trip clear) 0020: Reset
Preset speed run 0 050C 000F 0000: Output frequency 1 0000
command selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS485 RS485 0/1 04CC 00FF 0000: Timer OFF 1 EEPROM
communications timer 0001 ∼ 0064: 1s ∼ 100s contents

(Note 1) Throughout the remainder of this document, the abbreviations “LL”, “UL”, and “Fmax” will stand for LOWER
LIMIT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, and MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY, respectively.
(Note 2) The initialized value is 0004 only when an option ROM is installed and a communications option (RS485,
TOSLINE-F10, TOSLINE-S20, DeviceNet or RIO) is selected (COMMUNICATION SELECTION in
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS = 1 ∼ 3). Otherwise, it is initialized to 0000.
(Note 3) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 58 -
RS232C Command / Frequency
<< RS232C commands/frequency command will only be valid when the following parameter is
respectively configured for RS232C command, frequency, or both. >>
Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Command • frequency 0 0515 0003 0000: FREQUENCY MODE  0000
mode selection SELECTION, COMMAND
MODE SELECTION
settings
0001: RS232C commands valid
0002: RS232C frequency valid
0003: RS232C commands and
frequency valid

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Frequency command 0 0510 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01 0000

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C Run • stop command 0 0512 0001 0000: Stop command  0000
Command selection 0001: Run command
Forward • reverse run 0 0512 0004 0000: Reverse  0004
selection 0004: Forward
Acc/dec #1 / #2 0 0512 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1  0000
selection 0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 0512 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode)  0000
0080: Jog mode
Feedback control 0 0513 0001 0000: Feedback valid  0000
(Note 1) 0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC 0 0513 0002 0000: No compulsory DC  0000
injection braking mode injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC
injection below DC
INJECTION START
FREQUENCY
Fundamental 0 0513 0004 0000: V/F #1  0000
parameter switching 0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 0513 0008 0000: Normal  0000
(coast stop command) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off 0 0513 0010 0000: Does nothing  0000
command 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 0513 0020 0000: Does nothing  0000
(trip clear) 0020: Reset
Preset speed run 0 0514 000F 0000: Output frequency 1 0000
command selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

Group Function Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier Initialized Value
RS232C RS232C 0/1 0445 00FF 0000: Timer OFF 1 EEPROM
communications timer 0001 ∼ 0064: 1s ∼ 100s contents

(Note 1) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 59 -
Panel Command / Frequency
<< The following function is valid only when FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>
Group Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Panel FREQUENCY COMMAND 0 04F8 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>
Group Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Panel Run • stop command selection 0 04FA 0001 0000: Stop command 
Command (Note 1) 0001: Run command
DIRECTION SELECTION (FORWARD/REV) 0/1 04FA 0004 0000: Reverse 
0004: Forward
ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 SELECTION 0/1 04FA 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1 
0008: Acc / dec #2
Jog mode selection 0 04FA 0080 0000: Normal (acc/dec mode) 
(Note 1) 0080: Jog mode
PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL (Note 2) 0/1 04FB 0001 0000: Feedback valid 
0001: Feedback invalid
Compulsory DC injection braking mode 0 04FB 0002 0000: No compulsory DC 
(Note 1) injection braking
0002: Compulsory DC injection
below DC INJECTION
START FREQUENCY
FUNDAMENTAL PARAM SWITCHING 0/1 04FB 0004 0000: V/F #1 
0004: V/F #2
Gate block command 0 04FB 0008 0000: Normal 
(Note 1) 0008: Gate block
Emergency off command 0 04FB 0010 0000: Does nothing 
(Note 1) 0010: Emergency off
Reset command 0 04FB 0020 After writing 0020 (“TRIP 
(Note 1) CLEAR COMMAND (PRESS
CLEAR)“) will be displayed),
write 0000 and the inverter will
reset
Preset speed run command 0 04FC 000F 0000: Output frequency 1
(Note 1) selected by FREQUENCY
MODE SELECTION
0001 ∼ 000F: speeds 1 ∼ 15

(Note 1) It is also possible to write to bank 1 (EEPROM), but this is not for normal command use. To avoid the possibility
of unpredictable operation, do not write these commands to bank 1.
(Note 2) This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control is selected. In order
to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL
PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 60 -
Inverter Status Monitor (Read Only)

Function Bank Address Mask Data Contents (Units) Multiplier

Length
Operating frequency monitor 0 0524 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Rotation direction monitor 0 05B6 0004 bit → inverter status monitor 1 
Frequency command monitor 0 0500 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Output current monitor 0 0576 00FF byte % 1
Input voltage monitor (Note 1) 0 05B2 FFFF word % 0.1
Output voltage monitor (Note 1) 0 05B0 FFFF word % 0.1
Input terminal status monitor 0 057A FFFF word → bit monitor 1 
Output terminal status monitor 0 0579 00FF byte → bit monitor 2 
Cumulative run time (Note 2) 0 05A6 FFFF word  1
05D2 0008 bit  1
Past trips (Note 3) 0/1 04F3 007F 5 bytes → Table 1, Table 2 
(4 most recent trips) ∼ 04F7
Pre-compensation frequency 0 0524 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Post-compensation frequency 0 0260 FFFF word Hz 0.01
Torque current monitor 0 0684 FFFF word % (Note 4) 0.01
Excitation current monitor 0 0688 00FF byte % 1
PID feedback value 0 0506 FFFF word Hz (Note 4) 0.02
Motor overload ratio 0 0584 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Inverter overload ratio 0 0586 FFFF word % (Note 5)
DBR overload ratio 0 0588 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Input / output power units 0 03AE 0008 bit 0000: 0.01kW (Note 6)
0008: 0.1kW
Input power (%) (Note 7) 0 035C FFFF word % 0.1
Input power (kW) 0 0350 FFFF word kW (Note 6)
Output power (%) (Note 7) 0 035E FFFF word % (Note 4) 0.1
Output power (kW) 0 0352 FFFF word kW (Note 4) (Note 6)
RR input 0 0550 FFFF word % (Note 5)
Present trip 0 0591 007F byte → Table 1 
Command mode status 0 05B8 0003 2 bits 00: terminal 
01: panel
02: option
03: RS232C
Frequency mode selection status 0 05B8 000C 2 bits 00: terminal 
04: panel
08: option
0C: RS232C
CPU version number 2 8000 FFFF word  1
External ROM version number 3 0000 FFFF word  1
EEPROM version number 1 0380 FFFF word  1
Inverter typeform monitor 0 05CA 00FF byte → Table 5 1

(Note 1) These monitor voltage units are not affected by the setting of VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS -
they are always in %.
(Note 2) The time range for the cumulative run timer is 0000H ∼ FFFFH (0 ∼ 65535 hours), counted at address 05A6 in bank 0. When the
timer reaches a count of 65536, bit 3 of address 05D2 in bank 0 is set, and the count at address 05A6 is cleared. At a count of
65537, therefore, address 05A6 will contain 0001H and bit 3 of address 05D2 will be set.
Cumulative run time monitor example (reading value from inverter number “00”):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A5D2) (00A05D2) .................. select rollover bit address
(00M0008) (00M0008) .................. mask off rollover bit
(00R) (00R0008) .................. timer has rolled-over ( ≥ 65536 hours)
(00A5A6) (00A05A6) .................. select timer address
(00R) (00R000A) .................. timer = 10 (total time = 65546 hours)

- 61 -
(Note 3) Past trips are stored in a ring-buffer format, with the most recent trip located at the address following the 00H starting point.
(Note 4) Uses signed data (data values larger than 7FFFH are negative). If internal data is 8000H or larger, the actual value can be
obtained by: actual value = - [FFFFH - (internal data) + 1].
(Note 5) Multiplier is 100/65535.
(Note 6) If the input / output power units data is 0000, the monitored data is in 0.01kW units, and the multiplier is 0.01. If the input / output
power units data is 0008, the monitored data is in 0.1kW units, and the multiplier is 0.1. These values are automatically set
according to the inverter typeform.
(Note 7) 100% = √3 × rated voltage × rated current (with some variation for losses).

Input Terminal Status Monitor

Bit Monitor 1 057AH Input Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit
Lower Byte Read Mask
bit 0 F terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0001
bit 1 R terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0002
bit 2 S1 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0004
bit 3 S2 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0008
bit 4 S3 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0010
bit 5 S4 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 S5 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 S6 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Bit Monitor 1 057BH Input Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit

Upper Byte Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 unused (always 0)   
bit 3 unused (always 0)   
bit 4 unused (always 0)   
bit 5 S7 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 RES terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 ST terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Ex. 1) Input terminal monitor example (reading the input terminal status of inverter number “00”):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A57A) (00A057A)
(00R) (00R8025)

1000 0000 0010 0101

In this example, terminals ST, S4, S1 and F are shorted to CC, and all others are open.

Ex. 2) Example of monitoring only terminals S1 ∼ S4 (again from inverter number “00”):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A57A) (00A057A)
(00M003C) (00M003C)
(00R) (00R0004)
In this example, terminal S1 is shorted to CC, and S2 ∼ S4 are open.

- 62 -
Output Terminal Status Monitor
Bit Monitor 2 0579H Output Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit
Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 FAN OFF ON 0004
bit 3 FL FLB-FLC shorted FLA-FLC shorted 0008
bit 4 MS relay OFF ON 0010
bit 5 OUT (option) OUTB-OUTC shorted OUTA-OUTC shorted 0020
bit 6 RCH RCHA-RCHC open RCHA-RCHC shorted 0040
bit 7 LOW LOWA-LOWC open LOWA-LOWC shorted 0080

Inverter Status Monitor

Inverter 05B6H Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit
Status 1 Read Mask
Lower Byte bit 0 running (acc/dec)  running 0001
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 forward / reverse reverse forward 0004
bit 3 acc/dec #1/#2 acc/dec #1 acc/dec #2 0008
bit 4 for inverter use   
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 jog/normal mode normal (acc/dec) jog mode 0080

Inverter 05B7H Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Status 1 Read Mask
Upper Byte bit 0 feedback ON/OFF OFF feedback active 0001
bit 1 DC inject. braking OFF DC inject. braking active 0002
bit 2 V/F #1/#2 V/F #1 V/F #2 0004
bit 3 coasting not coasting coasting 0008
bit 4 emergency off not in emergency off in emergency off 0010
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 for inverter use   

Inverter 05BBH Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Status 2 Read Mask
bit 0 accelerating not accelerating accelerating 0001
bit 1 decelerating not decelerating decelerating 0002
bit 2 for inverter use   
bit 3 retry not retrying retrying 0008
bit 4 running (including stopped running 0010
DC inject. braking)
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 tripped not tripped tripped 0080

Ex) Inverter status monitoring example (reading the status of inverter number “00”):
HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER
(00A5B6) (00A05B6)
(00R) (00R000D)

0000 0000 0000 1101

In this example, the inverter is running forward in normal acc/dec mode using acc/dec #2 and V/F #1.

- 63 -
Table 1. List of trips (trips registered as past faults)

LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation

NO ERROR ××00 No error has been recorded since the last inverter
reset or trip clear
OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) ××01 Overcurrent during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (DECEL) ××02 Overcurrent during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××03 Overcurrent during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOAD-END OVERCURRENT ××04 Load-end overcurrent detected at start-up (output
(PRESS CLEAR) terminals, motor wiring etc.)
U-PHASE SHORT CKT ××05 U-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
V-PHASE SHORT CKT ××06 V-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
W-PHASE SHORT CKT ××07 W-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST INPUT PHASE ××08 Lost input phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST OUTPUT PHASE ××09 Lost output phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) ××0A Overvoltage during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (DECEL) ××0B Overvoltage during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (RUN) ××0C Overvoltage during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
INVERTER OVERLOAD ××0D Inverter overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
MOTOR OVERLOAD ××0E Motor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERLOAD TRIP ××0F Dynamic braking resistor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERHEAT TRIP ××10 Inverter overheat
(PRESS CLEAR)
EMERGENCY OFF ××11 Emergency off
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE ××12 EEPROM failure during write
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM READ FAILURE ××13 EEPROM failure during initial read
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××14 Unused
RAM ERROR ××15 RAM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
ROM ERROR ××16 ROM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CPU ERROR ××17 CPU error
(PRESS CLEAR)

- 64 -
 LCD Display Message Data (Hex) Explanation
COMMUNICATION ERROR ××18 RS232C timer time-out
(PRESS CLEAR)
GATE ARRAY FAULT ××19 Gate array error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CURRENT DETECT ERROR ××1A Output current detection circuit error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION PCB ERROR ××1B Option PCB error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION ROM ERROR ××1C Option ROM error
LOW CURRENT TRIP ××1D Low current
(PRESS CLEAR)
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP ××1E Main circuit undervoltage
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××1F Unused
OVERTORQUE TRIP ××20 Overtorque
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (SOFT) ××21 Earth fault (software)
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (HARD) ××22 Earth fault (hardware)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPEN FUSE TRIP ××23 Open fuse
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERCURRENT TRIP ××24 Dynamic braking resistor overcurrent
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (ACC) ××25 Overcurrent in DC section during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (DEC) ××26 Overcurrent in DC section during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××27 Overcurrent in DC section during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
AUTO-TUNING ERROR ××28 Auto-tuning error
(PRESS CLEAR)
INV TYPEFORM ERROR ××29 Inverter typeform error
(PRESS READ/WRITE)

- 65 -
Table 2. Trip data configuration ( : starting point)

When a trip occurs, the oldest trip becomes the starting point (00H), and the most recent trip is placed at
the previous starting point address (refer to Table 1 for trip codes):
04F3H 04F4H 04F5H 04F6H 04F7H Trip Status
00H 00H 00H 00H 00H Initial status (no trips)
00H 00H 00H 00H 01H 1st trip
00H 01H 03H 0BH 01H 4th trip
0BH 01H 03H 0BH 00H 5th trip
0BH 01H 03H 00H 13H 6th trip

Table 3. Pre-alarm status monitor data (bank 0)

05D4H Function LCD Display Message 0 1
bit 0 ∼ bit 3 unused   
bit 4 overload pre-alarm status OVERLOAD no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 5 overvoltage pre-alarm status OVERVOLTAGE no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 6 overcurrent pre-alarm status OVERCURRENT no pre-alarm pre-alarm
bit 7 overheat pre-alarm status OVERHEAT no pre-alarm pre-alarm

Table 4. Messages (non-trips)

LCD Display Message Bank Address Mask Data
INVERTER OFF 0 051B 0008 0008: ST-CC open
(ST-CC IS OPEN)
CONTROL POWER LOW 0 05B4 0010 0010: control circuit undervoltage

DC BUS 0 05B4 0001 0001: main circuit undervoltage

UNDERVOLTAGE
FREQUENCY POINT 0 05D4 0002 0002: frequency point setting error alarm
SETTING ERROR

Message monitor example (communicating with inverter number “00”):

HOST COMPUTER → INVERTER INVERTER → HOST COMPUTER

(00B0) (00B0000)
(00A5B4) (00A05B4)
(00M0001) (00M0001)
(00R) (00R0001)

In this case, a main circuit undervoltage condition is being indicated.

- 66 -
Table 5. Inverter typeform codes

230v Class 460v Class 575v Class

Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform
Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex)
G3-2010 ××21 G3-4015 ××42 G3-6060 ××65
G3-2015 ××22 G3-4025 ××43 G3-6120 ××67
G3-2025 ××23 G3-4035 ××44 G3-6160 ××68
G3-2035 ××24 G3-4055 ××45 G3-6220 ××69
G3-2055 ××25 G3-4080 ××46 G3-6270 ××6A
G3-2080 ××26 G3-4110 ××47 G3-6330 ××6B
G3-2110 ××27 G3-4160 ××48 G3-6400 ××6C
G3-2160 ××28 G3-4220 ××49 G3-6500 ××6D
G3-2220 ××29 G3-4270 ××4A G3-6600 ××6E
G3-2270 ××2A G3-4330 ××4B G3-6750 ××6F
G3-2330 ××2B G3-4400 ××4C G3-610K ××70
G3-2400 ××2C G3-4500 ××4D G3-612K ××71
G3-4600 ××4E G3-615K ××72
G3-4750 ××4F G3-620K ××73
G3-410K ××50
G3-412K ××51
G3-415K ××52
G3-420K ××53
G3-425K ××54
G3-430K ××55

- 67 -
Parameter List

GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY (✴) 0/1 03C0 FFFF 0BB8 ∼ 9C40 (30.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY #1 0/1 0428 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE SELECT (Note, ✴) 0/1 04BE 0030 0000: Input voltage level (0) 
0020: Automatic setting (1)
0030: Stationary setting (2)
MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #1 0/1 0426 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
REVERSE OPERATION DISABLE SELECT 0/1 04B6 0020 0000: Reverse allowed (0) 
0020: Reverse not allowed (1)
UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03C2 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03C4 FFFF 0 ∼ UL, Fmax
VOLTS PER HERTZ PATTERN (Note, ✴) 0/1 042D 000F 0000: Constant torque (1) 
0001: Variable torque (2)
0002: Auto. torque boost (3)
0006: 3 w/ auto. eng. sav. (4)
000A: vector control (5)
000E: 5 w/ auto. eng. sav. (6)
1•2 VOLTAGE BOOST #1 0/1 0424 FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
ACCELERATION TIME #1 (Ref. 1) 0/1 03C6 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 0.01 / 0.1
DECELERATION TIME #1 0/1 03C8 FFFF (0.01 ∼ 600.00 / 0.1 ∼ 6000.0)
ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 SELECTION 0/1 042D 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST LOW 0/1 04C4 00FF 0003 ∼ 00FD (0 ∼ 50) (Special)
ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN ADJUST HIGH 0/1 04C5 00FF

Codes used throughout this parameter list:

(✴) : Cannot set while inverter is running.

(Note) : No data checking performed → “Mask” and “Adjustment Range” sections will be shaded.

(Special) : Internal data = (display setting × 5 + 3), converted to hexadecimal.

(Ref. 1) : The adjustment range and multiplier depend on the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS
SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS as follows:
When ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is set for 0.1 sec. units, adjustment range =
0.1 ∼ 6000.0, and multiplier = 0.1.
When ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is set for 0.01 sec. units, adjustment range
= 0.01 ∼ 600.00, and multiplier = 0.01.
In addition, if the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is changed after setting
the ACC/DEC times, the ACC/DEC times will become 10 times or 0.1 times their former
value. Therefore, always reset the ACC/DEC time settings after changing the setting of
ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION.

- 68 -
GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
BASE FREQUENCY #2 0/1 0432 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE #2 0/1 0430 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
VOLTAGE BOOST #2 0/1 042E FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LVL #2 0/1 0434 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
STALL PROTECTION SELECTION #2 0/1 0437 0040 0000: ON (0) 
0040: OFF (1)
0 STALL PROTECTION LEVEL #2 0/1 0435 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
ACCELERATION TIME #2 (Ref. 1) 0/1 03CA FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 0.01 / 0.1
DECELERATION TIME #2 0/1 03CC FFFF (0.01 ∼ 600.00 / 0.1 ∼ 6000.0)
ACC/DEC PATTERN #2 SELECTION 0/1 0437 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCH FREQUENCY 0/1 0406 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01

<< The following functions are valid only when COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS is set to 2 (panel input valid) or 4 (local/remote changeover possible). >>

GROUP:PANEL CONTROL PARAMETERS

Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
DIRECTION SELECTION (FORWARD/REV) 0/1 04FA 0004 0000: Reverse (0) 
0004: Forward (1)
STOP PATTERN SELECTION 0/1 045C 0040 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
0040: Coast stop (1)
FUNDAMENTAL PARAM SWITCHING 0/1 04FB 0004 0000: V/F #1 (1) 
0004: V/F #2 (2)
ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 SELECTION 0/1 04FA 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1 (1) 
0008: Acc / dec #2 (2)
PANEL RESET SELECTION 0/1 045C 0030 0000: All possible (0) 
0010: overload only (1)
0020: overload, overcurrent
only (2)
PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL (Note 1) 0/1 04FB 0001 0000: Feedback valid (0) 
0001: Feedback invalid (1)

(Note 1): This parameter only selects whether or not feedback control is valid when feedback control
is selected. In order to use feedback control, parameter FEEDBACK CONTROL
SELECTION in GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS must still be set.

- 69 -
GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
INPUT TERMINAL SELECTION 0/1 04BB 0001 0000: Standard functions (0) 
0001: Individual selection (1)
1 “R” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 046C FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 54) 
“S1” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 046E FFFF
“S2” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0470 FFFF
“S3” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0472 FFFF
“S4” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0474 FFFF Refer to Table 6
“F” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0476 FFFF
“RES” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0478 FFFF (Note)
“ST” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047A FFFF
“S5” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047C FFFF
“S6” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 047E FFFF
“S7” INPUT TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0480 FFFF
POTENTIAL TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 0482 FFFF
R,S1-S7 TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0462 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
F INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0463 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RES INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0464 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
ST INPUT TERMINAL RESPONSE TIME 0/1 0465 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
“RCH” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0490 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“RCH” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 0492 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“RCH” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 0493 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“LOW” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 048C FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“LOW” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 048E 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“LOW” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 048F 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“FL” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0494 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“FL” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 0496 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“FL” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 0497 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“OUT” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 0498 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) See Table 7 
“OUT” CONTACTS DELAY TIME 0/1 049A 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
“OUT” CONTACTS HOLD TIME (Note) 0/1 049B 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100)
LOW SPEED SIGNAL OUTPUT FREQ 0/1 03FE FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
ACC/DEC COMPLETE DETECT BAND 0/1 0400 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
SPEED REACH MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 0/1 0404 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
SPEED REACH MINIMUM FREQUENCY 0/1 0402 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
COMMERCIAL POWER/INV SWITCHING OUTPUT 0/1 04C1 00C0 0000: OFF (0) 
0040: Auto. switch on trip (1)
0080: Switch at COMMERCIAL
POWER/INV SWITCH
FREQ (2)
00C0: Both (1) and (2) (3)
2 • 3 COMMERCIAL POWER/INV SWITCH FREQ 0/1 041C FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
“FP” OUTPUT TERMINAL PULSE FREQUENCY 0/1 04C0 0003 0000: 48f (0) 
0001: 96f (1)
0002: 360f (2)
RR INPUT SPECIAL FUNCTION SELECT (Note) 0/1 04B8 00E0 0000: Standard (0) 
0040: Fmax (1)
0080: TACC/TDEC mult. (2)
00C0: VB mult. factor (3)
0020: CL mult. factor (4)

- 70 -
Table 6. Input terminal selections

Setting Data Function Setting Data Function

Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 10C8 R (reverse run) 28 04AF Binary bit #6
1 011C SS1 (preset speed selection) 29 08AF Binary bit #7
2 021C SS2 (preset speed selection) 30 10AF Binary bit #8
3 041C SS3 (preset speed selection) 31 20AF Binary bit #9
4 081C SS4 (preset speed selection) 32 40AF Binary bit #10
5 20C8 F (forward run) 33 04CE No effect
6 201B RES (fault reset) 34 01C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting
(UP)
7 C0C9 ST (gate ON/OFF) 35 02C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting
(DOWN)
8 0CC8 JOG selection 36 04C7 UP/DOWN frequency clear
9 081A Acc/dec #1/#2 selection 37 08C7 PUSH-type RUN key
10 101B Emergency off 38 10C7 PUSH-type STOP key
11 021B DC injection braking 39 02B9 No effect
ON/OFF
12 041B Fundamental parameter 40 C0C8 Forward/reverse run selection
switching (V/F #2)
13 011B Feedback control ON/OFF 41 20C7 RUN
14 10CE Pattern run selection #1 42 30C9 Binary data write
15 20CE Pattern run selection #2 43 0198 [LOCAL/REMOTE] key
16 40CE Pattern run selection #3 44 0298 [MON] key
17 80CE Pattern run selection #4 45 0498 [PRG] key
18 02CE Pattern run continue signal 46 0898 [UP] (▲) key
19 01CE Pattern run step trigger 47 1098 [DOWN] (▼) key
signal
20 0AC9 JOG forward run 48 2098 [READ/WRITE] key
21 06C9 JOG reverse run 49 4098 [RUN] key
22 10AE Binary bit #0 50 8098 [STOP/CLEAR] key
23 20AE Binary bit #1 51 08CE Commercial power / inverter
switching signal
24 40AE Binary bit #2 52 40C7 Reserved for option use
25 80AE Binary bit #3 53 10CB RR frequency switching input
26 01AF Binary bit #4 54 20CB IV frequency switching input
27 02AF Binary bit #5

(Note): In order for binary bit #0 ∼ #10 (setting values 22 ∼ 32) and UP/DOWN frequency setting (setting
values 34 & 35) inputs to be valid, parameter FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 or
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #2 in GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS must be
set to 5 (BIN (binary setting or UP/DOWN setting)).

- 71 -
Table 7. Output terminal selections (RCH, LOW, FL, OUT relay contacts)

Setting Data Function Setting Data Function

Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 0000 Lower limit frequency 32 C5B7 Executing emergency off
1 0100 /Lower limit frequency 33 CDB7 /Executing emergency off
2 0200 Upper limit frequency 34 B5BB Executing retry
3 0300 /Upper limit frequency 35 BDBB /Executing retry
4 0400 Low speed signal 36 D5CF Pattern run switching output
5 0500 /Low speed signal 37 DDCF /Pattern run switching output
6 0600 Accel/decel complete 38 D5D8 PID deviation limit
7 0700 /Accel/decel complete 39 DDD8 /PID deviation limit
8 0800 Selected speed reach signal 40 C5BB Run/stop
9 0900 /Selected speed reach signal 41 CDBB /Run/stop
10 0A00 Fault 42 1400 Severe fault (armature short,
load-end short, open phase,
output error, earth fault)
11 0B00 /Fault 43 1500 /Severe fault (armature short,
load-end short, open phase,
output error, earth fault)
12 0C00 Fault other than earth fault or 44 1600 Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
13 0D00 /Fault other than earth fault or 45 1700 /Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
14 95B5 Overcurrent pre-alarm 46 E5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
15 9DB5 /Overcurrent pre-alarm 47 EDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
16 85C5 Inverter overload pre-alarm 48 F5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
17 8DC5 /Inverter overload pre-alarm 49 FDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
18 95C5 Motor overload pre-alarm 50 85C0 Fan ON/OFF
19 9DC5 /Motor overload pre-alarm 51 8DC0 /Fan ON/OFF
20 D5C5 Overheat pre-alarm 52 F5B6 Executing JOG
21 DDC5 /Overheat pre-alarm 53 FDB6 /Executing JOG
22 A5B4 Overvoltage pre-alarm 54 1800 Local/remote operation
23 ADB4 /Overvoltage pre-alarm 55 1900 /Local/remote operation
24 E5B4 Undervoltage alarm 56 A5D1 Cumulative timer alarm
25 EDB4 /Undervoltage alarm 57 ADD1 /Cumulative timer alarm
26 85B5 Undercurrent alarm 58 1A00 Communication error alarm
27 8DB5 /Undercurrent alarm 59 1B00 /Communication error alarm
28 85D1 Overtorque alarm 60 A5B6 F/R
29 8DD1 /Overtorque alarm 61 ADB6 /F/R
30 E5BB Braking resistor OL pre-alarm 62 1E00 Run preparation complete

- 72 -
31 EDBB /Braking resistor OL pre- 63 1F00 /Run preparation complete
alarm

- 73 -
GROUP:SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
START-UP FREQUENCY 0/1 03F8 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
END FREQUENCY 0/1 03FA FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 0408 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RUN FREQUENCY HYSTERESIS 0/1 040A FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
ENABLE JUMP FREQUENCIES 0/1 04BB 0080 0000: Function OFF (0) 
0080: Function ON (1)
1 JUMP FREQUENCY #1 0/1 03EE FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #1 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03EC FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #2 0/1 03F2 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #2 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03F0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #3 0/1 03F6 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
JUMP FREQUENCY #3 BANDWIDTH 0/1 03F4 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY (#) 0/1 0439 00FF 0005 ∼ 0064 (0.5 ∼ 10.0) 0.1

(#) : Adjustment range depends on inverter rating.

- 74 -
GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 0/1 04BA 0007 0001: RR (1) 
0002: IV (2)
0003: RX (3)
0004: PG (4)
0005: BIN (5)
FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #2 0/1 04BA 0038 0008: RR (1) 
0010: IV (2)
0018: RX (3)
0020: PG (4)
0028: BIN (5)
ANALOG INPUT FILTER 0/1 04BC 0003 0000: No filter (0) 
0001: Small filter (1)
0002: Medium filter (2)
0003: Large filter (3)
RR TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0002 0000: Standard (0) 
0002: Adjustable (1)
1 RR REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 0449 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RR REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DA FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RR REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044A 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RR REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DC FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
IV TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0004 0000: Standard (0) 
0004: Adjustable (1)
1 IV REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044B 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
IV REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03DE FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
IV REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044C 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
IV REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E0 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
RX TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0008 0000: Standard (0) 
0008: Adjustable (1)
1 RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044D 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
RX REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E2 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 044E 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
RX REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E4 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
PG TERMINAL STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0010 0000: Standard (0) 
0010: Adjustable (1)
1 PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 0/1 044F 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
PG REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E6 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 0/1 0450 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
PG REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03E8 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
BINARY INPUT STD OR ADJUSTABLE 0/1 04B8 0001 0000: Standard (0) 
0001: Adjustable (1)
1 BINARY REF SETTING POINT #1 0/1 0447 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY 0/1 03D6 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
BINARY REF SETTING POINT #2 0/1 0448 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY 0/1 03D8 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
JOG RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 03EA FFFF 0000 ∼ 07D0 (0.00 ∼ 20.00) 0.01
Other JOG STOP METHOD 0/1 04B6 00C0 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
than 0
0040: Coast stop (1)
0080: DC injection stop (2)
PRESET SPEED SELECTION 0/1 04A6 000F 0000 ∼ 000F (0 ∼ 15) 1

- 75 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
Other PRESET SPEED MODE ACTIVATION 0/1 04BB 0004 0000: Deactivated (0) 
than 0 0004: Activated (1)
PRESET SPEED #1 FREQUENCY 1 0528 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
PRESET SPEED #1 OPERATING MODE 1 052A 040C 0004 (0) 1
0000 (1)
000C (2)
0008 (3) (Note 1)
0404 (4)
0400 (5)
040C (6)
0408 (7)
2 or PRESET SPEED #2 FREQUENCY 1 0530 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #2 OPERATING MODE 1 0532 040C (Note 2) 1
3 or PRESET SPEED #3 FREQUENCY 1 0538 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #3 OPERATING MODE 1 053A 040C (Note 2) 1
4 or PRESET SPEED #4 FREQUENCY 1 0540 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #4 OPERATING MODE 1 0542 040C (Note 2) 1
5 or PRESET SPEED #5 FREQUENCY 1 0548 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #5 OPERATING MODE 1 054A 040C (Note 2) 1
6 or PRESET SPEED #6 FREQUENCY 1 0550 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #6 OPERATING MODE 1 0552 040C (Note 2) 1
7 or PRESET SPEED #7 FREQUENCY 1 0558 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #7 OPERATING MODE 1 055A 040C (Note 2) 1
8 or PRESET SPEED #8 FREQUENCY 1 0560 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #8 OPERATING MODE 1 0562 040C (Note 2) 1
9 or PRESET SPEED #9 FREQUENCY 1 0568 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #9 OPERATING MODE 1 056A 040C (Note 2) 1
10 or PRESET SPEED #10 FREQUENCY 1 0570 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #10 OPERATING MODE 1 0572 040C (Note 2) 1
11 or PRESET SPEED #11 FREQUENCY 1 0578 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #11 OPERATING MODE 1 057A 040C (Note 2) 1
12 or PRESET SPEED #12 FREQUENCY 1 0580 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #12 OPERATING MODE 1 0582 040C (Note 2) 1
13 or PRESET SPEED #13 FREQUENCY 1 0588 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #13 OPERATING MODE 1 058A 040C (Note 2) 1
14 or PRESET SPEED #14 FREQUENCY 1 0590 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher PRESET SPEED #14 OPERATING MODE 1 0592 040C (Note 2) 1
15 PRESET SPEED #15 FREQUENCY 1 0598 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
PRESET SPEED #15 OPERATING MODE 1 059A 040C (Note 2) 1

Caution! • Frequency parameters RX REF POINT #1 FREQUENCY ∼ BINARY REF POINT #2 FREQUENCY use signed data (data values
larger than 7FFFH are negative). If internal data is 8000H or larger, the actual setting can be obtained by using the conversion
formula: actual setting = - [FFFFH - (internal data) + 1]. In addition, due to the fact that the multiplier is 0.02, use Fmax ÷ 2
(converted to hexadecimal) for adjustment limits (-Fmax ÷ 2 ∼ Fmax ÷ 2 corresponds to -Fmax ∼ Fmax).
• Setting point parameters RX REFERENCE SETTING POINT #1 ∼ PG REFERENCE SETTING POINT #2 use signed data (data
values from 0080H to 00FFH are negative). If internal data is between 0080H and 00FFH, the actual setting can be obtained by
using the conversion formula: actual setting = - [00FFH - (internal data) + 1].
(Note 1): Use caution with these parameters, as the internal data values do not follow the same setting format as those set from the
operating panel. A look-up table, etc., can be used in the application program to reference these values properly.
(Note 2): Adjustment range is the same as PRESET SPEED #1 OPERATING MODE.

- 76 -
GROUP:PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
DYNAMIC BRAKING SELECTION (Note) 0/1 04BD 0003 0000: no dynam. braking (0) 
0001: with dynamic braking,
no DBR OL trip (1)
0003: with dynamic braking
and DBR OL trip (2)
2 BRAKING RESISTOR VALUE 0/1 0416 FFFF 000A ∼ 2710 (1.0 ∼ 1000) 0.1
BRAKING RESISTOR POWER RATING 0/1 0418 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01 ∼ 600.00) 0.01
OVERVOLTAGE STALL PROTECTION 0/1 04BD 0004 0000: ON (0) 
0004: OFF (1)
DC INJECTION START FREQUENCY 0/1 03FC FFFF 0000 ∼ 2EE0 (0.00 ∼ 120.00) 0.01
Other DC INJECTION CURRENT MAGNITUDE 0/1 043A 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
than 0 DC INJECTION TIME 0/1 043B 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
FWD/REV DC INJECTION PRIORITY CTRL 0/1 04BC 0040 0000: OFF (0) 
0040: ON (1)
MOTOR SHAFT STATIONARY CTRL 0/1 04BC 0080 0000: OFF (0) 
0080: ON (1)
EMERGENCY OFF MODE SELECTION 0/1 04BC 0030 0000: Coast stop (0) 
0010: Decelerated stop (1)
0020: DC injection stop (2)
2 EMERGENCY OFF DC INJECTION TIME 0/1 043D 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
NUMBER OF RETRY ATTEMPTS 0/1 043F 00FF 0000 ∼ 000A (0 ∼ 10) 1
Other TIME BETWEEN RETRY ATTEMPTS 0/1 0440 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
than 0
REGENERATION POWER RIDE-THROUGH 0/1 04BD 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: ON (1)
1 REGENERATION RIDE-THROUGH TIME 0/1 0446 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FA (0.0 ∼ 25.0) 0.1
AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR SPEED SEARCH) 0/1 04B6 0018 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: On power failure (1)
0010: On ST make/break (2)
0018: Both (1) and (2) (3)
ELECTRONIC THERMAL PROTECT LVL #1 0/1 042A 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
OVERLOAD REDUCTION START FREQ 0/1 0410 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD TIME LIMIT 0/1 0444 00FF 0001 ∼ 00F0 (10 ∼ 2400) 10
OVERLOAD SELECTION 0/1 04BD 0030 0000: with motor overload trip, 
w/o soft-stall (0)
0010: with motor overload trip
and soft-stall (1)
0020: w/o soft-stall or motor
overload trip (2)
0030: with soft-stall, w/o motor
overload trip (3)
STALL PROTECTION ENABLE 0/1 042D 0040 0000: ON (0) 
0040: OFF (1)
0 STALL PROTECTION CURRENT LEVEL 0/1 042B 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP SELECTION 0/1 04BD 0080 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0080: Trip (during run) (1)
UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT TIME 0/1 0414 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
LOW CURRENT DETECT SELECTION 0/1 04BC 0008 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0008: Trip on detection (1)
LOW CURRENT DETECT LEVEL 0/1 0441 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
LOW CURRENT DETECTION TIME 0/1 0442 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1

- 77 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
OUTPUT SHORT-CIRCUIT DETECTION SELECT 0/1 04BE 0003 0000: Standard motor (0) 
0001: High-speed motor (1)
0002: Positioning use
(standard motor) (2)
0003: Positioning use (high-
speed motor) (3)
OVERTORQUE TRIP SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0040 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
0040: Trip enabled (1)
OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL 0/1 0443 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 200) 1
FAULT TRIP EEPROM SAVE ENABLE 0/1 04B6 0002 0000: Data cleared when 
powered OFF (0)
0002: Data retained when
powered OFF (1)
COOLING FAN CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0004 0000: Automatic (temperature 
detection) (0)
0004: Always ON (1)
CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER ALARM SETTING 0/1 0422 FFFF 0000 ∼ C34B (0.00 ∼ 999.90) 0.02

- 78 -
GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
PATTERN RUN SELECTION 0/1 04A7 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: ON (1)
1 PATTERN RUN CONTINUE MODE 0/1 04A7 0001 0000: reset on stop (0) 
0001: switch when done (1)
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #0 1 0500 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #1 1 0501 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #2 1 0502 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #3 1 0503 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #4 1 0504 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #5 1 0505 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #6 1 0506 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 SPEED #7 1 0507 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #1 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 049E 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #0 1 0508 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #1 1 0509 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #2 1 050A 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #3 1 050B 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #4 1 050C 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #5 1 050D 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #6 1 050E 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 SPEED #7 1 050F 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #2 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A0 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #0 1 0510 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #1 1 0511 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #2 1 0512 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #3 1 0513 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #4 1 0514 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #5 1 0515 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #6 1 0516 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 SPEED #7 1 0517 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #3 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A2 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #0 1 0518 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #1 1 0519 00FF 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #2 1 051A 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #3 1 051B 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #4 1 051C 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #5 1 051D 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #6 1 051E 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 SPEED #7 1 051F 00FF
PATTERN GROUP #4 NUMBER OF CYCLES 0/1 04A4 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
SPEED #1 CONTINUE MODE 1 052E 00FF 0000: Count in seconds from 
time of activation (0)
0001: Count in minutes from
time of activation (1)
0002: Count in seconds from
speed reach (2)
0003: Count in minutes from
speed reach (3)
0004: Non-stop (continue until
STOP command) (4)
0005: Continue until next step
command (5)
Less than 4 SPEED #1 DRIVE TIME 1 052C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1

- 79 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
SPEED #2 CONTINUE MODE 1 0536 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #2 DRIVE TIME 1 0534 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #3 CONTINUE MODE 1 053E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #3 DRIVE TIME 1 053C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #4 CONTINUE MODE 1 0546 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #4 DRIVE TIME 1 0544 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #5 CONTINUE MODE 1 054E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #5 DRIVE TIME 1 054C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #6 CONTINUE MODE 1 0556 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #6 DRIVE TIME 1 0554 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #7 CONTINUE MODE 1 055E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #7 DRIVE TIME 1 055C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #8 CONTINUE MODE 1 0566 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #8 DRIVE TIME 1 0564 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #9 CONTINUE MODE 1 056E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #9 DRIVE TIME 1 056C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #10 CONTINUE MODE 1 0576 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #10 DRIVE TIME 1 0574 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #11 CONTINUE MODE 1 057E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #11 DRIVE TIME 1 057C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #12 CONTINUE MODE 1 0586 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #12 DRIVE TIME 1 0584 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #13 CONTINUE MODE 1 058E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #13 DRIVE TIME 1 058C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #14 CONTINUE MODE 1 0596 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #14 DRIVE TIME 1 0594 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
SPEED #15 CONTINUE MODE 1 059E 00FF Same as SPEED #1 
CONTINUE MODE
Less than 4 SPEED #15 DRIVE TIME 1 059C FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1

- 80 -
GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FEEDBACK CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04B9 0060 0020: No feedback (0) 
0040: PID control (1)
0060: Speed feedback (2)
1•2 FEEDBACK INPUT SIGNAL SELECTION 0/1 04B9 001C 0004: RR input (1) 
0008: IV input (2)
000C: RX input (3)
0010: PG feedback (4)
0014: RS232C input (5)
0018: Communication/12-bit
binary option board (6)
001C: BIN input (7)
PROPORTIONAL GAIN 0/1 04A8 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF (0.01 ∼ 2.55) 0.01
INTEGRAL GAIN 0/1 04AA FFFF 0001 ∼ 8CA0 (0.01 ∼ 360.00) 0.01
ANTI-HUNTING GAIN 0/1 04AC 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0.0 ∼ 25.5) 0.1
LAG TIME CONSTANT 0/1 04AD 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
PID LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 03D2 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
PID DEVIATION LIMIT SELECTION 0/1 04BE 0080 0000: No PID deviation lim. (0) 
0080: PID deviation limited (1)
1 PID DEVIATION UPPER LIMIT 0/1 04C8 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
PID DEVIATION LOWER LIMIT 0/1 04C9 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PULSES 0/1 040E FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (1 ∼ 9999) 1
PG INPUT: NUMBER OF PHASES 0/1 04B9 0001 0000: Single-phase input (1) 
0001: Two-phase input (2)
DROOPING CONTROL ENABLE 0/1 04B9 0002 0000: OFF (0) 
0002: ON (1)
1 DROOPING CONTROL AMOUNT 0/1 0451 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
OVERRIDE CONTROL SELECTION 0/1 04C1 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: FCRR (1)
0002: FCIV (2)
0003: FCRX (3)
0004: FCPG (4)
0005: FCPNL (5)
0006: FCOPT (6)
0007: FCMLT (7)
7 OVERRIDE MULTIPLIER INPUT 0/1 04C1 0038 0000: Reference (0) 
SELECTION 0008: KRR (1)
0010: KIV (2)
0018: KRX (3)
0020: KBIN (4)
OVERRIDE CHANGE MULTIPLIER 0/1 0420 FFFF FC18 ∼ 03E8 (-100.0 ∼ 100.0) 0.1

- 81 -
GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
RS232 BAUD RATE 1 04AE 0018 0000: 2400 baud (0) 
0008: 4800 baud (1)
0010: 9600 baud (2)
NUMBER OF DATA BITS 1 04AE 0040 0000: 7 bits (0) 
0040: 8 bits (1)
PARITY SETTING 1 04AE 0080 0000: Even parity (0) 
0080: Odd parity (1)
INVERTER ID NUMBER 1 04B1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
COMMUNICATION SELECTION 1 04AE 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: RS485 (1)
0002: F-10, DNet, RIO (2)
0003: TOSLINE S-20 (3)
0004: 12 bit binary input (4)
0005: 3-digit BCD (0.1Hz) (5)
0006: 3-digit BCD (1Hz) (6)
1 MASTER/SLAVE SELECTION 1 04AF 0018 0000: Slave (0) 
0008: Master (frequency
command) (1)
0010: Master (output
frequency) (2)
RS485 BAUD RATE 1 04AF 0004 0000: Normal mode (0) 
0004: High-speed mode (1)
2 TOSLINE-F10 COMMAND INPUT 1 04B0 0003 0000: OFF (0) 
0001: Frequency command (1)
0002: Command input (2)
0003: Both (1) and (2) (3)
TOSLINE-F10 MONITOR OUTPUT 1 04B0 003C 0000: (0) 0020: (8) 
0004: (1) 0024: (9)
0008: (2) 0028: (10)
000C: (3) 002C: (11)
0010: (4) 0030: (12)
0014: (5) 0034: (13)
0018: (6) 0038: (14)
001C: (7) 003C: (15)
TOSLINE-F10 COMM ERROR MODE 1 04B0 0080 0000: Data cleared (0) 
0080: Data retained (1)
3 TOSLINE-S20 RECEIVE ADDRESS 1 04CE FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
TOSLINE-S20 TRANSMIT ADDRESS 1 04D0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
TOSLINE-S20 COMMAND INPUT 1 04D2 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
TOSLINE-S20 MONITOR OUTPUT 1 04D3 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
TOSLINE-S20 FREQ REF ADDR SELECT 1 04D4 0001 0000: Disable (0) 1
0001: Enable (1)
1 TOSLINE-S20 FREQ REFERENCE 1 04D5 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
ADDR
TOSLINE-S20 COMM ERROR MODE 1 04D4 0002 0000: Data cleared (0) 1
0002: Data retained (1)
TOSLINE-S20 COMM OPTION RESET 1 02DC 0004 0000: No effect (0) 1
0004: Reset (1)
RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN 0/1 04AF 0020 0000: OFF (0) 
0020: ON (1)
1 RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 (Ref. 1) 0/1 04CA 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1 FREQ 0/1 04B2 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01
RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2 (Ref. 1) 0/1 04CB 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #2 FREQ 0/1 04B4 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01

- 82 -
(Note) All parameters in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (except for RS485/12-BIT BINARY BIAS,GAIN, RS485/12-
BIT BINARY POINT #1, RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1 FREQ, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2, and RS485/12-BIT
BINARY PT. #2 FREQ) must be set in the EEPROM (bank 1) to be valid. (These parameters can be set in bank 0 (RAM), but the
data settings will be written over by the values contained in the EEPROM the next time RAM is reset. Therefore, always write the
data settings for these parameters to the EEPROM (bank 1)). After changing the settings of these communication parameters, reset
the inverter to validate the data.
(Ref. 1) The data settings for parameters RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 and RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #2 are proportional to
MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY in GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1.
Ex: If MAXIMUM OUTPUT FREQUENCY = 80Hz, RS485/12-BIT BINARY POINT #1 = 10%, RS485/12-BIT BINARY PT. #1
FREQ = 20Hz, and an 8Hz frequency command is input, the output frequency will be 20Hz.

GROUP:AM/FM TERMINAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMS

Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
FM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION 0/1 0484 FFFF 1194: Pre-compensation 
reference frequency (0)
6686: Post-compensation
(Note)
output frequency (1)
1500: Frequency setting (2)
2576: Output current (3)
2689: DC voltage (4)
5668: Output voltage (5)
3684: Torque current (6)
2688: Excitation current (7)
7506: PID feedback value (8)
0584: Motor overload ratio (9)
0586: Inv. overload ratio (10)
0588: Dynamic braking resistor
OL ratio (11)
835C: Input power (12)
835E: Output power (13)
A000: Fixed output (14)
2304: Peak output current (15)
8302: Peak input voltage (16)
FREQUENCY METER ADJUSTMENT 0/1 0486 FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1
AM TERMINAL FUNCTION SELECTION (Note) 0/1 0488 FFFF Same as FM TERMINAL 
FUNCTION SELECTION
CURRENT METER ADJUSTMENT 0/1 048A FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1

- 83 -
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 0/1 0438 00FF 0000: Std. shpmt. setting (0) 
(previous setting monitor for read use) 0001: Pump application (1)
0002: Fan application (2)
Note: If data is written to this address, the previous 0003: Conveyor application (3)
setting displayed on the panel will be changed. 0004: Hoist application (4)
0005: Textiles application (5)
0006: Machine tools appl. (6)
INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 0/1 04C2 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
(for write use) 0011: Pump application (1)
0012: Fan application (2)
(Note, ✳) 0013: Conveyor application (3)
0014: Hoist application (4)
0015: Textiles application (5)
0016: Machine tools appl. (6)
STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION 0/1 04C2 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
0001: 50Hz std. settings (1)
0002: 60Hz std. settings (2)
(Note, ✳) 0003: Factory settings (3)
(Ref. 1) 0004: Trip clear (4)
0005: Save user-set param. (5)
0006: TYPE 5 reset (6)
0007: Initialize typeform (7)
COMMAND MODE SELECTION 0/1 04B7 0007 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
0001: Terminal input valid (1)
0002: Panel input valid (2)
0003: Communication option
input valid (3)
0004: local/remote valid (4)
FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION 0/1 04B7 0038 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
0008: Terminal input valid (1)
0010: Panel input valid (2)
0018: Comm./12-bit binary
option input valid (3)
0020: local/remote valid (4)
PANEL OPERATION MODE SELECTION (Ref. 2) 0/1 0452 00FB 0000 ∼ 003F (0 ∼ 63) 1
(except 0004, 0008, 000C....)
PASS NUMBER 0/1 049D 00FF 0000 ∼ 0063 (0 ∼ 99) 1
CPU VERSION 2 8000
ROM VERSION 3 0000  (Monitor only) 1
EEPROM VERSION 1 0380
INVERTER TYPEFORM 0 05CA  (Monitor only) 
STATUS MONITOR #1 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0454 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #2 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0456 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #3 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 0458 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
STATUS MONITOR #4 DISPLAY SELECT 0/1 045A FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
FREQUENCY UNITS SCALE FACTOR 0/1 0412 FFFF 0000 ∼ 4E20 (0.00 ∼ 200.00) 0.01
FREQUENCY DISPLAY RESOLUTION 0/1 045D 0003 0000: 1Hz (0) 
0001: 0.1Hz (1)
0002: 0.01Hz (2)
ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION (Ref. 3) 0/1 045D 0004 0000: 0.1 sec. (0) 
0004: 0.01 sec. (1)

- 84 -
 Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
CURRENT UNITS SELECTION 0/1 045D 0008 0000: % (0) 
0008: A (1)
VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION 0/1 045D 0010 0000: % (0) 
0010: V (1)
BLIND FUNCTION SELECTION 0/1 045E 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Selective unblinding (1)
1 FUNDAMENTAL PARAMS #2 BLIND 0/1 045E 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
0040: Unblind (1)
PANEL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045E 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
0080: Unblind (1)
TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
0002: Unblind (1)
FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)
PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
0008: Unblind (1)
PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
0010: Unblind (1)
FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0020 0000: Blind (0) 
0020: Unblind (1)
COMMUNICATION PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
0040: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL:PUMP PARAMS BLIND 0/1 045F 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
0080: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL:FAN PARAMS BLIND 0/1 0460 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: CONVEYOR BLIND 0/1 0460 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
0002: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: HOIST BLIND 0/1 0460 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)
INDUSTRIAL APPL: TEXTILES BLIND 0/1 0460 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
0008: Unblind (1)
INDUST APPL:MACHINE TOOLS BLIND 0/1 0460 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
0010: Unblind (1)
AM/FM ADJUSTMENT PARAMS BLIND 0/1 0461 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
0001: Unblind (1)
MOTOR PARAMETERS BLIND 0/1 0461 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
0004: Unblind (1)

(Ref. 1): The data setting value will be retained in the EEPROM even if it was written to RAM (bank 0).
Note) If 0000 (does nothing) is written to the EEPROM, the previous setting monitor value will
become 0. Also, if the industrial application parameters selection is written to after writing to the
standard setting mode selection, the standard setting mode selection’s previous data setting will be
cleared.
(Ref. 2): If the setting value is written to RAM only, the value displayed on the panel will not change. Also,
when the setting value is written to EEPROM, the value displayed on the panel will not change until a
reset is performed.
(Ref. 3): If the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION is changed after setting the ACC/DEC times,
the ACC/DEC times will become 10 times or 0.1 times their former value. Therefore, always reset
the ACC/DEC time settings after changing the setting of ACC/DEC TIME UNITS SELECTION.

- 85 -
GROUP:MOTOR RATING PARAMETERS
Function / Title Bank Address Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES 0/1 04C3 00FF 0001: (2) 2
0002: (4)
0003: (6)
0004: (8)
0005: (10)
0006: (12)
0007: (14)
0008: (16)
MOTOR RATED CAPACITY 0/1 041E FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (0.1 ∼ 999.9) 0.1
MOTOR TYPE 0/1 04BF 0030 0000:Toshiba EQPIII motor (0) 
0010:Toshiba STD motor (1)
0020:Other (2)
2 MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE
(230 / 460v units) 0/1 04C6 00FF 0012 ∼ 0078 (90 ∼ 600) 5
(575v units) 042C 001A ∼ 00AC (130 ∼ 860)
MOTOR RATED FREQUENCY 0/1 04C7 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 400) 2
MOTOR RATED RPM 0/1 040C FFFF 0000 ∼ 270F (0 ∼ 9999) 1
AUTO-TUNING ENABLE 0 04BE 0008 0000: Auto-tuning disabled (0) 
0008: Auto-tuning enabled (1)
LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA 0/1 04BF 00C0 0000: Small (0) 
0040: Medium (1)
0080: Large (2)
00C0: Very large (3)

- 86 -
9.5 ASCII Character Codes

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 “ 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ‘ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL

Note: Shaded items in the above table indicate valid RS485 communication codes.

- 87 -
9.6 Notes

- 88 -
- 89 -
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 W est Little York Rd., Houston, TX 77041
Tel: [800] 231-1412 Fax: [713] 466-8773 Telex: 762078

Printed in U.S.A
 HIGH PERFORMANCE TRANSISTOR INVERTER
TRUE TORQUE CONTROL DRIVE SERIES

MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE MANUAL

August, 1998
ICC #10028-004

 
Thank you for purchasing the “Modbus Communications Interface” for the Toshiba
TOSVERT-130 G3 High-Performance Transistor Inverter. Before using the Modbus
interface, please be sure to thoroughly read the instructions and precautions
contained in this manual. In addition, please make sure that this instruction manual
is delivered to the end user of the inverter unit into which the Modbus interface kit is
installed, and keep this instruction manual in a safe place for future reference or
inverter inspection.

This instruction manual describes the device specifications, wiring methods,

maintenance procedures, protocol, functions and usage methods for the Modbus
communications interface.

MODBUS IS A REGISTERED TRADEMARK OF AEG SCHNEIDER AUTOMATION

1
   

   
• Please use the interface only when the ambient temperature of the inverter unit into
which the interface is installed is within the following specified temperature limits:
Operation: -10 ∼ +40°C (+14 ∼ +104°F)
Storage: -25 ∼ +65°C (-13 ∼ +149°F)
• Avoid installation locations that may be subjected to large shocks or vibrations.
• Avoid installation locations that may be subjected to rapid changes in temperature or
humidity.

  • 
• Do not touch charged parts such as the terminal block while the inverter’s CHARGE
lamp is lit. A charge will still be present in the inverter unit’s internal electrolytic
capacitors, and therefore touching these areas may result in an electrical shock.
Always turn all inverter input power supplies OFF, and wait at least 5 minutes after the
CHARGE lamp has gone out before wiring the communication cables or motor wiring.
• When installing the interface board into the inverter and making wiring connections,
make certain that no clippings or wiring leads that could cause device failure fall into
the inverter or onto electronic components.
• Proper ground connections are vital for both safety and signal reliability reasons. For
proper grounding procedures, please refer to the section in this manual pertaining to
grounding (section 2).
• Route the communication cables separate from the inverter input/output power wiring.
• To avoid the possibility of electric shock due to leakage currents, always ground the
inverter unit’s E/GND terminal and the motor. To avoid misoperation, do not connect
the Modbus interface board's SHIELD terminal to either of the above-mentioned
grounds or any other power ground.

  
• The inverter’s EEPROM has a life span of 10,000 write cycles. Do not write to the
same holding register (other than register 01 (frequency command), register 02 (input
command) or write-only coils) more than 10,000 times.
• Do not touch or insert a rod or any other item into the inverter while power is applied,
as this may lead to electrical shock or inverter damage.
• Commission the disposal of the interface board to a specialist.
• Do not assign the same address to more than one inverter in the same network.
• Individual slave addresses can be set from 1 ∼ 247. Addresses 0 and 248 ∼ 255 are
invalid, and will cause the inverter to trip "OPTION PCB ERROR".
• When the inverter’s control power supply is turned on, the inverter performs
initialization functions for approximately 3 seconds, during which communications
capabilities are disabled. Communications capabilities will also be disabled for
approximately 3 seconds after momentary control power supply outages or inverter
resets

2
 

1. Interface Board Installation / Removal .................................................... 5

1.1 Before Installation................................................................................................... 5
1.2 Installation Procedure............................................................................................. 5
1.3 Removal ................................................................................................................. 8
1.3.1 Before Removal ............................................................................................... 9
1.3.2 Removal Procedure ......................................................................................... 9
2. Grounding ............................................................................................... 12

3. Equipment Specifications ...................................................................... 12

4. Maintenance And Inspection.................................................................. 13

5. Storage And Warranty ............................................................................ 14

5.1 Storage ................................................................................................................. 14
5.2 Warranty ............................................................................................................... 14

6. Modbus Interface Board Configuration................................................. 15

7. G3 Parameter Settings ........................................................................... 18

8. Modicon Programming........................................................................... 19
8.1 Supported Modbus Commands............................................................................ 19
8.2 Programmable Pointer Register Function ............................................................ 19
8.3 Loss of Communications Timer Function ............................................................. 20
8.4 Response Delay Timer Function .......................................................................... 21

9. Modbus Programming Registers........................................................... 22

9.1 Write-Only Registers ............................................................................................ 24
9.2 Read-Only Registers ............................................................................................ 25
9.3 Read/Write Registers ........................................................................................... 29
9.3.1 GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1 ............................................... 29
9.3.2 GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #2 ............................................... 30
9.3.3 GROUP:PANEL CONTROL PARAMETERS................................................. 30
9.3.4 GROUP:TERMINAL SELECTION PARAMETERS........................................ 31
9.3.5 GROUP:SPECIAL CONTROL PARAMETERS ............................................. 35
9.3.6 GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS ........................................ 36
9.3.7 GROUP:PROTECTION FUNCTION PARAMETERS .................................... 39
9.3.8 GROUP:PATTERN RUN CONTROL PARAMETERS ................................... 42
9.3.9 GROUP:FEEDBACK CONTROL PARAMETERS ......................................... 45
9.3.10 GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS.............................. 46
9.3.11 GROUP:AM/FM TERMINAL ADJUSTMENT PARAMS ............................... 48
9.3.12 GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS................................................................ 49

3
 9.3.13 GROUP:MOTOR RATING PARAMETERS .............................................
9.3.14 Programmable Pointer Registers .................................................................51
9.4 Write-Only Coils....................................................................................................52
9.5 Read-Only Coils....................................................................................................53
9.6 Inverter Fault Codes .............................................................................................54

10. Notes......................................................................................................56

4

        
  
The Modbus Communications Option ROM enclosed with the Modbus kit is
compatible only with G3 inverters with V120 or later main software. An error will
occur if the option ROM is installed in an inverter with pre-V120 main software. The
main software version number is printed on the CPU package (IC1) on the control
board. Additionally, this version number can be read from inverter memory by
displaying the parameter CPU VERSION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. If you
are unsure of the software version of your inverter, please contact Toshiba
International Corporation for more information.

The Modbus option ROM version number is printed on the label attached to the
ROM. The option ROM version number can also be read from the inverter’s memory
and displayed on the LCD panel after initialization by displaying the parameter ROM
VERSION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. The option ROM version number
replaces the standard ROM version number after installation/initialization.

IMPORTANT NOTE: The option ROM included with the Modbus interface kit
is for installation into G3 230V/460V units only. Do not install the option ROM into
any other inverter unit (such as H3, E3, or G3 600V units). All inverter units other
than the G3 230V/460V series are shipped from the factory with full communications
capability; and installation of the option ROM may cause incorrect operation or
inverter damage.


  
All parameters will be automatically reset to the factory default values after the option
ROM is installed in the inverter. If it is desired to retain the current parameter
settings, the user should access the user-changed parameter group to display and
record all the parameters and setting values that have been changed from factory
defaults. Even if the current settings are saved to non-volatile memory by setting the
STANDARD SETTING MODE SELECTION parameter in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS to 5*, they will be erased from memory during initialization of the option
ROM.
• Setting the standard mode selection parameter will be referred to in this manual
as performing a TYPE X RESET, where X is the parameter setting value.

   
Installation of the TOSHIBA Modbus option ROM and interface board into a
TOSVERT-130 G3 inverter should only be performed by a qualified technician
familiar with the maintenance and operation of the G3. To install the option ROM and
interface board, complete the following steps:
1. Record the option ROM version number located on the label of the option ROM in
the following box. The option ROM version is the number immediately following

5
 the “V” on the ROM label. For example, if the label indicates
“V6401”, the option ROM version is 6401. This version number will be used later
in the installation process. Option ROM version = .

Record the standard ROM version number prior to option ROM installation. The
standard ROM version can be read from parameter ROM VERSION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS.
Standard ROM version = .

2. CAUTION! Verify that all input power sources to the inverter have
been turned OFF and are locked and tagged out.

3. DANGER! Wait at least 5 minutes for the inverter’s electrolytic

capacitors to discharge before proceeding to step 4. Do not touch any internal
parts with power applied to the inverter, or for at least 5 minutes after power
to the inverter has been removed. A hazard exists temporarily for electrical
shock even if the source power has been removed.

4. Remove the inverter’s cover (open the door on units with hinged doors).
Verify that the CHARGE LED has gone out before continuing the installation
process.
5. Loosen the 4 screws attaching the G3’s operation panel support bracket to the
control board support bracket, and then remove the operation panel and support
bracket as a unit (refer to Figure 1).

operation panel
support bracket

operation panel support

bracket screws

Figure 1: G3 with front cover removed

6
6. CAUTION! The option ROM PCB assembly and interface board are
static-sensitive devices. Standard electrostatic-sensitive component handling
precautions should be observed. Locate the option ROM connector, labeled
CN41, on the lower-left side of the control PCB. Line up the connector on the
back of the option ROM PCB with CN41. Install the option ROM by pressing
gently but firmly on the option ROM PCB until a slight “click” is felt. Verify that the
option ROM PCB is seated properly and firmly in CN41. If the option ROM
connector does not appear to be mating with CN41 properly, verify that the ROM
is oriented properly and that there are no obstructions in either connector.
7. Set the Modbus interface board's DIP switches for the desired communication
parameters (refer to section 6).
8. Install the 4 nylon standoffs into the holes provided in the control board support
bracket (refer to Figure 2).

standoff mounting holes

Figure 2: G3 with front cover and operation panel support bracket

removed

9. Install the Modbus network cable through the access holes at the bottom of the
inverter and route the cable in order to make connections to the interface board
connector (TB1). Take care to not route the cable near any sharp edges or in
positions where it may be pinched.
10. Connect the Modbus cable to the interface board connector (TB1).

CAUTION! Extremely high voltages exist in the area near the Modbus
interface board and connector (TB1). Ensure that no stray wires (such as the

7
 shield on the Modbus communications wire) come into
contact with any internal inverter components. Also ensure that the
communications cable is not routed in such a manner that it may come into
contact with high-voltage inverter components, or inverter components that may
heat up during operation and damage the cable insulation.
11. Install the interface board into the inverter by carefully aligning the 4 nylon
standoffs with the 4 mounting holes provided in the interface board. Ensure that
connector CN5A on the back side of the interface board is aligned with connector
CN5 on the front side of the control board.
12. Press the interface board firmly onto the standoffs and connector CN5 until the
standoff retaining tabs lock. Ensure that CN5 and CN5A are thoroughly
interlocked.
13. Carefully re-install the operation panel and support bracket and tighten the 4
screws that attach the operation panel support bracket to the control board
support bracket.
14. Reinstall the inverter’s cover (close and latch the door on units with hinged
doors).

DANGER! Do not operate the unit with the cover off / cabinet
door open.
15. Turn all power sources to the inverter unit ON, and verify that the inverter
functions properly. If the inverter unit does not appear to power up, or does not
function properly, immediately turn power OFF. Repeat steps 2 ∼ 4 to remove
all power from the inverter. Then, verify all connections. Contact Toshiba
International Corporation for assistance if the problem persists.
16. To perform final verification that the option ROM is installed properly, display the
value of the ROM VERSION parameter in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. This
number should match the option ROM version number that was recorded in step
1. If this parameter value does not match the option ROM version number
recorded in step 1, repeat steps 2 ∼ 4 to remove all power from the inverter,
then re-verify that the option ROM is installed properly. If the option ROM
appears to be installed properly, but the version numbers still do not match,
contact Toshiba International Corporation for further assistance.

  
Removal of the Modbus interface board from a TOSVERT-130 G3 inverter should
only be performed by a qualified technician familiar with the maintenance and
operation of the G3. In order to protect the interface board connector’s reliability, do
not repeatedly connect and disconnect the interface. Use the following procedure if it
becomes necessary to remove the Modbus interface board from the inverter.

CAUTION! Do not remove the interface board while power is applied to

the inverter. Removing the interface board with power applied may damage the
inverter.

8


   
The inverter will display an error message if the option ROM becomes dislodged or is
removed from its socket. The inverter must be reset to clear this error. Therefore, all
parameters will be automatically reset to the factory default values after an option
ROM has been removed from the inverter. If it is desired to retain the current
parameter settings, the user should access the user-changed parameter group to
display and record all the parameters and setting values that have been changed
from factory defaults. Even if the current settings are saved using the TYPE 5
RESET function, they will be erased from memory during the re-initialization of the
inverter after the option ROM has been removed.

    

1. CAUTION! Verify that all input power sources to the inverter have
been turned OFF and are locked and tagged out.

2. DANGER! Wait at least 5 minutes for the inverter’s electrolytic

capacitors to discharge before proceeding to step 3. Do not touch any internal
parts with power applied to the inverter, or for at least 5 minutes after power
to the inverter has been removed. A hazard exists temporarily for electrical
shock even if the source power has been removed.

3. Remove the inverter’s cover (open the door on units with hinged doors).
Verify that the CHARGE LED has gone out before continuing the removal
process.
4. Loosen the 4 screws attaching the operation panel support bracket to the control
board support bracket and remove the operation panel and support bracket as a
unit (refer to Figure 3).

9
 operation panel
support bracket

operation panel support

bracket screws

Figure 3: G3 with front cover removed

5. CAUTION! The option ROM PCB and Modbus interface board are
static-sensitive devices. Standard electrostatic-sensitive component handling
precautions should be observed. Release the 4 corners of the interface board
from the standoffs by pressing down on the standoff locking tabs with a small flat-
headed screwdriver. Be careful to not apply any abnormal stress to the interface
board while performing this, as this may damage the interface board or control
board connectors.
6. Remove the interface board from the inverter.
7. Disconnect the communications cable from the interface board connector (TB1),
and pull the cable out through the access holes at the bottom of the inverter.
8. Locate the option ROM in the option ROM connector, labeled CN41, on the lower-
left side of the control PCB. Gently work the option ROM PCB up and down while
pulling on it until the ROM releases from the control PCB option ROM connector.

IMPORTANT NOTE: Do not remove the option ROM on inverter units that
were received from the factory with option ROMs pre-installed. Units that are
shipped from the factory with option ROMs pre-installed (H3 and 600V G3 units,
for example) require these ROMs for correct operation, and removal of the option
ROM may cause incorrect operation or inverter damage. If you are in doubt about
the requirement of an option ROM in your inverter unit, contact Toshiba
International Corporation for assistance.
9. Carefully re-install the operation panel and support bracket and tighten the 4
screws that attach the operation panel support bracket to the control board
support bracket.

10
 10. Reinstall the inverter’s cover (close and latch the door on
units with hinged doors).

DANGER! Do not operate unit with the cover off / cabinet

door open.
11. Turn all power sources to the inverter unit ON, and verify that the inverter
functions properly. If the inverter unit does not appear to power up, or does not
function properly, immediately turn power OFF. Repeat steps 1 ∼ 3 to remove
all power from the inverter. Then, verify all connections. Contact Toshiba
International Corporation for assistance if the problem persists.
12. To re-initialize the inverter after the ROM has been removed, perform a TYPE 3
reset. After the initialization sequence, display the value of the ROM VERSION
parameter in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS. This number should match the
standard ROM version number that was recorded prior to option ROM installation.
If this parameter value does not match the value recorded earlier, contact Toshiba
International Corporation for further assistance.

11
   
Grounding is of particular importance for reliable, stable operation. Communication
system characteristics may vary from system to system, depending on the system
environment and grounding method used. A ground connection with an impedance
of less than 100Ω should be used. Please be sure to consider the following points for
making proper ground connections:

Grounding method checkpoints

1. Make all ground connections such that no ground current flows through the
inverter case.
2. Ensure that all grounds are connected to points that are at the same potential as
inverter grounds.
3. Do not connect the Modbus interface board's SHIELD terminal to a power ground
or any other potential noise-producing ground connection (such as the inverter's
E/GND terminal).
4. Do not make connections to unstable grounds (paint-coated screw heads,
grounds that are subjected to inductive noise, etc.)
5. Use copper wire with a cross-sectional area of 2mm2 or larger, or aluminum wire
with a cross-sectional area of 2.6mm2 or larger for grounding.

     

Item Specification
Operating Environment Indoors, less than 1000m above sea level, do not
expose to direct sunlight or corrosive / explosive gasses.
Operating Temperature -10 ∼ +40°C (+14 ∼ +104°F)
Storage Temperature -25°C ∼ +65°C (-13 ∼ +149°F)
Relative Humidity 20% ∼ 90% (without condensation)
Vibration 5.9m/s2 {0.6G} or less (10 ∼ 55Hz)
Grounding Use a ground connection with an impedance of less than
100Ω.
Cooling Method Self-cooled

12
     !   
Preventive maintenance and inspection is required to maintain the Modbus
communication interface in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long operational
lifetime. Depending on usage and operating conditions, perform a periodic inspection
once every three to six months. Before starting inspections, always turn off all power
supplies to the inverter unit, and wait at least five minutes after the inverter’s
“CHARGE” lamp has gone out.

DANGER! Do not touch any internal parts with power applied

to the inverter, or for at least 5 minutes after power to the inverter has been
removed. A hazard exists temporarily for electrical shock even if the source
power has been removed.

Inspection Points
• Check that the wiring terminal screws are not loose. Tighten if necessary.
• Check that there are no defects in any wire terminal crimp points. Visually check
that the crimp points are not scarred by overheating.
• Visually check the wiring and cables for damage.
• Clean off any accumulated dust and dirt. Place special emphasis on cleaning the
ventilation ports of the inverter and all installed PCBs. Always keep these areas
clean, as adherence of dust and dirt can cause premature component failure.
• If use of the inverter unit is discontinued for extended periods of time, turn the
power on at least once every two years and confirm that the unit still functions
properly.
• Do not perform hi-pot tests on the inverter or Modbus interface board, as they
may damage the unit’s internal components.

Please pay close attention to all periodic inspection points and maintain a good
operating environment.

13
 "    ! #  $


  
Observe the following points when the Modbus interface board is not used
immediately after purchase or when it is not used for an extended period of time.
• Avoid storing the interface board in places that are hot or humid, or that contain
large quantities of dust or metallic dust. Store the interface board in a well-
ventilated location.
• When not using the Modbus interface board for an extended period of time, turn
the power on at least once every two years and confirm that it still functions
properly.

   
The Modbus communications interface kit is covered under warranty for a period of
12 months from the date of installation, but not to exceed 18 months from the date of
shipment from the factory. For further warranty or service information, please contact
Toshiba International Corporation.

14
 % &   
'   
The Modbus interface board uses an 8-position DIP switch (labeled SW1) to
configure the network communication characteristics. The switch settings are only
read during initialization, so if a change is made to any of the switches on SW1, the
inverter must be reset in order to enable the new settings. The various configuration
settings of SW1 are as follows:

SW1 #
1 Function
OFF Modbus RTU
ON Modbus ASCII

Communication Method:
SW1 #
4 3 2 Function
OFF OFF OFF 300 baud
OFF OFF ON 600 baud
OFF ON OFF 1200 baud
OFF ON ON 2400 baud
ON OFF OFF 4800 baud
ON OFF ON 9600 baud
ON ON OFF 19.2 kbaud
ON ON ON 38.4 kbaud

Baud Rate:
SW1 #
6 5 Function
OFF OFF even parity
OFF ON odd parity
ON OFF no parity (2 stop bits)
ON ON no parity (1 stop bit) - applies only to RTU mode

Parity:
SW1 #
7 Function
OFF Modicon Modbus
ON DO NOT SELECT (reserved for future expansion)

Protocol:

SW1 #8 is not used and its setting is therefore irrelevant.

15
 Additionally, a jumper on the interface board (labeled JP1) sets
whether or not the Modbus network is terminated at the interface board (termination
is 121Ω resistor). Only the 2 devices at the extreme ends of the Modbus network
should have JP1 set to "TERM". All other devices should have JP1 set to "OPEN".

A Note About Modbus Communication Formats

According to the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference Guide, the specifications for
both Modbus ASCII and RTU communication modes are as follows:

ASCII Mode

Coding System:........Hexadecimal, ASCII characters 0 ∼ 9, A ∼ F

One hexadecimal character contained in each ASCII character
of the message

Bits per Byte: ...........1 start bit

7 data bits, least significant bit sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity

Error Check Field:....Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC)

RTU Mode

Coding System:........8-bit binary, hexadecimal 0 ∼ 9, A ∼ F

Two hexadecimal characters contained in each 8-bit field of the
message

Bits per Byte: ...........1 start bit

8 data bits, least significant bit sent first
1 bit for even/odd parity; no bit for no parity
1 stop bit if parity is used; 2 bits if no parity

Error Check Field:....Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC)

According to the Modicon Modbus specification, therefore, the number of bits per
byte in ASCII mode is 1 start + 7 data + 1 parity + 1 stop (if parity is used), or 1 start +
7 data + 2 stop (if parity is not used). The ASCII data frame is therefore fixed at 10
bits per byte. Similarly, the number of bits per byte in RTU mode is 1 start + 8 data +
1 parity + 1 stop (if parity is used), or 1 start + 8 data + 2 stop (if parity is not used),
resulting in an RTU data frame that is fixed at 11 bits per byte.

In addition to these standard specified data frame sizes, the G3 Modbus interface
board offers an optional configuration of providing for only 1 stop bit when no parity is
selected in the RTU communication mode. As indicated on the previous page, by
setting SW5 and SW6 both to “ON”, the RTU data frame size is modified to consist of
1 start + 8 data + 1 stop bit = 10 bits per byte. Please note that this setting is only

16
 valid when RTU mode is selected; if SW5 and SW6 are both set
to “ON” when ASCII mode is selected, the inverter will trip “OPTION PCB ERROR”
upon initialization.

17
 (  )   
Modbus interface board communications are enabled by setting parameter
COMMUNICATION SELECTION in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING
PARAMETERS to 2 (Modbus, Tosline-F10, DeviceNet). No other Tosline-F10
communication parameter settings apply when using the Modbus interface. Similar
to when using any communication interface card, the option frequency command and
command input can be enabled by setting parameters FREQUENCY MODE
SELECTION and COMMAND MODE SELECTION, respectively, in GROUP:UTILITY
PARAMETERS to 3. For more information on methods for changing parameter
settings, refer to the TOSHIBA G3 Operation Manual.

The following is a list of the parameter settings that are required during setup to
enable Modbus communications:

Parameter Group Required Value

BLIND FUNCTION GROUP:UTILITY 1
SELECTION PARAMETERS
COMMUNICATIONS PARMS GROUP:UTILITY 1
BLIND PARAMETERS
COMMUNICATION GROUP:COMMUNICATION 2
SELECTION SETTING PARAMETERS
INVERTER ID NUMBER GROUP:COMMUNICATION any value other than 0
SETTING PARAMETERS or 248∼255.

As is the same with all other communication configuration parameters, the inverter
must be reset after making the parameter changes described above in order for the
changed settings to be enabled.

IMPORTANT: The standard factory setting for parameter INVERTER ID NUMBER is

0, which is reserved by the Modbus controller as the address used for
broadcast transmissions. If this parameter is not changed prior to
enabling Modbus communications, the inverter will trip "OPTION PCB
ERROR". Similarly, if an inverter number of 248 ∼ 255 is set, the
inverter will trip "OPTION PCB ERROR".

If the G3 inverter into which a Modbus communications interface board is installed

trips “OPTION PCB ERROR” for any reason during initialization or operation, it is
incapable of being reset via the Modbus network. When this trip condition occurs,
therefore, the inverter can only be reset locally via the panel or control terminal block.

If inverter control (frequency command input, RUN/STOP, etc.) is to be performed via

the Modbus network, the following inverter parameters must also be set as shown:

Parameter Group Required

Value
COMMAND MODE SELECTION GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS 3
FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS 3

18
 *   )  


  ! " 

The G3 Modbus interface board supports 5 Modbus commands: command 1 (0x01:
read coil status), command 3 (0x03: read holding registers), command 5 (0x05:
force single coil), command 6 (0x06: preset single register) and command 16 (0x10:
preset multiple registers). Not all registers or coils support all commands (for
example, read-only registers cannot be written to with a command 16). For more
information, refer to section 9. The following limits represent the maximum number of
registers and coils that can be read/written in one packet transaction:

Command RTU Mode RTU Mode ASCII Mode ASCII Mode

Read Max Write Max Read Max Write Max
1 16 coils N/A 16 coils N/A
3 125 registers N/A 61 registers N/A
5 N/A 1 coil only N/A 1 coil only
6 N/A 1 register only N/A 1 register only
16 N/A 123 registers N/A 59 registers

   !     #  

Registers 24B ∼ 28A are used as programmable pointer and data registers. The first
32 of these registers (24B ∼ 26A) are used to define other register addresses from
which you would like to read or write, and the remaining 32 registers (26B ∼ 28A) are
the actual registers used to access the data located at the register addresses defined
in registers 24B ∼ 26A. For example, if you would like to continuously read the data
from registers 05, 06, 1E, and 190, the standard register configuration would require
3 read commands to be issued: one reading 2 registers starting at register 05, one
reading 1 register starting at register 1E, and one reading 1 register starting at
register 190. To conserve network bandwidth and speed processing time, however,
the programmable pointer registers can be used to allow the same information to be
accessed, but by only issuing 1 command which reads 4 registers.

To configure this function, program as many registers as necessary (up to 32) in the
range 24B ∼ 26A with the register numbers of the registers you would like to
continuously access. In this example, we would set register 24B to 05 (the first
register number we want to access), register 24C to 06, register 24D to 1E, and
register 24E to 190. The data located at these registers can then be obtained by
accessing the corresponding registers in the range 26B ∼ 28A (data register 26B
corresponds to address register 24B, data register 26C corresponds to address
register 24C, etc.) Therefore, the 4 registers that are to be monitored can now be
accessed simply by issuing 1 read command with a length of 4 starting from register
26B. The returned data will be the data obtained from registers 05, 06, 1E, and 190
(in that order).

19
 Note that the settings of the programmable address registers
(24B ∼ 26A) are stored in nonvolatile EEPROM. Therefore, do not write to any of
these registers more than 10,000 times. Typically, these registers would only be
written to once, when the inverter and Modbus network are first commissioned. Also
note that when the Modbus interface board is first installed, the default contents of
these registers are initialized to 0 (“unconfigured address”). Attempts to read from or
write to programmable data registers (26B ∼ 28A) which have corresponding
programmable address registers set to “unconfigured address” will generate ILLEGAL
DATA ADDRESS exceptions (Modbus exception code 02).

 $  "   % #  

A configurable "loss of communications" timer function is provided, which can detect
communication losses and perform certain actions if a valid packet is not received
and processed within a set time period.

Register 1D0 sets the loss of communication time value (adjustable from 100ms to
60.000s in 1ms increments, factory setting = 1.000s). If a valid (exception-free)
reception-response (or exception-free broadcast) does not take place within this time
limit, the timer will expire. If the timer expires, 5 possible actions can occur, as set by
the value of register 1D1 (loss of communications action):

Register 1D1 Action Taken Upon Timeout

Setting
0 (default) No action: ignore timeout
1 Flash "COMM" on LCD display only
2 Flash "COMM" on LCD display, stop inverter with decelerated stop
3 Trip "OPTION PCB ERROR" (inverter must be reset locally)
4 Flash "COMM" on LCD display, set option frequency command to
UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY (CAUTION!)

Setting 0 is the default setting; when a communications timeout occurs, no action will
be taken.

For setting 1 (flash "COMM" on LCD display only), this condition will continue until the
next exception-free network packet is received and responded to (if the packet is a
broadcast, no response will be sent). The warning condition will then be removed
and the timer value reset.

For setting 2 (flash "COMM" on LCD display, stop inverter with decelerated stop), the
"COMM" warning will act as described in setting 1, but the inverter stop condition will
not be reset when an exception-free network packet is once again received. Note
that although the inverter stop condition is set, this only causes the inverter to actually
stop if parameter COMMAND MODE SELECTION in GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS
is set to 3 (communication option input valid). The inverter will then remain stopped
until commanded otherwise by the Modbus master.

Setting 3 does not depend on the COMMAND MODE SELECTION or FREQUENCY

MODE SELECTION parameters. Note that the “OPTION PCB ERROR” trip can only
be cleared locally at the inverter.

20
Setting 4 will cause the Modbus interface card to automatically modify the option
frequency command (register 01) upon a timeout occurrence such that the inverter
will accelerate to and continuously run at the UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, as set in
GROUP:FUNDAMENTAL PARAMETERS #1. Similar to the stop command issued by
the Modbus interface card with setting 2 (see above), the value of register 01 will not
automatically return to its pre-timeout value once proper network communications are
re-established. The Modbus master must specifically modify the value of register 01
once communications are re-established to cause the inverter to run at the desired
frequency once again. Note that in order for this setting to actually affect the
inverter’s operating frequency, parameter FREQUENCY MODE SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS must be set to 3 (communication option input valid).
Also note that the inverter will accelerate to the UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY only if
the inverter was running at the time of communications loss; otherwise the inverter
will remain stopped even though the option frequency command value has been
modified. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SELECTING THIS SETTING!
Thoroughly verify that there is no possibility of personal injury or equipment damage
due to the inverter running at the UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY setting, especially with
the possibility that network communications may not be able to be re-established in a
timely fashion (depending on what network condition caused the communications
timeout in the first place).

Note that the loss of communications timeout time and timeout action are both non-
volatile (stored in EEPROM). Therefore, do not write to these registers more than
10,000 times. The timeout time and timeout action are read only upon inverter
initialization; therefore, the inverter must be reset after these values have been
modified in order for them to take effect.

&    '  % #  

Register 1D2 contains the setting for a response delay timer function. This function is
useful for applications where it may not be desirable for the Modbus interface to
respond immediately to the network, such as when a radio modem that must be
switched from receive mode to transmit mode is being used.

The response delay timer is adjustable in 1ms increments from 0s to 2.000s (factory
setting = 0s). A response delay of 0s means that there is no delay; response packets
will be sent by the Modbus interface as soon as they are available. The delay timer
starts when a complete packet is received by the Modbus card - a response will not
be sent until the timer has expired (at a minimum). Note that this time value only sets
a minimum response delay value - depending on the quantity and location of registers
read/written, much more time may actually be required before a complete response is
formulated and ready to be returned to the network (an approximate value of 60ms
per register accessed can be used for most circumstances). For example, if 10
registers are always read/written, the interface board will require approximately
600ms to read/write the registers and formulate a response, so response delay times
less than approximately 600ms will have no actual effect.

Like the communications timeout parameters, the response delay timer value is read
only upon inverter initialization. This setting is also non-volatile (written to EEPROM).
Therefore, do not write to this register more than 10,000 times.

21
 + & )   
How To Use This Section:

This section contains tables which describe all of the registers and coils accessible
from the Modbus network. The descriptions for the columns in the listed tables are
as follows:

Register / Coil ...The register number / coil number used to access the parameter.

Bit ..................... This column only applies to write-only registers (section 9.1) and
read-only registers (section 9.2). If the register is comprised of a
collection of individual bit-oriented command/status items (for
example, register 02), this column will indicate which bit(s) in the
word-sized register the corresponding parameter described in the
Function column uses (bit 0 = LSB, bit F = MSB). If the parameter
uses the whole register, "word" will appear in this column, indicating
the parameter consumes the entire register (this does not mean,
however, that all register bits are used: refer to the explanation for
Mask below). All read/write registers (section 9.3) have word-size
data. Other possible values in this column are "low byte" (bits 0 ∼ 7)
and "high byte" (bits 8 ∼ F).

Function ............Describes the function accessed through this holding register.

Bank .................0 = RAM (volatile), 1 = EEPROM (nonvolatile), 0/1 = RAM &

EEPROM, DPRAM = interface board dual-port RAM (volatile), 2 & 3
= code space (read-only). IMPORTANT: the inverter’s EEPROM
has a life span of 10,000 write cycles. Do not write to a read/write
holding register whose bank is listed as 1 or 0/1 more than 10,000
times.

Mask .................The data bits within a register that are not covered by the
hexadecimal mask (for example, bits 8 ∼ F if the mask is 00FF) will
always be returned as 0 during data reads and will be ignored during
data writes. For example, if a hexadecimal value of AB98 is sent to
a register whose mask is 00FF, the actual value written to the
register's corresponding parameter will be 0098. As this is not
considered an error, no exception response will be generated if this
type of extraneous data condition occurs.

Adjustment Range ... Indicates valid data settings in real terms (Hz, ON/OFF, etc.)

Multiplier ...........Indicates scaling factor used to convert Adjustment Range data into
integer values. The equation used for this conversion is:

Actual Holding Register Data = Real Data ÷ Multiplier

For example, if 60.00Hz frequency command were desired, register

01 must be set to [60.00 ÷ 0.01] = 6000 decimal (= 1770 hex).

22
Example Table Excerpt:

Register Bit Function Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

01 word Frequency command DPRAM FFFF 0.00 ∼ 400.00Hz 0.01
Actual frequency will be
limited by LL, UL and Fmax.
02 0 RUN command DPRAM  0: Stop 
1: Run
1 STOP Command (has priority 0: run enabled
over RUN command) 1: stop
2 Forward • reverse run 0: reverse
selection 1: forward

Other Programming Register Notes:

• Throughout this document, the abbreviations "LL", "UL", and "Fmax" will stand for
LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY, UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY, and MAXIMUM
OUTPUT FREQUENCY, respectively.
• Reading from registers, register areas or coils marked as "Reserved" will return
data values of 0. Writing to registers, register areas or coils marked as
"Reserved" will have no effect. In both of these cases, as these actions are not
considered errors, no exception response will be generated.
• Certain holding registers cannot be written to while the inverter is running. These
registers will be indicated by the character (✴). If an attempt is made to write to
these registers while the inverter is running, an exception response will be
generated.
• The holding register data for all read/write registers with Bank information listed
as 0/1 will be retrieved from bank 0 (RAM) during reads and will be written to both
banks 0 and 1 (RAM and EEPROM) during writes.
• All parameters in GROUP:COMMUNICATION SETTING PARAMETERS (section
9.3.10) are retrieved from non-volatile memory upon inverter initialization. When
any of these registers are modified, therefore, the inverter must be reset for the
changed values to take effect.

23
 (
 )*   
Register Bit Function Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
01 word Frequency command DPRAM FFFF 0.00 ∼ 400.00Hz 0.01
Actual frequency will be
limited by LL, UL and Fmax.
02 0 RUN command DPRAM  0: Stop 
1: Run
1 STOP Command (has priority 0: run enabled
over RUN command) 1: stop
2 Forward • reverse run 0: reverse
selection 1: forward
3 Acc/dec #1 / #2 selection 0: Acc / dec #1
1: Acc / dec #2
4 Reserved 
5 Reserved 
6 Reserved 
7 Jog mode selection 0: Normal (acc/dec mode)
1: Jog mode
8 Feedback control 0: Feedback valid
1: Feedback invalid
9 Compulsory DC injection 0: No compulsory DC
braking mode injection braking
1: Compulsory DC injection
below DC INJECTION
START FREQUENCY
A Fundamental parameter 0: V/F #1
switching 1: V/F #2
B Gate block command 0: Normal
(coast stop command) 1: Gate block
C Emergency off command 0: Does nothing
1: Emergency off
D Reset command 0: Does nothing
(trip clear) 1: Reset
E Reserved 
F Reserved 
03 word Reserved DPRAM   
04 word Reserved DPRAM   

24
 (  )*   
Register Bit Function Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
05 word Output frequency monitor DPRAM FFFF 0.00 ~ 400.00Hz 0.01
06 0 Run • stop status DPRAM  0: Stopped 
1: Running
1 Run enable 0: Run enabled
1: Stopped
2 Forward • reverse status 0: Reverse
1: Forward
3 Acc / dec #1 / #2 selection 0: Acc / dec #1
status 1: Acc / dec #2
4 Reserved 
5 Fault status 0: Faulted
1: Not Faulted
6 Reserved 
7 Jog mode status 0: Normal (acc/dec mode)
1: Jog mode
8 Feedback enable status 0: Feedback valid
1: Feedback invalid
9 Compulsory DC injection 0: DC inject. braking inactive
braking mode 1: DC inject. braking active
A Fundamental parameter 0: V/F #1
switching 1: V/F #2
B Coast stop command status 0: Normal
1: Coast to stop
C Emergency off command 0: Normal
1: Emergency off
D Reserved 
E Main Circuit Undervoltage 0: Normal
1: Undervoltage
F Reserved 
07 word Output current monitor DPRAM 00FF 0 ~ 255% 1
08 word Output voltage monitor DPRAM FFFF 0 ~ 232% 0.1
(Note 1)
09 word IV terminal analog input value 0 FFFF 0000 ~ FFFF (0% ~ 100%) 1
0A word RX terminal analog input 0 FFFF 0000 ~ 7FFF (-100% ~ 0%) 1
value 7FFF ~ FFFF (0% ~ 100%)
0B word Frequency command monitor 0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 9C40 0.01
(0.00 ∼ 400.00 Hz)
0C word Input voltage monitor (Note 1) 0 FFFF 0 ~ 255% 0.1
0D word Input terminal status monitor 0 FFFF Refer to Table 1 (page 27) 
0E low Output terminal status 0 00FF Refer to Table 2 (page 27) 
byte monitor
high Inverter Status 2 FF00
byte
0F word Inverter Status 1 0 FFFF Refer to Table 3 (page 28) 
10 word Present trip 0 00FF 
11 high 4th Past trip (most recent) 0 7F00 
byte
low 3rd past trip 007F Refer to section 9.6 for fault
byte codes
12 high 2nd past trip 0 7F00 
byte
low 1st past trip (oldest) 007F
byte
13 word Pre-compensation output 0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 9C40 0.01
frequency (0.00 ∼ 400.00 Hz)

25
Register Bit Function Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
14 word Post-compensation output 0 FFFF 0000 ∼ 9C40 0.01
frequency (0.00 ∼ 400.00 Hz)
15 word Torque current monitor 0 FFFF (Note 2) 0.01
16 low Excitation current monitor 0 00FF 00 ∼ FF (0 ~ 255%) 1
byte
high Reserved    
byte
17 word PID feedback value 0 FFFF (Note 2) 0.02
18 word Motor overload ratio 0 FFFF 0 ~ 65535 100/65535
19 word Inverter overload ratio 0 FFFF 0 ~ 65535 100/65535
1A word DBR overload ratio 0 FFFF 0 ~ 65535 100/65535
1B word Input power (%) 0 FFFF 0 ~ 6553.5 0.1
1C word Input power (kW) 0 FFFF (Note 3)
1D word Output power (%) 0 FFFF (Note 2) 0.1
1E word Output power (kW) 0 FFFF (Note 2, Note 3)
1F word RR input 0 FFFF 0 ~ 65535 100/65535
20 word CPU version number 2 FFFF  
21 word External ROM version 3 FFFF  
number
22 word EEPROM version number 1 FFFF  
23 low Inverter typeform monitor 0 00FF Refer to Table 4 (page 28) 
byte
8 Input / output power units 0 0100 0: 0.01kW 
1: 0.1kW
9,A Command mode status 0 0600 00: terminal 
01: panel
10: option
11: RS232C
B,C Frequency mode selection 0 1800 00: terminal 
status 01: panel
10: option
11: RS232C
D,E, Reserved    
F
24 low Modbus Interface card    
byte software revision
high Modbus Interface card
byte software version
25 word Output current (amps)  FFFF 0.0 ~ 6553.5 A 0.1

(Note 1) These monitor voltage units are not affected by the setting of VOLTAGE UNITS SELECTION in
GROUP:UTILITY PARAMETERS; they are always in units of %.
(Note 2) These registers use signed data (data values larger than 7FFFH are negative). If the register data is 8000H
or larger, the actual value can be obtained by: actual value = - [FFFFH - (register data) + 1].
(Note 3) If the input / output power units data is 0, the monitored data is in 0.01kW units, and the multiplier is 0.01.
If the input / output power units data is 1, the monitored data is in 0.1kW units, and the multiplier is 0.1.
These values are automatically set according to the inverter’s capacity.

26
 Table 1: Input Terminal Status Monitor (register 0D)
Lower Bit Input 0 1 Single-Bit
Byte Terminal Read Mask
bit 0 F terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0001
bit 1 R terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0002
bit 2 S1 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0004
bit 3 S2 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0008
bit 4 S3 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0010
bit 5 S4 terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 S5 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 S6 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Upper Bit Input Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit

Byte Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 unused (always 0)   
bit 3 unused (always 0)   
bit 4 unused (always 0)   
bit 5 S7 (option) terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0020
bit 6 RES terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0040
bit 7 ST terminal - CC open terminal - CC shorted 0080

Table 2: Output Terminal Status Monitor / Inverter Status 2 (register 0E)

Lower Bit Output Terminal 0 1 Single-Bit
Byte Read Mask
bit 0 unused (always 0)   
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 FAN OFF ON 0004
bit 3 FL FLB-FLC shorted FLA-FLC shorted 0008
bit 4 MS relay OFF ON 0010
bit 5 OUT (option) OUTB-OUTC shorted OUTA-OUTC shorted 0020
bit 6 RCH RCHA-RCHC open RCHA-RCHC shorted 0040
bit 7 LOW LOWA-LOWC open LOWA-LOWC shorted 0080

Upper Bit Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Byte Read Mask
bit 0 accelerating not accelerating accelerating 0001
bit 1 decelerating not decelerating decelerating 0002
bit 2 for inverter use   
bit 3 retry not retrying retrying 0008
bit 4 running (including DC stopped running 0010
injection braking)
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 tripped not tripped tripped 0080

27
 Table 3: Inverter Status 1 (register 0F)
Lower Bit Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit
Byte Read Mask
bit 0 running (acc/dec)  running 0001
bit 1 unused (always 0)   
bit 2 forward / reverse reverse forward 0004
bit 3 acc/dec #1/#2 acc/dec #1 acc/dec #2 0008
bit 4 for inverter use   
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 jog/normal mode normal (acc/dec) jog mode 0080

Upper Bit Inverter Status 0 1 Single-Bit

Byte Read Mask
bit 0 feedback ON/OFF OFF feedback active 0001
bit 1 DC inj. braking OFF DC inj. braking active 0002
bit 2 V/F #1/#2 V/F #1 V/F #2 0004
bit 3 coasting not coasting coasting 0008
bit 4 emergency off not in emergency off in emergency off 0010
bit 5 for inverter use   
bit 6 for inverter use   
bit 7 for inverter use   

Table 4: Inverter Typeform Codes

230v Class 460v Class 575v Class

Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform Inverter Typeform
Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex) Model Data (Hex)
G3-2010 ××21 G3-4015 ××42 G3-6060 ××65
G3-2015 ××22 G3-4025 ××43 G3-6120 ××67
G3-2025 ××23 G3-4035 ××44 G3-6160 ××68
G3-2035 ××24 G3-4055 ××45 G3-6220 ××69
G3-2055 ××25 G3-4080 ××46 G3-6270 ××6A
G3-2080 ××26 G3-4110 ××47 G3-6330 ××6B
G3-2110 ××27 G3-4160 ××48 G3-6400 ××6C
G3-2160 ××28 G3-4220 ××49 G3-6500 ××6D
G3-2220 ××29 G3-4270 ××4A G3-6600 ××6E
G3-2270 ××2A G3-4330 ××4B G3-6750 ××6F
G3-2330 ××2B G3-4400 ××4C G3-610K ××70
G3-2400 ××2C G3-4500 ××4D G3-612K ××71
G3-4600 ××4E G3-615K ××72
G3-4750 ××4F G3-620K ××73
G3-410K ××50
G3-412K ××51
G3-415K ××52
G3-420K ××53
G3-425K ××54
G3-430K ××55

28
 (  +   

    ! "

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

26 MAXIMUM OUTPUT 0/1 FFFF 0BB8 ∼ 9C40 (30.00∼400.00) 0.01
FREQUENCY (✴)
27 BASE FREQUENCY #1 0/1 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00∼400.00) 0.01
28 BASE FREQUENCY VOLTAGE 0/1 0030 0000: Input voltage level (0) 
SELECT (✴) 0020: Automatic setting (1)
0030: Stationary setting (2)
29 MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
#1
2A REVERSE OPERATION 0/1 0020 0000: Reverse allowed (0) 
DISABLE SELECT 0020: Reverse not allowed (1)
2B UPPER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ~ Fmax 0.01
2C LOWER LIMIT FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ UL, Fmax 0.01
2D VOLTS PER HERTZ 0/1 000F 0000: Constant torque (1) 
PATTERN (✴) 0001: Variable torque (2)
0002: Auto. torque boost (3)
0006: #3 w/ auto. energy savings (4)
000A: Vector control (5)
000E: #5 w/ auto. energy savings (6)
2E 1, 2 VOLTAGE BOOST #1 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
2F ACCELERATION TIME #1 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01~ 600.00) 0.01
0001 ∼ EA60 (0.1~ 6000.0) 0.1
30 DECELERATION TIME #1 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01~ 600.00) 0.01
0001 ∼ EA60 (0.1~ 6000.0) 0.1
31 ACC/DEC PATTERN #1 0/1 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
SELECTION 0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
32 ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN 0/1 00FF 0003 ~ 00FD (0 ∼ 50) (Note 1) 1
ADJUST LOW
33 ACCEL/DECEL PATTERN 0/1 00FF 0003 ~ 00FD (0 ∼ 50) (Note 1) 1
ADJUST HIGH

Note 1: Register data = (desired setting x 5 + 3), converted to hexadecimal

29
      !

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

34 BASE FREQUENCY #2 0/1 FFFF 09C4 ∼ 9C40 (25.00 ∼ 400.00) 0.01
35 MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0258 (0 ∼ 600) 1
#2
36 VOLTAGE BOOST #2 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 012C (0.0 ∼ 30.0) 0.1
37 ELECTRONIC THERMAL 0/1 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
PROTECT LVL #2
38 STALL PROTECTION 0/1 0040 0000: ON (0) 
SELECTION #2 0040: OFF (1)
39 0 STALL PROTECTION 0/1 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
LEVEL #2
3A ACCELERATION TIME #2 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.1~ 6000.0) 0.1
0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01~ 600.00) 0.01
3B DECELERATION TIME #2 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.1~ 6000.0) 0.1
0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01~ 600.00) 0.01
3C ACC/DEC PATTERN #2 0/1 0030 0000: Linear (0) 
SELECTION 0010: Self-adjusting (1)
0020: S-Pattern #1 (2)
0030: S-Pattern #2 (3)
3D ACC/DEC #1/#2 SWITCH 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY

"

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

3E DIRECTION SELECTION 0/1 0004 0000: Reverse (0) 
(FORWARD/REV) 0004: Forward (1)
3F STOP PATTERN SELECTION 0/1 0040 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
0040: Coast stop (1)
40 FUNDAMENTAL PARAM 0/1 0004 0000: V/F #1 (1) 
SWITCHING 0004: V/F #2 (2)
41 ACCEL/DECEL #1/#2 0/1 0008 0000: Acc / dec #1 (1) 
SELECTION 0008: Acc / dec #2 (2)
42 PANEL RESET SELECTION 0/1 0030 0000: All possible (0) 
0010: OL only (1)
0020: OL, OC only (2)
43 PANEL FEEDBACK CONTROL 0/1 0001 0000: Feedback valid (0) 
0001: Feedback invalid (1)

   #    !

30
 $   % ! #%

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

44 INPUT TERMINAL 0/1 0001 0000: Standard functions (0) 
SELECTION 0001: Individual selections (1)
45 1 “R” INPUT TERMINAL 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 54) 
FUNCTION
46 “S1” INPUT Refer to Table 5 (page 33)
TERMINAL FUNCTION
47 “S2” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
48 “S3” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
49 “S4” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
4A “F” INPUT TERMINAL
FUNCTION
4B “RES” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
4C “ST” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
4D “S5” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
4E “S6” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
4F “S7” INPUT
TERMINAL FUNCTION
50 POTENTIAL TERMINAL
FUNCTION
51 R,S1-S7 TERMINAL 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RESPONSE TIME
52 F INPUT TERMINAL 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RESPONSE TIME
53 RES INPUT TERMINAL 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RESPONSE TIME
54 ST INPUT TERMINAL 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
RESPONSE TIME
55 “RCH” CONTACTS 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) 
FUNCTION
Refer to Table 6 (page 34)
56 “RCH” CONTACTS DELAY 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
57 “RCH” CONTACTS HOLD 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
58 “LOW” CONTACTS 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) 
FUNCTION
Refer to Table 6 (page 34)
59 “LOW” CONTACTS DELAY 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
5A “LOW” CONTACTS HOLD 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
5B “FL” CONTACTS FUNCTION 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) 
Refer to Table 6 (page 34)
5C “FL” CONTACTS DELAY 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
5D “FL” CONTACTS HOLD 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
5E “OUT” CONTACTS 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ FFFF (0 ∼ 63) 
FUNCTION
Refer to Table 6 (page 34)
5F “OUT” CONTACTS DELAY 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME

  !

31
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
60 “OUT” CONTACTS HOLD 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 0064 (1 ∼ 100) 1
TIME
61 LOW SPEED SIGNAL 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
OUTPUT FREQ
62 ACC/DEC COMPLETE 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
DETECT BAND
63 SPEED REACH MAXIMUM 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
64 SPEED REACH MINIMUM 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
65 COMMERCIAL POWER/INV 0/1 00C0 0000: OFF (0) 
SWITCHING OUTPUT 0040: Auto switch on trip (1)
0080: At COMMERCIAL POWER/INV
SWITCH FREQ (2)
00C0: Both (1) and (2) (3)
66 2, 3 COMMERCIAL 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
POWER/INV SWITCH
FREQ
67 “FP” OUTPUT TERMINAL 0/1 0003 0000: 48f (0) 
PULSE FREQUENCY 0001: 96f (1)
0002: 360f (2)
68 RR INPUT SPECIAL 0/1 00E0 0000: Standard (0) 
FUNCTION SELECT 0040: Fmax (1)
0080: TACC/TDEC mult. (2)
00C0: VB mult. Factor (3)
0020: CL mult. Factor (4)

32
 Table 5: Input Terminal Selections
Setting Data Function Setting Data Function
Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 10C8 R (reverse run) 28 04AF Binary bit #6
1 011C SS1 (preset speed selection) 29 08AF Binary bit #7
2 021C SS2 (preset speed selection) 30 10AF Binary bit #8
3 041C SS3 (preset speed selection) 31 20AF Binary bit #9
4 081C SS4 (preset speed selection) 32 40AF Binary bit #10
5 20C8 F (forward run) 33 04CE No effect
6 201B RES (fault reset) 34 01C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting (UP)
7 C0C9 ST (gate ON/OFF) 35 02C7 UP/DOWN frequency setting
(DOWN)
8 0CC8 JOG selection 36 04C7 UP/DOWN frequency clear
9 081A Acc/dec #1/#2 selection 37 08C7 PUSH-type RUN key
10 101B Emergency off 38 10C7 PUSH-type STOP key
11 021B DC injection braking ON/OFF 39 02B9 No effect
12 041B Fundamental parameter 40 C0C8 Forward/reverse run selection
switching (V/F #2)
13 011B Feedback control ON/OFF 41 20C7 RUN
14 10CE Pattern run selection #1 42 30C9 Binary data write
15 20CE Pattern run selection #2 43 0198 [LOCAL/REMOTE] key
16 40CE Pattern run selection #3 44 0298 [MON] key
17 80CE Pattern run selection #4 45 0498 [PRG] key
18 02CE Pattern run continue signal 46 0898 [UP] (▲) key
19 01CE Pattern run step trigger signal 47 1098 [DOWN] (▼) key
20 0AC9 JOG forward run 48 2098 [READ/WRITE] key
21 06C9 JOG reverse run 49 4098 [RUN] key
22 10AE Binary bit #0 50 8098 [STOP/CLEAR] key
23 20AE Binary bit #1 51 08CE Commercial power / inverter
switching signal
24 40AE Binary bit #2 52 40C7 Reserved for option use
25 80AE Binary bit #3 53 10CB RR frequency switching input
26 01AF Binary bit #4 54 20CB IV frequency switching input
27 02AF Binary bit #5

Note: In order for binary bit #0 ∼ #10 (setting values 22 ∼ 32) and UP/DOWN frequency setting (setting values 34 &
35) inputs to be valid, parameter FREQUENCY PRIORITY SELECTION #1 or FREQUENCY PRIORITY
SELECTION #2 in GROUP:FREQUENCY SETTING PARAMETERS must be set to 5 (BIN (binary setting or
UP/DOWN setting)).

33
 Table 6: Output Terminal Selections (RCH, LOW, FL, OUT relay
Setting Data Function Setting Data Function
Value (Hex) Value (Hex)
0 0000 Lower limit frequency 32 C5B7 Executing emergency off
1 0100 /Lower limit frequency 33 CDB7 /Executing emergency off
2 0200 Upper limit frequency 34 B5BB Executing retry
3 0300 /Upper limit frequency 35 BDBB /Executing retry
4 0400 Low speed signal 36 D5CF Pattern run switching output
5 0500 /Low speed signal 37 DDCF /Pattern run switching output
6 0600 Accel/decel complete 38 D5D8 PID deviation limit
7 0700 /Accel/decel complete 39 DDD8 /PID deviation limit
8 0800 Selected speed reach signal 40 C5BB Run/stop
9 0900 /Selected speed reach signal 41 CDBB /Run/stop
10 0A00 Fault 42 1400 Severe fault (armature short, load-
end short, open phase, output error,
earth fault)
11 0B00 /Fault 43 1500 /Severe fault (armature short, load-
end short, open phase, output error,
earth fault)
12 0C00 Fault other than earth fault or 44 1600 Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
13 0D00 /Fault other than earth fault or 45 1700 /Non-severe fault (overload,
load-end overcurrent overcurrent, overvoltage)
14 95B5 Overcurrent pre-alarm 46 E5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
15 9DB5 /Overcurrent pre-alarm 47 EDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #1
16 85C5 Inverter overload pre-alarm 48 F5D8 Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
17 8DC5 /Inverter overload pre-alarm 49 FDD8 /Commercial power / inverter
switching output #2
18 95C5 Motor overload pre-alarm 50 85C0 Fan ON/OFF
19 9DC5 /Motor overload pre-alarm 51 8DC0 /Fan ON/OFF
20 D5C5 Overheat pre-alarm 52 F5B6 Executing JOG
21 DDC5 /Overheat pre-alarm 53 FDB6 /Executing JOG
22 A5B4 Overvoltage pre-alarm 54 1800 Local/remote operation
23 ADB4 /Overvoltage pre-alarm 55 1900 /Local/remote operation
24 E5B4 Undervoltage alarm 56 A5D1 Cumulative timer alarm
25 EDB4 /Undervoltage alarm 57 ADD1 /Cumulative timer alarm
26 85B5 Undercurrent alarm 58 1A00 Communication error alarm
27 8DB5 /Undercurrent alarm 59 1B00 /Communication error alarm
28 85D1 Overtorque alarm 60 A5B6 F/R
29 8DD1 /Overtorque alarm 61 ADB6 /F/R
30 E5BB Braking resistor OL pre-alarm 62 1E00 Run preparation complete
31 EDBB /Braking resistor OL pre-alarm 63 1F00 /Run preparation complete
contacts)

34
 &  !#% # 

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

69 START-UP FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
6A ∼ 6F Reserved    
70 END FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
71 RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
72 RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
HYSTERESIS
73 ENABLE JUMP 0/1 0080 0000: Function OFF (0) 
FREQUENCIES 0080: Function ON (1)
74 1 JUMP FREQUENCY #1 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
75 JUMP FREQUENCY #1 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
BANDWIDTH
76 JUMP FREQUENCY #2 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
77 JUMP FREQUENCY #2 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
BANDWIDTH
78 JUMP FREQUENCY #3 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
79 JUMP FREQUENCY #3 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
BANDWIDTH
7A ∼ 7F Reserved    
80 PWM CARRIER FREQUENCY 0/1 00FF 0005 ∼ 0064 (0.5 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
(Note 1)

  !

Note 1: Actual adjustment range depends on inverter rating.

35
 '   (#) !%

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

81 FREQUENCY PRIORITY 0/1 0007 0001: RR (1) 
SELECTION #1 0002: IV (2)
0003: RX (3)
0004: PG (4)
0005: BIN (5)
82 FREQUENCY PRIORITY 0/1 0038 0008: RR (1) 
SELECTION #2 0010: IV (2)
0018: RX (3)
0020: PG (4)
0028: BIN (5)
83 ANALOG INPUT FILTER 0/1 0003 0000: No filter (0) 
0001: Small filter (1)
0002: Medium filter (2)
0003: Large filter (3)
84 RR TERMINAL STANDARD 0/1 0002 0000: Standard (0) 
OR ADJUSTABLE 0002: Adjustable (1)
85 1 RR REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
SETTING POINT #1
86 RR REF POINT #1 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
87 RR REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
SETTING POINT #2
88 RR REF POINT #2 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
89 IV TERMINAL STANDARD 0/1 0004 0000: Standard (0) 
OR ADJUSTABLE 0004: Adjustable (1)
8A 1 IV REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
SETTING POINT #1
8B IV REF POINT #1 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
8C IV REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
SETTING POINT #2
8D IV REF POINT #2 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
8E RX TERMINAL STANDARD 0/1 0008 0000: Standard (0) 
OR ADJUSTABLE 0008: Adjustable (1)
8F 1 RX REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
SETTING POINT #1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
90 RX REF POINT #1 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
FREQUENCY
91 RX REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
SETTING POINT #2
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
92 RX REF POINT #2 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
FREQUENCY
93 PG TERMINAL STANDARD 0/1 0010 0000: Standard (0) 
OR ADJUSTABLE 0010: Adjustable (1)
94 1 PG REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
SETTING POINT #1
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
95 PG REF POINT #1 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
FREQUENCY
96 PG REFERENCE 0/1 00FF 009C ∼ 00FF, 0000 ∼ 0064 1
SETTING POINT #2
(-100 ∼ -1, 0 ∼ 100)
97 PG REF POINT #2 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
FREQUENCY

  !

36
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
98 BINARY INPUT STD OR 0/1 0001 0000: Standard (0) 
ADJUSTABLE 0001: Adjustable (1)
99 1 BINARY REF SETTING 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
POINT #1
9A BINARY REF POINT 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
#1 FREQUENCY
9B BINARY REF SETTING 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
POINT #2
9C BINARY REF POINT 0/1 FFFF -Fmax ∼ Fmax 0.02
#2 FREQUENCY
9D JOG RUN FREQUENCY 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 07D0 (0.00 ∼ 20.00) 0.01
9E Other JOG STOP 0/1 00C0 0000: Decelerated stop (0) 
than 0 METHOD 0040: Coast stop (1)
0080: DC injection stop (2)
9F PRESET SPEED SELECTION 0/1 000F 0000 ∼ 000F (0 ∼ 15) 1
A0 ∼ FF Reserved    
100 Other PRESET SPEED 0/1 0004 0000: Deactivated (0) 
than 0 MODE 0004: Activated (1)
ACTIVATION
101 PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
#1 FREQUENCY
102 PRESET SPEED 1 040C 0004: (0) 1
#1 OPERATING 0000: (1)
MODE
000C: (2)
0008: (3)
0404: (4)
0400: (5)
040C: (6)
0408: (7)
103 2 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #2 FREQUENCY
104 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#2 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
105 3 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #3 FREQUENCY
106 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#3 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
107 4 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #4 FREQUENCY
108 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#4 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
109 5 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #5 FREQUENCY
10A PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#5 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
10B 6 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #6 FREQUENCY
10C PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#6 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
10D 7 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #7 FREQUENCY
10E PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#7 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE

37
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
10F 8 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #8 FREQUENCY
110 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#8 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
111 9 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #9 FREQUENCY
112 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#9 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
113 10 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #10 FREQUENCY
114 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#10 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
115 11 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #11 FREQUENCY
116 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#11 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
117 12 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #12 FREQUENCY
118 PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#12 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
119 13 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #13 FREQUENCY
11A PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#13 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
11B 14 or PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
higher #14 FREQUENCY
11C PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#14 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE
11D 15 PRESET SPEED 1 FFFF LL ∼ UL 0.01
#15 FREQUENCY
11E PRESET SPEED 1 040C Same as PRESET SPEED #1 1
#15 OPERATING OPERATING MODE
MODE

38
*   #% #%   !

39
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
11F DYNAMIC BRAKING 0/1 0003 0000: no dynamic braking (0) 
SELECTION 0001: with dynamic braking, no DBR
overload trip (1)
0003: with dynamic braking and DBR
overload trip (2)
120 2 BRAKING RESISTOR 0/1 FFFF 000A ∼ 2710 (1.0 ∼ 1000) 0.1
VALUE
121 BRAKING RESISTOR 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ EA60 (0.01 ∼ 600.00) 0.01
POWER RATING
122 OVERVOLTAGE STALL 0/1 0004 0000: ON (0) 
PROTECTION 0004: OFF (1)
123 DC INJECTION START 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 2EE0 (0.00 ∼ 120.00) 0.01
FREQUENCY
124 Other DC INJECTION 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
than 0 CURRENT
MAGNITUDE
125 DC INJECTION 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
TIME
126 FWD/REV DC INJECTION 0/1 0040 0000: OFF (0) 
PRIORITY CTRL 0040: ON (1)
127 MOTOR SHAFT STATIONARY 0/1 0080 0000: OFF (0) 
CTRL 0080: ON (1)
128 EMERGENCY OFF MODE 0/1 0030 0000: Coast stop (0) 
SELECTION 0010: Decelerated stop (1)
0020: DC injection stop (2)
129 2 EMERGENCY OFF DC 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
INJECTION TIME
12A NUMBER OF RETRY 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 000A (0 ∼ 10) 1
ATTEMPTS
12B Other TIME BETWEEN 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0.0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1
than 0 RETRY ATTEMPTS
12C REGENERATION POWER 0/1 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
RIDE-THROUGH 0008: ON (1)
12D 1 REGENERATION RIDE- 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FA (0.0 ∼ 25.0) 0.1
THROUGH TIME
12E AUTO-RESTART (MOTOR 0/1 0018 0000: OFF (0) 
SPEED SEARCH) 0008: On power failure (1)
0010: On ST make/break (2)
0018: Both (1) and (2) (3)
12F ELECTRONIC THERMAL 0/1 00FF 000A ∼ 0064 (10 ∼ 100) 1
PROTECT LVL #1
130 OVERLOAD REDUCTION 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 0BB8 (0.00 ∼ 30.00) 0.01
START FREQ
131 MOTOR 150% OVERLOAD 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00F0 (10 ∼ 2400) 10
TIME LIMIT
132 OVERLOAD SELECTION 0/1 0030 0000: with motor overload trip, 
without soft-stall (0)
0010: with motor overload trip and
soft-stall (1)
0020: without soft-stall or motor
overload trip (2)
0030: with soft-stall, without motor
overload trip (3)
133 STALL PROTECTION 0/1 0040 0000: ON (0) 
ENABLE 0040: OFF (1)
134 0 STALL PROTECTION 0/1 00FF 000A ∼ 00D7 (10 ∼ 215) 1
CURRENT LEVEL

40
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
135 UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP 0/1 0080 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
SELECTION 0080: Trip (during run) (1)
136 UNDERVOLTAGE DETECT 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03E8 (0.00 ∼ 10.00) 0.01
TIME
137 LOW CURRENT DETECT 0/1 0008 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
SELECTION 0008: Trip on detection (1)
138 LOW CURRENT DETECT 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
LEVEL
139 LOW CURRENT DETECTION 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
TIME
140 OUTPUT SHORT-CIRCUIT 0/1 0003 0000: Standard motor (0) 
DETECTION SELECT 0001: High-speed motor (1)
0002: Positioning use (standard
motor) (2)
0003: Positioning use (high-speed
motor) (3)
141 OVERTORQUE TRIP 0/1 0040 0000: Trip disabled (0) 
SELECTION 0040: Trip enabled (1)
142 OVERTORQUE TRIP LEVEL 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 200) 1
143 FAULT TRIP EEPROM SAVE 0/1 0002 0000: Data cleared when powered 
ENABLE OFF (0)
0002: Data retained when powered
OFF (1)
144 COOLING FAN CONTROL 0/1 0004 0000: Automatic (temperature 
SELECTION detection) (0)
0004: Always ON (1)
145 CUMULATIVE RUN TIMER 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ C34B (0.00 ∼ 999.90) 0.02
ALARM SETTING

41
 +     # 

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

146 PATTERN RUN SELECTION 0/1 0008 0000: OFF (0) 
0008: ON (1)
147 1 PATTERN RUN 0/1 0001 0000: reset on stop (0) 
CONTINUE MODE 0001: switch when done (1)
148 PATTERN GROUP #1 1 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
SPEED #0
149 PATTERN GROUP #1 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
SPEED #1
150 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #2
151 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #3
152 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #4
153 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #5
154 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #6
155 PATTERN GROUP #1
SPEED #7
156 PATTERN GROUP #1 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
NUMBER OF CYCLES
157 PATTERN GROUP #2 1 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
SPEED #0
158 PATTERN GROUP #2 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
SPEED #1
159 PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #2
15A PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #3
15B PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #4
15C PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #5
15D PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #6
15E PATTERN GROUP #2
SPEED #7
15F PATTERN GROUP #2 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
NUMBER OF CYCLES
160 PATTERN GROUP #3 1 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
SPEED #0
161 PATTERN GROUP #3 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
SPEED #1
162 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #2
163 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #3
164 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #4
165 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #5
166 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #6
167 PATTERN GROUP #3
SPEED #7
168 PATTERN GROUP #3 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
NUMBER OF CYCLES

  !

42
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
169 PATTERN GROUP #4 1 00FF 0000: Skip (0) 1
SPEED #0
16A PATTERN GROUP #4 0001 ∼ 000F: Speeds 1 ∼ 15
SPEED #1
16B PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #2
16C PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #3
16D PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #4
16E PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #5
16F PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #6
170 PATTERN GROUP #4
SPEED #7
171 PATTERN GROUP #4 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF: 1 ∼ 255 1
NUMBER OF CYCLES
172 SPEED #1 CONTINUE 1 00FF 0000: Count in seconds from time of 
MODE activation (0)
0001: Count in minutes from time of
activation (1)
0002: Count in seconds from speed
reach (2)
0003: Count in minutes from speed
reach (3)
0004: Non-stop (continue until STOP
command) (4)
0005: Continue until next step
command (5)
173 <4 SPEED #1 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
174 SPEED #2 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
175 <4 SPEED #2 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
176 SPEED #3 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
177 <4 SPEED #3 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
178 SPEED #4 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
179 <4 SPEED #4 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
17A SPEED #5 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
17B <4 SPEED #5 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
17C SPEED #6 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
17D <4 SPEED #6 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
17E SPEED #7 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
17F <4 SPEED #7 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
180 SPEED #8 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
181 <4 SPEED #8 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME

43
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
182 SPEED #9 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
183 <4 SPEED #9 DRIVE 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
TIME
184 SPEED #10 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
185 <4 SPEED #10 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME
186 SPEED #11 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
187 <4 SPEED #11 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME
188 SPEED #12 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
189 <4 SPEED #12 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME
18A SPEED #13 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
18B <4 SPEED #13 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME
18C SPEED #14 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
18D <4 SPEED #14 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME
18E SPEED #15 CONTINUE 1 00FF Same as SPEED #1 CONTINUE 
MODE MODE
18F <4 SPEED #15 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 1F40 (0 ∼ 8000) 1
DRIVE TIME

44
   #, # 

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

190 FEEDBACK CONTROL 0/1 0060 0020: No feedback (0) 
SELECTION 0040: PID control (1)
0060: Speed feedback (2)
191 1, 2 FEEDBACK INPUT 0/1 001C 0004: RR input (1) 
SIGNAL SELECTION 0008: IV input (2)
000C: RX input (3)
0010: PG feedback (4)
0014: RS232C input (5)
0018: Communication/12-bit binary
interface board (6)
001C: BIN input (7)
192 PROPORTIONAL 0/1 00FF 0001 ∼ 00FF (0.01 ∼ 2.55) 0.01
GAIN
193 INTEGRAL GAIN 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 8CA0 (0.01 ∼ 360.00) 0.01
194 ANTI-HUNTING 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0.0 ∼ 25.5) 0.1
GAIN
195 LAG TIME 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
CONSTANT
196 PID LOWER LIMIT 0/1 FFFF 0 ∼ Fmax 0.01
FREQUENCY
197 PID DEVIATION LIMIT 0/1 0080 0000: No PID deviation limit (0) 
SELECTION 0080: PID deviation limited (1)
198 1 PID DEVIATION 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
UPPER LIMIT
199 PID DEVIATION 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0032 (0 ∼ 50) 1
LOWER LIMIT
19A PG INPUT: NUMBER OF 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (1 ∼ 9999) 1
PULSES
19B PG INPUT: NUMBER OF 0/1 0001 0000: Single-phase input (1) 
PHASES 0001: Two-phase input (2)
19C DROOPING CONTROL 0/1 0002 0000: OFF (0) 
ENABLE 0002: ON (1)

19D 1 DROOPING CONTROL 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 10.0) 0.1

AMOUNT
19E OVERRIDE CONTROL 0/1 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
SELECTION 0001: FCRR (1)
0002: FCIV (2)
0003: FCRX (3)
0004: FCPG (4)
0005: FCPNL (5)
0006: FCOPT (6)
0007: FCMLT (7)
19F 7 OVERRIDE 0/1 0038 0000: Reference (0) 
MULTIPLIER INPUT 0008: KRR (1)
SELECTION
0010: KIV (2)
0018: KRX (3)
0020: KBIN (4)
1A0 OVERRIDE CHANGE 0/1 FFFF FC18 ∼ 03E8 (-100.0 ∼ 100.0) 0.1
MULTIPLIER
1A1 ∼ Reserved    
1CF

  !

45

-  #%#% !%   !

46
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
1D0 Loss of communications 1  100 ∼ 60000 (0.100s ∼ 60.000s) 0.001
timeout time
1D1 Loss of communications 1  0∼4 
timeout action
1D2 Response delay time 1  0 ∼ 2000 (0s ∼ 2.000s) 0.001
1D3 ∼ Reserved    
200
201 RS232 BAUD RATE 1 0018 0000: 2400 baud (0) 
0008: 4800 baud (1)
0010: 9600 baud (2)
202 NUMBER OF DATA BITS 1 0040 0000: 7 bits (0) 
0040: 8 bits (1)
.203 PARITY SETTING 1 0080 0000: Even parity (0) 
0080: Odd parity (1)
204 INVERTER ID NUMBER 1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00FF (0 ∼ 255) 1
205 COMMUNICATION 1 0007 0000: OFF (0) 
SELECTION 0001: RS485 (1)
0002: Modbus, F10, DeviceNet (2)
0003: TOSLINE S-20 (3)
0004: 12 bit binary input (4)
0005: 3-digit BCD (0.1Hz) (5)
0006: 3-digit BCD (1Hz) (6)
206 1 MASTER/SLAVE 1 0018 0000: Slave (0) 
SELECTION 0008: Master (frequency command)
(1)
0010: Master (output frequency) (2)
207 RS485 BAUD RATE 1 0004 0000: Normal mode (0) 
0004: High-speed mode (1)
208 2 TOSLINE-F10 1 0003 0000: OFF (0) 
COMMAND INPUT 0001: Frequency command (1)
0002: Command input (2)
0003: Both (1) and (2) (3)
209 TOSLINE-F10 1 003C 0000: (0) 0020: (8) 
MONITOR OUTPUT 0004: (1) 0024: (9)
0008: (2) 0028: (10)
000C: (3) 002C: (11)
0010: (4) 0030: (12)
0014: (5) 0034: (13)
0018: (6) 0038: (14)
001C: (7) 003C: (15 )
20A TOSLINE-F10 COMM 1 0080 0000: Data cleared (0) 
ERROR MODE 0080: Data retained (1)
20B 3 TOSLINE-S20 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
RECEIVE ADDRESS
20C TOSLINE-S20 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
TRANSMIT ADDRESS
20D TOSLINE-S20 1 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
COMMAND INPUT
20E TOSLINE-S20 1 001F 0000 ∼ 001F (0 ∼ 31) 1
MONITOR OUTPUT
20F TOSLINE-S20 FREQ 1 0001 0000: Disable (0) 1
REF ADDR SELECT 0001: Enable (1)
210 1 TOSLINE-S20 1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 03FF (0 ∼ 1023) 1
FREQ REFERENCE
ADDR

47
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
211 TOSLINE-S20 COMM 1 0002 0000: Data cleared (0) 1
ERROR MODE 0002: Data retained (1)
212 TOSLINE-S20 COMM 1 0004 0000: No effect (0) 1
OPTION RESET 0004: Reset (1)
213 RS485/12-BIT BINARY 0/1 0020 0000: OFF (0) 
BIAS,GAIN 0020: ON (1)
214 1 RS485/12-BIT 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY POINT #1
215 RS485/12-BIT 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01
BINARY PT. #1 FREQ
216 RS485/12-BIT 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0064 (0 ∼ 100) 1
BINARY POINT #2
217 RS485/12-BIT 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ Fmax (0 ∼ Fmax) 0.01
BINARY PT. #2 FREQ

Note: Registers 1D0 ∼ 1D2 are not standard G3 parameters accessible via the LCD keypad. They are Modbus-
specific parameters that are only accessible via the Modbus network.



 .  % /!  !

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

218 FM TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 FFFF 1194: Pre-comp ref. frequency (0) 
SELECTION 6686: Post-comp output freq. (1)
1500: Frequency setting (2)
2576: Output current (3)
2689: DC voltage (4)
5668: Output voltage (5)
3684: Torque current (6)
2688: Excitation current (7)
7506: PID feedback value (8)
0584: Motor overload ratio (9)
0586: Inverter overload ratio (10)
0588: DBR overload ratio (11)
835C: Input power (12)
835E: Output power (13)
A000: Fixed output (14)
2304: Peak output current (15)
8302: Peak input voltage (16)
219 FREQUENCY METER 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1
ADJUSTMENT
21A AM TERMINAL FUNCTION 0/1 FFFF Same as FM TERMINAL FUNCTION 
SELECTION SELECTION
21B CURRENT METER 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ FFFF 1
ADJUSTMENT

48
 
  % %)   !

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

21C INDUSTRIAL 0/1 00FF 0000: Std. Shpmt. setting (0) 
APPLICATIONS 0001: Pump application (1)
(previous setting monitor for 0002: Fan application (2)
read use only)
0003: Conveyor application (3)
0004: Hoist application (4)
0005: Textiles application (5)
0006: Machine tools appl. (6)
21D INDUSTRIAL 0/1 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
APPLICATIONS 0011: Pump application (1)
(for write use) (✴) 0012: Fan application (2)
0013: Conveyor application (3)
0014: Hoist application (4)
0015: Textiles application (5)
0016: Machine tools appl. (6)
21E STANDARD SETTING MODE 0/1 00FF 0000: Does nothing (0) 
SELECTION (✴) 0001: 50Hz std. Settings (1)
0002: 60Hz std. Settings (2)
0003: Factory settings (3)
0004: Trip clear (4)
0005: Save user-set param. (5)
0006: TYPE 5 reset (6)
0007: Initialize typeform (7)
21F COMMAND MODE SELECTION 0/1 0007 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
0001: Terminal input valid (1)
0002: Panel input valid (2)
0003: Communication interface input
valid (3)
0004: local/remote valid (4)
220 FREQUENCY MODE 0/1 0038 0000: Only RS232C valid (0) 
SELECTION 0008: Terminal input valid (1)
0010: Panel input valid (2)
0018: Communication/12-bit binary
interface input valid (3)
0020: local/remote valid (4)
221 PANEL OPERATION MODE 0/1 00FB 0000 ∼ 003F (0 ∼ 63) 1
SELECTION
(except 0004, 0008, 000C....)
222 PASS NUMBER 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 0063 (0 ∼ 99) 1
223 CPU VERSION 2 FFFF (Monitor only) 
224 ROM VERSION 3 FFFF (Monitor only) 
225 EEPROM VERSION 1 FFFF (Monitor only) 
226 INVERTER TYPEFORM 0 00FF (Monitor only) 
227 STATUS MONITOR #1 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
DISPLAY SELECT
228 STATUS MONITOR #2 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
DISPLAY SELECT
229 STATUS MONITOR #3 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
DISPLAY SELECT
22A STATUS MONITOR #4 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 0010 (1 ∼ 16) 1
DISPLAY SELECT
22B FREQUENCY UNITS SCALE 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 4E20 (0.00 ∼ 200.00) 0.01
FACTOR
22C FREQUENCY DISPLAY 0/1 0003 0000: 1Hz (0) 
RESOLUTION 0001: 0.1Hz (1)
0002: 0.01Hz (2)

49
Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier
22D ACC/DEC TIME UNITS 0/1 0004 0000: 0.1 sec. (0) 
SELECTION 0004: 0.01 sec. (1)
22E CURRENT UNITS 0/1 0008 0000: % (0) 
SELECTION 0008: A (1)
22F VOLTAGE UNITS 0/1 0010 0000: % (0) 
SELECTION 0010: V (1)
230 BLIND FUNCTION 0/1 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
SELECTION 0001: Selective unblinding (1)
231 1 FUNDAMENTAL PARAMS 0/1 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
#2 BLIND 0040: Unblind (1)
232 PANEL CONTROL 0/1 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0080: Unblind (1)
233 TERMINAL SELECTION 0/1 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0001: Unblind (1)
234 SPECIAL CONTROL 0/1 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0002: Unblind (1)
235 FREQUENCY SETTING 0/1 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0004: Unblind (1)
236 PROTECTION 0/1 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
FUNCTION PARAMS 0008: Unblind (1)
BLIND
237 PATTERN RUN 0/1 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
CONTROL PARAMS 0010: Unblind (1)
BLIND
238 FEEDBACK CONTROL 0/1 0020 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0020: Unblind (1)
239 COMMUNICATION 0/1 0040 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0040: Unblind (1)
23A INDUSTRIAL 0/1 0080 0000: Blind (0) 
APPL:PUMP PARAMS 0080: Unblind (1)
BLIND
23B INDUSTRIAL 0/1 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
APPL:FAN PARAMS 0001: Unblind (1)
BLIND
23C INDUSTRIAL APPL: 0/1 0002 0000: Blind (0) 
CONVEYOR BLIND 0002: Unblind (1)
23D INDUSTRIAL APPL: 0/1 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
HOIST BLIND 0004: Unblind (1)
23E INDUSTRIAL APPL: 0/1 0008 0000: Blind (0) 
TEXTILES BLIND 0008: Unblind (1)
23F INDUST 0/1 0010 0000: Blind (0) 
APPL:MACHINE TOOLS 0010: Unblind (1)
BLIND
240 AM/FM ADJUSTMENT 0/1 0001 0000: Blind (0) 
PARAMS BLIND 0001: Unblind (1)
241 MOTOR PARAMETERS 0/1 0004 0000: Blind (0) 
BLIND 0004: Unblind (1)

50
 
   %

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

242 NUMBER OF MOTOR POLES 0/1 00FF 0001: (2) 2
0002: (4)
0003: (6)
0004: (8)
0005: (10)
0006: (12)
0007: (14)
0008: (16)
243 MOTOR RATED CAPACITY 0/1 FFFF 0001 ∼ 270F (0.1 ∼ 999.9) 0.1
244 MOTOR TYPE 0/1 0030 0000:Toshiba EQPIII motor (0) 
0010:Toshiba STD motor (1)
0020:Other (2)
245 2 MOTOR RATED
VOLTAGE 0/1 00FF 0012 ∼ 0078 (90 ∼ 600) 5
(230 / 460v units)
246 (575v units) 001A ∼ 00AC (130 ∼ 860)
247 MOTOR RATED 0/1 00FF 0000 ∼ 00C8 (0 ∼ 400) 2
FREQUENCY
248 MOTOR RATED RPM 0/1 FFFF 0000 ∼ 270F (0 ∼ 9999) 1
249 AUTO-TUNING ENABLE 0 0008 0000: Auto-tuning disabled (0) 
0008: Auto-tuning enabled (1)
24A LOAD MOMENT OF INERTIA 0/1 00C0 0000: Small (0) 
0040: Medium (1)
0080: Large (2)
00C0: Very large (3)

  !

Register Function / Title Bank Mask Adjustment Range Multiplier

24B ∼ Programmable Address 0 FFFF 1 ∼ 24A 
26A Registers (32 total)
26B ∼ Programmable Data According to the attributes of the registers programmed in 24B∼26A
28A Registers (32 total)


$ 0 1 234 02545

51
 (&  )*  "
The following write-only “0X” coils are available via the Modbus command 05. These
coils access the same bits which are detailed in holding register 02 (refer to section
9.1 of this manual).

Coil Function Bank Function

01 RUN command DPRAM OFF: Stop
ON: Run
02 STOP Command (has priority over RUN OFF: Run enabled
command) ON: Stop
03 Forward • reverse run selection OFF: Reverse
ON: Forward
04 Acc/dec #1 / #2 selection OFF: Acc / dec #1
ON: Acc / dec #2
05 Jog mode selection OFF: Normal (acc/dec mode)
ON: Jog mode
06 Feedback control OFF: Feedback valid
ON: Feedback invalid
07 Compulsory DC injection braking mode OFF: No compulsory DC injection braking
ON: Compulsory DC injection below DC
INJECTION START FREQUENCY
08 Fundamental parameter switching OFF: V/F #1
ON: V/F #2
09 Gate block command (coast stop OFF: Normal
command) ON: Gate block
0A Emergency off command OFF: Does nothing
ON: Emergency off
0B Reset command (trip clear) OFF: Does nothing
ON: Reset
0C Reserved 
0D Reserved 
0E Reserved 
0F Reserved 
10 Reserved 

52
 (  )*  "
The following read-only “0X” coils are available via Modbus command 01. These
coils access the same bits which are detailed in holding register 06 (refer to section
9.2 of this manual).

Coil Function Bank Function

11 Run • stop status DPRAM OFF: Stopped
ON: Running
12 Run enable status OFF: Run enabled
ON: Stopped
13 Forward • reverse status OFF: Reverse
ON: Forward
14 Acc / dec #1 / #2 selection status OFF: Acc / dec #1
ON: Acc / dec #2
15 Fault status OFF: Faulted
ON: Not faulted
16 Jog mode status OFF: Normal (acc/dec mode)
ON: Jog mode
17 Feedback enable status OFF: Feedback valid
ON: Feedback invalid
18 Compulsory DC injection braking mode OFF: DC injection braking inactive
status ON: DC injection braking active
19 Fundamental parameter switching status OFF: V/F #1
ON: V/F #2
1A Coast stop command status OFF: Normal
ON: Coasting to stop
1B Emergency off command status OFF: Normal
ON: Emergency off
1C Main circuit undervoltage (MSV) status OFF: Normal
ON: MSV
1D Reserved 
1E Reserved 
1F Reserved 
20 Reserved 

53
 (,   #  "
LCD Display Message Data Explanation
(Hex)
NO ERROR ××00 No error has been recorded since the last inverter reset or trip clear

OVERCURRENT (ACCEL) ××01 Overcurrent during acceleration

(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (DECEL) ××02 Overcurrent during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××03 Overcurrent during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOAD-END OVERCURRENT ××04 Load-end overcurrent detected at start-up (output terminals, motor wiring
(PRESS CLEAR) etc.)
U-PHASE SHORT CKT ××05 U-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
V-PHASE SHORT CKT ××06 V-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
W-PHASE SHORT CKT ××07 W-phase armature short circuit
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST INPUT PHASE ××08 Lost input phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
LOST OUTPUT PHASE ××09 Lost output phase (option)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (ACCEL) ××0A Overvoltage during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (DECEL) ××0B Overvoltage during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERVOLTAGE (RUN) ××0C Overvoltage during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
INVERTER OVERLOAD ××0D Inverter overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
MOTOR OVERLOAD ××0E Motor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERLOAD TRIP ××0F Dynamic braking resistor overload
(PRESS CLEAR)
OVERHEAT TRIP ××10 Inverter overheat
(PRESS CLEAR)
EMERGENCY OFF ××11 Emergency off
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM WRITE FAILURE ××12 EEPROM failure during write
(PRESS CLEAR)
EEPROM READ FAILURE ××13 EEPROM failure during initial read
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××14 Unused
RAM ERROR ××15 RAM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
ROM ERROR ××16 ROM error
(PRESS CLEAR)
CPU ERROR ××17 CPU error
(PRESS CLEAR)
COMMUNICATION ERROR ××18 RS232C timer time-out
(PRESS CLEAR)
GATE ARRAY FAULT ××19 Gate array error
(PRESS CLEAR)

54
 LCD Display Message Data Explanation
(Hex)
CURRENT DETECT ERROR ××1A Output current detection circuit error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION PCB ERROR ××1B Option PCB error
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPTION ROM ERROR ××1C Option ROM error
LOW CURRENT TRIP ××1D Low current
(PRESS CLEAR)
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP ××1E Main circuit undervoltage
(PRESS CLEAR)
 ××1F Unused
OVERTORQUE TRIP ××20 Overtorque
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (SOFT) ××21 Earth fault (software)
(PRESS CLEAR)
EARTH FAULT (HARD) ××22 Earth fault (hardware)
(PRESS CLEAR)
OPEN FUSE TRIP ××23 Open fuse
(PRESS CLEAR)
DBR OVERCURRENT TRIP ××24 Dynamic braking resistor overcurrent
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (ACC) ××25 Overcurrent in DC section during acceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (DEC) ××26 Overcurrent in DC section during deceleration
(PRESS CLEAR)
DC OVERCURRENT (RUN) ××27 Overcurrent in DC section during constant-speed run
(PRESS CLEAR)
AUTO-TUNING ERROR ××28 Auto-tuning error
(PRESS CLEAR)
INV TYPEFORM ERROR ××29 Inverter typeform error
(PRESS READ/WRITE)

55

, - 

56
57
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
13131 W est Little York Rd., Houston, TX 77041
Tel: [800] 231-1412 Fax: [713] 466-8773 Telex: 762078
W orld W ide W eb http://www.tic.toshiba.com

Printed in U.S.A
 TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

1. PURPOSE

The purpose of this document is:

• To outline the minimum testing procedures required by TIC (Toshiba International
Corporation) to test a Schlumberger UniConn Controller installed in a Toshiba G3 or G7
ASD (SWD, SS2K+, or Titan)
• To outline the required steps to be conducted by TIC to load the default values with
which each UniConn should be shipped with from TIC.

2. PROCEDURE

a) The following items are required for each ASD:

• UniConn – Universal Site Controller – 1 ea
• UniConn Isolated Communication Card – 1ea; two possible models:
RS232 model only – only to be used with G3 ASD (see Figure 1-a below; note:
will disappear, replaced by the model below)

Schlumberger Private
RS232/485 model – can be used with both G3 & G7 ASD (see Figure 1-b below)

Figure 1 – UniConn Isolated Communication Card; (a-left) works w/RS-232 only-only to

be used with G3 ASD, (b-right) RS232/485 model-can be used with both G3/G7 ASD

b) Install and secure the Communication Card in expansion slot 1 (front-most) of the
UniConn; connect the communication cable from G3/G7 to the Communication Card’s
port – if using RS232/485 model (as in Figure 1-b):
• With G3 ASD – connect on top (RS-232) port – 5 pin

EPC - Edmonton Page 1 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

• With G7 ASD – connect on bottom (RS-485) port – 6 pin

See Figure 2 below for detail.

Figure 2 – UniConn RS232/485 Isolated Communication Card Port Connectors

c) Power up the VSD with UniConn connected. Make sure:

• The UniConn display comes up, indicating that the UniConn is powered up

Schlumberger Private
• Both LEDs on the Communication Card’s face-plate (MAIN & ISO) come up.

d) Check revision of software installed. To do this – from Status screen (first screen after
powered-up) – press any of the five keys below the display then follow the following
sequence: MENU – SETUP; the first screen that shows up then shows the UniConn’s
Serial Number and firmware revision. If it is not the latest Revision “flash” the Uniconn
with the latest revision supplied by Schlumberger Edmonton Product Center using a 9-
pin serial cable.

e) Configuring UniConn to perform operational test:

1. Using WellView software:

• Plug-in an RS-232 cable to the front communication port of the UniConn (DB-9
female port), then plug in the other end of the cable to the serial port of a
desktop/laptop.
• Double-click Wellview icon on the computer’s desktop (see Figure 3 on next page)
• Select File -> New from Wellview’s menu bar; wait for Wellview to detect the
connected UniConn; see comparison of Figure 4-a & 4-b to see Wellview screen

EPC - Edmonton Page 2 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 !

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

snapshots before & after Wellview detected UniConn. Note that the default site-
name is Stenam00.ste.
• Select File -> New from Wellview’s menu bar, then select & open TICTest.ste file.
Have Wellview window of both files visible in the same screen; left-click once in
TICTest.ste window, the drag and drop it in Stename00.ste to copy the test
configuration (see Figure 5). Two dialogue windows will appear asking confirmation
– select “Yes” on both. You’d see this has been completed once the sitename

Schlumberger Private
Figure 3 – WellView icon on desktop

EPC - Edmonton Page 3 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 "

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Schlumberger Private
Figure 4-a – Wellview screen while establishing communication with connected UniConn;
note empty status bar & event log window & comm. speed switching

EPC - Edmonton Page 4 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 #

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Schlumberger Private
Figure 4-b – Wellview screen with established communication with connected UniConn;
note status bar & event log window display live values

EPC - Edmonton Page 5 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 $

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Left click once in TICTest.ste

window, then drag & drop in
Stename00.ste window to copy
test configuration

Schlumberger Private
Figure 5- Copying test configuration to UniConn being tested

changes from “Sitename00” to TICTest”

• In TICTest window: double click on “Restart Timer” window; the associated set-up
window will appear as can be seen in Figure 6. Change the port function (circled in
Figure 6) as applicable by selecting from the drop-down list:
I. SWD - G3 ASD with Sinewave filter
II. SS2K - G3 ASD without Sinewave filter
III. TITAN – G7 ASD with or without Sinewave filter

EPC - Edmonton Page 6 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 %

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Schlumberger Private
Figure 6 – Setting up port function according to drive type

2. Manual procedure to set-up UniConn for testing – if Wellview is not available or not
working:
• Using the UniConn controller perform a reset to UniConn factory defaults.

MENU SETUP UNICONN ADJ RESET TO FACTORY DEFAULTS YES

• Program the UniConn for VSD operation using the settings as outlined below.
These would be the same settings seen through Wellview (configured at TIC).

MENU SETUP OPTION PORTS PORT 1 FUNCTION SWD (G3 WITH SINEWAVE
FILTER),
SS2K (G3 WITHOUT SINEWAVE
FILTER),
TITAN (G7 WITH/OUT FILTER)
Menu VSD VSD Motor Amps VSD UL Action BYPASS

EPC - Edmonton Page 7 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 &

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Menu VSD Load Rotation Action BYPASS

Menu VSD Load C_UNBAL Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Average Amps Underload Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Average Amps Overload Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Stall Time Stall Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Stall Time Short_CCT Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Volts Rotation Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Volts V_UNBAL Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Average Volts Undervolts Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Average Volts Overvolts Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Power Factor PWR_FACTOR Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Frequency LO_FREQ Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Frequency HI_FREQ Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Supply Volts HI_SUPPLY Alarm Setpoint 250V
Motor Spin
Menu VSD (Forward:) SPIN Action BYPASS
Menu VSD Ground Unbalance LEG_GROUND Action BYPASS

Schlumberger Private
• Return to the main menu and press the Hand button and then start.

f) The UniConn default settings allow the VSD to ramp to 60Hz. Let the drive run for 1-5
minutes; verify that the UniConn status screen correctly displays VSD’s output voltage
(460-480V) and running speed (60 Hz); output current displayed should be close to
zero. Press the RED off button on UniConn face-plate to conclude test.

g) Return the VSD UL setting to LOG+STOP and clear any alarms (lockouts or latched).
1. Manual method:
• To change VSD UL action setting:

MENU VSD VSD MOTOR AMPS VSD UL ACTION LOG+STOP

• To clear alarms- on the same screen as MENU / HAND /AUTO – if any latched
alarm is active “UNLATCH” will appear – select this; if any lock-out alarm is active,
“UNLOCK” will appear - – select this.

2. Using Wellview:

EPC - Edmonton Page 8 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 '

TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

• To change VSD UL setting – double click VSD window; on the pop-up window
that appears (see Figure 7-a below), click on “Alarm Settings” button, on the
next window that appears (see Figure 7-b) – from the “Action” drop-down list
below “UNDERLOAD”, select “LOG+STOP”. Click OK on the two pop-up
windows to return to the main screen
• To clear latched & lock-out alarms, click once on “Unlatch Alarms” & “Clear
Lockout” buttons (see Figure 7-c).

Figure 7-a – VSD Pop-Up window – click on Alarm Settings Schlumberger Private

h) Using Wellview, click on the Clear Statistical Log button. From Wellview’s menu bar
select File -> Database – Special Functions, then click once on “Clear All Statistical
and Log History” (see Figure 8). Select OK on the appearing dialogue window. If
Wellview does not accomplish this, press the RED off button on UniConn once. The
event log window would be clean if this is completed.

EPC - Edmonton Page 9 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

i) If UniConn configuration and testing is done using Wellview software, perform random
check on five parameters to confirm UniConn parameter updates have been done

Schlumberger Private
Figure 7-b – Setting VSD Underload Action to LOG+STOP after completing testing

EPC - Edmonton Page 10 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Schlumberger Private
Figure 7-c – Clearing any existing latched alarm (left button) and lock-out (right button)

successfully through Wellview; pick the parameters from the table in Page 6 of this
procedure. Record the supposed value with actual values obtained; if discrepancy(ies)
is/are found, manually set all the values from the table through UniConn faceplate.

j) Refer back to and complete VSD testing procedures.

EPC - Edmonton Page 11 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 TEST PROCEDURE
UNICONN TESTING AT TOSHIBA
Prepared by: M. Kayadarma Design Engineer: Max Kante Records: M. Jackson
Date prepared: 7-Nov-2005 Mfg. Engineer: Dan Travers Proj. Mgr: Darcy Ryan

Schlumberger Private
Figure 8 – Clearing UniConn logs prior to shipping

EPC - Edmonton Page 12 of 12 Document No. DOC 100255880 RevAA

Property of Schlumberger - Do not disclose, use or reproduce without written approval from Schlumberger.
Propriété de Schlumberger - Ne pas exposer, utiliser ou copier sans l'autorisation expresse de Schlumberger
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECCL05
Industrial Division – Control Plant Revision Level: 4
Checklist for Inverters Page Number: 1 of 1

Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
End Item Serial#______________________VFD S/N:_____________________Order Qty:________Line:____________
Setup
1. Check that all documents are present.
2. Verify that all parts are present per pull sheet.
3. Check for damaged parts.
4. Verify parts per rating sheet.
5. Ensure all parts are fastened properly.
6. Ensure device labels are properly attached.
7. Ensure all documents go to the next station.
Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Wiring
1. Check that all documents are present.
2. Check for damaged parts.
3. Ensure wiring matches wiring diagram.
4. Ensure that polarities on diode installations are correct.
5. Ensure lugs are crimped properly.
6. Ensure all terminations are properly torqued and marked.
7. Ensure all documents go to the next station.
Wired By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Cabling
1. Check that all documents are present.
2. Check for damaged parts.
3. Verify cable size per wiring diagram.
4. Ensure lugs are crimped properly.
5. Ensure all terminations are properly torqued and marked.
6. Ensure all documents go to the next station.
Cabled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Final Assembly
1. Check that all documents are present.
2. Check for damaged parts.
3. Ensure subpanel is tightened and torqued.
4. Ensure wiring to door devices matches wiring diagram. (If applicable)
5. Ensure breaker trip unit is properly torqued and marked.
6. Ensure lugs are crimped properly.
7. Ensure all terminations are properly torqued and marked.
8. Ensure unit is cleaned and wiped out.
9. Ensure all documents go to the next station.
Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
QC
1. Assembly inspections verified and all documentation present and complete.
2. Unit checked against drawings and write-up.
3. Unit checked for loose wires and hardware.
4. Polarities on diode installations verified.
5. Power cables inspected prior to power-up.
Inspected By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Comments

Inspected By: Date: Pass QC Ready For Test

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECCT13
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 3
Checklist and Test Record for Heat Sink Assemblies Page Number: 1 of 1

Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
Serial #: Area:
Assembly
Caution: Before assembly begins, ensure assembler and subassembly are properly grounded to prevent static electricity discharge!!
Use
grounding straps and rods at all times during this assembly. Wear static resistant gloves while handling IGBT’s.
1. All required parts present and verified against assembly prints. Assembly diagrams must be issued with each order.
2. Assembly prints checked for additional drilling requirements on heat sink. If additional drilling is required, ensure the
following steps are followed with great care.
A. Ensure that the correct diameter hole is drilled in the correct location.
B. Ensure that a thorough deburring is accomplished after the holes have been drilled and tapped. Mounting surface must
be very smooth to the touch.
C. Ensure that the heat sink is free of metal flakes by using a low-pressure air hose to clean all areas.
D. Proper positioning double-checked.
Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Inverter/Converter Assembly
1. Ensure that all contact surfaces of IGBT’s, diodes, and heat sink are wiped cleaned with alcohol.
2. Ensure all IGBT’s of an inverter assembly have the same grade. If this is not feasible use the following guidelines:
A. All IGBT’s in the same arm must be of the same grade.
B. All IGBT’s in the same phase must be within one grade of each other.
Note: Positive arm is toward the upper three IGBT’s; negative arm is toward the lower three IGBT’s.
Caution: If you are unsure about which IGBT to use, Do Not Guess! Ask Your Supervisor!
3. Layer of jointing compound (Nikkei-S200 or equal) applied to all IGBT’s and diodes, as required by prints, prior to assembly.
(Ensure enough is used to provide a good solid contact between components.)
4. Mounting fixture ME239 used to maintain required spacing between IGBT’s.
5. IGBT’s and diodes secured and mounting screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
6. Gate-protect and snubber PCB part numbers (from component side) verified with prints.
7. Gate-protect boards installed and screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
8. Bus bars and snubber boards installed and screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
9. Mark IGBT grades on QC label. Indicate positive and negative arm. (i.e. 25+/24-)
Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Test/QC
1. Leakage test performed on IGBT phase assemblies. Refer to 5EC0048 for tolerances.
Leakage - Pos-AC - µA AC-Neg - µA
2. Resistance across base-emitter leads recorded.
Resistance - U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
3. Assembly inspected for cleanliness and damage.
Comments

U V W

+ - + - + -
µ
Leakage
Ω
Resistance

Tested By: Inspected By: Date: Pass Test and QC Ready for Installation

This document to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECCT22
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 1
Checklist and Test Record for S3 & G3+ Heat Sink Assemblies Page Number: 1 of 1

Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
Serial #: Area:
Assembly
Caution: Before assembly begins, ensure assembler and subassembly are properly grounded to prevent static electricity discharge!!
Use
Grounding straps and rods at all times during this assembly. Wear static resistant gloves while handling IGBT’s.
___1. All required parts present and verified against assembly prints. Assembly diagrams must be issued with each order.

Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:

Inverter/Converter Assembly
1. Ensure that all contact surfaces of IGBT’s, diodes, and heat sink are wiped cleaned with alcohol.
2. Ensure all IGBT’s of an inverter assembly have the same date code/EUPEC. If this is not feasible use the following guidelines:
Refer to D-IR0034
A. All IGBT’s in the same arm must be of the same date code.
B. All IGBT’s in the same phase must be within one date code of each other.
Note: Positive arm is the right three IGBT’s; negative arm is the left three IGBT’s.
Caution: If you are unsure about which IGBT to use, Do Not Guess! Ask Your Supervisor!
3. Layer of jointing compound applied to all IGBT’s and diodes, as required by prints, prior to assembly.
(Ensure enough is used to provide a good solid contact between components.)
4. Mounting fixture used to maintain required spacing between IGBT’s.
5. IGBT’s and diodes secured and mounting screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
6. Gate-protect and snubber PCB part numbers (from component side) verified with prints.
7. Gate-protect boards installed and screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
8. Bus bars and snubber boards installed and screws tightened to torque values specified on assembly diagrams.
9. Mark IGBT grade/date code on QC label. Indicate positive and negative arm. (i.e. +/- 0139A)
Assembled By: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Test/QC
1. Leakage test performed on Heat Sink assemblies. Refer to 8EC0048 for tolerances.
Leakage - Pos-AC - µA Neg-AC - µA
2. Resistance across base-emitter leads recorded.
Resistance - U- KΩ V- KΩ W-
KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
3. Assembly inspected for cleanliness and damage.
Comments

Tested By: Inspected By: Date: Pass Test and QC Ready for Installation

This document to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECQF10
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 2
Assembly Check Sheet – Heat Sink Page Number: 1 of 1

Inspection Data Sheet

Production Order: Project:

Assembly

Assembler Inspector Date

1. Verify IGBT to B.O.M. _________ ________ ______

(Material list must have part number also)

2. Mount IGBT to heat Sink W/ Coating applied. _________ ________ ______

3. QC: Test Polarity of IGBT (See Diagram) _________ ________ ______

4. QC: Torque IGBT 26 1bin, No. 2 Ph. Tip _________ ________ ______

5. Verify Rectifiers to B.O.M. _________ ________ ______

6. Mount Rectifiers to heat sink with coating applied. _________ ________ ______

7. QC: Test Polarity of Rectifiers _________ ________ ______

8. QC: Torque Rectifiers 26 1bin , No. 2, Ph. Tip _________ ________ ______

9. Verify bus and protect boards to B.O.M. _________ ________ ______

10. Position boards onto IGBT _________ ________ ______

11. Verify wire assemblies to B.O.M. _________ ________ ______

12. Secure boards and attach wiring with hardware. _________ ________ ______

Note: Lug Position

13. Torque 121bin, No. 2, Ph. Tip _________ ________ ______

14. Mount snubber boards. Attach wires per dwg. _________ ________ ______

15. Torque snubber boards 26 1bin, No 3, Ph. Tip _________ ________ ______

16. Attach remaining bus and main fuses _________ ________ ______

17. Torque: ¼-20: 120 1bin, 7/16 deep socket _________ ________ ______

18. Torque: Mid: 15 lb ft, 13mm short socket _________ ________ ______

19. Torque Main Fuses _________ ________ ______

3/8-16: 19 lb ft, 9/16 open end wrench (special)

20. Hold completed assembly for electrial test before installation. _________ ________ ______

Quality Control

Final Q.C. Test:

Final Q.C. Inspection:

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECQF11
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 4
In-Process Inspection Large Drive Page Number: 1 of 1

Inspection Data Sheet

Production Order: __________________ Project: ________________ End Item #:

_____________________

Item: _______________________ Work Area: __________________

Assembly

Assembler Inspector Date

Cabinet Assembly _________ ________ ______

Sub-Assembly Installation _________ ________ ______

HMI Reda Installation _________ ________ ______

Inverter Assembly _________ ________ ______

Cap Assembly _________ ________ ______

Power Board Assembly _________ ________ ______

OutPut Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Input CB Assembly _________ ________ ______

CTT Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Power Supply Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Cap Discharge Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Soft Starter Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Surge Suppressor Assembly _________ ________ ______

General Wiring Panels _________ ________ ______

Wiring Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Cable Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Final Wire Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Assembly Final QC _________ ________ ______

Final In-Process Inspection _________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

Quality Control

Final Q.C. Test:

Final Q.C. Inspection:

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECQF12
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 4
In-Process Inspection Small Drives Page Number: 1 of 1

Inspection Data Sheet

Production Order: _________________ Project: ________________End Item #: ____________________

Item: _____________________ Work Area: _________________

Assembly

Assembler Inspector Date

Cabinet Assembly _________ ________ ______

Power Supply Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Right Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

Output Panel Assembly _________ ________ ______

HMI Reda Installation _________ ________ ______

Sub-Assembly Installation _________ ________ ______

General Wiring Panels _________ ________ ______

Wiring Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Cable Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Final Wire Cabinet _________ ________ ______

Assembly Final QC _________ ________ ______

Final In-Process Inspection _________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

_________ ________ ______

Quality Control

Final Q.C. Test:

Final Q.C. Inspection:

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECTR18
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 11
Test Record for 454kVA and Below G3, & H3 plus pack units Page Number: 1 of 1

Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
End Item Serial#____________________VFD S/N ________________________Order Qty.: Line:
HMI___________________________________
Visual Inspection
1. Assembly inspections verified and all documentation present and complete. Dwg #: Rev.:
___ 2. Unit checked against drawings and write-up and build-up options verified.
___ 3. Enclosure: Serial #________________________________ Manufactured by: _____________________________
___4. HMI Check: Model *_________________Serial *___________________ Revision *_________________________
Pre-Power Checks

Option Yes Option Yes Option Yes Option Yes

Circuit Breaker ACL NEMA 1 10A GFCI outlet
DCL 12 pulse input Bypass
Junction box Dynamic Braking Space heater
1. Unit checked for loose wires and hardware.
2. Jumpers set prior to power-up. (Jumper settings depend upon installed options.) Do not change jumper settings after
power has been applied.
A. Jumpers set. JP3 (AM term.) JP4 (FM term.) (0-1mA or 4-20mA) Rom V._____________
B. Dip switch sw1 set. (I for IV input, V for RR input) (5V or 10V ref. to RR) P#_____________
3. Polarities on diode installations verified. S/N_____________
4. Power cables inspected prior to power-up. Input terminals are L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T). Output terminals Soft ware V_____
are T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W). Connecting input voltage to the output terminals will damage the inverter.
Main Power
1. Supply voltage verified. Input voltage --- Vrms
2. Parameters set. Refer to job drawings for current ratings.
Utility Param. All drives Terminal Selection Param. Su Programming
Blind Funct. Selection 1 “Input Terminal Selection 1 EEP Address 046A set to 20
Term. Selection Params. 1 S4 Input Terminal Funct 10 *EEP Address 0380 set to ____________
Special Control Params 1 Refer. dwg # 18 of schematics
Carrier frequency 2.2

3. Test S4 interlock (trip drive on e-stop) *Set for drives that are re-rated
4. HMI communications checked. Drive starts and stops.
5. Inverter run to 60 Hz with motor load.
6. Output waveform with proper PWM verified. Output voltage --- Vrms (≤ input voltage)
7. Inverter run to 60 Hz with no load.
8. Current monitored while loading inverter.
9. Installed options function properly.
10. Parameter settings reconfirmed.
11. Turn off power to re-initialize drive.
12. Turn on power and recheck all software settings.
Final QC
1. Unit inspected for paint defects or damage.
2. Label placement verified.
3. Customer pack verified.
4. Test report completely filled-out and signed
5. Disconnect Battery, HMI
Comments

Tested By: Inspected By: Date: Pass Test and QC Ready To Ship

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECTR19
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 5
Test Record for 518KVA to 1200KVA Units Page Number: 1 of 3
(R3-451K, R3-460K, R3-470K, R3-481K, R3-493K, R3-410L, R3-412L)
Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
Serial #: Customer: Order Qty.: Area:
Unit Rating: kVA V Amps HMI Version: Dwg. #: Rev.:
Visual Inspection
1. Order write-up checked and compared to unit.
2. Components checked against rating sheet in job drawings. P#__________________
3. Main PCB’s checked. ROM V.___________ S/N_________________
Control: (46942-CC) Serial # Interface: (46822A-CC) Serial #
Base Drive: (42071A-CC) Serial # Serial # Serial #
HMI Model # _______________ Serial #_______________ Revision #______________
4. Mark all IGBT gate leads and 42071A-CC PCB’s with proper phase indication.
5. Capacitor polarity (orientation) checked.
6. DC bus discharging contactor checked for orientation and connection.
7. PCB’s checked for components touching.
8. Main circuit checked for continuity and short circuits. (Highlight drawings)
9. IGBT heatsink QC marks and rating number on IGBT’s
___10. Enclosure U. L. Serial#______________________________________ Manufactured by: ____________________________
Insulation Resistance
1. Conditions: Ambient Temperature --- °F Humidity --- %
2. Insulation Resistance Main Circuit --- MΩ Control Circuit --- MΩ
(@ 500V > 5MΩ) (@ 500V > 5MΩ)
3. Withstand Voltage Test Main Circuit --- mA Control Circuit --- mA
(1min. @ 2.5kV < 35mA) (1min.@ 1.5kV < 5mA)
Pre-Power Checks
1. Short circuit checks OK.
2. Leakage current recorded from heat sink tests (Form 5ECCT13. Ref. procedures 5EC0048.)
Master Leakage - U- µA V - µA W-________µA X-________µA Y-________µA Z-_________µA
Slave A Leakage - U- µA V - µA W-________µA X-________µA Y-________µA Z-_________µA
Slave B Leakage - U- µA V - µA W-________µA X-________µA Y-________µA Z-_________µA
3. Gate lead data recorded from heat pipe tests and verified prior to power-up.
Master Res. - U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
Slave A Res. - U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
Slave B Res. - U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
4. Jumper positions verified. Jumpers set prior to power-up. (Jumper settings depend upon installed options.) Do not change
jumper settings after power has been applied.
On 46822A-CC Interface
Unit 451K 460K 470K 481K 493K 410L 412L
SW1 Off On Off On Off On Off
SW2 Off Off On On Off Off On
SW3 Off Off Off Off On On On
SW4 On On On On On On On
SW5 On On On On On On On
SW6 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
SW7 On On On On On On On
SW8 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
SW9 X X X X X X X *Not Used
SW10 On On On On Off Off Off
A. Jumpers set. JP3 (AM term.) JP4 (FM term.) (0-1mA or 4-20mA)
B. Dip switch sw1 set. (I for IV input, V for RR input) (5V or 10V ref. to RR)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECTR19
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 5
Test Record for 518KVA to 1200KVA Units Page Number: 2 of 3
(R3-451K, R3-460K, R3-470K, R3-481K, R3-493K, R3-410L, R3-412L)
Control Power
1. Parameters set.
Utility Param. Terminal Selection Param. REDA HMI Programming
Blind Funct. Selection 1 “Input Terminal Selection 1 Press and HOLD CLEAR during power up. HMI
Term. Selection Params. 1 S4 Input Terminal Funct 10 will say New Installation. Set Drive amps only.
Su Programming Follow the procedure. Use defaults for the rest
EEP Address 046A 20 of the inputs. Finish all questions until complete.

2. Power supplies checked.

P15 (14.4~15.6) --- Vdc P5 (4.75~5.25) --- Vdc P8 (7~9.5) --- Vdc
N15 (-14.4~-15.6) --- Vdc P24 (21~27) --- Vdc
REFERENCE to test point “N1A” .
P15A (14.4~15.6) ---_________Vdc N15A (-14.4~-15.6)---_______Vdc
REFERENCE to test point “N1”.
P15B (14.4~15.6) ---_________Vdc N15B (-14.4~-15.6)---_______Vdc
____3. BUV level on 42071A. Vary CN6A voltage with variac (<195VAC) Master______ Slave A_______ Slave B________
____4. Base pulse checked for offset. U______ V_______ W______ X______ Y_______ Z________
5. Motor pulses checked. U~V V~W W~X
6. Shunt trip circuit checked. Door Switch Timer Fuse Trip Other
7. “OH” trip confirmed.
8. Fan direction checked.
9. Control logic special to drive tested and highlighted on job drawings.
Main Power **(Check To Make Sure Back Test Cover Is In Place)**
1. Base drive overvoltage tests
MUV Level MTV Level OP Level IGBT7 (DB Only)
(366~413Vdc) (720~780Vdc) (787~852Vdc) (≈760v)
Master
2. Positive and negative capacitor voltages measured at 760Vdc.
Cap Bank 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Master Pos. Caps (<390Vdc)
Master Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave A Pos. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave A Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave B Pos. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave B Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)
3. Discharge test (Dc bus should discharge to less than 50V within 5 MIN sec. after power is turned off) min.
4. Motor run / load test
A. Inverter run to 60 Hz with no motor load.
B. Inverter run to 60 Hz with motor load.
C. Input voltage measured with Fluke87.
D. Dc bus voltage measured with Fluke87. Bus Voltage --- Vdc (Ref. only)
E. Output voltage measured @ 60 Hz with Fluke87. Output Voltage --- Vrms (Ref. only)
F. Current feedback display checked.
G. Surge voltages (IGBT<200V, FWD<250V) measured at 100% of rated current. See rating sheet of drawings for unit’s rated
current. FWD surges required only if VFWD > VIGBT.

Rated Current --- A Actual Current --- A Dc Bus Voltage --- Vdc
Master IGBT Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---
FWD Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---
Slave A IGBT Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---
FWD Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---
Slave B IGBT Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---
FWD Surges U--- V--- W--- X--- Y--- Z---

____H. Load balance (Measure current between power unit and ACL). Balance=5%.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECTR19
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 5
Test Record for 518KVA to 1200KVA Units Page Number: 3 of 3
(R3-451K, R3-460K, R3-470K, R3-481K, R3-493K, R3-410L, R3-412L)
Uφ Vφ Wφ
Master
Slave A
Slave B

I. Load tested for 30 minutes. K. Auto restart checked twice with motor load.
J. Overload tested. Inverter loaded to 110% L. Cycle test performed.
for 60 sec.
5. All super user settings and standard factory parameters reconfirmed.
A. Parameter settings reconfirmed. D. Turn off power to re-initialize drive.
B. Current feedback scaling reconfirmed. E. Turn on power recheck all software settings.
C. Factory settings reset. (TYP 3 reset)

Final QC
1. Shunt trip reconnected. 5. Customer pack verified.
2. Pots on PCB’s paint locked. 6. Test report completely filled out and signed.
3. Label placement verified. 7. Test report filed with copy of test drawings.
4. Unit inspected for paint defects or damage.
Comments

Inspected By: Tested By: Date: Pass Test and QC Ready To Ship

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 5ECTR30
Industrial Division - Control Plant Revision Level: 3
SINE WAVE Page Number: 1 of 2
Test Record for 518kVA and Below G3, & H3 plus pack units

Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
End Item Serial#____________________VFD S/N ________________________Order Qty.: Line:
UniConn Version________________________________
Visual Inspection
1. Assembly inspections verified and all documentation present and complete. Dwg #: Rev.:
___ 2. Unit checked against drawings and write-up and build-up options verified.
___ 3. Enclosure: Serial #________________________________ Manufactured by: _____________________________
___4. UniConn Check Model#____________________Serial#____________________Revision#_______________
5. Scada Isolated I/O Card: Port#_______ Serial#_________________________ Rev.#_________________
Pre-Power Checks

Option Yes Option Yes Option Yes Option Yes

Circuit Breaker ACL NEMA 1 10A GFCI outlet
DCL 12 pulse input Bypass
Junction box Dynamic Braking Space heater
1. Unit checked for loose wires and hardware including MS1, MS2 & Precharged Resistor.
2. Jumpers set prior to power-up. (Jumper settings depend upon installed options.) Do not change jumper settings after
power has been applied.
A. Jumpers set. JP3 (AM term.) JP4 (FM term.) (0-1mA or 4-20mA)
Rom V._____________ P#________________ S/N___________________________
B. Dip switch sw1 set. (I for IV input, V for RR input) (5V or 10V ref. to RR)
3. Polarities on diode installations verified.
4. Verify jumper settings between ST to CC (Jumper settings depend upon installed options).
5. Check Connections and Fuse’s switches inside Sinewave Filter (If Applicable).
6. Power cables inspected prior to power-up. Input terminals are L1, L2, L3 (R, S, T). Output terminals
are T1, T2, T3 (U, V, W). Connecting input voltage to the output terminals will damage the inverter.
Main Power
1. Supply voltage verified. Input voltage --- Vrms
2. Parameters set. Refer to job drawings for current ratings.
Utility Param. All drives Terminal Selection Param. Su Programming
Blind Funct. Selection 1 “Input Terminal Selection 1 EEP Address 046A set to 20
Term. Selection Params. 1 S4 Input Terminal Funct 10
Special Control Params 1 518kva Only
Carrier frequency 2.2 Gate Driver DSI-J14, J15, J17
Protection Params 1 Type Form 58
Output Short-Circuit Dct 3
3. Test S4 interlock (trip drive on e-stop) *Set for drives that are re-rated
4. UniConn communications checked. Drive starts and stops.(Disconnect Battery when loading program)
5. Inverter run to 60 Hz with motor load using the UniConn.
6. Output voltage --- Vrms
7. Inverter run to 60 Hz with no load using the UniConn.
8. Current monitored while loading inverter.
9. Installed options function properly.
10. Parameter settings reconfirmed. Refer to UniConn settings.
11. Turn off power to re-initialize drive.
12. Turn on power and recheck all software settings.
Final QC
1. Unit inspected for paint defects or damage.
2. Label placement verified and proper Schlumberger logos installed.
3. Customer pack verified including 2 manuals: the appropriate Schlumberger VSD (Sinewave or non-Sinewave) and UniConn
Manuals. May be in CD format.
4. Additional options added checked against purchase order, if applicable.
5. Loose items received from Schlumberger Edmonton Product Center shipped inside drive, if applicable.
6. Unit properly packaged according to shipping specifications.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
___7. Test report completely filled out and signed.
___8. Test report filed with copy of test drawings.
Comments

Tested By: Inspected By: Date: Pass Test and QC Ready To Ship

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
Industrial Division - Control Plant Document Number: 5ECTR31
Test Record for S3B451K to S3B415L / G3+A451K to G3+A415L Units Revision Level: 2
Page 1 of 4
Project Data
Production Order: Project: Item: Date:
Serial #: Customer: Order Qty.: Area:
Unit Rating: kVA V Amps Dwg. #: Rev.:
UniConn Version __________________
Visual Inspection
1. Order write-up checked and compared to unit.
2. Components checked against rating sheet in job drawings.
3. Main PCB’s checked.
Control: (03828 TYPE D) Serial # ROM V. Serial #
Gate Drive: (42755P4___) Serial # Serial A # Serial B#
Interface: (PC61910P109A)Serial # GND PCB: (PC61910P108A) Serial #
UniConn Model # Serial # Revision #
4. Unit checked for loose wires and hardware including MSI & MS2 contactors and
Precharge Resistor.
5. Mark all IGBT gate leads and 42755P4* PCB’s with proper phase indication.
6. Capacitor polarity (orientation) checked.
7. DC bus discharging contactor checked for orientation and connection.
8. PCB’s checked for components touching.
9. Main circuit checked for continuity and short circuits. (Highlight drawings)
10. IGBT heatsink QC marks and rating number on IGBT’s
12.Enclosure U. L. Serial # Manufactured by:
12.Scada Isolated I/O Card: Port#________ Serial#_____________________ Rev#__________
Insulation Resistance
1. Conditions: Ambient Temperature - °F Humidity - %
2. Insulation Resistance Main Circuit - MΩ (@ 500V > 5MΩ)
Control Circuit - MΩ (@ 500V > 5MΩ)
3. Withstand Voltage Test Main Circuit - mA; 1min. @ 2.5kV
2 Bridge mA limits: 2P < 35, 2P+SW < 37, 3P < 48, 3P+SW < 50
3 Bridge mA limits: 2P < 53, 2P+SW < 56, 3P < 72, 3P+SW < 75
Control Circuit - mA (1min. @ 1.5kV < 5mA)
Pre-Power Checks
1. Leakage current recorded from heat sink tests (Form 5ECCT22, Procedure 8EC0048.)
Master Leakage - Pos - μA Neg - μA
Slave A Leakage - Pos - μA Neg - μA
Slave B Leakage - Pos - μA Neg - μA
2. Gate lead data recorded from heat sink tests and verified prior to power-up.
Master Res. - U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
Slave A Res.- U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
Slave B Res.- U- KΩ V- KΩ W- KΩ X- KΩ Y- KΩ Z- KΩ
3. Jumper settings between ST to CC (Jumper settings depend upon installed options.).
Set prior to power-up. Do not change jumper settings after power has been applied.
4. Verify DIP Switches on PC61910P109A Interface:
Unit 451K 460K 470K 481K 493K 410L 412L 414L 415L
SW1-J11 Off On Off On Off On Off On Off
SW2-J12 Off Off On On Off Off On On Off
SW3-J13 Off Off Off Off On On On On Off
SW4-J14 On On On On On On On On Off
SW5-J15 On On On On On On On On Off
SW6-J16 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
SW7-J17 On On On On On On On On On
SW8-J8 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
SW9-n/a Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
SW10-3P Off Off Off Off *Off *Off On On On
This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
Industrial Division - Control Plant Document Number: 5ECTR31
Test Record for S3B451K to S3B415L / G3+A451K to G3+A415L Units Revision Level: 2
Page 2 of 4
Typeform 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E F5 40
* - For three bridge units, this should be “On”.

A. Typeform jumpers set. JP3 (AM term.) JP4 (FM term.) (0-1mA or 4-20mA)
B. Dip switches sw1 set. (I for IV input, V for RR input) (5V or 10V ref.)
4. Calibration
A. Calibrate 42755P4* per 8EC0091 document. Record set resistance values.
___B. Calibrate PC61910P108A per 8EC00XX document

R110A+RH1 R112A+RH2
Slave A
Master
Slave B

Control Power
1. Parameters set.
Utility Parameters Terminal Selection Schlumberger UniConn
Parameters Programming
Blind Function 1 “Input Terminal 1
Selection Selection
Term. Selection 1 S4 Input Terminal 10
Parameters. Function
Carrier Freq. 2.2 Su Programming
Output Short-Ckt 3 EEP Address 046A 20
det. (SWD only)

2. Power supplies checked.

P15 (14.4~15.6) --- Vdc P5 (4.75~5.25) --- Vdc
N15 (-14.4~-15.6) --- Vdc P24 (21~27) --- Vdc
REFERENCE to test point “CC”
3. TypeForm check.
4. Base pulse checked for offset. U- V- W- X- Y- Z-
5. Motor pulses checked. U-V V-W W-U
6. Shunt trip circuit checked. Door Switch Timer Fuse Trip Other
7. “OH” trip confirmed.
8. Fan direction checked.
9. Check connections and contacts on filter fuses inside Sinewave filter compartment.
10.Control logic special to drive tested and highlighted on job drawings.
Main Power
1. Gate drive overvoltage tests
MUV Level MTV Level OP Level IGBT7 (DB
(366~413Vdc) (720~780Vdc) (787~852Vdc) Only) (≈760v)
Master
2. Positive and negative capacitor voltages measured at 760Vdc.

CAP BANK VOLTS

Master Pos. Caps (<390Vdc)
Master Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave A Pos. Caps (<390Vdc) W
Slave A Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave B Pos. Caps (<390Vdc)
Slave B Neg. Caps (<390Vdc)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
Industrial Division - Control Plant Document Number: 5ECTR31
Test Record for S3B451K to S3B415L / G3+A451K to G3+A415L Units Revision Level: 2
Page 3 of 4

3. Discharge test (Dc bus < 50V within 5 minutes after power off) min. s.
4. Motor run at full voltage. (Measure with RMS meter)
A. Inverter run to 60 Hz with no motor load using the UniConn.
B. Inverter run to 60 Hz with motor load using the UniConn.
C. Input voltage. Input Voltage - Vrms (Ref. only)
D. Dc bus voltage. Bus Voltage - Vdc (Ref. only)
E. Output voltage measured @ 60 Hz. Output Voltage - Vrms (Ref. only)
F. Auto restart checked twice with motor load.

5. Load test at low voltage.

A. Current feedback display checked.
B. Surge voltages (IGBT<200V) measured at 100% of rated current.
Rated Current : A Actual Current: A Dc Bus Voltage: Vdc

Master IGBT Surge: U- V- W- X- Y- Z-

Slave A IGBT Surge: U- V- W- X- Y- Z-

Slave B IGBT Surge: U- V- W- X- Y- Z-

C. Load balances (Measure current between output terminals and ACL). Balance ±5%.
Uφ Vφ Wφ
Master
Slave A
Slave B
D. Load tested for 30 minutes.
E. Overload tested. Inverter loaded to 110% for 120 sec.
6. A.Cycle test performed with no external control power at full voltage
B.UniConn communication checked. Drive starts and stops.
(Disconnect Battery when loading program)
7. All super user settings and standard factory parameters reconfirmed.
A. Parameter settings reconfirmed.
B. Current feedback scaling reconfirmed. Refer to UniConn settings.
C. Factory settings reset. (TYP 3 reset)
D. Turn off power to re-initialize drive.
E. Turn on power recheck all software settings.
Final QC
1. Shunt trip reconnected.
2. Check connections and Fuse’s contacts inside Sinewave Filter (If Applicable)
3. Pots on PCB’s paint locked.
4. Set incomplete sequence timer to 0.3sec. W
5. Label placement verified and proper Schlumberger logos installed.
6. Unit inspected for paint defects or damage.
7. Customer pack verified including 2 manuals: the appropriate Schlumberger VSD manual
(Sinewave or non-Sinewave) and UniConn Manual. May be in CD format.
8. Additional options added checked against purchase order, if applicable.
9. Loose items received from Schlumberger Edmonton Product Center shipped inside
drive, if applicable.
10. Unit properly packaged according to shipping specifications.
11. Test report completely filled out and signed.
12. Test report filed with copy of test drawings.
Comments

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
Industrial Division - Control Plant Document Number: 5ECTR31
Test Record for S3B451K to S3B415L / G3+A451K to G3+A415L Units Revision Level: 2
Page 4 of 4

8.0 Revision History.

Inspected By: Tested By: Date: Pass Test/QC Ready To Ship

Rev Date Description

0 09/15/03 Initial Release
1 10/21/03 Misc.
2 06/18/04 Revise Withstand limits, Add note on SW10, Add Typeform data and SW signal information,
Remove reference to 42755P4 typeform “F”. Add revision block.
3
4

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0013

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 04/01/93
Revision level: 6
Completing Test and Inspection Sheets Revision date: 03/05/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO DEFINE THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR DOCUMENTING AND MAINTAINING Q.C. TEST AND HISTORY
SHEETS.
2.0 SCOPE
THIS INSTRUCTION APPLIES TO ALL TESTS AND HISTORY SHEETS USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OR
EQUIPMENT IN THE CONTROL PLANT.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
TEST SHEETS AND HISTORY SHEETS FOR:
INVERTERS
T400
ALL U-LINE SUB ASSEMBLIES
L.V/MV/SWGR
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE TEST/QC MANAGER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURE COMPLIANCE WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF
THIS DOCUMENT.
IT IS THE INDIVIDUAL TESTER/INSPECTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY TO DOCUMENT ALL PERTINENT
INFORMATION ON THE APPROPRIATE TEST SHEET.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 OBTAIN A COPY OF THE APPROPRIATE TEST SHEET FOR THE TYPE OF EQUIPMENT BEING
TESTED OR INSPECTED. MAKE COPIES ONLY REQUIRED FOR THAT JOB.
6.2 LOCATE THE CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION TO BE USED AS THE GUIDELINES FOR
ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION.
6.3 PERFORM THE TEST OR INSPECTION ACCORDING TO THE EQUIPMENT BEING EVALUATED,
CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION AND THE TEST SHEET.
6.4 FILL IN ALL APPROPRIATE INFORMATION ON THE TEST SHEETS AND SUBMIT THE COMPLETED
SHEET SO IT CAN BE FILED.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0013
Rev: 6
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 04/01/93 Initial release.
1 04/21/95 History was not maintained.
2 10/04/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was QQP1601.
3 02/12/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
4 05/06/97 Added distribution.
5 11/20/97 Upgraded software.
6 03/05/01 Upgraded document (format)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0015

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 5

Control Plant Issue Date: 02/02/96
Revision level: 6
Inspection / Test Incoming Procedure Revision date: 05/11/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO ESTABLISH A WORK INSTRUCTION TO ENSURE THAT ALL INCOMING MATERIAL IS NOT USED OR
PROCESSED UNTIL IT HAS BEEN INSPECTED OR OTHERWISE VERIFIED AS CONFORMING TO SPECIFIED
REQUIREMENTS.
2.0 SCOPE
THE WORK INSTRUCTION APPLIES TO ALL MATERIALS USED IN THE MANUFACTURING PROCESS.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
8EC0016 - NON-CONFORMING MATERIAL
4.0 DEFINITIONS
RMR (LONG FORM) - REJECTED MATERIAL REPORT
KIT - A KIT IS A SINGLE PART NUMBER MADE UP OF ONE OR MORE PARTS. ONE BOX (PACKAGE) MAY
CONTAIN MORE THAN ONE KIT.
100% INSPECTION – REQUIRES EACH PART IN THE LOT RECEIVED TO BE INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE ENGINEERING DRAWING OR THE APPLICABLE SPECIFICATION.
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE INCOMING QUALITY CONTROL FUNCTION IS RESPONSIBLE TO ENSURE THAT ALL INCOMING
MATERIAL IS NOT USED OR PROCESSED UNTIL IT HAS BEEN INSPECTED OR OTHERWISE VERIFIED AS
CONFORMING TO SPECIFIED REQUIREMENTS PER THIS WORK INSTRUCTION.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 REMOVE THE PACKING SLIP FROM THE INCOMING MATERIAL AND COMPARE THE INFORMATION
TO THE MATERIAL THAT IS TO BE RECEIVED.
6.2 ADDITIONAL INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS ARE PER THE INSPECTION CODE FOUND IN THE
BAAN QUANTITY CONTROL SYSTEM. (REFERENCE APPENDIX A).
6.3 THE DATA FOR ACCEPTED MATERIAL IS ENTERED INTO THE BAAN INVENTORY UPDATE
TRANSACTION SCREEN.
6.4 NON-CONFORMING MATERIAL REQUIRES COMPLETING AN RMR. (SEE 8EC0016)
6.5 ATTACH A COPY OF PACKING SLIP TO THE BACK OF THE BAAN RECEIVER AND PLACE THEM
WITH THE RECEIVED MATERIAL.
6.6 INSTALL A BAR-CODE LABEL TO THE PACKAGE, IF POSSIBLE.
6.7 INSPECTION CODES IN BAAN ARE AUTHORIZED TO BE CHANGED BY THE TEST/Q.C. MANAGER.
THIS IS DETERMINED FROM THE VENDOR ANALYSIS REPORTS OR MANUFACTURING
REJECTING PROBLEMS. THE INSPECTION CODES CAN BE CHANGED AT ANY TIME.
6.8 WHEN NON-STANDARD PARTS COME IN THAT HAVE NO ENGINEERING DRAWINGS. THE PART
NUMBER FROM THE PACKING LIST WILL BE ENTERED INTO MAC-PAC PART MASTER INQUIRY.
THEN THE INFORMATION IN BAAN AND THE INFORMATION ON THE PART PACKING LIST WILL BE
COMPARED TO MAKE SURE THE CORRECT PART IS BEING RECEIVED.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0015
Rev: 6
Page: 2 of 5

APPENDIX A

INSPECTION CODE DEFINITIONS

NO NO INSPECTION REQUIRED
NORMAL 1 PC - INSPECT ONE PIECE OF MATERIAL LOG
1KIT - INSPECT ONE KIT OF MATERIAL LOT
TIGHTENED 2 PC - INSPECT TWO PIECES OF MATERIAL LOT
1% - INSPECT 1% OF MATERIAL LOT
10% - INSPECT 10% OF MATERIAL LOT OR KITS
50% - INSPECT 50% OF MATERIAL LOT
FULL ALL - INSPECT ALL MATERIAL IN LOT OF KITS
FAI FIRST ARTICLE INSPECTION REPORT REQUIRED
TIGHTENED INSPECTION GUIDE LINES REQUIRED

INSPECTION CODE AND QUANTITY

PART DESCRIPTION NO NORMAL TIGHTENED FULL
BASE, CABIN NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
BATTERY NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
BRACKET NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
BOTTOM COVER NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
BUS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
BUSHINGS, INSULATORS NO 1 PC 1% OF LOT ALL
BREAKER NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
CAPACITOR AND CAP. ASSY. NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
CABLE ASSY. NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
CASTERS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
CONNECTORS NO 1 PC 1% OF LOT ALL
CONTACTORS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
COVERS, TOPS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
DOORS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
DIODE, LED NO 1 PC 1% OF LOT ALL
FAN NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
FASTENERS, HARDWARE NO 1 PC 1% OF LOT ALL
FILTER AIR NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
FILTER EMI NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
FUSE NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
GASKET, CABLE TIES NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
GLASTIC NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
HANDLE MECHANICAL NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
HEAT SINK NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
IC’S TRANSISTORS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
INVERTERS NO 1 PC 2 PCS ALL
IGBT’S, GTRS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
LABEL NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
LUG NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
MACHINED PRODUCT NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
MAGNETICS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
MANUALS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
MISC. ELECTRICAL PARTS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL

PART DESCRIPTION NO NORMAL TIGHTENED FULL

MOV NO 1 PC 1% OF LOT ALL
This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0015
Rev: 6
Page: 3 of 5

OP PANEL NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL

RELAY (ALL TYPES) NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
PANELS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
RAW WIRE SPOOLS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
SHEET METAL KITS NO 1 KIT 10% OF LOT ALL
STAMPINGS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
TRANSFORMER/REACTORS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
WELDMENTS NO 1 PC 10% OF LOT ALL
WIRE KITS NO 1 KIT 10% OF LOT ALL

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0015
Rev: 6
Page: 4 of 5

Inspector: Date: Shift:

Order Part Number ID Rev Source Inspection Quantity Lot Comments
Number Status
Sample Accept Reject Accept Reject
Size

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0015
Rev: 6
Page: 5 of 5

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 02/02/96 Initial release.
1 02/12/96 Revised work instruction. Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
2 09/20/96 Added the Inspection record as page four.
3 11/07/97 Added Distribution. Re-worded para 6.1, 6.2 and 6.7.
4 11/20/97 Upgraded software.
5 05/07/98 Made changes to paragraph 4.0
6 05/11/01 Updated document, changed MAC-PAC to BAAN

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0018

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 02/27/96
Revision level: 4
Verification of Inspection Status Revision date: 03/05/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
THE PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS TO PROVIDE INSTRUCTION ON THE VERIFICATION OF
INSPECTION AND TEST STATUS FOR PRODUCTION PRODUCT.
2.0 SCOPE
THIS DOCUMENT APPLIES TO PRODUCTS PRODUCED IN THE CONTROL PLANT.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
IN-PROCESS (PRODUCTION) INSPECTION INSTRUCTION
IN-PROCESS INSPECTION ROUTING
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
Q.C. DEPARTMENT OR DESIGNEE
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 THE IN-PROCESS ROUTING SHEET WILL BE USED AS EVIDENCE OF INSPECTION STATUS, AND
WILL BE USED BY Q.C./TEST AS EVIDENCE OF TEST STATUS AND FINAL Q.C. INSPECTION
STATUS.
6.2 WHEN Q.C. TESTING HAS BEEN COMPLETED, THE TESTER SHALL INITIAL OR STAMP THE IN-
PROCESS INSPECTION ROUTING SHEET TO INDICATE THAT IT HAS PASSED THE TEST, AND IS
READY FOR FINAL Q.C. INSPECTION.
6.3 WHEN Q.C. FINAL INSPECTION HAS BEEN COMPLETED AND THE PRODUCT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED CONFORMING, THE Q.C. REPRESENTATIVE WILL INITIAL OR STAMP THE IN-
PROCESS INSPECTION ROUTING SHEET AS AN INDICATION THAT THE PRODUCT IS READY FOR
PACKING AND SHIPPING.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0018
Rev: 4
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 02/27/96 Initial release.
1 09/19/96 Revised paragraph 6.1.
2 08/12/97 Added distribution.
3 11/26/97 Upgraded software.
4 03/05/01 Upgraded document (originator to revised by and approval name change)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0019
Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 3
Control Plant
Issue Date: 01/30/01
Revision level: 0
Inspection Plan For Control Plant Revision date: 01/30/01
Review date: Ongoing
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Distribrution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey

6.0 Purpose
To ensure that in-process inspections are identified and documented in accordance with Toshiba quality system.

7.0 Scope
This work instruction applies to the processes used assemblies within the Control Plant.

8.0 Reference Documents

N/A

9.0 Definitions
N/A

10.0 Responsibility
The manager of Quality Control designee is responsible for the identification of inspection points within
the Control Plant and for the implementation of those inspections.

11.0 Procedure
6.1 General
Inspections are performed by operators and by Quality control personnel. Those performed by operators
are part of the daily routine and are designed to ensure that no defective products will be used in
the final product. Those inspections performed by Quality Control personnel are designed to verify the
successful completion of manufacturing operations by the manufacturing departments.

6.2 Inspection plan flow chart.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hard copy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: Rev: 0
Page: 2 of 3
Receiving/Shipping

Receive
Inspection Stock material A
material Ship to
Package
warehouse

Document:8KC0001 Document: 8EC0015

Resp.: QC, Receiving
J-line

Test/
Assemble
Inspection

Document:8GC0005
Document:8EC0083
Resp.: QC
B Line

Assemble

Document:8GC0005

Test/
Reda

Wire panels Assemble

Inspection

Document:8EC0083
Resp.: QC
T-400

Wire panels Assemble

Document:8GC0003
U Line

Test/
Assemble
Inspection

Document:8EC0090
Resp.: QC
MV-Switchgear-LV

Assemble Test/
Wire panels Inspection
cabinets Inspection

Document:8GC0001 Document:8GC0006
Document:8EC0058
Document:Checksheet
Resp.: QC
Resp.: Assembly
Transportation

Wire harness Water Test/ Customer

Assemble Inspection
assembly test Inspection Inspection

Document:Checksheet Resp.: QC Document:8EC0100

Resp.: Assembly Resp.: QC
Fab

Punch/Bend Inspect Weld Paint Inspect A

Document:8GC0010Resp.: Operator Document:8EC0009

Resp.: QC

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hard copy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: Rev: 0
Page: 3 of 3

Revision History

Rev Date Description

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hard copy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0038

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 04/01/93
Revision level: 9
Q.C. Move Tags for in Process Inspection Revision date: 03/13/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO DEFINE THE METHOD OF IN PROCESS INSPECTION. THIS INSTRUCTION IS ALSO INTENDED TO
SUPPORT THE REQUIREMENTS OF ISO9001 SEC 4.10.2.
2.0 SCOPE
THIS INSTRUCTION APPLIES TO ALL ASSEMBLY AREAS OF THE CONTROL PLANT.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
8EC0006 - DEFECTIVE MATERIAL HANDLING
DEB1032 - INSPECTION AND TESTING
4.0 DEFINITIONS
IN PROCESS INSPECTION - IS DEFINED AS AN INSPECTION DONE ON THE PRODUCT PRIOR TO
ASSEMBLY / TEST BEING COMPLETE FOR THE PURPOSE OF DETERMINING SUITABILITY OF THE
PRODUCT.
MOVE TAGS - A MOVE TAG MAY BE A PHYSICAL TAG OR A MARK INDICATING INSPECTION HAS BEEN
DONE.
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE MANUFACTURING AND QUALITY MANAGERS SHALL ENSURE THIS INSTRUCTION IS IMPLEMENTED
AND MAINTAINED.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 UPON COMPLETION OF ASSEMBLY NOTIFY THE AREA SUPERVISOR OR DESIGNATED LEAD
PERSON.
6.2 THE SUPERVISOR OR LEAD SHALL NOTIFY Q.C. THAT AN INSPECTION IS NEEDED PRIOR TO
MOVING THE ASSEMBLY TO THE NEXT FUNCTION REQUIRED.
6.3 THE Q.C. INSPECTOR SHALL INSPECT THE ASSEMBLY ACCORDING TO THE DOCUMENTATION
PACKAGE AND THE LEVEL OF ASSEMBLY COMPLETED.
6.4 THE Q.C. INSPECTOR SHALL STAMP THE LOWER RIGHT CORNER OF ASSEMBLY INDICATING
THAT THE INSPECTION HAS BEEN DONE. ANY DISCREPANCY SHALL BE NOTED ON THE
APPROPRIATE TEST / INSPECTION SHEET.
6.5 IF Q.C. IS NOT ABLE TO INSPECT ON ASSEMBLY PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OR MOVING IT IS NOT
TO BE MARKED. THE Q.C. INSPECTOR DURING THE NEXT OPERATION WILL CHECK ALL
ASSEMBLIES FOR INSPECTION MARKINGS.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0038
Rev: 9
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 04/01/93 Initial release.
1-2 10/15/93 History not maintained.
3 04/21/95 Added para 6.5.
4 09/27/95 Revised reference documents.
5 10/03/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was QQP1015.
6 02/14/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
7 09/08/97 Added distribution.
8 11/26/97 Upgraded software.
9 03/13/01 Originator changed to Revised by along with the name for Approved by.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0041

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 3

Control Plant Issue Date: 03/22/96
Revision level: 3
Snubber Board Diode Revision date: 03/13/01
Quality Control Test Procedure Revised by: Elaine Eason
Part 41681A, 41681B Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey

1.0 PURPOSE
TO ASSURE ALL INCOMING SNUBBER BOARDS CONTAIN DIODES WHICH FALL WITHIN THE
ACCEPTABLE LIMITS OF LEAKAGE CURRENT AT RATED VOLTAGE.
2.0 SCOPE
TO ESTABLISH TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE Q.C. DEPARTMENT.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
N/A
4.0 DEFINITIONS
NECESSARY EQUIPMENT: FLUKE 87 MULTIMETER
TEKTRONIX OSCILLOSCOPE
HARNISCHFEGER A59190 THYRISTOR TESTER
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE TEST/QUALITY CONTROL MANAGER, WILL ENSURE THAT THESE WORK INSTRUCTIONS ARE
AVAILABLE AND FOLLOWED BY ALL TEST/QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 TEST EQUIPMENT SETTINGS AND PREPARATION:
-SET THE FLUKE 87 TO µA; CONNECT THE LEADS TO THE 400mA TERMINALS (mA µA) AND (COM)
MAKE SURE THE METER IS READING DC AMPS.
-SET THE THYRISTOR TESTER S2 SWITCH TO REV LEAKAGE. TURN THE VOLTAGE ADJUST DIAL
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TO 0 VOLTS.
-SET THE OSCILLOSCOPE UP AS FOLLOWS:
-SET 200V/DIV
-SET 5mSEC/DIV
-SET VERTICAL POSITION TO -3.00 DIV
-SELECT MEASUREMENT MAXIMUM
(THIS WILL BE LABELED C1 MAX)

6.2 TEST CIRCUIT CONNECTION:

-CONNECT THE THYRISTOR TESTER ANODE (J1) TERMINAL TO THE DA1 (DA2) DIODE ANODE.
-CONNECT THE THYRISTOR TESTER CATHODE (J3) TERMINAL TO THE FLUKE 87 (mA µA)
TERMINAL.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0041
Rev: 3
Page: 2 of 3

-CONNECT THE FLUKE 87 (COM) TERMINAL TO THE DA1 (DA2) DIODE CATHODE.
-CONNECT THE OSCILLOSCOPE PROBE AND GROUND CLIP TO THYRISTOR TESTER (J3) AND
(J1), RESPECTIVELY.
6.3 TEST PROCEDURE:
WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE LEAKAGE
TEST BUTTON, TURN THE VOLTAGE
ADJUST DIAL UNTIL C1 MAX READS
1.000KV. THE RMS CURRENT READING
OF THE FLUKE 87 METER SHOULD NOT
EXCEED 13 µA. SNUBBER BOARDS WITH
DIODES THAT HAVE AN RMS LEAKAGE
CURRENT OVER 13 µA MUST BE
REJECTED.
PARTS 41681A AND 41681B WHICH PASS
THIS QC TEST SHOULD BE MARKED
CLEARLY WITH A YELLOW MARKER
ACROSS THE EDGE OF THE BOARD
DIRECTLY ABOVE THE REV: A SILK-
SCREEN.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0041
Rev: 3
Page: 3 of 3

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 03/22/96 Initial release.
1 11/07/97 Added distribution.
2 11/26/97 Upgraded software.
3 03/13/01 Originator changed to Revised by and Approved by name also changed

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8EC0042

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 3

Control Plant Issue Date: 03/22/96
Revision level: 3
Snubber Diode Revision date: 03/13/01
Quality Control Test Procedure Revised by: Elaine Eason
Part PC40300P200, PC40300P201 Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey

1.0 PURPOSE
TO ASSURE ALL INCOMING WESTCODE SM10PCN070-2 AND SM10PCR070-2 DIODES FALL WITHIN THE
ACCEPTED LIMITS OF LEAKAGE CURRENT AT RATED VOLTAGE.
2.0 SCOPE
TO ESTABLISH TEST PROCEDURES FOR THE Q.C. DEPARTMENT.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
N/A
4.0 DEFINITIONS
NECESSARY EQUIPMENT: FLUKE 87 MULTIMETER
TEKTRONIX OSCILLOSCOPE
HARNISCHFEGER A59190 THYRISTOR TESTER
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE TEST/QUALITY CONTROL MANAGER WILL ENSURE THAT THESE WORK INSTRUCTIONS ARE
AVAILABLE AND FOLLOWED BY ALL TEST/QUALITY CONTROL PERSONNEL.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 TEST EQUIPMENT SETTINGS AND PREPARATION:
-SET THE FLUKE 87 TO µA; CONNECT THE LEADS TO THE 400mA TERMINALS (mA µA) AND (COM).
MAKE SURE THE METER IS READING DC AMPS.
-SET THE THYRISTOR TESTER S2 SWITCH TO REV LEAKAGE. TURN THE VOLTAGE ADJUST DIAL
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE TO 0 VOLTS.
-SET THE OSCILLOSCOPE UP AS FOLLOWS:
-SET 200V/DIV
-SET 5mSEC/DIV
-SET VERTICAL POSITION TO -3.00 DIV
-SELECT MEASUREMENT MAXIMUM
(THIS WILL BE LABELED C1 MAX)

6.2 TEST CIRCUIT CONNECTION:

-CONNECT THE THYRISTOR TESTER ANODE (J1) TERMINAL TO THE TEST DIODE ANODE.
-CONNECT THE THYRISTOR TESTER CATHODE (J3) TERMINAL TO THE FLUKE 87 (mA µA)
TERMINAL.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0042
Rev: 3
Page: 2 of 3

-CONNECT THE FLUKE 87 (COM) TERMINAL TO THE TEST DIODE CATHODE

-CONNECT THE OSCILLOSCOPE PROBE AND GROUND CLIP TO THYRISTOR TESTER (J3) AND
(J1), RESPECTIVELY.
6.3 TEST PROCEDURE:
WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE LEAKAGE
TEST BUTTON, TURN THE VOLTAGE
ADJUST DIAL UNTIL C1 MAX READS
1.000KV. THE RMS CURRENT READING
OF THE FLUKE 87 METER SHOULD NOT
EXCEED 8 µA. DIODES WITH AN RMS
LEAKAGE CURRENT OVER 8 µA MUST BE
REJECTED.
PART PC40300P200 THAT PASSES THIS QC TEST
SHOULD BE MARKED CLEARLY WITH A BLACK MARKER
ACROSS THE UPPER EDGE. PART PC40300P201 THAT
PASSES THIS QC TEST SHOULD BE MARKED CLEARLY
WITH A YELLOW MARKER ACROSS THE UPPER EDGE.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0042
Rev: 3
Page: 3 of 3

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 03/22/96 Initial release.
1 11/07/97 Added distribution.
2 11/26/97 Upgraded software.
3 03/13/01 Originator changed to Revised by also Approved by name changed

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document Number: 8EC0048
Toshiba International Corporation
Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 4
Control Plant Issue Date: 08/11/2003
Revision level: 0
Work Instructions And Test Specifications For Revision date: 05/11/01
Multi Parallel IGBT Heat Sink Assemblies Originator: Elaine Eason
GCI6788G250 & GCI6788G251 Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey

1.0 Purpose
Confirm that the assembled Heat Sink circuitry leakage current falls within the allowable limits at rated voltage.
Confirm the functionality of the g-e protect circuit.
2.0 Scope
To establish test procedures for the Q.C. Department.
3.0 Reference documents
5ECCT22 - Checklist & Test Record for Heat Sink Assemblies
4.0 Definitions
Necessary equipment: Fluke 87 Multimeter
Tektronix Oscilloscope
Harnischfeger A59190 Thyristor Tester
Discharge Resistor
5.0 Responsibility
The Test/Quality Control Manager will ensure that these work instructions are available and followed by all
Test/Quality Control Personnel.
6.0 Procedure
6.1 Test equipment settings and preparation:
-Set the Fluke 87 to µa; connect the leads to the 400ma terminals (ma µa) and (com). Make sure the
meter is reading dc amps.
-Set the Thyristor Tester S2 switch to Rev Leakage.
Turn the Voltage Adjust dial counter-clockwise to 0
volts.
-Set the Oscilloscope up as follows:
-Set 200v/div
-Set 5msec/div
-Set vertical position to -3.00 div
-Select measurement maximum
(this will be labeled C1 max)

6.2 Test circuit connection:

The following connection description is a two step
procedure. This procedure is performed once per Heat Sink Assembly for a Multi-Parallel IGBT
configuration.

Step 1:

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0048
Rev: 3
Page: 2 of 4

-Orient Heat Sink assembly so that the AC Bus Bars are facing to the front and DC bus is on the
rear.
-Connect one side of the Discharge Resistor to the Heat Sink negative (outside vertical) DC Bus.
-Connect other side of the Discharge Resistor to the Heat Sink positive (inside vertical) DC Bus.
-Jumper the three Heat Sink AC Out Bus Bars together on the front side.
-Connect the Thyristor Tester anode (J1) terminal to the Heat Sink negative (outside vertical) DC
Bus.
-Connect the Thyristor Tester cathode (J3) terminal to the Fluke 87 (ma µa) terminal.
-Connect the Fluke 87 (com) terminal to the Heat Sink AC Out Bus Bars.
-Connect the Oscilloscope probe and ground clip to Thyristor Tester (J3) and (J1), respectively.

Perform the test procedure described in 6.3.

Caution: The Capacitors are now at 1000 Volts!
Step 2:
-Connect the Thyristor Tester anode (J1) terminal to the Heat Sink AC Bus.
-Connect the Thyristor Tester cathode (J3) terminal to the Fluke 87 (ma µa) terminal.
-Connect the Fluke 87 (com) terminal to the Heat Sink Positive (outer horizontal) Bus.
-Connect the Oscilloscope probe and ground clip to Thyristor Tester (J3) and (J1), respectively.
Perform the test procedure described in 6.3.
Step3:
-Discharge the Heat Sink by closing the switch on the Discharge Resistor box.
6.3 Test procedure:
While holding down the Leakage Test button, turn the Voltage Adjust dial until C1 max reads 1.000kv. Do
not exceed this value! Once stabilized, continue holding the button for 60 seconds. Leakage current
should not drift upward. The RMS current reading of the Fluke 87 meter should not exceed the value
listed on the leakage chart. Heat Sinks with
an RMS leakage current over the value listed
in the chart must be rejected.
Heat Sinks which pass this QC test should be
marked clearly by placing a QC stamp on the
upper right-hand corner of the Heat Sink.
Record the leakage current on 5ECCT22.
Record the leakage current associated with
step 1 in the positive block, and the leakage
current associated with step 2 in the negative
block.

Heat Sink Assembly Leakage

GCI6788G250 100µA
GCI6788G251 75µA

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0048
Rev: 3
Page: 3 of 4

6.4 Test equipment settings for g-e resistance test:

-Connect the Fluke 87 leads to the 1000v terminals (com) and (vΩ). Set the meter to read ohms.
Test procedure:
-Measure the resistance across pin1 and pin3 of each JST connector. Depending on which Heat Sink
Assembly is being tested the resistance reading should fall between the values listed in the chart below.
Any Heat Sink with a resistance reading outside of this range should be rejected. Record the resistance
values on 5ECCT22.

Heat Sink Assembly Resistance

GCI6788G250 7.47kΩ to 9.13kΩ
GCI6788G251 11.2kΩ to 13.7kΩ

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8EC0048
Rev: 3
Page: 4 of 4

Revision history

Rev Date Description

0 08/22/2003 Initial release.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corp.
Industrial Division
Control Plant
TIC Job（ISG）
Shipping Procedure
Document Number: 8EC0233
Issue Date: 07/01/2002
Revision Level: 0
Originator: Takuo Kuwahara
Approved By: Keith Bailey
Distribution: Network

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document Number : 8EC0233
TIC job (ISG)
Revision Level : 0
Shipping Procedure Page 2of 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................................3

1.1 PURPOSE................................................................................................................................................................................3
1.2 APPLICABILITY ......................................................................................................................................................................3
2.0 SHIPPING PREPARATION...........................................................................................................................................3
2.1 PREPERATION BEFORE TAKING TO PACKING AREA ...............................................................................................................3
2.2 WRITING QUALIFICATION PASS .............................................................................................................................................3
2.3 WRITING PACKAGE LIST .......................................................................................................................................................3
2.4 PUTTING QUALIFICATION PASS ON UNITS .............................................................................................................................3
2.5 SHIPPING REQUEST.................................................................................................................................................................3

3.0 SHIPPING.........................................................................................................................................................................3

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document Number : 8EC0233
TIC job(ISG)
Revision Level : 0
Shipping Procedure Page 3 of 3

1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of this document is to describe the shipping preparation work

1.2 Applicability
This procedure applies to the shipping routine after PSI

2.0 SHIPPING PREPARATION

2.1 Preparation Before Taking To Packing Area

Inspect the following checkpoints at a test site before passing Units to Package Area
・ External appearance of units (No glue from taping, take off protective sheets from name plates)
・ If there are some parts should be sent together with the unit, pack them and attach to the unit
・ Water and dust proof treatment to open area, such as cleats and connectors for car cables

2.2 Writing Qualification Pass

Fill out Qualification Pass after completing the shipping preparation
・ PRD Order Number
・ Project Number: *Example “NUCT:700032” “NICTD:103262”
・ Item Number
・ Serial Number *1
・ Quantity
・ Delivery Date
・ TIC test engineer’s Name

- *1 -
Serial Numbers need to be confirmed with Serial Number Controller because this Number might
be different from the serial number of manufacturing

Example: Control Number for NYCT R142A is different from unit Serial Number

2.3 Writing Package List

After filling out Qualification Pass, fill out the Release Log about shipping items at Package Area

2.4 Putting Qualification Pass On Units

Attach Qualification Pass on units
Package area personal will come to pick up units to Package area for routine scheduled shipment, and
there is no need to bring units there

2.5 Shipping Request

After being packaged, shipment scheduled items are kept temporary in TIC warehouse
In order to ship out from TIC to customers, bring a serial number list of the shipment scheduled items to
Project Control Division personnel and request to complete the shipment

2.6 Shipping
Shipping process completes after finishing the above shipping preparation work. After shipment is completed,
proceed the filing of the test data.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8FC0004

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 6

Control Plant Issue Date: 04/01/95
Revision level: 8
Wire Label Instructions Revision date: 05/11/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey

1.0 PURPOSE
THE PURPOSE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS TO DEFINE THE STEPS NECESSARY TO CREATE WIRE LABELS.
2.0 SCOPE
THIS DOCUMENT APPLIES TO THE CONTROL PLANT MANUFACTURING FACILITY
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
N/A
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE INDUSTRIAL ENGINEER AND ENGINEERING PRINT ROOM PERSONNEL ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR
FOLLOWING THIS DOCUMENT.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 ENTERING LABELS INTO BRADY WITHOUT A SOURCE FILE.
6.1.1 FROM C:\ PROMPT ENTER BRADY LABEL MAKER BY TYPING 'L' <ENTER>.
1. 'L' IS THE NAME OF A BATCH FILES THAT STARTS BRADY.
6.1.2 SELECT THE CREATE/EDIT OPTION ON THE MENU.
6.1.3 ENTER THE APPROPRIATE DATA IN THE SPACES PROVIDED (SEE CHART).
*NOTE THAT WHEN USING THE A AND D PRINTERS THAT THE PRINTER SETTING MUST
BE SET TO EPSON LQ AND WHEN USING THE B PRINTER LET IT DEFAULT TO EPSON FX.
6.1.4 WHEN LABELS ARE SHOWN ON SCREEN SIMPLY ENTER THE REQUESTED
CHARACTERS.
6.1.5 UPON COMPLETION OF ENTERING THE LABELS PRESS ESC KEY TO ACTIVATE POP UP
MENUS.
6.1.6 SELECT APPROPRIATE CHOICE (IN THIS CASE IT WOULD BE PRINT WITHOUT SAVING).
6.1.7 GO THROUGH PRINT MENU SELECTION DESIRED OUTPUT, BUT BEFORE PRINTING
MAKE SURE CORRECT PRINTER IS SELECTED AND THAT THE PROPER MATERIAL IS
LOADED.
6.1.8 BY PRESSING ESC YOU WILL EXIT THE PRINT MENU AND PRESSING IT AGAIN WILL
ACTIVATE THE POP UP MENUS.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8FC0004
Rev: 8
Page: 2 of 6

6.2 CHART
*NOTE THAT MANY FILES WITH APPROPRIATE SPACING AND SETTINGS HAVE BEEN SET UP TO
SPEED UP THE PROCESS.
FILENAME DESCRIPTION BRADY PART # SIZE (GENERAL)
(DEFAULT) 1.0 - 2.0 AWG SLEEVE WIRETAGS PS-500-2W 1 LPL & 5CPI
(DEFAULT) 6 - 8 AWG SLEEVE WIRETAGS PS-375-2W-3 1 LPL & 5CPI
(DEFAULT) 18 - 20 AWG SLEEVE WIRETAGS PS-125-2W-3 1 LPL & 5CPI
(DEFAULT) 12 - 18 AWG SLEEVE WIRETAGS PS-187-2W-3 1 LPL & 5CPI
(DEFAULT) 10 AWG SLEEVE WIRETAGS PS-250-2W-3 1 LPL & 5CPI
DVLBS DEVICE LABELS DAT-99 2 LPL & 7CPI
NFT2-60V VERTICAL TERMINAL BLOCK STRIPS FOR NFT2 DAT-153
NFT2H-24 HORIZONTAL TERMINAL BLOCK STRIP FOR NFT2 DAT-166
TBC-HOR HORIZONTAL TERMINAL STRIPS FOR CONNECTRON DAT-166
TBC-VERT VERTICAL TERMINAL STRIPS FOR CONNECTRON DAT-166
TCNV-562 VERTICAL TERMINAL STRIPS FOR SMALL CONNECTRON DAT-153
TMH-10 HORIZONTAL TERMINAL BLOCK STRIPS FOR MARATHON DAT-166
TMV-8 VERTICAL TERMINAL BLOCK STRIPS FOR MARATHON DAT-153

6.3 EXTRACTING LABELS FROM CAD.

6.3.1 FROM DOS TYPE 'NETMENU WIRELB'.
6.3.2 SELECT THE MENU OPTION 'FIND A FILE'.
1. ENTER THE DRAWING NUMBER FOUND IN THE LOWER RIGHT-HAND CORNER.
THE NETWORK SHOULD COME BACK WITH A LOCATION, BUT IF IT DOES NOT
LOCATE THE ENGINEER THAT THE FILE ORIGINATED FROM AND ASK FOR IT TO
BE UPLOADED.
6.3.3 FROM THE MENU SELECT 'MOVE A DRAWING FROM PERMANENT STORAGE TO C'.
1. ENTER THE DRIVE WHERE THE DRAWING(S) ARE (FROM STEP B).
2. ENTER THE DRAWING NUMBER (NUMBER IS LOCATED IN BOTTOM-RIGHT-HAND
CORNER). IF YOU ARE WORKING OUT OF A SERIES USE ? TO INDICATE A
WILDCARD TYPE NUMBER.
3. PRESS 'ENTER' TO HIGHLIGHT NEEDED FILES AND ESC BUTTON WHEN DONE.
6.3.4 FROM THE MENU SELECT 'START AUTOCAD VERSION 12'.
1. AFTER CAD HAS LOADED TYPE 'OPEN' AND LOCATE THE FILE.
2. COPY DOUBLE WIRES AT THIS POINT BECAUSE EXTRACTION ROUTINES DO
NOT TAKE DOUBLE WIRES INTO CONSIDERATION.
3. LIST RANDOM WIRE POINTS TO DETERMINE THE TYPE OF EXTRACTION
METHOD THAT WILL BE USED.
A. WIRETAG DATABASE FILES CAN ORIGINATE IN THREE DIFFERENT
FORMS.
1. THEY CAN BE IN ATTRIBUTE FORM.
2. THEY CAN BE IN TEXT FORM ON A LAYER GENERALLY NAMED
"WTG".
3. THEY CAN BE IN TEXT FORM IN THE TEXT LAYER.

B. EXTRACTING FROM THE ATTRIBUTE FORM.

1. FROM ACAD PROMPT TYPE THE COMMAND "ATTEXT" (ATTRIBUTE
This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8FC0004
Rev: 8
Page: 3 of 6

EXTRACT)
2. NEXT TYPE AN "S" AND PRESS <ENTER>
3. ACAD WILL ASK FOR A TEXT FORMAT FILE. IF IT DOES NOT
DEFAULT TO "WIRETAG.TXT" TYPE IT IN AND PRESS <ENTER>.
4. ACAD WILL THEN ASK FOR THE WIRETAG TEXT FILE. USE THE
DRAWING NAME WITH A .TXT EXTENSION.
5. GO ON TO THE NEXT DRAWING.
C. EXTRACTING FROM THE SEPARATE "WTG" LAYER.
1. IF YOU HAVE THE LISP ROUTINE "WTF.LSP" ALREADY LOADED
SKIP TO NUMBER 2. IF NOT TYPE (LOAD "C:\WTF.LSP").
2. AT THE ACAD COMMAND PROMPT TYPE "WTF" AND <ENTER>.
3. ACAD WILL ASK FOR THE LAYER NAME AND IN MOST CASES IT
WILL BE "WTG". IF THIS IS THE CASE ENTER WTG <ENTER>.
4. ACAD WILL THEN ASK FOR THE DRAWING NAME. ENTER THE
DRAWING NAME WITH A .TXT EXTENSION.
5. GO ON TO THE NEXT DRAWING.
D. THE "TEXT" LAYER FORM.
1. IF THE WIRETAGS ARE IN THE GENERAL TEXT LAYER WITH ALL
OF THE OTHER TEXT IN THE DRAWING THE TAGS CAN NOT BE
EXTRACTED WITH AUTOCAD.
4. AFTER ALL FILES HAVE BEEN EXTRACTED EXIT AUTOCAD.
5. EXIT FROM MENU TO DOS.
6. IF ATTEXT EXTRACTION METHOD WAS USED GO TO C:\WK\. IF WTG
EXTRACTION METHOD WAS USED GO TO F:\.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8FC0004
Rev: 8
Page: 4 of 6

7. ENTER BLACK BEARD EDITOR BY TYPING BB.

A. BLACK BEARD WILL ASK FOR THE NAME OF THE FILE YOU WISH TO EDIT.
ENTER THE NAME WITH THE .TXT EXTENSION.
B. THINGS TO DO IN BLACK BEARD:
1. REMOVE ALL GARBAGE ITEMS LIKE PARENTHESES USING
GLOBAL SEARCH AND REPLACE.
2. ADD PERIODS TO THE NUMBERS SIX AND NINE.
3. IF THERE ARE MANY FILES YOU MAY WISH TO MERGE THEM ALL
TOGETHER IN ON BIG FILE. THIS IS DONE SO BY USING THE
'INSERT' COMMAND IN THE FILE MENU.
4. TO EXIT BLACK BEARD PRESS CTRL Z AND IF YOU EVER GET IN
TROUBLE REMEMBER THAT ESC WILL ACTIVATE THE POP UP
MENUS.
8. FROM THE DOS PROMPT TYPE SORT <FILENAME.TXT> FILENAME.SRT AND
PRESS <ENTER>.
9. ENTER BRADY LABEL MAKER.
A. SELECT THE IMPORT OPTION ON THE MENU.
1. FILL IN BLANKS APPROPRIATELY AND EXIT.
2. WIRE TAGS ARE NOW IN BRADY. FROM MAIN MENU SELECT
CREATE/EDIT. ENTER THE FILE NAME AND THE APPROPRIATE
INFORMATION AND PRESS <ENTER>.
3. CHECK ALL TAGS TO MAKE SURE THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO
TAGS FOR EACH LABEL. (REMEMBER: THERE ARE TWO ENDS
OF WIRE THAT NEED TO BE LABELED).
4. SORT DATA IN EACH FILE.
5. WHEN FINISHED EDITING PRESS ESC TO ACTIVATE MENUS AND
CHOOSE APPROPRIATE ACTION.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8FC0004
Rev: 8
Page: 5 of 6

SPECIAL LABELS
6.4 SOLID STATE STARTER LABELS.
6.4.1 GO IN THE WORD-PROCESSING SOFTWARE.
6.4.2 OPEN FILE SST.DOC. THIS FILE SHOULD BE IN C:\
6.4.3 EDIT FILE ACCORDING TO WHAT HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
6.4.4 PRINT LABELS.
A. LABELS SHOULD COME OUT ON THE CONTROL PLANT LASER JET III.
B. BYPASS FEED CRACK AND PEEL PAPER THROUGH COPY MACHINE.
C. LAMINATE AND CUT LABELS.
6.5 PROBLEM SOLVING
6.5.1 IF ACAD CANNOT FIND WIRETAG.TXT FILE CREATE IT BY EXITING TO DOS AND TYPING
BB WIRETAG.TXT.
6.5.2 WHEN BLACK BEARD APPEARS TYPE WN C02000.
6.5.3 SAVE FILE BY EXITING AND SAVE IT IN YOUR F:\DRIVE.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8FC0004
Rev: 8
Page: 6 of 6

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 04/01/94 Initial release.
1 04/30/94 History was not maintained.
2 06/20/94 Change responsibility
3 06/15/95 Revise sec. 6.2.
4 09/25/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was EQP0905.
Revise 6.4.1.
5 02/15/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
6 11/11/97 Added distribution.
7 12/04/97 Upgraded software.
8 05/11/01 Update doc. (Originator to Revised by and Approval name)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8HC0005

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 10/13/93
Revision level: 6
Releasing Orders to the Revision date: 05/14/01
Manufacturing Shop Floor Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO DESCRIBE THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROVIDING SHOP PAPERWORK TO MANUFACTURE PRODUCT
IN THE CONTROL PLANT.
2.0 SCOPE
ALL MANUFACTURING PRODUCTS
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
PRODUCTION ORDER, PULL LIST
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
PRODUCTION CONTROL PERSONNEL
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 AFTER MRP GENERATION, THE PLANNER WILL RELEASE WORK ORDERS TO THE SHOP FLOOR
PRIOR TO THE SCHEDULED START DATE.
6.2 USING BAAN, THE PLANNER WILL RELEASE AND PRINT THE APPROPRIATE WORK ORDER.
6.3 ORDERS TO THE INVENTORY CAGE ARE GENERATED TO PICK THE PARTS.
6.4 THE WORK ORDER AND DRAWINGS ARE SENT TO THE APPROPRIATE SHOP FLOOR AREA. THE
PULL ORDERS ARE DELIVERED TO THE INVENTORY CAGE.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8HC0005
Rev: 6
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 10/13/93 Initial release.
1 12/22/93 History was not maintained.
2 09/18/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was PQP0906.
3 02/15/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
4 12/04/97 Added distribution and upgraded software.
5 01/27/98 Revised para. 6.1 and 6.4.
6 05/14/01 Updated doc. (Originator to Revised by and Approval name change.)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8JC0008

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 02/15/93
Revision level: 6
Job Pulling Revision date: 05/15/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO DESCRIBE THE INSTRUCTIONS TO PULL JOBS BY MANUFACTURING ORDER PICK LIST.
2.0 SCOPE
PULLING INSTRUCTION
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
DEB1039
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE DEPARTMENT SUPERVISOR OR DESIGNEE SHALL INSURE THAT ALL PULLING INSTRUCTIONS ARE
FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 LOG EACH PICK LIST IN THE LOGBOOK BY Production, JOB NUMBER, PULLERS NAMES AND DATE.
6.2 PROVIDE A JOB TAG FOR EACH CART OR PALLET USED, IDENTIFYING THE JOB NUMBER AND
Production Order.
6.3 PROVIDE PROTECTIVE MATERIALS TO INSURE THAT ALL PARTS PICKED WILL STAY DAMAGED
FREE.
6.4 PICK PARTS USING PRINTED PICK LIST. PART NUMBER ARE TO BE USED TO IDENTIFY PARTS.
PART NUMBER IDENTIFICATION MUST BE ATTACHED TO AT LEASE ONE PIECE OF EVERY PART
PULLED.
6.5 INVESTIGATE ALL DISCREPANCIES OF ON HAND QUANTITIES AND/OR LOCATIONS BY USE OF
THE COMPUTER.
6.6 ISSUE ALL PARTS PULLED BY PICK LIST WHEN PULLING IS COMPLETE.
6.7 DELIVER COMPLETED JOB TO THE APPROPRIATE OR DESIGNATED AREA WITH A COPY OF THE
PICK LIST PLACED WITH THE PARTS.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8JC0008
Rev: 6
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 02/15/93 Initial release.
1 12/22/93 History was not maintained.
2 09/20/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was MQP1502.
3 02/16/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
4 12/05/97 Added distribution and upgraded software.
5 10/04/99 Upgrade Procedures

6 05/15/01 Update doc. (Originator to Revised by and Approval name changed)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8KC0001

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 10/11/93
Revision level: 11
Incoming Receiving Inspection Revision date: 05/15/01
Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
INSTRUCTIONS FOR INCOMING RECEIVING INSPECTION.
2.0 SCOPE
INCOMING RECEIVING INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS FOR ALL PRODUCTS.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
N/A
4.0 DEFINITIONS
4.1 BAR CODE LABEL – PRODUCT ACCEPTANCE & INSPECTION LEVEL IDENTIFICATION.
4.2 Q.C. – QUALITY CONTROL
4.3 BANN – COMPUTER INVENTORY & MANUFACTURING SYSTEM
4.4 UL – UNDERWRITERS LABORATORY
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE QUALITY CONTROL FUNCTION IS RESPONSIBLE TO INSURE THAT ALL MATERIAL IS RECEIVED AND
INSPECTED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS INSTRUCTION.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 INSPECT PRODUCT BY VERIFYING THE PRODUCT QUANTITY AND DESCRIPTION IS IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE PACKING SLIP DESCRIPTION AND THE Purchase Order DESCRIPTION.
6.2 VISUALLY INSPECT ALL PACKAGES FOR DAMAGE. NOTE: ALL DAMAGE ON THE BILL OF LADING
OR PACKING SLIP WHEN FOUND.
6.3 SIGN AND DATE PACKING SLIPS OR BILL OF LADING AND WHEN PRACTICAL, WRITE THE P.O.
NUMBER ON THE BOX AS EVIDENCE OF INSPECTION.
6.4 RECEIVE Purchase Orders OR Production Orders USING LISTS INTO BAAN.
6.5 REQUEST BAR CODE LABELS AND TAG ALL PARTS THAT PASS INSPECTION WITH A BAR CODED
LABEL, WHEN PRACTICAL.
6.6 CHECK PACKING SLIP & BAR-CODE LABEL FOR UL DESCRIPTION.
6.7 REQUEST BACKORDER TICKETS, DELIVER AND ISSUE PRODUCT TO CORRESPONDING JOBS.
6.8 MOVE REMAINING PRODUCT TO THE INVENTORY STOCK STAGING AREA.
6.9 RECEIVE AND MOVE ALL OUTSIDE VENDOR PRODUCT AND ANY PRODUCT WITH A “Q.C.” PRIME
LOCATION TO Q.C. INCOMING INSPECTION.
6.9.1 INCOMING Q.C. INSPECTION INSPECTS THE PRODUCT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS OR APPLICABLE
SPECIFICATIONS.
6.9.2 PRODUCT NOT MEETING ENGINEERING SPECIFICATIONS OR ENGINEERING DRAWING
DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERISTICS REQUIRES AN RMR BE COMPLETED, ISSUED AND
THAT THE PRODUCT BE HELD BY Q.C. FOR DISPOSITION.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8KC0001
Rev: 11
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 10/11/93 Initial release.
1-2 04/28/95 History was not maintained.
3 07/28/95 Moved para 6.6 to 6.5 added para 6.6.
4 09/20/95 Reformatted Work Instruction. Change to new numbering system. Old number was IQP1501.
5 02/06/96 Reformatted for new network system. Added revision history.
6 08/02/96 Add definitions to section 4.0. Correct the word check in 6.1 to read inspect and add the words “and
the P.O.” to the end of the sentence. Insert the words “that pass inspection” between the word parts
and with in section 6.5. Correct the document identification prefix to 5 from 8. Change the title to
Incoming Receiving Inspection. Add 6.9.1 and 6.9.2
7 09/10/96 Change document from “5” to “8”.
8 08/11/97 Add distribution.
9 12/08/97 Upgraded software.
10 10/04/99 Upgrade procedure
11 05/15/01 Updated doc. (Originator to Revised by and Approval name changed)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Toshiba International Corporation Document Number: 8KC0003

Industrial Division Sheet number: 1 of 2

Control Plant Issue Date: 02/06/96
Revision level: 2
Inspection and Receiving Instructions Revision date: 05/15/01
For UL Certified Parts Revised by: Elaine Eason
Review date: Ongoing
Distribution: Network Approved by: Keith Bailey
1.0 PURPOSE
TO DESCRIBE THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR INCOMING INSPECTIONS AND RECEIVING OF UL TRACEABLE
PARTS.
2.0 SCOPE
INSPECTION AND RECEIVING INSTRUCTIONS FOR UL TRACEABLE PARTS.
3.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
DEB1439 HANDLING OF MATERIAL
4.0 DEFINITIONS
N/A
5.0 RESPONSIBILITY
THE Q.C. SUPERVISOR OR HIS DESIGNEE WILL INSURE THAT THESE INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IMPLEMENTED AND MAINTAINED.
6.0 PROCEDURE
6.1 CHECK MATERIALS AND PARTS TAGGED FOR UL INSPECTION FOR PROPER UL LABELING BY
MEANS OF EITHER A STICKER ON THE PACKAGE OR AN ENCLOSED UL CERTIFICATE. EACH
LABEL OR CERTIFICATE MUST HAVE THE FOLLOWING:
A TYPE OF MATERIAL
B PART # OF MATERIAL
C COMPANY NAME
6.2 IF UL STICKER IS APPLIED TO THE PART, SEND THE PART TO INVENTORY.
6.3 IF THERE IS NO STICKER AND A UL CERTIFICATE IS SUPPLIES, THE Q.C. INSPECTOR WILL
RETAIN THE ORIGINAL IN THE UL CERTIFICATE BOOK AND GIVE A COPY OF THE CERTIFICATE
ALONG WITH THE PART TO THE INVENTORY SUPERVISOR.

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.
 Document: 8KC0003
Rev: 2
Page: 2 of 2

Revision History

Rev Date Description

0 02/06/96 Initial release.
1 12/08/97 Added distribution and upgraded software.
2 05/15/01 Updated doc. (Originator to Revised by and approval name changed)

This document is to be considered “for reference only” when printed as a hardcopy from the network. The revision status must be verified prior to use.